JP7844809B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to amusement machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are configured to be generated, and some are configured to generate the second game state again by winning a game in the second game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2008-295672

For gaming machines and the like exemplified above, it is necessary to effectively inform players of their game status , and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

This invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably inform players of the game status .

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing predetermined performances on a display means, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined notification based on the game result can be executed by the predetermined performance execution means, and a specific notification which has different occurrence conditions from the predetermined notification, can be executed even when the predetermined notification is not executed , and can suggest a change in the player's playing style can be executed by the predetermined performance execution means, and occurrence conditions that can start the specific notification are met when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area during the execution of the predetermined notification. In the event that the predetermined notification is performed, the system is configured to allow the predetermined notification to continue, and if the conditions for initiating the specific notification are met when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area during the execution of the predetermined notification, the system is configured to allow the start of the specific notification to be on standby at least during the execution of the predetermined notification, and the standby specific notification is configured to be started when the predetermined notification is completed, and in a predetermined situation in which the player can play the game, after the conditions for initiating the specific notification are met, the specific notification may be started only once, and thereafter the specific notification may not be started again, and the system is configured to allow the specific notification to be started again if the power to the game machine is cut off and then turned back on while the specific notification is being performed.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance on a display means, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined notification based on the game result can be executed by the predetermined performance execution means, and a specific notification which has different occurrence conditions from the predetermined notification, can be executed even when the predetermined notification is not being executed , and can suggest a change in the player's gameplay, can be executed by the predetermined performance execution means, and when the occurrence conditions that can start the specific notification are met by a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry area during the execution of the predetermined notification, The system is configured to allow the predetermined notification to continue, and when the conditions for initiating the specific notification are met by a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry area while the predetermined notification is being performed, the system is configured to allow the start of the specific notification to be on standby at least while the predetermined notification is being performed, and the standby specific notification is configured to be started when the predetermined notification ends, and in a predetermined situation in which the player can play the game, after the conditions for initiating the specific notification are met, the specific notification is configured to be started only once, and thereafter the specific notification is not started again, and the system is configured to allow the specific notification to be started again when the power to the game machine is turned off and then turned back on while the specific notification is being performed. This has the effect of allowing the player to be appropriately notified of the game status.

This is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine, and is primarily a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control unit. This diagram schematically shows the configuration of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and the reserved ball execution area. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table for Special Figure 1, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table for Special Figure 2. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for Special Feature 1, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for Special Feature 2. This is a list explaining the triggers for transitioning to each game state, the probability of winning with special symbols, the probability of winning with regular symbols, the recommended ball launching method, the main prize destinations, the variation time for the first special symbol, the variation time for the second special symbol, and whether or not right-handed play is permitted. This diagram shows the firing patterns in each game state and the transition destinations to the game state based on the type of jackpot won. This diagram schematically shows an example of a reserved number table for Special Feature 1. This diagram schematically shows an example of a reserved number table for Special Feature 2. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of Table A of the stop pattern tables, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of Table B of the stop pattern tables, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of Table C of the stop pattern tables. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the E table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the F table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for misses and minor wins in Special Feature 1, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for big wins in Special Feature 1. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for misses and minor wins in Special Feature 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for big wins in Special Feature 2. This timing chart schematically shows the relationship between the timing of ball detection at the through gate, first start gate, upper second start gate, and lower second start gate during left-handed play in "normal gameplay state," the timing of execution of variable display of normal symbols, variable display of the first special symbol, and variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving timing of the solenoid for normal electric power and the solenoid for opening and closing the large prize gate. This is a timing chart for when, during left-handed play in "normal gameplay mode," the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a low probability state for special symbols reaches 900 times due to the display of the first special symbol, and the player enters a state of reduced low probability time. This is a timing chart for when, during left-handed play in "normal gameplay mode," the number of times the special symbol has been displayed in the low probability state of the special symbol reaches 900 due to the display of the second special symbol, and the player enters the low probability time reduction state. This timing chart schematically shows the relationship between the timing of ball detection at the through gate, first start gate, upper second start gate, and lower second start gate during right-hand play in "probability fluctuation state" and "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the execution timing of variable display of normal symbols, variable display of special symbol 1, and variable display of special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the solenoid for normal electric power and the solenoid for opening and closing the large prize gate. This timing chart schematically shows the relationship between the timing of ball detection at the through gate, first start gate, upper second start gate, and lower second start gate during right-hand play in the "latent probability fluctuation state," the timing of execution of variable display of normal symbols, variable display of special symbol 1, and variable display of special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the solenoid for normal electric power and the solenoid for opening and closing the large prize gate. This diagram schematically shows an example of a jackpot release table. This diagram schematically shows an example of a small win release table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a random number table per graph, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a random number variation time table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal power supply release table. This diagram schematically shows an example of a time-saving termination condition table. This block diagram primarily shows the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device. This diagram schematically shows the configuration of the first pending information storage area and the first execution information storage area, as well as the second pending information storage area and the second execution information storage area. This flowchart shows the startup process performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the configuration change process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the main processing performed by the MPU within the main control unit. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the start-up prize-winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the special pattern variation processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the variable start process (Figure 1) executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the variable start process (as shown in Figure 2) executed by the MPU within the main control unit. This flowchart shows the fluctuation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the other stop process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the time-saving counting process performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the ceiling reach counting process performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the hit process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the jackpot opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process of opening the main prize slot, which is performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the jackpot termination process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the minor win opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit during the minor win period. This flowchart shows the graph fluctuation processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the normal power control process performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the NMI interrupt processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit. This flowchart shows the startup process executed by the MPU within the audio lamp control device. This flowchart shows the main processing performed by the MPU within the audio lamp control device. This flowchart illustrates the command determination process executed by the MPU within the audio lamp control device. This flowchart shows the command processing shown in Figure 1, which is executed by the MPU within the audio lamp control device. This flowchart shows the command processing shown in Figure 2, which is executed by the MPU within the audio lamp control device. This flowchart illustrates the variable effect processing performed by the MPU within the audio lamp control device. This flowchart illustrates the process of displaying instructions for how to hit the target, which is executed by the MPU within the audio lamp control device. The following diagrams show the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state". (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the progression of variation effects on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation effect of the second special symbol in a conventional pachinko machine during the "normal game state". (a) is a diagram showing the state in the "normal game state" where there are two more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed. (b) is a diagram showing the state from (a) when the variation display of the first special symbol has finished. (b) is a diagram showing the state where the number of times the special symbol variation display will be executed until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one more time. (c) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (b) where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, the variation display of the "super reach" performance is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started. (d) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (c) where only the variation display of the second special symbol has finished and the ceiling has been reached, and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state" and the main display right-hand shooting instruction and performance shooting instruction are displayed. Figures (a) to (d) show the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol during the "normal game state" in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Figure (a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there are two more executions of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Figure (b) shows the state from (a) to when the variation display of the first special symbol has finished and the execution of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached continues. (c) shows the state where the number of attempts has decreased to one; (b) shows the state where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, the variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started; (d) shows the state where only the variation display of the second special symbol has finished and the ceiling has been reached, transitioning to the "Normal low probability time reduction state", with only the right-hand shooting instruction for the main display being displayed, and the performance shooting instruction not being executed. The first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 shows the progression of the variation performance on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation performance of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". (a) shows the state from the state in Figure 58(d) where the variation performance of the "super reach" performance mode being performed in the variation display of the first special symbol shows a losing result. (b) shows the state from the state in (a) where the variation performance of the "super reach" performance mode being performed in the variation display of the first special symbol has ended. (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the misaligned third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, (b) is a diagram showing the state in which, from the state in (b), the main display area Dm is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", and the performance play instructions are being executed, and (d) is a diagram showing the state in which, from the state in (c), the notification of the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" and the performance play instructions have ended, and the third symbol displayed in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot termination process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the command processing shown in Figure 1, which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the command processing shown in Figure 2, which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the variable effect processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ceiling arrival notification process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. Figure 67(a) shows the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol during "normal gameplay" in a conventional pachinko machine. Figure 67(a) shows the state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Figure 67(b) shows the state from Figure 67(a) where the variation display of the first special symbol has finished, and the number of special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. The diagrams show the states, and Figure 67(c) shows the state from the state of Figure 67(b) where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, and an effect is being executed to notify that the ceiling has been reached in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started. Figure 67(d) shows the state from the state of Figure 67(c) where only the variation display of the second special symbol has finished while the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed, the ceiling has been reached, and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state" with the main display right-hand shooting instruction and the effect shooting instruction displayed. The diagram shows the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol during the "normal game state" in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. Figure 68(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there are two more executions of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Figure 68(b) shows the state from the state in Figure 68(a) where the variation display of the first special symbol has finished, and the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. Figure 68(c) shows the state from Figure 68(b) where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, and an effect is being executed to announce that the ceiling has been reached in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started. Figure 68(d) shows the state from Figure 68(c) where, while the ceiling reach announcement effect is being executed, only the variation display of the second special symbol has finished and the ceiling has been reached, and the game has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state", with only the right-hand shooting instruction for the main display being displayed, and the shooting instructions for the effect not being executed. Figure 69(a) shows the progression of the variation performance on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation performance of the second special symbol during the "normal game state" in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. Figure 69(a) shows the state in which the ceiling reach notification performance in the variation display of the first special symbol continues to be executed from the state in Figure 68(d), and the ceiling reach counter 81c that was displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm in Figures 68(a) to 68(d) has been erased. Figure 69(b) shows the state in which the first Figure 69(c) shows the state after the special symbol variation display has ended. From the state in Figure 69(b), the ceiling arrival notification effect has ended, the state after reaching the ceiling and transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" has been announced, and the instructions for playing the effect are being executed. From the state in Figure 69(c), the transition notification to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" and the instructions for playing the effect have ended, and the state after the third symbol displayed in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. This is a timing chart for the third embodiment, in which, during the "normal game state," the ceiling is reached by the fluctuation display of special symbol 1 and the state transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," and at the timing when the fluctuation display of special symbol 1 that leads to reaching the ceiling ends, the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 is running in parallel. This flowchart shows the command processing shown in Figure 1, which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. This flowchart shows the ceiling arrival notification extension process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. In the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the diagram shows the progression of the variation animation on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation animation of the first special symbol while the variation animation of the second special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state". Figure 73(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there is one more execution of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, the variation displays of the first and second special symbols are being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reach notification animation is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 73(b) shows the state after the display of the first special symbol variation has finished and the ceiling has been reached, transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" from the state in Figure 73(a). Figure 73(c) shows the state after the ceiling arrival notification effect has finished and the effect play instructions are being executed from the state in Figure 73(b). Figure 73(d) shows the state after the effect play instructions have finished and the display of the second special symbol variation, which is currently being executed, is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm from the state in Figure 73(c). Figure 74(a) shows the progression of the variation effects on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation effect of the first special symbol while the variation effect of the second special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. Figure 74(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there is one more execution of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, the variation displays of the first and second special symbols are being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 74(b) shows the state from the state in Figure 74(a) where only the variation display of the first special symbol has finished and the ceiling has been reached, and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state". Figures 74(c) and 74(d) show the state from the state in Figure 74(b) where the variation display of the second special symbol is continuing to be executed, and the ceiling reach notification effect is continuing to be executed. The third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 shows the progression of the variation performance on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation performance of the first special symbol while the variation performance of the second special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state". Figure 75(a) shows the state from the state of Figure 74(d) to the state where the variation display of the second special symbol has ended. Figure 75(b) shows the state from the state of Figure 75(a) to the state where the ceiling arrival notification performance has ended and the performance play instructions are being executed. Figure 75(c) shows the state from the state of Figure 75(b) to the state where the performance play instructions have ended and the variation display of the second special symbol has started. This is a timing chart for the fourth embodiment, where the ceiling is reached by the display of the variation of special symbol 2 during "normal gameplay state" and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state". This is a flowchart showing the variable effect processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ceiling arrival waiting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the command processing shown in Figure 1, which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. This flowchart shows the command processing shown in Figure 2, which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. The diagram shows the progression of the variation effects on the third symbol display device 81, which are performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment. Figure 81(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there are two more executions of the variation display of special symbols until the ceiling is reached, and the variation displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being executed in parallel. Figure 81(b) shows the state from Figure 81(a) to the first special symbol Figure 81(c) shows the state where only the variable display has finished and the number of times the variable display of special symbols will be executed until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. Figure 81(b) shows the state where the next variable display of the first special symbol has started from the state in Figure 81(b) and the ceiling reach waiting animation is being executed. Figure 81(d) shows the state where only the variable display of the second special symbol has finished from the state in Figure 81(c), the ceiling has been reached, and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state" and the instruction to shoot to the right for the main display is displayed. The fourth embodiment shows the progression of the variation performance on the third symbol display device 81, which is performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state". Figure 82(a) shows the state from the state of Figure 81(d) after the ceiling arrival waiting performance has ended, it has been notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state", and instructions on how to play for the performance are being executed. Figure 82(b) shows the state from the state of Figure 82(a) after the notification of the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" and instructions on how to play for the performance have ended, and the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm during the "normal low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Figure 82(c) shows the state from the state of Figure 82(b) after the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol has begun. This is a timing chart for the fifth embodiment in which, during the "normal game state," the ceiling is reached by the display of variation of special symbol 1, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," but a jackpot occurs during the display of variation of special symbol 2 while the display of variation of special symbol 1 is still running. This is a flowchart showing the variable effect processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. This flowchart shows the ceiling arrival effect switching process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. The diagram shows the progression of the variation performance on the third symbol display device 81, which is performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment. Figure 86(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there is one more execution of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, and the variation displays of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped. Figure 86(b) shows the state from the state in Figure 86(a) where the variation display of the first special symbol has started and the ceiling reach notification performance is being executed. Figure 86(c) shows the state from the state in Figure 86(b) where the variation display that results in a jackpot for the second special symbol has started and the ceiling reach notification performance has been interrupted. Figure 86(d) shows the state from the state in Figure 86(c) where the variation display that results in a jackpot for the second special symbol has stopped. The fifth embodiment shows the progression of the variation effects on the third symbol display device 81, which are performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol when the ceiling of the "normal game state" is reached. Figure 87(a) shows the state in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" to which the player has transitioned from the state in Figure 86(d) due to a big win with the variation display of the second special symbol, where the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol has reached 99. Figure 87(b) shows the state to which the variation display of the second special symbol has stopped from the state in Figure 87(a), the time reduction termination condition has been met, and the player has transitioned to the "normal game state". Figure 87(c) shows the state to which the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm has switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol from the state in Figure 87(b). This is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a random number table per graph in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a random number variation time table in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal power supply opening table in the sixth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Figures 1 to 59, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 formed by a roughly rectangular wooden frame, and an inner frame 12 formed to be approximately the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The outer frame 11 has metal hinges 18 attached to two locations on the left side (see Figure 1) in a front view, allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed towards the front, with the hinges 18 on the side serving as the axis of opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see Figure 3), which has numerous nails and prize slots (ball entry slots) 63, 64, 71, 71a, etc., is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. The game is played by balls flowing down the front of this game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Details of the game board 13 will be described later in Figure 3.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers its upper front surface and a lower tray unit 15 that covers its lower surface. To support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two locations on the left side (top and bottom) in a front view (see Figure 1). The side with the hinges 19 is used as the axis of opening and closing, allowing the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 to open and close towards the front. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts and electrical components, and a roughly oval-shaped window section 14c is provided in its approximate center. A glass unit 16, consisting of two glass plates, is positioned on the back side of the front frame 14, allowing the front of the game board 13 to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through this glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has a roughly box-shaped upper tray 17 that extends forward and has an open top surface for storing balls. Prize balls and loaned balls are dispensed into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 slopes downward to the right in a front view (see Figure 1), and this slope guides the balls placed in the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5). A frame button 22 is also provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper tray 17 in a front view.

The frame button 22 is a button pressed by the player, for example, to change the stage of the animation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button to allow the player to select the content of the animation displayed in the preview during the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol is referred to as the "variation animation").

Furthermore, the variation effect is a display shown on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. As described below, it is triggered when a ball launched into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning slot (for example, the first starting slot 64, the upper second starting slot 71, or the lower second starting slot 71a (see Figure 3)), and after the symbols (the third symbols described later) vary for a predetermined time, the combination of symbols displayed at the stop indicates the result of the lottery conducted for that winning slot (whether it is a jackpot or not) to the player.

Furthermore, a "stage" refers to a performance mode that provides a unified presentation for the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. This pachinko machine 10 features three stages: the "City Stage," the "Sky Stage," and the "Island Stage." The aforementioned reel spinning effects and the various effects such as the "reach display" performed during the reel spinning effects are designed to match the theme assigned to each stage.

Here, in a situation where the city stage (e.g., the first performance) is selected and being executed (e.g., the first game state), if the frame button 22 is pressed (e.g., the switching means), when switching to the empty stage (e.g., the second performance), a predetermined performance indicating that the stage has been switched (e.g., screen darkening, etc., the third performance) may be executed, and after the predetermined performance ends, the game may transition to the empty stage (e.g., the second game state). By configuring the game in this way, it becomes possible to clearly inform the player that the stage has been switched, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced through easily understandable performances.

Furthermore, "reach display" refers to the display that appears just before the "jackpot display," which indicates the occurrence of a jackpot, in the reel spinning animation performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. Specifically, it refers to the state where the third symbols in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 (see Figure 4), described later, stop on the same symbol, while the middle symbol column Z2 (see Figure 4) has not yet stopped and continues to spin.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the "reach display" is broadly divided into a single unit element that constitutes the "normal reach" performance (hereinafter, a single unit element that constitutes the performance is referred to as a "variable element"), a "super reach" variation element that develops from and is executed from the "normal reach" variation element and has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the "normal reach" variation element, and a "special reach" variation element that also develops from and is executed from the "normal reach" variation element and has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the "super reach" variation element.

The stage changes occur when the player presses the frame button 22 during periods when no reel spinning animation is running (i.e., during demo display) or during the "high-speed spinning" element of the reel spinning animation, where the third symbol spins so rapidly that it is invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the stage cycles through "City Stage" → "Sky Stage" → "Island Stage" → "City Stage" → ... Also, immediately after power-on, the "City Stage" is set as the initial stage.

Furthermore, in the variation animation performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), described later, when the variation element of a "normal reach" is initiated, and the variation element of a "normal reach" develops into a variation element of a "super reach" or a "special reach," the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a selection screen for the variation element of a "super reach" or a "special reach" during the variation element of a "normal reach."

Specifically, the selection screen displays multiple candidates that can be selected as variable elements for either "Super Reach" or "Special Reach." If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected candidate changes. Then, based on the selected animation candidate when developing into a "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" variable element, the variable element for either "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" is determined, and according to that determination, the variable element for "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 was configured as a button to be pressed. However, instead of the frame button 22, an operating lever that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, and left relative to the pachinko machine 10) may be used. Based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or changed, or the variable elements of a "super reach" or a "special reach" may be determined.

Furthermore, although the frame button 22 is configured to be positioned on the front side when viewed from the side of the upper tray 17, the position of the frame button 22 can be any position as long as it is within the player's reach. For example, it may be positioned on the top surface of the upper tray 17, or it may be positioned near the lower tray 50 (top or side), as described later.

Furthermore, in the special symbol variation animation, the system may be configured to execute a rapid-fire animation (e.g., a first animation) that prompts the player to repeatedly press the frame button 22. In this case, when the execution lottery for the rapid-fire animation is won (e.g., the occurrence of a second event), the execution period of the rapid-fire animation is set (e.g., a period setting means), the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (e.g., a first event) within the set execution period of the rapid-fire animation is counted (e.g., a counting means), and if the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times during the execution of the rapid-fire animation (e.g., the occurrence of a third event), the content of the rapid-fire animation that was displayed up to that point is changed (terminated) (e.g., an animation termination means), and a predetermined development animation (e.g., a second animation) that may result in a jackpot is executed. On the other hand, if a jackpot has not been won, or if the predetermined number of presses has not been made, the system may be configured to continue the rapid-fire animation or not execute the development animation. In this development animation, an animation that can suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot will be won may be executed.

The front frame 14 is equipped with various light-emitting means, such as lamps, around its periphery (for example, in the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change their illumination pattern by lighting or flashing in response to changes in the game state, such as during a jackpot or a predetermined "reach" display, thereby enhancing the visual effects during gameplay. The periphery of the window section 14c is provided with illuminated sections 29-33, each containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs).

In the pachinko machine 10, these illuminated sections 29-33 function as indicator lights such as jackpot lamps. During a jackpot or when a "reach" is displayed, the built-in LEDs illuminate or flash, causing each illuminated section 29-33 to light up or flash, indicating that a jackpot is in progress or that a "reach" (one step away from a jackpot) is displayed. Furthermore, an indicator lamp 34, which incorporates an LED or other light-emitting means, is provided in the upper left corner of the front frame 14, capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed or an error has occurred.

On the lower side of the right-side illuminated section 32, a small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin from the back side to allow visibility of the back side of the front frame 14. This allows the stickers and other labels affixed to the adhesive space K1 (see Figure 3) on the front of the game board 13 to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, to enhance its brilliance, plated components 36 made of acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") resin, which are chrome-plated, are attached to the area around the illuminated sections 29-33.

Below the window section 14c, a ball dispensing operation unit 40 is located. The ball dispensing operation unit 40 includes a balance display unit 41, a ball dispensing button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes or cards inserted into the card unit (ball dispensing unit; not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are dispensed according to the operation. Specifically, the balance display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc., is displayed. An internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance as a number. The ball dispensing button 42 is operated to obtain dispensed balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium). Dispensed balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated to request the return of the card, etc., inserted into the card unit.

Furthermore, in pachinko machines where balls are dispensed directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball dispensing device without the use of a card unit—so-called cash machines—the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is unnecessary. In this case, the component configuration can be made common by adding decorative stickers or the like to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40. This allows for the standardization of pachinko machines using card units and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a roughly box-shaped lower tray 50 in its center, which stores balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. To the right of the lower tray 50 is an operating handle 51, which is operated by the player to launch balls onto the front of the game board 13. Inside this operating handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for authorizing the operation of the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5), a push-button stop switch 51b that stops ball launching while the handle is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is activated, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation. The ball is then launched with a force corresponding to the change in the variable resistor's resistance value, and the ball is driven onto the front of the game board 13 with a distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball release lever 52 is provided on the lower front of the lower tray 50 for discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downwards. This ball release lever 52 is normally biased to the right. By sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls naturally fall out and are discharged from this opening. This ball release lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "ball box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from it. As mentioned above, an operating handle 51 is located to the right of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in Figure 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 mainly consists of control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94. Control board unit 90 is a unit comprising a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). Control board unit 91 is a unit comprising a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 integrates the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the dispensing unit 93 into a single unit. Furthermore, each control board is equipped with a micro-processing unit (MPU), a single-chip microcontroller that manages various controls; ports for communication with various devices; a random number generator used during various lotteries; and a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, as needed.

The main control unit 110, the sound lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the launch control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each housed in board boxes 100 to 104. Each board box 100 to 104 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, housing each control unit and each board.

Furthermore, the circuit board box 100 (main control device 110) and circuit board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are indestructibly connected (connected by a crimping structure) to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown). A sealing sticker (not shown) is also affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning both the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and attempting to peel off the sealing sticker or forcibly open the circuit board boxes 100 and 102 will cause it to break on both the box base and box cover sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing sticker, it is possible to determine whether the circuit board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 comprises a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upwards, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently sloping downstream, a case rail 132 connected vertically downstream of the tank rail 131, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the downstream end of the case rail 132, which dispenses balls using a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see Figure 5). Balls supplied from the island equipment of the gaming hall are continuously replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are dispensed as needed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to add vibration to the tank rail 131.

Furthermore, the payout control device 111 is equipped with a state reset switch 120, the firing control device 112 is equipped with a variable resistor operating knob 121, and the power supply unit 115 is equipped with a RAM erase switch 503. The state reset switch 120 is operated to resolve ball jams (return to normal state) when payout errors occur, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see Figure 5). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the specific configuration of the game board 13 will be explained with reference to Figure 3. First, as shown in Figure 3, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a variable display unit 80, which includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, numerous nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for guiding the balls, a general prize entry opening 63 where a predetermined number of prize balls can be obtained when a ball enters, a variable prize entry device 65 that opens when a jackpot of the third symbol occurs, a first start opening 64 that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol (one of the third symbols, so-called special symbols), an upper second start opening 71 and a lower second start opening 71a that trigger the drawing of the second special symbol (one of the third symbols), a through gate 67 that triggers the drawing of the second symbol (so-called ordinary symbol), an ordinary electric device 72 that, when open, allows balls to enter the lower second start opening 71a, a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83, etc., and its peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

The general prize entry slot 63, the first start slot 64, the variable prize entry device 65, the through gate 67, the upper second start slot 71, the lower second start slot 71a, the standard electric charger 72, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Furthermore, the central front portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 3.

An outer rail 62, formed by bending a strip of metal plate into a roughly arc shape, is installed on the front of the game board 13. An inner rail 61, also formed from a strip of metal plate in the same arc shape, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The outer rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the outer perimeter of the front of the game board 13, and the front and back are enclosed by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). Thus, a game area is formed on the front of the game board 13 where the game is played based on the movement of the balls. The game area is a roughly circular area on the front of the game board 13, demarcated by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (an area where prize slots are located and the launched balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A ball return prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 3) to prevent the balls, once guided to the upper part of the game board 13, from returning to the ball guidance passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight distance of the ball. Balls launched with a force exceeding a predetermined amount will hit the return rubber 69, and their force will be attenuated as they bounce back towards the center (hereinafter, the act of launching a ball with enough force to hit the return rubber 69 and causing the ball to pass the right side of the variable display unit 80 in a front view will be referred to as "right-handed play," while the act of launching a ball and causing it to pass the left side of the variable display unit 80 in a front view will be referred to as "left-handed play"). In the first embodiment, during left-handed play, the ball can enter or enters easily into the first start opening 64, while the upper second start opening 71, variable prize device 65, through gate 67, and lower second start opening 71a are configured to be difficult or impossible for the ball to enter. Similarly, during right-handed play, the ball can enter or enters easily into the upper second start opening 71, variable prize device 65, through gate 67, and lower second start opening 71a, while the ball is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the first start opening 64.

Furthermore, a resin arc member 70, formed by providing an arc on its inner surface to connect the rails, is embedded and fixed to the base plate 60 between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62.

In the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in Figure 3), a special symbol display device 37 is installed, which consists of a state LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b, both composed of multiple LEDs that serve as light-emitting means, and a right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c. The special symbol display device 37 displays the fluctuations of the first and second special symbols (hereinafter, the fluctuations of both special symbols are referred to as "dynamic display") in accordance with the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 5), which will be described later, and also displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

The status LED group 37a indicates the number of reserved balls (balls that have entered the first start port 64, upper second start port 71, or lower second start port 71a, as described later) whose variable display has not yet been executed. The number of jackpot rounds (hereinafter, rounds may be simply referred to as "R") and error displays are also indicated by the lighting status of the corresponding status LED group 37a. The status LED group 37a is configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining these colors, various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs.

In the context of a jackpot, a "round" refers to the period from when the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a, which opens and closes the variable prize entry device 65 (described later) to divide the number of prize balls awarded for a jackpot, is opened until it is closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one "round" is executed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a began to open, or when 10 balls enter the slot while the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a is open.

The special LED group 37b consists of a total of 12 LEDs: an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays a first special symbol indicating the result of the first lottery game, which is executed based on the ball entering the first start opening 64. The lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays a second special symbol indicating the result of the second lottery game, which is executed based on the ball entering the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the upper LED group 37b1 are lit one by one in sequence, starting from the uppermost LED and continuing downwards, and this lighting pattern is repeated) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the entry into the first start opening 64 located in the center of the game board 13 has elapsed. After this, it displays a symbol indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, one of 64 different stop symbols, determined by the combination of lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

Furthermore, the lower LED group 37b2 displays a dynamic display (dynamic display time) until a certain time has elapsed, determined based on the winning entry into the upper second start opening 71 located on the right side of the game board 13, or the lower second start opening 71a located on the right side of the game board 13, below the upper second start opening 71. After this time, the LEDs in the lower LED group 37b2 are lit one by one in sequence, starting from the uppermost LED, and this lighting pattern is repeated. Finally, a symbol indicating the result is displayed (in the first embodiment, one of 64 different stop symbols, determined by the combination of lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

In both LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, if the result is a "losing" outcome, only the leftmost LED will light up. If the result is a "jackpot," each LED group will light up in a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. Details of the stopping patterns for each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, a determination of whether or not a jackpot is hit (jackpot lottery) is performed for each ball that enters the first start opening 64, the upper second start opening 71, or the lower second start opening 71a. If a jackpot is determined in each determination, the type of jackpot is also determined according to the entry opening 64, 71, or 71a into which the ball entered, and the variable prize entry device 65 is opened and closed according to the type of jackpot.

In the first embodiment, the types of jackpots determined based on entry into the first starting port 64 include "5-round time-saving jackpot (sometimes referred to as "Time-Saving A")", "10-round probability-changing jackpot (sometimes referred to as "Probability-Changing A")", and "10-round hidden probability-changing jackpot (sometimes referred to as "Hidden Probability A")" (see Figure 8(a)). Furthermore, based on entry into the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, "Time-Saving A" or "Hidden Probability A" are available (see Figure 8(b)).

Here, "normal gameplay state" refers to a gameplay state that is not a "probability fluctuation state," a "latent probability fluctuation state," a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." It refers to a state where the jackpot probability for each special symbol and the jackpot probability for normal symbols are at their normal levels (i.e., low probability states), and the normal electric motor 72 is open for a short time. In other words, the "normal gameplay state" is configured such that the jackpot probability for each special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "latent probability fluctuation state," and the jackpot probability for normal symbols is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" (equivalent to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" and "latent probability fluctuation state"), and the normal electric motor 72 is open for a short time.

As will be explained in detail later, in the "normal game state," when playing in the so-called right-handed game, the game state is not one in which the ball is more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a (hereinafter, the state in which the ball is more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a may be referred to as the "winning assistance state"), but rather the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the "normal game state," if a ball launched in the right-handed game is detected (for example, detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67), a predetermined alarm (for example, an audio output of "Please return to left-handed gameplay" or a display of "Please return to left-handed gameplay" on the third symbol display device 81) is output to indicate to the player and hall staff that an unrecommended game is being played. This configuration suppresses the continued execution of the unrecommended right-handed gameplay in the "normal game state," making it possible to achieve gameplay as specified in the game specifications.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low, and the player fails to win a jackpot for a predetermined number of consecutive times (900 times in the first embodiment) in the dynamic display, a function (a so-called ceiling function) is installed to generate a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" as a relief measure for the player. This state occurs when the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol and the probability of winning with a normal symbol remain low, but the variation time of the normal symbols is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is lengthened. (Hereafter, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low, entering the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" without winning a jackpot for 900 consecutive times in the dynamic display will be referred to as "reaching the ceiling," and the number of times the "ceiling is reached" when the probability of winning a special symbol is low will be referred to as the "number of times the ceiling is reached.")

Next, the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State" refers to a state where the probability of hitting a jackpot with each special symbol is low, similar to the "Normal Play State" and the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State" described later. However, the probability of hitting with normal symbols increases, the display time of the normal symbols' variations (hereinafter, the display time of the normal symbols' variations is referred to as "variable display") is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is lengthened. (Hereafter, the state in which the probability of hitting with normal symbols increases, the display time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is lengthened may be referred to as the "High Probability Time Reduction Function"). In this "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State," the normal electric motor 72, located above the lower second start port 71a in a front view, is more likely to be in an open state, making it easier for balls launched during right-hand play to enter the lower second start port 71a.

In other words, the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" is a state where the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols is the same as in the "normal game state," but wins with normal symbols are more easily achieved in a shorter time than in the "normal game state," and the normal electric mechanism 72 remains open for a longer period. Therefore, in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," it is easier to get the balls launched by right-handed play into the lower second start opening 71a, allowing the player to play while suppressing the decrease in their ball count by obtaining prize balls (for example, 1 ball per entry) based on the balls entering the lower second start opening 71a.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" means that the probability of winning with normal symbols is high for a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) from the start of the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" until the dynamic display of special symbols is performed. After the dynamic display of special symbols has been performed for the predetermined number of times, the machine is configured to transition from the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Furthermore, in the "Normal High Probability Time Shortened State," "Normal Low Probability Time Shortened State," the "Probability Fluctuation State" (described later), or the "Latent Probability Fluctuation State" (described later), if it is detected that a ball has been launched by left-handed play (for example, detection of a ball entering the first start port 64), the system is configured to output a predetermined alarm (for example, an audio output of "Please play to the right" or a display of "Please play to the right") to indicate to the player and hall staff that an unrecommended game is being played. This configuration suppresses the continued execution of unrecommended left-handed play in the "Normal High Probability Time Shortened State," "Normal Low Probability Time Shortened State," "Probability Fluctuation State," and "Latent Probability Fluctuation State," thereby ensuring gameplay as specified by the game's design.

Next, the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State" is a state in which the probability of hitting a jackpot with each special symbol is low, similar to the "Normal Game State" and the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State" described later. The probability of hitting with normal symbols is low, similar to the "Normal Game State" and the "Latent Probability Fluctuation State." However, the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 becomes long, similar to the "Probability Fluctuation State" and the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State." (Hereafter, the state in which the probability of hitting with normal symbols is low, while the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is lengthened may be referred to as the "Low Probability Time Reduction Function." Also, the "High Probability Time Reduction Function" and the "Low Probability Time Reduction Function" may be collectively referred to as the "Time Reduction Function.") Because of this configuration, balls launched during right-hand play are more likely to enter the lower second start port 71a.

In other words, the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Shortened State" is a state where the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols and the probability of hitting with normal symbols are the same as in the "Normal Play State," but the variable display of normal symbols makes it easier to hit a jackpot in a shorter time than in the "Normal Play State," and the open state of the normal electric mechanism 72 is extended. Therefore, in the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Shortened State," it is easier to get the balls launched by right-handed play into the lower second start opening 71a, making it possible to play while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by obtaining prize balls (for example, 1 ball/entry) based on the balls entering the lower second start opening 71a.

This "Reduced Low Probability Time for Normal Symbols" state is configured to occur when, after a big win, the player fails to win a big win for 900 consecutive times in the low probability state for special symbols. Specifically, it occurs when, during the 900-spin dynamic display in the low probability state for special symbols, the player continuously receives misses or wins small winning symbols (hereinafter, the occurrence of the 900-spin dynamic display in the low probability state for special symbols may be referred to as "reaching the ceiling").

Furthermore, in the "Reduced Normal Symbol Low Probability Time State," from the start of the "Reduced Normal Symbol Low Probability Time State" until a predetermined number of dynamic displays of special symbols (1140 times in the first embodiment) are performed, the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric function 72 becomes longer. After the specified number of dynamic displays of special symbols have been performed, the system is configured to transition from the "Reduced Normal Symbol Low Probability Time State" to the "Normal Game State."

Furthermore, if the game transitions to the "Normal Gameplay State" after the special symbols are displayed a specified number of times in the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," the game is configured so that it cannot transition back to the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State" in the "Normal Gameplay State." However, if the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State" is triggered based on reaching the ceiling, and the game transitions back to the "Normal Gameplay State" after the time reduction termination condition based on the number of times the special symbols are dynamically displayed is met, the game may be configured to transition back to the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State" if the number of times the special symbols are dynamically displayed reaches the ceiling again.

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state," after a big win ends, the probability of winning with each special symbol increases as an added value, creating a high-probability state. Furthermore, the probability of winning with regular symbols increases, and the high-probability time-saving function is activated.

In other words, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a jackpot result with a special symbol is easily obtained, as is a state in which a win result with a normal symbol is easily obtained, and furthermore, the normal electric motor 72 remains open for a longer period of time. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state," since the balls launched by right-handed play are more likely to enter the lower second start port 71a, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the player can play while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls by obtaining prize balls (for example, 1 ball/entry) based on the ball entering the lower second start port 71a. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured (arranged) so that the balls launched by right-handed play can enter the upper second start port 71, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed by balls entering both the upper second start port 71 and the lower second start port 71a. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state," it becomes possible to play in a state where jackpot games (special game states) based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol are more likely to occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol is high until a jackpot result with a special symbol is obtained. When a jackpot result with a special symbol is obtained, the machine is configured to transition to either the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" depending on the type of jackpot.

Next, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," after a big win ends, the probability of winning with each special symbol increases as an added value, resulting in a high-probability state, while the probability of winning with regular symbols remains low, and the opening of the regular electric payout 72 is short.

In other words, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is a state in which jackpot results from special symbols are easily obtained, while wins from regular symbols are difficult to obtain, similar to the "normal gameplay state," and the normal electric payout 72 is only open for a short period of time.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is configured (arranged) so that balls launched by right-handed play can enter the upper second start opening 71, and by entering the upper second start opening 71, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed. In addition, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a minor prize (see Figure 7(b)), and by winning a minor prize, the variable prize entry device 65 is opened for a certain period of time. In the "latent probability fluctuation state," the closing period of the normal electric motor 72 is extended, and balls launched by right-handed play roll all the way from the right end to the left end of the top surface of the normal electric motor 72, and can flow down towards the variable prize entry device 65 located on the left side of the normal electric motor 72 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when a minor win is determined during the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the variable prize entry device 65 opens, allowing the ball to enter the open variable prize entry device 65 and win prize balls. In the "latent probability fluctuation state," the variable display time of the normal symbol is long (i.e., 15 seconds), and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is short (i.e., 0.1 seconds). However, since the normal electric motor 72 can be opened to a certain extent, it is configured so that the ball can enter the lower second start opening 71a.

Furthermore, in the "latent probability variation state," the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol becomes high until a jackpot result with a special symbol is obtained. When a jackpot result with a special symbol is obtained, the system is configured to transition to either the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or the "latent probability variation state," depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, we will explain each type of jackpot. Jackpot type "Time-Saving A" is a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, in which the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65 is opened from the 1st to the 5th round. In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol, this jackpot type "Time-Saving A" may be selected, and the system is configured to transition to the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time-Saving State" after the jackpot ends.

Next, the jackpot type "Probability Variation A" is a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, in which the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, this jackpot type "Probability Variation A" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the system is configured to transition to a "probability variation state" after the completion of the jackpot of type "Probability Variation A".

Next, the jackpot type "Hidden Probability A" is a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, in which the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "latent probability fluctuation state," or when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol in any game state, this jackpot type "Hidden Probability A" may be selected, and after the jackpot of jackpot type "Hidden Probability A" ends, the system is configured to transition to the "latent probability fluctuation state."

Here, we will explain the display patterns of the special LED group 37b for each type of jackpot. For the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one display pattern corresponding to a miss, 32 display patterns corresponding to jackpot type "Short Time A," and 31 display patterns corresponding to jackpot types "Probability Variation A" or "Hidden Probability A," for a total of 64 display patterns. Furthermore, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type; random display patterns are pre-assigned. Therefore, when a player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, they can recognize the stop display for a miss, but it is difficult to distinguish whether the stop display corresponds to jackpot type "Short Time A," "Probability Variation A," or "Hidden Probability A."

Furthermore, the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol has 64 different display patterns for stopping (illuminating) the symbols: one pattern for a miss, 32 patterns for the "Short Time A" jackpot type, and 31 patterns for the "Hidden Probability A" jackpot type. Similar to the upper LED group 37b1, each display pattern does not follow a specific pattern for each jackpot type; instead, random patterns are pre-assigned. Therefore, when a player looks at the display patterns of the lower LED group 37b2, they can recognize a miss, but it is difficult to distinguish whether the stop display indicates a "Short Time A" or "Hidden Probability A" jackpot type.

With this configuration, even when the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 displays each type of jackpot during the stop display, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the type of jackpot won unless they are aware of all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display. Therefore, it becomes difficult to identify the type of jackpot based solely on the display results of the variation animation, creating a gameplay element that encourages the player to guess the type of jackpot, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c on the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp that indicates a game state in which shooting balls in the right-hand direction is encouraged. This right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c is not lit in the "normal game state" where left-hand shooting is encouraged and right-hand shooting is not. However, it lights up in the "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or during a jackpot game, in which right-hand shooting is encouraged. By checking this right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c and the right-hand shooting indication display on the third symbol display device 81, the player can recognize whether or not they should be playing in the right-hand direction.

As will be explained in more detail later, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to display two types of indications for right-handed play on the third symbol display device 81: a main display right-handed play instruction 89 (see Figure 4) and a performance play instruction (for example, see the performance right-handed play instruction 81d in Figure 57(d)).

The main display indicator for right-hand play 89 (see Figure 4) is always synchronized with the right-hand play notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37. It is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during "probability fluctuation states," "latent probability fluctuation states," "normal symbol high probability time reduction states," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction states," when right-hand play is encouraged, or during a jackpot game.

The instructions for playing the game are not synchronized with the right-hand play notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37. Instead, they only indicate left-hand or right-hand play at specific timings. For example, they are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when switching from left-hand to right-hand play, when switching from right-hand to left-hand play, when, in a "normal play state" where left-hand play is performed, a right-hand play is initiated and the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when, in a play state where right-hand play is performed, a left-hand play is initiated and the ball enters the first start gate 64.

Furthermore, the main display's right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance's shooting instructions are important display information that suggests the player how to play. Therefore, they are prioritized over other display content executed during gameplay in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the third symbol of each symbol row displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm, or the super reach performance), and are configured to be displayed at the forefront (frontmost layer).

Furthermore, as will be explained in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously and in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation). Therefore, depending on the execution state of the first and second special symbols, for example, if the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches the ceiling and transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, there is a risk that the third symbol display device 81 may display instructions for how to play the performance (a suggestion to play to the right for the performance) in front of the variation performance of the first special symbol while the variation performance is being executed.

In such cases, if a right-hand play suggestion is displayed while the player is playing left-handed, during the execution of the first special symbol variation animation performed by the third symbol display device 81, part of the first special symbol variation animation may be obscured by the right-hand play suggestion (see Figure 57(d)), potentially causing the player to lose interest. Furthermore, if the right-hand play suggestion appears while the first special symbol variation animation is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 during left-handed play, the player may become confused.

Therefore, in the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the timing of the display of the performance-oriented playing instructions is adjusted to prevent inconsistencies in the display content of the third symbol display device 81. This configuration prevents players from becoming disengaged from the game and allows for accurate indication to the player whether they should play left-handed or right-handed, taking into account the game state and the performance execution state. This prevents players from becoming confused and losing faith in the game. More details will be described later with reference to Figures 19, 56, and 57-59.

The game area of the game board 13 is equipped with multiple general prize slots 63, from which 3 to 15 balls are dispensed as prize balls when a ball enters a slot.

Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is provided in the central part of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is equipped with a third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of the third symbol according to the game state, in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start opening 64, the upper second start opening 71, or the lower second start opening 71a (hereinafter, the entry of a ball into the first start opening 64, the upper second start opening 71, or the lower second start opening 71a). It is also equipped with a second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second symbol display device 83 may be referred to as the "normal symbol display device 83"), which is composed of LEDs that can perform a variable display of normal symbols triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. Furthermore, a center frame 86 is provided on the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 consists of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 5), described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4) are displayed: left, center, and right.

Each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4) is composed of multiple symbols, and these symbols scroll vertically for each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment is used in common for the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol. While the special symbol display device 37 displays the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 uses the third symbol to provide decorative displays corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or LEDs instead of a display device.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously and in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation). That is, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed based on an entry into the first start port 64, if an entry occurs into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed even while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is in progress. Furthermore, while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed based on an entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, if an entry occurs into the first start port 64, the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed even while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is in progress.

Here, we will explain the execution methods of each special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 for each game state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is encouraged, the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed using three symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4), while the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed using the three symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, but rather in the variation region 88b for special symbol 2 (see Figure 4), which will be described later.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," where right-hand play is encouraged, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed using three symbol rows Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not performed using the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but rather in the special symbol 1 fluctuation area 87b (see Figure 4), which will be described later, to perform the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Here, with reference to Figure 4, the display content of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained. Figure 4 is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. Figure 4(a) schematically shows the area division settings and active line settings of the display screen, and Figure 4(b) is an example of an actual display screen.

The third design consists of ten main designs numbered "0" through "9". Each main design is formed by adding the number "0" through "9" to a rear design consisting of a wooden box. The odd-numbered designs ("1", "3", "5", "7", "9") have large numbers covering almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the even-numbered designs ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") have auxiliary designs resembling characters such as a plane, a furoshiki (wrapping cloth), and a helmet covering almost the entire front of the wooden box. The even-numbered design is added in small green letters to the lower right of the auxiliary design, positioned in front of the auxiliary design.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the result of the lottery for any special symbol by the main control device 110 (see Figure 5), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variation animation is performed in which the same main symbols line up, and a jackpot occurs after the variation animation ends. For example, if a jackpot type "Probability Variation A" is won, which has more jackpot rounds than jackpot type "Short Time A", a variation animation is performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" line up. Also, if a jackpot type "Short Time A" is won, a variation animation is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers, i.e., "2", "4", "6", or "8", line up.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot of type "Kakhen A" is won, all main symbols are configured to appear. Specifically, for example, even when a jackpot of type "Kakhen A" is won, a variation animation may occur in which identical main symbols with the numbers "2" or "8" appear. By configuring it in this way, for example, the content of the game value that can be granted cannot be determined at the time the variation animation stops, and by performing upgrade animations during the jackpot, the variety of gameplay can be enriched, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

As shown in Figure 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is broadly divided into three sections vertically. The lower two-thirds consists of a main display area Dm that displays the variation of the third symbol and a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of reserved balls, etc. The remaining upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right. The left symbol row Z1 is displayed in display area Dm1, the center symbol row Z2 is displayed in display area Dm2, and the right symbol row Z3 is displayed in display area Dm3.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 displays the aforementioned third symbol in a predetermined order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order within each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with a periodic pattern for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Note that the numerical arrangement may differ within each symbol row Z1 to Z3. For example, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, while the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Furthermore, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three rows (top, middle, and bottom) for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1. During the variation animation corresponding to the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state, the third symbol stops and is displayed on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. If the combination of winning symbols (a combination of identical main symbols) aligns on the active line L1 when the third symbol stops, a jackpot video is displayed, indicating a jackpot for the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state.

The sub-display area Ds is positioned above the main display area Dm and is horizontally elongated. It is further divided into three smaller areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Each of these smaller areas Ds1 to Ds3 displays characters or preview images. The images displayed in each of these smaller areas Ds1 to Ds3 create a sense of anticipation for the player, suggesting that a jackpot is likely as a result of the fluctuations displayed in the main display area Dm.

The cockpit display area Db is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which are the number of balls that have entered the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, corresponding to the special symbols set for each game state, but for which the variation display (variation effect) has not yet been executed.

The small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds is configured to display the following: a display area 87 for the fourth symbol of special symbol 1, which can change in sync with the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of held balls; a display area 88 for the fourth symbol of special symbol 2, which can change in sync with the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the number of held balls; and the aforementioned right-hand shooting instruction 89 for the main display.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for Special Feature 1 consists of a Special Feature 1 reserve count display 87a that displays the number of reserves for the dynamic display of the first special symbol numerically, and a Special Feature 1 variable area 87b that can change in synchronization with the execution of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol.

The Special Symbol 1 Reserve Count Display 87a is configured to display the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the range of "0" to "4" using a numerical symbol. Specifically, when the Special Symbol 1 Reserve Count Display 87a displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0; when the Special Symbol 1 Reserve Count Display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1; when the Special Symbol 1 Reserve Count Display 87a displays "2", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 2; when the Special Symbol 1 Reserve Count Display 87a displays "3", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 3; and when the Special Symbol 1 Reserve Count Display 87a displays "4", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4.

Specifically, the reserved ball count display 87a for Special Symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for Special Symbol 1 is displayed in a manner that matches the content of the reserved ball count in the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the status LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. Furthermore, in the "normal game state" where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, it is displayed in a manner that matches the content of the reserved ball count in the reserved symbol display area Db1, which will be described later.

The variable area 87b for Special Feature 1 is a display area for showing the execution and results of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is configured so that the display color of the square symbol can change. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable area 87b for Special Feature 1 changes rapidly in the order of white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple, and after purple, it changes again to white → red → ... and so on, repeating the change while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed. When the dynamic display of the first special symbol stops, the square symbol in the variable area 87b for Special Feature 1 is displayed in a display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, if the square symbol in the variable area 87b for special symbol 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was a miss. If the square symbol in the variable area 87b for special symbol 1 stops in red, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was a jackpot. That is, the square symbol in the variable area 87b for special symbol 1 is displayed in accordance with the display content of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37, and is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm in the "normal game state" where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for Special Feature 2 consists of a Special Feature 2 reserve count display 88a that displays the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the second special symbol numerically, and a Special Feature 2 variable area 88b that can change in synchronization with the execution of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol.

The Special Symbol 2 Reserve Count Indicator 88a is configured to display a number symbol in the range of "0" to "4" for the number of reserved symbols in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the Special Symbol 2 Reserve Count Indicator 88a displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0; when the Special Symbol 2 Reserve Count Indicator 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1; when the Special Symbol 2 Reserve Count Indicator 88a displays "2", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2; when the Special Symbol 2 Reserve Count Indicator 88a displays "3", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 3; and when the Special Symbol 2 Reserve Count Indicator 88a displays "4", it indicates that the number of reserved symbols in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4.

Specifically, the reserve count display 88a for Special Symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for Special Symbol 2 is displayed in a manner that matches the content of the reserve count in the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the status LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. Furthermore, in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," and "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, it is displayed in a manner that matches the content of the reserve count in the reserve symbol display area Db2 described later.

The variable area 88b for Special Feature 2 is a display area for showing the execution and results of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Similar to the variable area 87b for Special Feature 1, the display color of the square symbol is configured to change. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable area 88b for Special Feature 2 rapidly changes in the order of white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple. After purple, it repeats the change to white → red → ... while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed. When the dynamic display of the second special symbol stops, the square symbol in the variable area 88b for Special Feature 2 is displayed in a display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, if the square symbol in the variable area 88b for special symbol 2 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a miss. If the square symbol in the variable area 88b for special symbol 2 stops in red, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a jackpot. That is, the square symbol in the variable area 88b for special symbol 2 is displayed in accordance with the display content of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above. Furthermore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is synchronized with the display content of the main display area Dm during the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," and "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" displayed in the main display area Dm.

The main display indicating right-hand shooting 89 is a display intended to suggest to the player that right-hand shooting is encouraged during gameplay. This main display indicating right-hand shooting 89 is hidden during "normal gameplay," where left-hand shooting is encouraged and right-hand shooting is discouraged. However, it is displayed during "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "latent probability fluctuation state," or during a jackpot game, where right-hand shooting is encouraged. By checking this main display indicating right-hand shooting 89 and the right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c, the player can determine whether or not they should be playing right-hand.

In the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in Figure 4(b), for example, in the "normal game state," a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, videos are displayed in the left sub-area Ds1 and the right sub-area Ds3, indicating that the state is more likely to transition to a jackpot than usual, and suggesting recommended firing patterns depending on the game state to the player. In the central sub-area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) performs predetermined actions, and sometimes performs special actions different from the predetermined actions, or the color of the boy's hair (normally black) or the color of his headband (normally white) changes, or another character appears, resulting in a pre-announcement effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if a ball enters the first start port 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a dynamic display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, or if a ball enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a dynamic display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, the number of balls that enter (number of reserved balls) is reserved up to a maximum of 4 times in each case. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, and is also displayed in the reserved ball display 87a for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special symbol 1, or in the reserved ball display 88a for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special symbol 2. Furthermore, the corresponding special symbol variation effect is displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the reserved symbol display area Db1 in the cockpit display area Db.

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (normally a "○" symbol (white circle symbol)) is displayed for each reserved ball (one reserved ball count) of the first or second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game state. The number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the first or second special symbol, which is set to be displayed (prioritized display) according to the game state, is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

In other words, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game state, is 1. If one reserved symbol is displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, for a total of two reserved symbols, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game state, is 2. This indicates that, if three reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first or second special symbol, as set to be displayed according to the game state, is three. If four reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first or second special symbol, as set to be displayed according to the game state, is four. Furthermore, if no reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first or second special symbol, as set to be displayed according to the game state, is zero, and that there are no reserved variation effects.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously. However, it is also possible to configure the machine to execute only one of the lottery games. When executing only one of the lottery games, if the reserved balls for the first special symbol and the reserved balls for the second special symbol are stored when either of the currently executing lottery games finishes, the machine may be configured to execute the second lottery game for the second special symbol with priority over the first lottery game for the first special symbol (so-called "special symbol 2 priority variation"), or to execute the first lottery game for the first special symbol with priority over the second lottery game for the second special symbol (so-called "special symbol 1 priority variation"), or to execute the lottery games for the special symbols according to the order in which they are won (so-called "winning order variation"). Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to simultaneously display the variation effects for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the central part of the cockpit display area Db, there is an execution symbol display area Db0 where execution symbols indicating that a variation effect is being performed in the main display area Dm are displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is located in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, to the right of the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, and is configured to display execution symbols that are larger than each of the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d. Furthermore, the reserved symbols that were displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as execution symbols in this execution symbol display area Db0.

The execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 are erased when the variation animation being performed in the main display area Dm ends. As the execution symbols are erased, the displayed reserved symbols move and are displayed as the lower-level reserved symbols. Specifically, for example, in a "normal gameplay state" where there are four reserved symbols for the first special symbol, if the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 are erased when the variation animation for the first special symbol ends, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a will move (shift) and be displayed as the execution symbols in the execution symbol display area Db0. Furthermore, the reserved symbols displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b will move (shift) and be displayed as the reserved symbols in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Additionally, the reserved symbols displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c will move (shift) and be displayed as the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Furthermore, the reserved symbols displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d are moved (shifted) and displayed as reserved symbols in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable animation based on ball entry into the first start port 64, or the upper second start port 71 or lower second start port 71a, is configured to be reserved up to a maximum of four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four; it may be set to three or fewer times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or by using four different patterns (for example, colors or lighting patterns) for each number of reserved balls in a divided area. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. Additionally, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved ball lamps, corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of lit reserved ball lamps.

Returning to Figure 3, let's continue the explanation. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in a front view. This through gate 67 has a through-hole (not shown) running vertically for the ball to pass through. When a ball passes through this through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) located in the through-hole turns on, and this activation triggers a normal symbol winning lottery in the main control device 110. Note that this through gate 67 only serves as a trigger for the variable display lottery of normal symbols; it is configured so that no prize balls or other items are dispensed even when a ball passes through. Alternatively, a normal prize entry point that can acquire the trigger for the normal symbol lottery may be provided, and the system may be configured to acquire the trigger for the normal symbol lottery and dispense a predetermined number of prize balls.

A standard electric power supply unit 72 is located on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. This standard electric power supply unit 72 mainly consists of a retractable plate 72a and a standard electric power supply solenoid (not shown) that drives the retractable plate 72a.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) normally maintains the retractable plate 72a of the ordinary electric motor 72 in a protruding state, covering the upper side of the lower second start opening 71a in a front view, thereby preventing balls from flowing into the lower second start opening 71a. When a win is achieved with the variable display of ordinary symbols, the ordinary electric motor solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, driving the retractable plate 72a of the ordinary electric motor 72 from a protruding state to a retracted state within the game board 13 for a predetermined time, thereby enabling balls to flow into the lower second start opening 71a. This configuration makes it easier for balls flowing down the right side of the variable display unit 80 in a front view during right-handed play to enter the lower second start opening 71a, i.e., creating a state that assists in winning.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability of winning a prize with the variable display of the normal symbols changes depending on the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state," the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," and the "latent probability fluctuation state," the probability of winning with the normal symbols is set to a low probability state (for example, 70/100), making it more difficult to win a prize with the variable display of the normal symbols than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state." This makes it more difficult to retract (open) the retraction plate 72a of the normal electric motor 72, and makes it more difficult to enter the lower second start opening 71a than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state." On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the probability of winning with normal symbols is set to a high probability state (for example, 99/100), and the variable display of normal symbols makes it easier to win than in the "normal game state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," and "latent probability fluctuation state." This makes it easier to retract (open) the retraction plate 72a of the normal electric motor 72, and allows for easy entry into the lower second start opening 71a.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high probability state of the normal symbols, the variable display leads to a win with a high probability (i.e., 99%), so in the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," which are states in which the normal symbols are in a high probability state, the machine is configured so that many of the balls launched in right-handed play can enter the lower second start opening 71a. On the other hand, in the low probability states of the normal symbols, specifically the "normal play state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state," although the variable display can lead to a win with a lower probability than in the high probability state (i.e., 70%), the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is shorter, so the machine is configured so that balls launched in right-handed play are less likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a than in the high probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," which is one of the low probability states for normal symbols, although the variable display can lead to a win at a lower probability than the high probability state (i.e., 70%), the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is long, similar to the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state." Therefore, the balls launched during right-hand play are configured to enter the lower second start opening 71a more easily than in the "normal play state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state."

This allows players to play while ensuring that the balls launched by right-hand play enter the lower second starting port 71a during the "probability fluctuation state," "normal high probability time reduction state," and "normal low probability time reduction state" (or "latent probability fluctuation state"). The payout of prize balls based on balls entering the lower second starting port 71a allows players to play while minimizing the decrease in their own ball count compared to the "normal play state."

Furthermore, instead of changing the probability of winning with normal symbols from the "normal game state," such as in a "probability variation state" or a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," it is also possible to change the time during which the retraction plate 72a of the normal electric motor 72 is retracted (released) or the number of times the retraction plate 72a of the normal electric motor 72 is retracted (released) in a single win, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in a "probability variation state" or a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the time during which the retraction plate 72a of the normal electric motor 72 is retracted may be made longer than in the "normal game state," or the number of times the retraction plate 72a of the normal electric motor 72 is retracted in a single win may be made greater than in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability variation state." Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," at least two actions may be performed simultaneously: increasing the probability of winning with normal symbols, increasing the immersion time of the normal electric motor 72's retraction plate 72a, and increasing the number of times the normal electric motor 72's retraction plate 72a is immersed.

The standard symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by alternately lighting up the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as display symbols (standard symbols) each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the variable display in the standard symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in the first embodiment), the standard electric motor 72, located above the lower second start port 71a in a front view, becomes operational for a predetermined time. When it stops at a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (the "×" symbol in the first embodiment), the standard electric motor 72 becomes inactive (it remains closed).

The through gate 67 can hold up to four balls, and the number of held balls is indicated by the illumination of the second symbol hold lamp 84 (hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second symbol hold lamp 84 may be referred to as the "normal symbol hold lamp 84"). Four normal symbol hold lamps 84 are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. The number of held balls is indicated by the number of normal symbol hold lamps 84 that are illuminated.

Furthermore, the variable display of the regular symbols may be performed not only by switching the illumination and de-illumination of multiple lamps in the regular symbol display device 83, as in the first embodiment, but also by using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the illumination of the regular symbol hold lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the number of times the balls pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to a maximum of four, but may be set to three or fewer times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, since the number of hold balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the regular symbol hold lamp 84 may not be illuminated to indicate this.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first starting opening 64 into which balls can enter is provided. Game pins and other components are planted around this first starting opening 64 so that approximately 6 balls (so-called S1 = 6) launched during left-handed play enter it per minute. When a ball enters the first starting opening 64, a first starting opening switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. This activation of the first starting opening switch triggers a lottery for a jackpot of the first special symbol in the main control device 110 (see Figure 5). A dynamic display corresponding to the lottery result is shown in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable animation based on the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. The first starting opening 64 also serves as one of the prize-winning openings, dispensing 4 balls as prize balls when a ball enters it.

On the right side of the variable display unit 80 in a front view, there is a lower second start opening 71a into which balls can only enter when the normal electric motor 72 is open. Around this lower second start opening 71a, when the normal electric motor 72 is in a game state that makes it easy to open (i.e., "probability fluctuation state," "normal high probability time shortened state," and "normal low probability time shortened state"), game pins are planted so that approximately 50 to 60 balls launched in right-handed play enter the opening per minute. When a ball enters the lower second start opening 71a, a lower second start opening switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and this activation of the lower second start opening switch triggers a lottery for a jackpot of the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see Figure 5). The result of the lottery is then displayed on the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variation animation based on the second special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. The lower second starting opening 71a also serves as one of the prize entry points, where one ball is dispensed as a prize ball when a ball enters.

Downstream of the through gate 67 and upstream of the retractable plate 72a of the ordinary electric motor 72, an upper second start opening 71 into which balls can enter is provided. Game pins and the like are planted around this upper second start opening 71 so that approximately 30 to 40 balls launched in right-handed play enter it per minute. No ordinary electric motor 72 or the like is provided near this upper second start opening 71 (directly above it when viewed from the front), and the system is configured so that a certain number of balls launched in right-handed play can enter the upper second start opening 71 regardless of the game state. When a ball enters this upper second start opening 71, an upper second start opening switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) conducts a lottery for a jackpot of the second special symbol as a result of this upper second start opening switch turning on. Then, a dynamic display corresponding to the lottery result is shown in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variation effect based on the second special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. The upper second starting opening 71 also serves as one of the prize entry points, where one ball is dispensed as a prize ball when a ball enters.

A horizontally elongated rectangular prize slot is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, approximately in the center of the variable prize slot 65. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit up to show the jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the stop symbol corresponding to that jackpot (for example, three identical symbols in a row ("777", etc.)), indicating the occurrence of a jackpot game. Subsequently, depending on the type of jackpot, the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a provided in the variable prize slot 65 is opened, and the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot game) in which it is easier for balls to enter the large prize slot. In this special game state, the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a, which is normally closed, is opened until predetermined conditions are met (for example, until "30 seconds" have elapsed, or until 10 balls have entered the prize slot). Alternatively, if a lottery result resulting in a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of any special symbol, the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a may be opened due to the passage through the through gate 67, and the game state may transition to a jackpot game (for example, a predetermined game state). In this case, for example, in the "normal game state" (e.g., normal game state, first launch mode), if the dynamic display of a first special symbol that can indicate whether or not there will be a transition to a jackpot game (e.g., part of a game result indication effect) results in a jackpot and the jackpot symbol appears (e.g., the occurrence condition is met), after the dynamic display of the special symbol that results in the jackpot ends, a ball launch effect is performed (e.g., the third symbol display device 81 displays "Shoot to the right and get the ball into the gate to start the jackpot!", or a rightward-indicating arrow symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, etc. Related effect.) prompting the player to shoot to the right and get the ball into the through gate 67 (e.g., related effect execution means), and a predetermined jackpot waiting screen (e.g., part of a game result indication effect) is displayed until the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the jackpot effect related to the jackpot game (e.g., specific effect) is not started (e.g., effect non-start means). Then, in response to the ball launch animation, a ball is launched, enters the through gate 67, and is detected by the through switch (not shown; detection means), initiating the jackpot state. The jackpot opening/closing plate 65a is opened, and the system switches from the jackpot standby screen to the jackpot animation for the jackpot game, initiating the jackpot animation (for example, a specific animation execution means). The display area for the ball launch animation is smaller than the display area for the jackpot animation. Furthermore, the system may be configured to continue displaying the ball launch animation along with the jackpot animation even after the jackpot animation has started.

This large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a, when opened, closes after a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined number of prize entries have been detected. After closing, the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of this large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be repeatable up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). This state of opening and closing is a form of special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. By getting the balls into the variable prize entry device 65, the player receives a larger payout of prize balls than usual, which adds value to the game.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 for attaching certificates, identification labels, etc. Certificates attached to the attachment spaces K1 can be viewed through the small window 35 (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14.

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out-out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the prize-winning ports (ball entry ports) 63, 64, 65, 71, and 71a are guided through the out-out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 has numerous nails planted to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction of ball descent, and various components (mechanisms) such as windmills are also installed. Balls that enter each prize-winning port 63, 64, 65, 71, and 71a are also guided to the ball discharge path and discharged outside the pachinko machine 10, similar to balls that pass through the out-out port 66.

Next, the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a single-chip microcontroller acting as an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 contains a read-only memory (ROM) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed-value data executed by the MPU 201, a random-access memory (RAM) 203 for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and other built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits.

Furthermore, in order to instruct the operation of sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to these sub-control devices via a data transmission circuit. However, these commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control unit 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, including the jackpot lottery, the setting of dynamic display and variation effects for each special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery for the display results of the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Furthermore, ROM 202 stores at least the following: jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, number of reserved balls table 202c, stop pattern table 202d, variation pattern table 202e, jackpot release table 202f, minor jackpot release table 202g, regular jackpot random number table 202h, regular jackpot variation table 202i, regular electric payout release table 202j, and time-saving end condition table 202k. The main control device 110 performs the above-mentioned main controls using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202.

Here, referring to Figure 6, the counters and other components provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 will be described. These counters and other components are used in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform tasks such as jackpot抽選 (lottery), setting the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting the variable effects of the third symbol display device 81, and drawing lots for the display results of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83. Furthermore, within the description of the various counters, various tables, control timings, and transitions of game states stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 will also be explained, referring to Figures 7 to 16.

For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display settings of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effects of the third symbol display device 81, the following are used: a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the type of jackpot symbol stop, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect type of the variable effect, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS1 used for selecting the variable pattern.

Furthermore, the regular symbol display device 83 uses the regular symbol winning counter C4 for the lottery, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the regular symbol winning counter C4.

Each of these counters is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of "4 milliseconds," which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31). Some counters are also updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 30), and the updated values are appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the first special symbol, and a second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the second special symbol. In each of these areas, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 are stored, respectively, in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the first start opening 64, the upper second start opening 71, or the lower second start opening 71a.

The following explains each counter in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 9999"), and then reset to "0" after reaching its maximum value (for example, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take values between "0 and 9999"). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle of updates, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that point is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value.

The first initial random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from "0 to 9999", then the first initial random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter within the range of "0 to 9999". This first initial random number counter CINI1 is updated once with each execution of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31) and repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 30).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, for example (once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 31) in the first embodiment). When a ball enters the first start opening 64 (start entry), the value is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reserve areas (1st to 4th areas) located in the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start opening 64 (first special symbol). Furthermore, when a ball enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a (start entry), the value is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of one of the second reserve areas (1st to 4th areas) located in the second reserve ball storage area 203e corresponding to the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a (second special symbol).

The random number value that results in a jackpot, as determined by the jackpot random number counter C1, is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol, which is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In other words, a jackpot is determined when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d matches the random number value that results in a jackpot, as set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol. Similarly, a jackpot is determined when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e matches the random number value that results in a jackpot, as set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol.

Here, with reference to Figure 7, the details of the jackpot random number tables 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be explained. Figure 7(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the jackpot random number table 202a1 (hereinafter referred to as "Special Symbol 1 Jackpot Random Number Table 202a1") corresponding to the first special symbol stored in ROM 202, and Figure 7(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the jackpot random number table 202a2 (hereinafter referred to as "Special Symbol 2 Jackpot Random Number Table 202a2") corresponding to the second special symbol stored in ROM 202.

In the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 are each divided into two types for each setting value: one for low probability states, used when the game state is a low probability state for special symbols, and another for high probability states, used when the game state is a high probability state for special symbols, where the probability of hitting a jackpot is higher than in the low probability state for special symbols.

Furthermore, for each setting value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are set differently. In addition, the system is configured to compensate for the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers necessary to shift from the low-probability state to the high-probability state by subtracting the number of losing random numbers corresponding to losses. That is, when increasing the number of jackpot random numbers to shift from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, the number of losing random numbers is decreased, and that decrease is allocated to the number of jackpot random numbers. In this way, by varying the number of jackpot random numbers according to the game state, the probability of hitting a jackpot changes between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

On the other hand, for each special symbol, the number of random values for minor wins is set to be the same for each setting value. That is, the number of random values for minor wins in the first special symbol is configured to be the same for each setting value. Similarly, the number of random values for minor wins in the second special symbol is also configured to be the same for each setting value. By making the number of random values for minor wins the same for each special symbol for each setting value, the proportion of game value awarded, considering only minor wins for all setting values of each special symbol, becomes equal.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random values for each setting of the first and second special symbols is compensated for by the number of losing random values for all setting values. Furthermore, the number of minor jackpot random values for the first or second special symbols is not changed for each setting. That is, the increase in the number of jackpot random values due to setting changes is compensated for by decreasing the number of losing random values and allocating that decrease to the jackpot random values, while the number of minor jackpot random values for the first and second special symbols remains the same for each setting of the first or second special symbols. By configuring it this way, it becomes possible to calculate the payout rate for each setting value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random values, thereby suppressing the increase in man-hours during the design of the game specifications.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from a setting change is compensated for by using the most frequent random number other than the jackpot random number that can be obtained when the jackpot random number counter C1 is most likely to be in use during gameplay (i.e., the losing random number). This configuration makes it difficult to determine the setting from, for example, the number of times the losing role, which is the most frequent role in the variation of the first special symbol, appears. Therefore, the setting determination element for the player is limited to the appearance rate of jackpots, which have a lower probability of appearing than the losing role, making it difficult for the player to discern the setting of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, even with a low setting (i.e., setting value 1, etc.), the player can continue playing without discerning the setting, thereby promoting the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from a setting change is compensated for by using the number of losing random numbers corresponding to losing roles that do not provide any game value to the player, from the jackpot random number counter C1.

Unlike big wins and small wins, losing combinations do not add any value to the gameplay. Therefore, they are not clearly (or prominently) displayed on the data lamp (not shown) that displays game results for each pachinko machine 10. However, if the number of random values corresponding to big wins (which are easily displayed clearly on the data lamp) and the number of random values corresponding to small wins were both changed for each setting, then a player could easily guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 by glancing at the appearance rates of these two elements on the data lamp. As a result, for example, if a player were to figure out that a pachinko machine 10 is set to a low setting (e.g., setting value "1"), the player might not play that machine, potentially leading to a decrease in its usage.

Therefore, by configuring the system to compensate for the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from a change in the probability setting value by using the number of losing random numbers corresponding to losing roles in the jackpot random number counter C1, which do not provide any game value to the player and are not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp, the player's setting determination element is limited to the jackpot appearance rate, making it difficult to determine the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 from the appearance rate of minor wins. Thus, by limiting the probability setting value determination element to the appearance rate of roles based on a single random number, for example, even with a low setting (i.e., setting value "1"), the player can continue playing without determining the setting, thereby promoting the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 7(a), in the first embodiment of the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, when the setting value is "1", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) for the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 32, and these values are defined (set) in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 from "0 to 31". In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with a setting value of "1" (i.e., "normal game state", "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is set to 32/10000 = 0.32/100 (i.e., 0.32%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "1", the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the high-probability state of the first special symbol (jackpot random number value) is 221, and these values are defined (set) in the first special symbol's jackpot random number table 202a1, ranging from "0 to 220". In other words, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state" and "latent probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the setting value "1" is 221/10000 = 2.21/100 (i.e., 2.21%), meaning that the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be approximately seven times easier to hit a jackpot in than the low-probability state.

Here, when the setting value is "1", the number of random numbers that result in a minor win (minor win random numbers) in the Special Symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, both in the low probability state and the high probability state, is 5000. The values for the low probability state are "32 to 5031", and the values for the high probability state are "221 to 5220", which are specified (set) in the Special Symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a minor win for the first special symbol with the setting value "1" is 5000/10000 = 50.00/100 (i.e., 50.00%), regardless of the game state, and the probability of winning a minor win is set to be the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the setting value is "1", the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the low probability state in the Special Feature 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 (losing random numbers) is the remaining 4968 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 as "5032 to 9999". Also, the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the high probability state (losing random numbers) is the remaining 4779 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 as "5221 to 9999". In other words, the probability of the first special symbol missing in the low-probability state of the first special symbol with setting value "1" (i.e., "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state") is set to 4968/10000 = 49.68/100 (i.e., 49.68%), and the probability of the second special symbol missing in the high-probability state of the first special symbol (i.e., "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to 4779/10000 = 47.79/100 (i.e., 47.79%).

In other words, with a setting of "1," the increase in the number of jackpot random values in the high-probability state of the first special symbol is compensated for by decreasing the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," which is the state in which the player spends the most time during gameplay. The system is configured so that the increase in jackpot random values from the low-probability state to the high-probability state remains within the range of the number of losing random values in the "normal game state" (i.e., 4968 or less).

Thus, in the first special symbol, the number of random numbers that result in a minor win (minor win random number) is set to be as likely to be selected as the number of random numbers that result in a losing win. In other words, the lottery game using the first special symbol is set to be more likely to result in a losing or minor win.

Next, when the setting value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random values) for the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 34, and these values "0 to 33" are specified (set) in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the setting value "2" (i.e., "normal game state", "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is set to 34/10000 = 0.34/100 (i.e., 0.34%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "2," the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the high-probability state of the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 223, and these values "0 to 222" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with setting value "2" is 223/10000 = 2.23/100 (i.e., 2.23%), meaning that the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be approximately seven times easier to hit a jackpot in than the low-probability state.

Here, when the setting value is "2," the number of random numbers that result in a minor win (minor win random numbers) in the Special Symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, both in the low probability state and the high probability state, is 5000, just as in the case of setting value "1." The values for the low probability state are "34 to 5033," and the values for the high probability state are "223 to 5222," which are specified (set) in the Special Symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a minor win for the first special symbol with setting value "2" is 5000/10000 = 50.00/100 (i.e., 50.00%), regardless of the game state, so that the probability of winning a minor win is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the setting value is "2", the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the low probability state in the Special Figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 (losing random numbers) is the remaining 4966 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 as "5034 to 9999". Also, the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the high probability state (losing random numbers) is the remaining 4777 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 as "5223 to 9999". In other words, the probability of the first special symbol missing in the low probability state of the first special symbol with setting value "2" (i.e., "normal game state", "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is set to 4966/10000 = 49.66/100 (i.e., 49.66%), and the probability of the first special symbol missing in the high probability state of the first special symbol (i.e., "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to 4777/10000 = 47.77/100 (i.e., 47.77%).

In other words, with setting value "2," the increase in the number of jackpot random values in the high-probability state of the first special symbol is compensated for by decreasing the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," which is the state in which the player spends the most time during gameplay. Furthermore, the number of jackpot random values resulting from the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and the increase due to the setting value change, is configured to remain within the range of the number of losing random values in the "normal game state" (i.e., 4966 or less).

Therefore, in the special feature 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, setting value "2" results in the same minor win probability (50.00% in both cases) as setting value "1," but the jackpot probability is slightly higher (low probability state: 0.32% → 0.34%, high probability state: 2.21% → 2.23%). This means that jackpots are more likely to occur with this setting than with setting value "1."

Next, when the setting value is "3," the number of values (jackpot random values) for the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 36, and these values are defined (set) in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 as "0 to 35." In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the setting value "3" (i.e., "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is set to 36/10000 = 0.36/100 (i.e., 0.36%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "3," the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the high-probability state of the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 225, and these values "0 to 224" are specified (set) in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state of the first special symbol with the setting value "3" (i.e., the "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 225/10000 = 2.25/100 (i.e., 2.25%), meaning that the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be approximately seven times easier to hit a jackpot in than the low-probability state.

Here, when the setting value is "3," the number of random numbers that result in a minor win (minor win random numbers) in the Special Symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, both in the low probability state and the high probability state, is 5000, just as in the cases of setting values "1" and "2." The values for the low probability state are "36 to 5035," and the values for the high probability state are "225 to 5224," which are specified (set) in the Special Symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a minor win for the first special symbol with setting value "3" is 5000/10000 = 50.00/100 (i.e., 50.00%), regardless of the game state, so that the probability of winning a minor win is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the setting value is "3", the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the low probability state in the Special Feature 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 (losing random numbers) is the remaining 4964 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 as "5036 to 9999". Also, the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the high probability state (losing random numbers) is the remaining 4775 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 as "5225 to 9999". In other words, the probability of the first special symbol missing in the low-probability state of the first special symbol with setting value "3" (i.e., "normal gameplay state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state") is set to 4964/10000 = 49.64/100 (i.e., 49.64%), and the probability of the first special symbol missing in the high-probability state of the first special symbol (i.e., "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to 4775/10000 = 47.75/100 (i.e., 47.75%).

In other words, with setting value "3," the increase in the number of jackpot random values in the high-probability state of the first special symbol is compensated for by decreasing the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," which is the state in which the player spends the most time during gameplay. Furthermore, the number of jackpot random values resulting from the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and the increase due to the setting value change, is configured to remain within the range of the number of losing random values in the "normal game state" (i.e., 4964 or less).

Therefore, in the jackpot random number table 202a, setting "3" results in the same minor win probability (50.00% in both cases) as setting "2," but the jackpot probability is slightly higher (low probability state: 0.34% → 0.36%, high probability state: 2.23% → 2.25%). This means that jackpots are more likely to occur with this setting than with setting "2."

Next, as shown in Figure 7(b), in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) for the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 32, the same as in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the values "0 to 31" are defined (set) in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with a setting value of "1" (i.e., "normal game state", "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is set to 32/10000 = 0.32/100 (i.e., 0.32%), the same as the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when the setting value is "1", the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the high-probability state of the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 221, the same as the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 220" is specified (set) in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high-probability state of the second special symbol with the setting value "1" (i.e., the "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 221/10000 = 2.21/100 (i.e., 2.21%), the same as the first special symbol. The high-probability state of the special symbols is set to be approximately seven times easier to hit a jackpot in than the low-probability state.

Here, when the setting value is "1", the number of random numbers that result in a minor win (minor win random numbers) in the Special Symbol 2 Big Win Random Number Table 202a2, both in the low probability state and the high probability state, is 7500. The values for the low probability state are "32 to 7531", and the values for the high probability state are "221 to 7720", which are specified (set) in the Special Symbol 2 Big Win Random Number Table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a minor win for the second special symbol with the setting value "1" is 7500/10000 = 75.00/100 (i.e., 75.00%), regardless of the game state. This setting ensures that the probability of winning a minor win is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the setting value is "1", the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the low probability state in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 (losing random numbers) is the remaining 2468 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "7532 to 9999". Also, the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the high probability state (losing random numbers) is the remaining 2279 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "7721 to 9999". In other words, the probability of missing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with setting value "1" (i.e., "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state") is set to 2468/10000 = 24.68/100 (i.e., 24.68%), and the probability of missing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (i.e., "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to 2279/10000 = 22.79/100 (i.e., 22.79%).

In other words, with setting value "1," the increase in the number of jackpot random values in the high-probability state of Special Feature 2 is compensated for by decreasing the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," which is the state in which the player spends the most time during gameplay. The system is configured so that the increase in the number of jackpot random values from the low-probability state to the high-probability state remains within the range of the number of losing random values in the "normal game state" (i.e., 2468 or less).

Thus, similar to the first special symbol, the second special symbol also has a set random number value for minor wins (minor win random number value), and this value is set to be significantly more likely to be selected compared to the losing random number value for the second special symbol. In other words, in the lottery game for the second special symbol, it is easier to win a minor win than a big win or a loss.

As will be explained in more detail later, the roles of the minor wins in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the minor wins in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are configured to be different.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a minor win is achieved in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the variable prize entry device 65, which opens upon winning the minor win game, is configured to have a short opening time (see Figure 23). Furthermore, the lottery result for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is easily obtained in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is performed. Even if the player switches to right-handed play at the moment a minor win is achieved in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in this "normal game state," the short opening time of the variable prize entry device 65 makes it difficult to enter the device, resulting in a high probability of loss for the player. Therefore, in the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a minor win is achieved in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is de-lit, and the main display right-handed instruction 89 is also hidden.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is in progress when a minor win is achieved in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to stop at a losing symbol (see Figure 38). Moreover, in the "normal game state," the time it takes for the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be derived may be, or is likely to be, longer than the time it takes for the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be derived (see Figures 11 to 16 described later). Therefore, in the "normal game state," the dynamic display of the second special symbol is more easily stopped by a minor win in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

In other words, the minor win in the dynamic display of the first special symbol does not serve the purpose of awarding prize balls, but rather functions to stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is running in the "normal game state." This configuration prevents the awarding of prize balls that would otherwise occur during the "normal game state" when the player is shooting to the right, causing the ball to enter the upper second start opening 71, triggering a minor win in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and then causing the ball to enter the variable prize entry device 65, which is opened by the minor win, thus awarding prize balls.

On the other hand, when a minor win is achieved in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the variable prize entry device 65, which is opened upon winning the minor win game, is configured to remain open for a long period of time (see Figure 23). Furthermore, the lottery results for the dynamic display of the second special symbol are more likely to be obtained in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," and "latent probability fluctuation state" when playing right-hand shots. Of these, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," when the dynamic display of the second special symbol achieves a minor win, the variable prize entry device 65 is configured to be more likely to receive a prize (see Figures 20 and 21 described later).

In other words, the small win in the dynamic display of the second special symbol serves the purpose of acquiring prize balls in the "latent probability fluctuation state."

Furthermore, a specific area may be provided within the variable prize-winning device 65, and a jackpot may be triggered when the variable prize-winning device 65 opens and the game ball passes through this specific area. Additionally, a non-specific area (for example, a losing hole) different from the specific area may be provided within the variable prize-winning device 65, and if the variable prize-winning device 65 opens and the game ball passes through this non-specific area, the game may end without a jackpot. This configuration enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a gameplay element where, upon winning a minor prize, the variable prize-winning device 65 opens, the game ball enters the device, and either the entered game ball passes through the specific area resulting in a jackpot, or the entered game ball passes through the non-specific area and the game ends without a jackpot.

Furthermore, from the start of the minor win game until one of the following results is derived, such as the game ball passing through a specific area and resulting in a big win, the game passing through a non-specific area and ending without a big win, or the game ending without the game ball being able to enter the variable prize-winning device 65 which was opened at the start of the minor win game, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to indicate whether or not a big win will occur. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol is determined to result in a minor win (for example, a transition condition) (for example, a transition condition determination means), and a notification is displayed to transition from left-handed gameplay to right-handed gameplay in accordance with the timing of the opening of the variable prize-winning device 65. Subsequently, simultaneously with the start of the minor win game, the third symbol display device 81 may initiate a challenge sequence (e.g., a first sequence) to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur. Once one of the following results is determined—whether the game ball passes through a specific area (e.g., a predetermined area) (e.g., ball entry detection means) resulting in a jackpot, or passes through a non-specific area resulting in no jackpot and the minor win game ending, or the game ball fails to enter the variable prize-winning device 65 opened upon the start of the minor win game, the challenge sequence may be terminated (e.g., a sequence termination means), and a V-winning sequence (e.g., a second sequence) may be initiated to suggest to the player that, contrary to the challenge sequence, a V-winning outcome may occur, leading to a transition in the game state. Furthermore, the execution time of the challenge sequence may be set in advance (e.g., a period setting means), and if, after the execution period has elapsed, neither a V-winning outcome nor a ball passing through a non-specific area occurs, an error such as a ball jam may occur, and an error processing sequence (e.g., an error notification sequence) may be executed as a prize-winning error.

Next, when the setting value is "2," the number of values (jackpot random values) for the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 34, the same as in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and these values are defined (set) in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "0 to 33." In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") with the setting value "2" is set to 34/10000 = 0.34/100 (i.e., 0.34%), the same as the first special symbol.

Furthermore, when the setting value is "2," the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the high-probability state of the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 223, the same as in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and these values are defined (set) in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "0 to 222." In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high-probability state (i.e., the "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") with the setting value "2" is 223/10000 = 2.23/100 (i.e., 2.23%), the same as the first special symbol. Therefore, the high-probability state for special symbols is set to be approximately seven times easier to hit a jackpot in than the low-probability state.

Here, when the setting value is "2," the number of random numbers that result in a minor win (minor win random numbers) in the Special Symbol 2 Big Win Random Number Table 202a2, both in the low probability state and the high probability state, is 7500, just as in the case of setting value "1." The values for the low probability state are "34 to 7533," and the values for the high probability state are "223 to 7722," which are specified (set) in the Special Symbol 2 Big Win Random Number Table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a minor win in the second special symbol with setting value "2" is 7500/10000 = 75.00/100 (i.e., 75.00%), regardless of the game state, so that the probability of winning a minor win is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the setting value is "2", the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the low probability state in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 (losing random numbers) is the remaining 2466 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "7534 to 9999". Also, the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the high probability state (losing random numbers) is the remaining 2277 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "7723 to 9999". In other words, the probability of missing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with setting value "2" (i.e., "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state") is set to 2466/10000 = 24.66/100 (i.e., 24.66%), and the probability of missing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (i.e., "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to 2277/10000 = 22.77/100 (i.e., 22.77%).

In other words, with setting value "2," the increase in the number of jackpot random values in the high-probability state of Special Feature 2 is compensated for by decreasing the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," which is the state in which the player spends the most time during gameplay. Furthermore, the number of jackpot random values, both from the increase in the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the setting value change, is configured to remain within the range of the number of losing random values in the "normal game state" (i.e., 2466 or less).

Therefore, in the special feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, setting "2" results in the same minor win probability (75.00% in both cases) as setting "1," but the jackpot probability is slightly higher (low probability state: 0.32% → 0.34%, high probability state: 2.21% → 2.23%). This means that jackpots are more likely to occur with this setting than with setting "1."

Next, when the setting value is "3," the number of values (jackpot random values) for the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 36, the same as in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and these values are defined (set) in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "0 to 35." In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") with the setting value "3" is set to 36/10000 = 0.36/100 (i.e., 0.36%), the same as the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when the setting value is "3," the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the high-probability state of the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 225, the same as in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and these values are defined (set) in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "0 to 224." In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high-probability state (i.e., "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the setting value "3" is 225/10000 = 2.25/100 (i.e., 2.25%), the same as the first special symbol. The high-probability state of the special symbols is set to be approximately seven times easier to hit a jackpot in than the low-probability state.

Here, when the setting value is "3," the number of random numbers that result in a minor win (minor win random numbers) in the Special Symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, both in the low probability state and the high probability state, is 7500, just as in the cases of setting values "1" and "2." The values for the low probability state are "36 to 7535," and the values for the high probability state are "225 to 7724," which are specified (set) in the Special Symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a minor win for the second special symbol with setting value "3" is 7500/10000 = 75.00/100 (i.e., 75.00%), regardless of the game state, so that the probability of winning a minor win is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the setting value is "3", the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the low probability state in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 (losing random numbers) is the remaining 2464 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "7536 to 9999". Also, the number of random numbers that result in a loss in the high probability state (losing random numbers) is the remaining 2275 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers, and these values are defined (set) in the Special Feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 as "7725 to 9999". In other words, the probability of missing the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol with setting value "3" (i.e., "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state") is set to 2464/10000 = 24.64/100 (i.e., 24.64%), and the probability of missing the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (i.e., "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to 2275/10000 = 22.75/100 (i.e., 22.75%).

In other words, with setting value "3," the increase in the number of jackpot random values in the high-probability state of Special Feature 2 is compensated for by decreasing the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," which is the state in which the player spends the most time during gameplay. Furthermore, the number of jackpot random values resulting from the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and the increase due to the setting value change, is configured to remain within the range of the number of losing random values in the "normal game state" (i.e., 2464 or less).

Therefore, in the special feature 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, setting value "3" has the same minor win probability (both 75.00%) as setting value "2," but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 0.34% → 0.36%, high probability state: 2.23% → 2.25%). This means that jackpots are more likely to occur with this setting than with setting value "2."

As described above, in both the Special Figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the Special Figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random values in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" is compensated for by the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "normal low probability time reduction state," while being configured to remain within the range of the number of losing random values in the "normal game state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "normal low probability time reduction state." Furthermore, in the Special Figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the Special Figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the number of minor jackpot random values is configured not to change between the "normal game state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "normal low probability time reduction state" and the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state." By configuring it in this way, the payout rate for each setting can be calculated by considering only the increase in the jackpot random number, thereby suppressing the increase in man-hours during the game specification design.

Furthermore, the jackpot random number table 202a may include random values that result in winning a time-saving symbol that transitions to the "normal low probability time-saving state" without going through the jackpot state. In this case, the transition to the "normal low probability time-saving state" due to reaching the ceiling and the transition to the "normal low probability time-saving state" due to winning a time-saving symbol may occur simultaneously. In such cases, the system is configured to prioritize the state that is more advantageous to the player. For example, if transitioning to the "normal low probability time-saving state" due to winning a time-saving symbol may grant "500" time-saving spins, the number of time-saving spins that can be granted when transitioning to the "normal low probability time-saving state" by reaching the ceiling ("1140" spins) is greater. Therefore, the system is configured to prioritize the transition to the "normal low probability time-saving state" due to reaching the ceiling.

Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to indicate whether or not a jackpot will occur from the start of the minor win game until one of the following results is derived: the game ball passes through a specific area and a jackpot is achieved, the game ball passes through a non-specific area and the minor win game ends without a jackpot, or the game ball fails to enter the variable prize-winning device 65 that was opened at the start of the minor win game and the minor win game ends. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state," the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicates a minor win (for example, the first game state), and a notification is displayed to transition from left-handed play to right-handed play in accordance with the timing of the opening of the variable prize-winning device 65. Subsequently, simultaneously with the start of the minor win game, the third symbol display device 81 may start a V-opening performance (e.g., the first performance) that determines whether or not a big win will occur and launches a ball to enter a specific area (e.g., "Aim for V!", etc., part of the first performance). When one of the following results is derived (e.g., the game state ends without a big win by passing the game ball through the specific area, the game state ends without a big win by passing through a non-specific area, or the game state ends without the game ball entering the variable prize-winning device 65 that was opened at the start of the minor win game), the V-opening performance may be switched (e.g., a switching means) and a V-acquisition performance (e.g., the second performance) may be started that suggests to the player that, unlike the V-opening performance, a V-acquisition may occur and the game state may change. During the aforementioned minor win game, if a V-win occurs, the game state may be configured to transition to a major win game after the minor win game ends, and the major win game may be configured to provide the player with a more advantageous game value than the minor win game. Furthermore, if a major win is achieved, the system may be configured so that the ball is guaranteed to enter a specific area.

Returning to Figure 6, let's continue the explanation. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. It is incremented by 1 sequentially within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, for example (once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 31) in the first embodiment).

Then, when the ball enters the first starting port 64, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203, which is the same first reserved ball storage area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored. Furthermore, when the ball enters the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203, which is the same second reserved ball storage area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved ball storage areas 203d or 203e is not a jackpot random number (jackpot random value), that is, if it is a miss or a minor win random number (miss random value or minor win random value), then the variation pattern in the variation animation and the type of stopping symbols (hereinafter referred to as "stopping type") will be those of a miss or a minor win. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved ball storage areas 203d or 203e is a jackpot random number (jackpot random value), then the variation pattern and stopping type in the variation animation will be those of a jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stopping type at the time of the jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99," and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. This jackpot type table 202b includes a special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1, which is referenced in the first lottery game for the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2, which is referenced in the second lottery game for the second special symbol.

Here, with reference to Figure 8, the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be explained. Figure 8(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in ROM 202, and Figure 8(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol, also stored in ROM 202.

As shown in Figures 8(a) and 8(b), the jackpot type table 202b is divided into tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and within those tables, the game state and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are three types of jackpots: "Time-Saving A," which corresponds to a "Reduced Time State for High Probability of Normal Symbols" where, after a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, the probability of hitting a jackpot with a special symbol is low, but the probability of hitting a jackpot with a normal symbol is high until a specified number of special symbols appear (100 times in the first embodiment); "Probability Fluctuation A," which corresponds to a "Probability Fluctuation State" where, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, both the probability of hitting a jackpot with a special symbol and the probability of hitting a jackpot with a normal symbol are high until the next jackpot; and "Latent Probability Fluctuation A," which corresponds to a "Latent Probability Fluctuation State" where, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the probability of hitting a jackpot with a normal symbol is low, but the probability of hitting a jackpot with a special symbol is high until the next jackpot.

In the special feature 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special feature 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the types of jackpots that can be selected differ depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning. Each of these tables associates the possible values of the jackpot type counter C2, which determines that jackpot type, with each respective jackpot type.

In the example of the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in Figure 8(a), when a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in the "normal game state," the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 34" is associated with jackpot type "Time Reduction A," and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "35 to 99" is associated with jackpot type "Probability Variation A." Furthermore, when a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in the "Probability Variation State," "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State," or "Latent Probability Variation State," the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 34" is associated with jackpot type "Time Reduction A," and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "35 to 99" is associated with jackpot type "Latent Probability Variation A."

Therefore, in the lottery for the first special symbol in the "normal game state," if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d is a value that results in a jackpot, then the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved ball storage area can be selected from the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7," then jackpot type "Short Time A" may be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95," then jackpot type "Probability Change A" may be selected.

Furthermore, in the lottery for the win or loss of the first special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "latent probability fluctuation state," if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d is a value that results in a jackpot, then a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved ball storage area may be selected from the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7," then jackpot type "Time Reduction A" may be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95," then jackpot type "Latent Probability A" may be selected.

Therefore, in "normal gameplay," when a jackpot is won through the dynamic display of the first special symbol, there is a 35% chance of winning a jackpot of type "Shortened Time A" and a 65% chance of winning a jackpot of type "Probability Variation A." Furthermore, in "Probability Variation State," "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State," or "Latent Probability Variation State," when a jackpot is won through the dynamic display of the first special symbol, there is a 35% chance of winning a jackpot of type "Shortened Time A" and a 65% chance of winning a jackpot of type "Latent Probability A" instead of a jackpot of type "Probability Variation A."

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, during left-handed play, the machine is configured such that while the ball can enter the first start port 64 and the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed, it is difficult to enter the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, making it difficult to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Therefore, during left-handed play (i.e., "normal play state"), the machine is configured to primarily execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Next, in the example of the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in Figure 8(b), when a jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in all game states, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 34" is associated with the jackpot type "Short Time A," and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "35 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "Hidden Probability A."

In other words, in the lottery for the win or loss of the second special symbol in all game states, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second reserved ball storage areas 203e is a value that results in a jackpot, then a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reserved area can be selected from the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", then jackpot type "Short Time A" may be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", then jackpot type "Hidden Probability A" may be selected.

Therefore, when a jackpot is won through the dynamic display of the second special symbol, there is a 35% chance of winning a jackpot of type "Short Time A" and a 65% chance of winning a jackpot of type "Hidden Probability A".

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, right-hand play is discouraged (not recommended, prohibited) in the "normal gameplay state," and the time it takes for the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be derived in the "normal gameplay state" is longer than the time it takes for the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be derived (see Figures 11 to 16 described later). In addition, the dynamic display of the second special symbol in progress is configured to stop as a losing symbol when a minor win is achieved in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the lottery result from the dynamic display of the second special symbol is practically difficult to derive in the "normal gameplay state."

Here, referring to Figures 9 and 10, the game modes in each game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as well as the transition conditions and destinations for each game state, will be explained. Figure 9 is a list explaining the trigger for transitioning to each game state, the probability of winning a jackpot with special symbols, the probability of winning with normal symbols, the recommended ball launch mode, the main prize destinations, the variation time for the first special symbol, the variation time for the second special symbol, and whether right-hand play is permitted for each game state. Figure 10 shows the launch mode in each game state and the destinations for transitioning to each game state based on the type of jackpot won, etc. Although Figure 10 also shows the transition to the game state when playing with an unrecommended launch mode, this explanation will be omitted here for the sake of clarity.

As shown in Figure 9, the triggers for transitioning to the "normal game state" are the factory default initial state, the RAM clear state, when the dynamic display of special symbols in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" is executed 100 times (so-called end of electric support; see Figure 10), or when the dynamic display of special symbols in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is executed 1140 times (so-called end of electric support; see Figure 10).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9, in the "normal game state," as described above, the probability of winning with special symbols is low, and the probability of winning with regular symbols is also low. In addition, in the "normal game state," left-handed play is encouraged, and balls launched in this left-handed play mainly enter the first starting gate 64. The dynamic display time of the first special symbol 1 changes within the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds," and the dynamic display time of the second special symbol 1 changes within the range of "20 seconds to 190 seconds" (see Figures 11 to 16 described later). In this "normal game state," if right-handed play is performed, the launch pattern is detected by the through gate 67, etc., and based on this detection, a voice output device 226 (see Figure 5), etc., is configured to issue a right-handed play prohibition notification to suppress right-handed play.

Next, the trigger for transitioning to the "Reduced Low Probability Time State for Special Symbols" is when, after a big win ends, no big wins are achieved for 900 consecutive times in the low probability state for special symbols. That is, during the 900 dynamic displays in the low probability state for special symbols, misses or minor wins continue to occur (see Figure 10).

Furthermore, in the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," as described above, the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols is low, and the probability of hitting with normal symbols is also low, but the opening time of the normal electric mechanism 72 is extended (see Figure 24). In addition, in the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," right-handed play is encouraged, and balls launched using this right-handed play can enter the upper second start opening 71, as well as the lower second start opening 71a, where the low probability time reduction function is active. The dynamic display time of the first special symbol 1 fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds," and the dynamic display time of the second special symbol 1 also fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds" (see Figures 11 to 16 described later). Note that in this "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," since right-handed play is encouraged, the above-mentioned right-handed play prohibition notification is not executed even if a ball passes through the through gate 67.

Next, the trigger for transitioning to the "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State" is winning a jackpot of type "Time Reduction A" (see Figure 10).

In this "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State," as described above, the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols is low, while the probability of hitting with normal symbols is high. Furthermore, in this "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State," similar to the "Probability Fluctuation State," right-handed play is encouraged, and balls launched using this right-handed play can enter both the upper second start opening 71 and the lower second start opening 71a, where the high probability time reduction function is active. The dynamic display time of the second special symbol 1 fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds," while the dynamic display time of the first special symbol 1 fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds" (see Figures 11 to 16 described later). Note that in this "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State," since right-handed play is encouraged, the above-mentioned right-handed play prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the trigger for transitioning to the "probability fluctuation state" is winning a "probability fluctuation A" type jackpot (see Figure 10).

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state," as described above, the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols is high, and the probability of hitting with regular symbols is also high. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state," right-handed play is encouraged, and balls launched using this method can enter both the upper second start opening 71 and the lower second start opening 71a, where the high-probability time-saving function is active. The dynamic display time of the first special symbol 1 fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds," while the dynamic display time of the second special symbol 1 fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds" (see Figures 11 to 16 described later). Note that in this "probability fluctuation state," because right-handed play is encouraged, the above-mentioned right-handed play prohibition notification is not executed even if a ball passes through the through gate 67.

Next, the trigger for transitioning to the "latent probability fluctuation state" is winning a jackpot of type "latent probability A" (see Figure 10).

Furthermore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," as described above, the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols is high, while the probability of hitting with regular symbols is low. In addition, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," right-handed play is encouraged, and while balls launched using this method can enter the upper second start opening 71, the time-saving function is not activated as in the "regular symbol high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," or "regular symbol low probability time reduction state," making it difficult for balls to enter the lower second start opening 71a. The dynamic display time of the first special symbol 1 fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds," while the dynamic display time of the second special symbol 1 fluctuates within the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds" (see Figures 11 to 16 described later). Note that in this "latent probability fluctuation state," since right-handed play is encouraged, the above-mentioned right-handed play prohibition notification is not executed even if a ball passes through the through gate 67.

Returning to Figure 6, let's continue the explanation of the various counters. The stop pattern selection counter C3, for example, increments by "1" sequentially within the range of "0 to 99," and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "99").

In the first embodiment, the general presentation patterns for the winning and losing variations displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are selected based on the number of pending variation patterns and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each presentation pattern is provided with a long pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "long") which tends to select a relatively long variation time, a middle pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "middle") which tends to select a variation time shorter than the long pattern, and a short pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "short") which tends to select a variation time shorter than the middle pattern.

Specifically, one of six possible presentation modes can be selected: a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode where no "reach display" occurs; a "non-reach (medium)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation mode; a "normal reach" presentation mode where only the variable elements of a "normal reach" are executed as a "reach display"; a "super reach" presentation mode where the variable elements of a "super reach" are executed, developing from the variable elements of the "normal reach"; and a "special reach" presentation mode where the variable elements of a "special reach" are executed, similarly developing from the variable elements of a "normal reach."

Here, we will explain each presentation mode in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "Non-Reach (Long)" presentation mode, the "Non-Reach (Medium)" presentation mode, and the "Non-Reach (Short)" presentation mode (hereinafter, the "Non-Reach (Long)" presentation mode, the "Non-Reach (Medium)" presentation mode, and the "Non-Reach (Short)" presentation mode may be collectively referred to as the "Non-Reach" presentation mode) are presentation modes in which, as a special symbol variation performance, the third symbol display device 81, in which three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 vary, performs a "high-speed variation" variation element that shuffles each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at high speed, and then, in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that stop first, the same third symbol does not stop, and no "Reach display" is generated.

Furthermore, the "high-speed variation" element refers to, for example, the variation effect of the third symbol displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4) in the third symbol variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, where the third symbols are rapidly scrolled downwards vertically on the display screen. In this "high-speed variation," the third symbols are varied in such a way that the player cannot clearly recognize the displayed content of the third symbols, and an effect is performed that irregularly mixes (shuffles) the stopping results of the variation effect that were displayed at the previous stop.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, after the "high-speed variation" variation element is performed, the "low-speed variation" variation element is performed, except for certain performance modes ("non-reach (medium)" performance mode and "non-reach (short)" performance mode).

The "slow-speed variation" variation element refers to a variation element in the variation performance of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which scrolls the third symbol at a slow speed visible to the player after the "high-speed variation" variation element. In this "slow-speed variation" variation element, the display stops each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in sequence while allowing the player to recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the two symbol rows that are stopped first (for example, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see Figure 4)), a "reach display" occurs and the variation element develops into a "normal reach." However, if different third symbols stop in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped first, the remaining symbol row Z2 is stopped and the variation performance ends. Details of each variation element, including the "high-speed variation" variation element and the "slow-speed variation" variation element, will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" performance mode, the "high-speed variation" variation element is performed followed by the "low-speed variation" variation element, causing each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to stop in order. Different third symbols stop on the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that stop first, and the remaining symbol row Z2 stops, ending the variation performance. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (medium)" and "non-reach (short)" performance modes, the "high-speed variation" variation element is not performed after the "low-speed variation" variation element. After the "high-speed variation" variation element ends, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stops simultaneously, different third symbols stop on the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, the two symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" performance mode), and the other symbol row Z2 also stops, ending the variation performance.

Among the various performance modes, the "Normal Reach" performance mode refers to a type of "reach display" where, in the variation performance of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, the variation element of "Normal Reach" is executed immediately after the same third symbol stops in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are displayed first, and it does not develop into other "reach displays," namely, the variation elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach."

Among the various performance modes, the "Super Reach" mode is a type of "reach display" where the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are executed, evolving from the variable elements of a "Normal Reach."

Among the various presentation modes, the "Special Reach" presentation mode is one type of "reach display" presentation mode in which the variable elements of a "Special Reach" are executed, evolving from the variable elements of a "Normal Reach."

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically, for example (once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 31) in the first embodiment). When a ball enters the first start opening 64, the value is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserve area, which is located in the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start opening 64, and contains the jackpot random number counter C1. Similarly, when a ball enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, the value is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserve area, which is located in the second reserve ball storage area 203e corresponding to the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, and contains the jackpot random number counter C1.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d, which references the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, is configured to differ depending on whether the variation effect is successful or not, the current game state, and the number of variation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently in reserve. That is, multiple types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided and are configured to be selected based on the number of variation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols in standby mode, etc.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number of reserved balls table 202c provided in the ROM 202, one of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the success or failure of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current number of variation effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a general variation mode of the variation effect is selected. Subsequently, based on the selected variation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (described later), the detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined.

The multiple stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3, which selects the performance mode, differs for each stop pattern table 202d. Multiple stop pattern tables 202d are provided to change the selection ratio of the performance mode for the variation performance depending on whether the variation performance is successful or not, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the selection ratio of the performance mode is changed depending on (1) whether a jackpot occurs in the variation performance of the acquired third symbol, (2) whether the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "latent probability variation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal game state," and (3) the number of reserved balls for the variation performance that are being held.

The primary reason for this is to vary the probability of winning a jackpot for each presentation pattern. Specifically, the probability of selecting different stopping patterns—namely, "non-reach" presentation patterns, "normal reach" presentation patterns, "super reach" presentation patterns, and "special reach" presentation patterns—is varied depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost. This changes the probability of winning a jackpot for each presentation pattern. For example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" or "special reach" presentation patterns are more likely to be selected, while if the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" or "normal reach" presentation patterns are more likely to be selected.

By structuring the game in this way, the "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" presentation patterns can be designed to increase the likelihood of a jackpot, while the "Normal Reach" and "Non-Reach" presentation patterns can be designed to decrease the likelihood of a jackpot or prevent one altogether, thus differentiating the jackpot probability for each presentation pattern. Therefore, when a jackpot-prone presentation pattern appears during the reel spin, it suggests to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring while that pattern is running, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a jackpot, the machine is configured to select a general type of performance (stop pattern) for the variation performance based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easier to select a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot and harder to select a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the machine is configured to select a performance type (stop pattern) for the variation performance based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it harder to select a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot and harder to select a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. As a result, when informing the player of the lottery result for the third symbol in the variation performance, if a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot is being executed, a jackpot is more likely to occur in that variation performance, and if a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot is being executed, a jackpot is less likely to occur in that variation performance. By creating a difference in the expected value of a jackpot for each performance type (stop pattern), the enjoyment of the game during the execution of that variation performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the second reason is to minimize wasted balls (so-called overflow entries resulting in no special symbol draw) resulting from balls entering the first start port 64 when the waiting count for the first special symbol's variation animation has reached its maximum, or from balls entering the upper second start port 71 or lower second start port 71a when the waiting count for the second special symbol's variation animation has reached its maximum.

To explain in more detail, the number of waiting times for the variation animation of the first and second special symbols is limited to a maximum of four, and since the variation animation is performed for at least a certain period of time, in game states where it is easy for balls to enter the lower second start opening 71a, such as the "probability variation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," and "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. In these game states, if a variation animation with a long variation time is selected, balls will frequently enter the lower second start opening 71a when the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol has been reached, and despite the ball entering the lower second start opening 71a, the opportunity to draw for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. Furthermore, even in "normal gameplay," if the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is reached and a long-duration variation animation is selected, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol will not be consumed during the execution of that animation. Therefore, even if balls enter the first start port 64 during this time, the opportunity to draw for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In this situation, the player will determine that there is no game value in entering the first start port 64, and will stop launching balls and interrupt the game until the variation animation is completed and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. When gameplay is interrupted, the utilization rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases, affecting the management of the amusement facility.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the machine is configured to select the performance mode of the variation animation based on a stop pattern table 202d that is likely to select a short variation time when the game state is such that the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is easily reached, or when the number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) the maximum number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to suppress the entry of balls into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached.

Furthermore, a third reason is to extend the execution time and delay the end of the variation animation, thereby maintaining the state in which the variation animation is being performed for a longer period. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls for the variation animation is small (or none), and a ball is not entered into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a within the variation time of the currently running variation animation, the next variation animation cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demo screen or the like. If the player is playing the game by firing balls but the third symbol display device 81 does not display a variation animation, the player will not be able to obtain the excitement related to the jackpot lottery that they desire, and will lose interest in the game. Furthermore, if the third symbol display device 81 does not display any variation effects, the player may perceive the pachinko machine 10 as one in which it is difficult to enter the first start opening 64, the upper second start opening 71, or the lower second start opening 71a. This could lead the player to judge the machine as unrewarding and potentially cause them to stop playing.

Therefore, in the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small, the machine is configured to select the variation effect mode based on a stop pattern table 202d that tends to select a longer variation time. This makes it less likely for the third symbol display device 81 to be in a state where no variation effect is being performed, and allows the execution state of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 to be maintained for a longer period.

Furthermore, as a fourth reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variation machine capable of simultaneously and in parallel execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol. However, the special symbols that are to be executed (recommended) for each game state are predetermined (specified) as part of the game specifications, and in order to actively draw the special symbols that are to be executed for each game state, the machine is configured to impose a predetermined penalty if, for example, an opportunity to draw a special symbol that is not to be executed (not recommended) is obtained in a predetermined game state.

Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state," left-handed play is pre-encouraged as a game specification, and by playing left-handed, the player wins a jackpot in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, thereby obtaining game value from the jackpot, while also experiencing gameplay where the jackpot type will be either "Time-Saving A" or "Probability Variation A" depending on the type of jackpot. Furthermore, in the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time-Saving State" and the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time-Saving State," right-handed play is pre-encouraged as a game specification, and by playing right-handed, the player experiences gameplay where they can win a jackpot in the dynamic display of the special symbol while the time-saving function is active. In addition, in the "Probability Variation State," right-handed play is pre-encouraged as a game specification, and by playing right-handed, the player experiences gameplay where they can maintain the prize-winning assistance state while also experiencing gameplay where they can experience gameplay where the next jackpot will be of a certain type. Furthermore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," right-hand play is encouraged as part of the game's specifications. By playing this right-hand game, players can win a minor prize during the dynamic display of the second special symbol, thereby gaining game value from the minor prize while simultaneously experiencing the game's element of uncertainty regarding the type of jackpot that will result in the next major prize.

Therefore, in the "normal gameplay state," the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on left-handed play is encouraged, while in the "probability variation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," and "latent probability variation state," the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on right-handed play is encouraged. However, if the game is not played according to the above-mentioned game specifications, particularly if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed simultaneously with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal gameplay state," the game result will differ from the payout rate based on the initially set game specifications, potentially causing unforeseen losses to the arcade.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when multiple dynamic displays of the second special symbol are held (for example, four) during "normal gameplay," the newly started dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed for a longer time (for example, "20 seconds") than the dynamic display of the first special symbol. During the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, a minor win is achieved in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, allowing the dynamic display of the second special symbol to stop as a losing symbol. This configuration reduces the efficiency of the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol when a ball enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, which triggers the dynamic display of special symbols not recommended in the game specifications. As a result, players can be discouraged from executing the dynamic display of special symbols that are not recommended, thereby suppressing gameplay that deviates from the intended game specifications and reducing disadvantages to the hall.

Furthermore, while left-handed play is not encouraged in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal high probability time reduction state," "latent probability fluctuation state," or "normal low probability time reduction state," the value of the game obtained by the player is set lower even when playing in this unencouraged state (i.e., left-handed play) than when playing in the encouraged state (i.e., right-handed play). Therefore, since this is not a disadvantageous play style for the arcade, no special penalties are imposed.

Here, with reference to Figures 11 and 12, the details of the reserved number table 202c will be explained. Figure 11 is a schematic diagram showing the reserved number table 202c1 for Special Symbol 1, corresponding to the first special symbol, and Figure 12 is a schematic diagram showing the reserved number table 202c2 for Special Symbol 2, corresponding to the second special symbol.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a variation performance of the first special symbol is performed based on a ball entering the first start port 64, the machine is configured to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6 by referring to the reserve count table 202c1 for special symbol 1 based on whether the variation performance is successful or not, the game state at that time, and the total number of reserved balls for the variation performance of the first special symbol at that time. Furthermore, when a variation performance of the second special symbol is performed based on a ball entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, the machine is configured to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6 by referring to the reserve count table 202c2 for special symbol 2 based on whether the variation performance is successful or not, the game state at that time, and the total number of reserved balls for the variation performance of the second special symbol at that time. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the general pattern of the variation effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the Special Symbol 1 Reserve Count Table 202c1 in Figure 11, when a miss or minor win is selected in "normal gameplay," and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is "1 to 3," then Table A 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (see Figure 13(a)) is selected. Also, when a miss or minor win is selected in "normal gameplay," and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is "4," then Table B 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see Figure 13(b)) is selected. On the other hand, when a big win is selected in "normal gameplay," regardless of the number of reserved balls, Table C 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (see Figure 13(c)) is selected.

Next, when a miss or minor win is extracted in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "latent probability fluctuation state," regardless of the number of reserved balls, Table D 202d4 of Stop Pattern Table 202d (see Figure 14(a)) is selected. Furthermore, when a big win is extracted in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "latent probability fluctuation state," regardless of the number of reserved balls, Table C 202d3 of Stop Pattern Table 202d (see Figure 13(c)) is selected.

Next, as shown in the reserved ball count table 202c2 for special figure 2 in Figure 12, when a miss or minor win is extracted in "normal gameplay," regardless of the number of reserved balls, table E 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d (see Figure 14(b)) is selected. Furthermore, when a big win is extracted in "normal gameplay," regardless of the number of reserved balls, table C 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (see Figure 13(c)) is selected.

Next, when a miss or minor win is selected in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," or "normal high probability time reduction state," and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "1," then Table A 202d1 of Stop Pattern Table 202d (see Figure 13(a)) is selected. Furthermore, when a miss or minor win is selected in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," or "normal high probability time reduction state," and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "2 to 4," then Table F 202d6 of Stop Pattern Table 202d (see Figure 14(c)) is selected.

Next, when a miss or a minor win is selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state," regardless of the number of reserved balls, Table D 202d4 of Stop Pattern Table 202d (see Figure 14(a)) is selected. Furthermore, when a major win is selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state," regardless of the number of reserved balls, Table C 202d3 of Stop Pattern Table 202d (see Figure 13(c)) is selected.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is extracted using the dynamic display of any special symbol, or when a miss or minor win is extracted for the first special symbol in a "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "latent probability fluctuation state," or when a miss or minor win is extracted for the second special symbol in a "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state," the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when a jackpot is won and there are many reserved balls, the system may be configured to select a stop pattern table 202d that is more likely to select a relatively short fluctuation pattern.

In this case, for example, the system is configured to select a performance mode in which, for each performance mode in which the "reach display" is executed, only the duration of the "high-speed variation" variation element is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds. With this configuration, for example, if the variation performance starts with a maximum of 4 reserved balls for the first special symbol, even if the "high-speed variation" variation element is performed for 5 seconds, the "reach display" may occur in that variation performance at the point when the 5-second "high-speed variation" variation element ends (the point when it is recognized as a 5-second "high-speed variation" variation element). Therefore, even if the 5-second "high-speed variation" variation element is performed, by configuring the system to execute a performance mode in which a "reach display" is executed other than the "non-reach (short)" performance mode, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variation performance will result in a jackpot or a loss at the point when the 5-second "high-speed variation" variation element is executed.

Furthermore, in the special symbol 2 reserve count table 202c2, when a miss or minor win occurs on the 100th spin of the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," that is, when the winning streak state ends and the game transitions to the "normal game state," the stop pattern table 202d for the dynamic display of the special symbol (specific state) may be individually set and configured so that the variation time is a fixed period (for example, "20 seconds") regardless of the number of reserved balls. By configuring it in this way, while executing a winning streak termination animation (for example, the first animation) to inform the player that the winning streak state has ended, the number of big wins (so-called winning streak count) and the number of balls won during the winning streak state (from the big win in the "normal game state" to the dynamic display in question) can be informed to the player, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the reserve count table 202c2 for special figure 2, when a miss or minor win is extracted during the 1st to 4th spins of the "normal game state," that is, when the dynamic display of the special symbol that will result in a miss or minor win on the 100th spin in the "normal high probability time shortened state" (for example, the first game state) ends, and the continuous win state ends and the game transitions to the "normal game state" (for example, the second game state), the stop pattern table 202d of the dynamic display (for example, specific conditions) that may remain as reserved balls for the second special symbol may be individually set and configured so that the variation time is a fixed amount of time (for example, "0.5 seconds") regardless of the number of reserved balls. By configuring it in this way, the timing of the end of the winning streak ending sequence, which is executed when a miss or minor win is selected on the 100th spin in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," can be extended from the end of the dynamic display indicating a miss or minor win on the 100th spin in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" (e.g., the first hour) to the end of the final dynamic display of the remaining second special symbol balls at the end of the dynamic display indicating a miss or minor win on the 100th spin in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" (e.g., the second hour). This allows for a maximum of 5 spins of dynamic display to be shown as a single winning streak ending sequence, thereby increasing the expectation of winning a jackpot in this sequence.

Furthermore, in the special symbol 2 reserve count table 202c2, regardless of the lottery result (miss, minor win, or big win) and the number of reserved balls in the "probability variation state," the variation time may be set to a fixed period of time (for example, "0.5 seconds"). By configuring it in this way, the time from a big win game that transitions to the "probability variation state" to the next big win can be made extremely short, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 can make the time from a big win game that transitions to the "probability variation state" to the next big win game appear as a single big win game. In this case, during the "probability variation state" after the big win state ends, the text message "Waiting for a big win" is continuously displayed, the dynamic display of special symbols is performed only on the mini-reel display, and the system is configured to switch back to the big win animation when a big win is achieved and the next big win state begins. In other words, the jackpot waiting sequence is a sequence executed based on the execution of the first or second special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state," and the jackpot sequence is a sequence of events in the jackpot state derived from the execution of the dynamic display indicating a jackpot for the first or second special symbol.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to Figures 13 and 14. Figure 13(a) schematically shows an example of Table A 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d; Figure 13(b) schematically shows an example of Table B 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d; and Figure 13(c) schematically shows an example of Table C 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. Furthermore, Figure 14(a) schematically shows an example of Table D 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d; Figure 14(b) schematically shows an example of Table E 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d; and Figure 14(c) schematically shows an example of Table F 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in Figure 13(a), in Table A 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" performance type is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" performance type is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" performance type is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" performance type is set to "98" and "99".

Furthermore, in Table A 202d1, no value is assigned to the stop pattern selection counter C3 for the "non-reach (medium)" and "non-reach (short)" presentation patterns, and it is set so that neither the "non-reach (medium)" nor the "non-reach (short)" presentation patterns are selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 13(b), in Table B 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" performance mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" performance mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" performance mode is set to "98, 99".

Furthermore, in Table B 202d2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned a value to either the "non-reach (long)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation patterns, and is therefore set so that neither the "non-reach (long)" nor the "non-reach (short)" presentation patterns are selected.

Specifically, in Table A 202d1, the selection ratios are set as follows: "Non-reach (long)" presentation type 75%, "Normal reach" presentation type 20%, "Super reach" presentation type 3%, and "Special reach" presentation type 2%. Similarly, in Table B 202d2, the selection ratios are set as follows: "Non-reach (medium)" presentation type 75%, "Normal reach" presentation type 20%, "Super reach" presentation type 3%, and "Special reach" presentation type 2%.

In other words, in Table A 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected, while in Table B 202d2, the "non-reach (medium)" presentation mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode. On the other hand, in both Table A 202d1 and Table B 202d2, each "reach display" is selected at the same rate.

Therefore, since Table A 202d1 and Table B 202d2 are selected so that the long or medium animation pattern differs only in the "non-reach" animation pattern, it can be said that Table A 202d1 tends to have a relatively longer animation duration compared to Table B 202d2. In other words, it can be said that Table B 202d2 tends to have a shorter animation duration compared to Table A 202d1.

Thus, in the "normal gameplay state" where left-handed play is encouraged, when a losing result is drawn, the system is configured to select the type of variation animation based on the number of reserved balls in the current variation animation. For example, if there are many reserved balls in the variation animation, the "non-reach (medium)" variation animation, which has a relatively short duration, is selected. This shortens the execution time of the variation animation when there are many reserved balls in the variation animation, and increases the number of times the variation animation is executed, thereby improving the execution efficiency of the variation animation.

Furthermore, for example, if the number of reserved balls in the variation animation is small, the "non-reach (long)" animation mode, which has a longer variation animation duration than the "non-reach (medium)" animation mode, is selected to ensure sufficient time for balls to enter the first start port 64 (upper second start port 71 or lower second start port 71a). This allows for the execution of the "non-reach (long)" animation mode, which has a longer variation animation duration than the "non-reach (medium)" animation mode, making it easier to ensure sufficient time for balls to enter the first start port 64. This increases the likelihood of new ball entry occurring during the execution time of the variation animation on the third symbol display device 81, thereby maintaining the state in which the variation animation is being executed.

In the first embodiment, the selection of the animation pattern for a losing spin is configured such that the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of balls held for the spin animation differs. However, the configuration ensures that substantially the same animation pattern is selected for the determination of the spin animation based on the entry of a ball into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, and for the determination of the spin animation based on the start of the spin animation based on the entry of the ball.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a losing variation animation, either Table A 202d1 or Table B 202d2 is selected based on the number of balls held during the variation animation. However, the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3, which is assigned to the "non-reach (long)" animation pattern, "non-reach (medium)" animation pattern, "normal reach" animation pattern, "super reach" animation pattern, or "special reach" animation pattern, are set to be the same in both Table A 202d1 and Table B 202d2.

In other words, based on the number of reserved balls in the variation animation, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" or "non-reach (medium)" animation is selected in the "non-reach" animation mode. The only difference is the duration of the variation elements in "high-speed variation," but essentially the same animation mode is selected. Therefore, the animation mode selected at the start of play and the animation mode selected at the start of variation are essentially the same (same type) animation mode, even if the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). As a result, even if a pre-announcement such as a "reserved ball change announcement" is made based on the animation mode selected at the start of play, the content of the variation animation executed will be essentially the same (same type), and the variation animation targeted by the pre-announcement will execute an animation that does not cause any discrepancy with the content of the pre-announcement.

Furthermore, as a pre-announcement effect, the system may be configured to perform a so-called pre-announcement continuous effect (e.g., a first effect) that continues across multiple dynamic displays (variation effects) (e.g., a period setting means). In this case, for example, in a "normal game state" where it is difficult for a ball to enter the upper second start opening 71 (e.g., a second condition) than for a ball to enter the first start opening 64 (e.g., a first condition), the system is configured to prioritize the variation effect of the second special symbol over the variation effect of the first special symbol (a so-called special symbol 2 priority variation), and multiple start entries that can generate a dynamic display of the first special symbol (e.g., the first condition is met) are acquired and their values are stored in the first reserved ball counter 203a (e.g., a first calculation means), so the system is configured to perform the above-mentioned pre-announcement continuous effect in response to the multiple dynamic displays of the first special symbols. Here, in a situation where a pre-announcement continuous performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being performed, that is, before the execution time of the pre-announcement continuous performance has elapsed, if a starting win (for example, the second condition is met) occurs that can generate the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation performance of the first special symbol. Therefore, the ongoing pre-announcement continuous performance is terminated (for example, by a performance termination means), and the variation performance of the second special symbol (for example, the second performance) indicating whether the game state may change depending on whether or not a jackpot is won is executed. By configuring it in this way, for example, if a game specification is set such that a jackpot is confirmed when the pre-announcement continuous performance is performed a predetermined number of times, executing the pre-announcement continuous performance even in the variation performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol that was won midway through prevents inconsistencies in the game specification, such as a jackpot being confirmed when the pre-announcement continuous announcement continues for a predetermined number of times or more. This prevents inconsistencies in the performance content, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Next, as shown in Figure 13(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "4", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "40" to "99".

Furthermore, Table C 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected during a jackpot, and since a "reach" display is always generated, the "non-reach" presentation pattern is not selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 14(a), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "non-reach (short)" performance mode ("0" to "99"), while the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" performance mode, the "non-reach (medium)" performance mode, and each "reach display" performance mode. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," "normal high probability time reduction state," or "latent probability fluctuation state," the stop type of the dynamic display indicating a miss or minor win for the first special symbol is always set to the "non-reach (short)" performance mode. Also, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," the stop type of the dynamic display indicating a miss or minor win for the second special symbol is always set to the "non-reach (short)" performance mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 14(b), in Table E 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "normal reach" presentation pattern ("0" to "99"), while the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are not assigned to the "non-reach" presentation patterns, the "super reach" presentation patterns, and the "special reach" presentation patterns. Therefore, the stop type of the dynamic display indicating a miss or minor win for the second special symbol in "normal gameplay" is always set to be the "normal reach" presentation pattern.

By configuring the system in this way, the dynamic display time of the second special symbol in "normal gameplay" can be made to run for a longer period than the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Furthermore, by triggering a minor win in the dynamic display of the first special symbol while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is running, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be stopped as a losing symbol. This reduces the efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol when a ball enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, which triggers the dynamic display of special symbols that are not recommended for gameplay. As a result, players can be discouraged from triggering the dynamic display of special symbols that are not recommended, thereby preventing gameplay that deviates from the intended gameplay specifications and reducing losses for the arcade.

On the other hand, even if a minor win occurs during the dynamic display of the second special symbol while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is running, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not stopped (canceled) based on the minor win of the second special symbol. This is because, for example, in "normal gameplay," if a relatively long animation (e.g., a "special reach" animation for a big win) is running during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol may be triggered by accidentally playing with the right-hand side. In this case, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol were interrupted by a minor win being determined during the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the big win would not be awarded despite the player having won, potentially causing significant losses to the player. Therefore, even if a minor win is determined during the dynamic display of the second special symbol, continuing the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol prevents unforeseen disadvantages to the player.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to stop (cancel, interrupt) the display of the other special symbol when a minor win is determined in the dynamic display of either special symbol. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stopped (cancel, interrupt) when a minor win is determined in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (cancel, interrupt) when a minor win is determined in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Next, as shown in Figure 14(c), in the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" performance mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" performance mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" performance mode is set to "98, 99".

Furthermore, in F-table 202d6, no value is assigned to the stop pattern selection counter C3 for the "non-reach (long)" and "non-reach (medium)" performance modes, and it is set so that neither the "non-reach (long)" nor the "non-reach (medium)" performance mode is selected.

Therefore, as shown in Table C 202d3, in the variation animations upon winning a jackpot, the selection rate is higher in the order of "Special Reach" > "Super Reach" > "Normal Reach," and as shown in Tables A 202d1, B 202d2, and F 202d6, in the variation animations upon losing, the selection rate is higher in the order of "Normal Reach" > "Super Reach" > "Special Reach." Consequently, the probability of winning a jackpot when each "Reach Display" appears is configured such that the probability of a jackpot display appearing increases in the order of "Special Reach" > "Super Reach" > "Normal Reach." This allows the player to be shown the level of expectation for a jackpot through the variation animation's presentation style, and the player can experience the excitement of a jackpot depending on the variation animation style that is performed.

Based on the above, by determining the type of special symbol, the success or failure of the variation animation, the game state at that time, and the number of balls held for the variation animation at that time, it is possible to select an animation mode that shortens the execution time of the variation animation and increases the number of executions based on the game situation, thereby improving the efficiency of the variation animation execution.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls in a variation animation is large (for example, "4"), and a "reach display" is selected, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the "high-speed variation" animation element of each "reach display" is shortened. Alternatively, the system may be configured to select the animation mode based on the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls in a variation animation is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the "low-speed variation" animation element is omitted for each animation mode. Additionally, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each animation mode differs completely depending on the number of reserved balls in the variation animation. However, if the selection rate of each animation mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variation animation, when performing pre-announcements such as "reserved ball change announcements," the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding to execute the pre-announcement may differ from the number of reserved balls at the time of execution of the variation animation that is the target of the pre-announcement. In such cases, processing is required to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-announcement and the content of the variation animation, which complicates the process.

Returning to Figure 6, let's continue the explanation. The variable type counter CS1 is configured to increment by "1" sequentially within the range of "0 to 9", and then return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "9"). The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see Figure 30). Then, at the moment the ball enters the first starting port 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203, which is provided in correspondence with the first starting port 64, and is one of the first reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4 where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored. Furthermore, when a ball enters the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203, which is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a. This storage area is one of the second reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4, where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation time (rough variation pattern) of the variation effect. Specifically, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the detailed variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202, according to the effect selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, and also determine whether or not to execute a pre-announcement effect and the manner in which the pre-announcement effect is executed.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a general variation pattern for the variation effect and determines only the variation time. This configuration eliminates the need for the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform detailed control such as pre-announcement lottery necessary for executing the variation effect, thus reducing the processing load on the MPU 201 related to the variation effect. Furthermore, the main control unit 110 no longer needs to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, thus reducing the ROM capacity of the main control unit 110.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can determine the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in selecting the variation effect. Moreover, in a pachinko machine 10 where the game state changes constantly, it becomes possible to select or change the content of the variation effect in response to these changes, allowing for the execution of appropriate effects according to the game state.

Here, with reference to Figures 15 and 16, the details of the variable pattern tables 202e will be explained. This pachinko machine 10 provides the following variable pattern tables 202e: Variable pattern table 202e1 for special symbol 1 misses/minor wins (used when the first special symbol is a miss), Variable pattern table 202e2 for special symbol 1 jackpots (used when the first special symbol is a jackpot), Variable pattern table 202e3 for special symbol 2 misses/minor wins (used when the second special symbol is a miss), and Variable pattern table 202e4 for special symbol 2 jackpots (used when the second special symbol is a jackpot).

Figure 15(a) schematically shows an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for special feature 1 misses and minor wins stored in ROM 202, and Figure 15(b) schematically shows an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for special feature 1 jackpots stored in ROM 202. Furthermore, Figure 16(a) schematically shows an example of the variation pattern table 202e3 for special feature 2 misses and minor wins stored in ROM 202, and Figure 16(b) schematically shows an example of the variation pattern table 202e4 for special feature 2 jackpots stored in ROM 202. As shown in Figures 15 and 16, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, the presentation patterns for misses or minor wins are categorized into four types: "E0: Non-Reach Long" (referenced when the "Non-Reach (Long)" presentation pattern is determined), "E1: Non-Reach (Medium)" (referenced when the "Non-Reach (Short)" presentation pattern is determined), "E2: Non-Reach Short" (referenced when the "Non-Reach (Short)" presentation pattern is determined), "E3: Normal Reach" (referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation pattern is determined), "E4: Super Reach" (referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation pattern is determined), and "E5: Special Reach" (referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation pattern is determined).

Furthermore, the presentation patterns for big wins are categorized into three types: "E3: Normal Reach" (referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation pattern is determined), "E4: Super Reach" (referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation pattern is determined), and "E5: Special Reach" (referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation pattern is determined).

Furthermore, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of these divided groups.

In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area containing the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), i.e., if it is a loss or a minor win value, the reserve number table 202c1 for special symbol 1 is referenced, and a stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserve balls at that time. A performance mode is then selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected performance mode, a group to be referenced in the special symbol 1 loss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1 is determined. Within that group of special symbol 1 loss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area is determined as the variation pattern for the variation performance held in that reserve area.

In the special symbol 1 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol is a miss or a minor win, "E0: Non-reach/Long" has one variation pattern (variation time; hereafter, "variation pattern" can be replaced with "variation time") which consists of a "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + a "low-speed variation" variation element, with a total variation time of "15 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E0: Non-Reach Long" is set to "0-9" for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element, meaning that only the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element can be selected.

In other words, when the "Non-Reach (Long)" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol's animation is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the "High-Speed Animation (Long)" animation element plus the "Slow-Speed Animation" animation element. Therefore, in the case of the "Non-Reach (Long)" animation pattern for the first special symbol's animation, the animation pattern will always consist of the "High-Speed Animation (Long)" animation element plus the "Slow-Speed Animation" animation element.

Here, we will explain each of the variation elements that constitute the variation pattern. A variation element is a part of a variation animation, and a variation animation is constructed by combining these variation elements. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation elements include a "high-speed variation" element, a "low-speed variation" element, a "normal reach" element, a "super reach" element, a "special reach" element, and a "re-variation" element.

The "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is a fluctuation element that scrolls rapidly so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. This "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element occurs for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation animation when the "non-reach (long)" animation mode is selected (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"), for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation animation when the "non-reach (medium)" animation mode is selected (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (medium)"), and for "2 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation animation when the "non-reach (short)" animation mode is selected (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). When this "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element ends, the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element described later begins (executes), or the fluctuation animation ends immediately.

The "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element begins after the "10-second" "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element has been executed. It involves scrolling the third symbol to make it visible, indicating whether or not a "reach" display will occur. This "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element is not executed when the "non-reach (medium)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected. However, if the "non-reach (long)," "normal reach," "super reach," or "special reach" presentation mode is selected, it will occur for "5 seconds" after the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element.

In other words, in the "non-reach (medium)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation modes, after the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, each row of symbols on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop rapidly (a so-called "perfect stop") without going through the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element. Note that if this "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element ends, the fluctuation presentation may end immediately.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is composed of a variation pattern that includes a variation element of "10 seconds" of "high-speed variation" and a variation element of "5 seconds" of "low-speed variation". Furthermore, the "non-reach (medium)" performance mode is composed of a variation pattern that includes only a variation element of "5 seconds" of "high-speed variation". Additionally, the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is composed of a variation pattern that includes only a variation element of "2 seconds" of "high-speed variation".

The "Normal Reach" variation element is a variation element that, when the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "Reach Forming Symbol") stops in the two symbol rows that stop first in the "Slow Variation" variation element, indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variation result of the remaining symbol rows. This "Normal Reach" variation element occurs for "5 seconds" after the "Slow Variation" variation element when the "Normal Reach" performance mode is selected.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, after the execution of the "normal reach" variation element, there are several patterns available: one that directly displays a "miss," one that directly displays a "jackpot," one that develops into a "super reach" variation element, one that develops into a "special reach" variation element, and one that temporarily displays a "miss" before executing a "re-variation" variation element.

The "Super Reach" variation element is executed when the "Loss Display" does not stop during the "Normal Reach" variation element and the remaining symbol rows continue to change. The third symbol display device 81 then performs a predetermined animation (for example, a "Battle Animation") to indicate whether or not a jackpot occurs. This "Super Reach" variation element runs for 40 seconds after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variation element.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, after the execution of the "Super Reach" variation element, there are three patterns available: one that directly displays a "Loss" indicator, one that directly displays a "Big Win" indicator, and one that first displays a temporary "Loss" indicator before executing the "Re-Variation" variation element.

The "Special Reach" variation element is executed when the "Loss Display" does not stop during the "Normal Reach" variation element and the remaining symbol rows continue to change. The third symbol display device 81 then displays a special effect (for example, a "Competition Effect") different from the predetermined effect, indicating whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" variation element runs for "160 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variation element.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, after the execution of the "Special Reach" variation element, there are three patterns available: one that directly displays a "Loss" indicator, one that directly displays a "Big Win" indicator, and one that displays a temporary "Loss" indicator before "Re-variation."

Furthermore, while the system is configured to progress from the "Normal Reach" variation element to the "Super Reach" variation element or the "Special Reach" variation element after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variation element, this configuration may be changed to one where, if the reach-forming symbols stop after a "Slow Variation," the system directly progresses to the "Super Reach" variation element or the "Special Reach" variation element without going through the "Normal Reach" variation element. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the "Special Reach" variation element is performed after the execution of the "Super Reach" variation element.

The "re-variation" variation is a variation that develops and is executed after a "miss" display appears during any "reach" display, resulting in the appearance of a "jackpot" display. This "re-variation" variation occurs for "10 seconds" after any "reach" display.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, a pattern is provided in which a "jackpot display" appears after the execution of the "re-spin" variation element.

Furthermore, this "re-variation" variation element is configured to occur only when a jackpot is won. In other words, the "re-variation" variation element is not executed when a "miss" is displayed. This is because the "re-variation" variation element changes a currently displayed "miss" to one of the "jackpot" displays. If it were executed when a "miss" or "minor win" is displayed (meaning a jackpot hasn't been won), it would create a visual inconsistency. Therefore, this "re-variation" variation element is selected only in the jackpot variation pattern tables 202e2 and 202e4 (see Figures 15(b) and 16(b)), and is not selected in the miss/minor win variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e3 (see Figures 15(a) and 16(a)).

Next, in the special feature 1 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1, under "E1: Non-reach/Medium," one variation pattern is provided that consists only of the "High-speed variation (medium)" variation element, with an overall variation time of "5 seconds."

In the example shown in Figure 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E1: Non-Reach Medium" is set to "0-9" for "only the fluctuation elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Medium)'," indicating that only the fluctuation elements of "High-Speed Fluctuation (Medium)" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Non-Reach (Medium)" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol's animation is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with "only the 'High-Speed Animation (Medium)' animation elements." That is, in the case of the "Non-Reach (Medium)" animation pattern for the first special symbol's animation, only the "High-Speed Animation (Medium)" animation elements are always selected as the animation pattern.

Next, in the special feature 1 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1, under "E2: Non-reach/Short," one variation pattern is provided that consists only of the "high-speed variation (short)" variation element, with a total variation time of "2 seconds."

In the example shown in Figure 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E2: Non-Reach Short" is set to "0-9" for "only the fluctuation elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Short)'," indicating that only the fluctuation elements of "High-Speed Fluctuation (Short)" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Non-Reach (Short)" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol's animation is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with "only the 'High-Speed Animation (Short)' animation element." That is, in the case of the "Non-Reach (Short)" animation pattern for the first special symbol's animation, only the "High-Speed Animation (Short)" animation element is always selected as the animation pattern.

Next, in the special feature 1 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: Normal Reach" has one variation pattern prepared, consisting of a total variation time of "20 seconds" and comprising "high-speed variation (long) variation elements + low-speed variation elements + normal reach variation elements".

In the example shown in Figure 15(a), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E3: Normal Reach" is set to "0 to 9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach," and only the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" are selectable.

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e1, which is referenced when the Special Symbol 1 animation is executed, all possible values ("0 to 9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the "High-Speed Animation (Long)" animation element, the "Slow-Speed Animation" animation element, and the "Normal Reach" animation element. Therefore, in the case of the "Normal Reach" animation pattern for the Special Symbol 1 animation, the selected animation pattern will always consist of the "High-Speed Animation (Long)" animation element, the "Slow-Speed Animation" animation element, and the "Normal Reach" animation element.

Next, in the special feature 1 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Super Reach" has one variation pattern with a total variation time of "60 seconds," consisting of "high-speed variation (long) variation elements + low-speed variation elements + normal reach variation elements + super reach variation elements."

In the example shown in Figure 15(a), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E4: Super Reach" is set to "0 to 9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach," and only the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" are selectable.

In other words, when the "Super Reach" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e1, which is referenced when the Special Symbol 1 animation is executed, all possible values ("0 to 9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the following: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Super Reach' animation elements'. Therefore, in the case of the "Super Reach" animation pattern for the Special Symbol 1 animation, the following animation pattern is always selected: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Super Reach' animation elements'.

Next, in the special feature 1 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Special Reach" has one variation pattern with a total variation time of "180 seconds," consisting of "high-speed variation (long) variation elements + low-speed variation elements + normal reach variation elements + special reach variation elements."

In the example shown in Figure 15(a), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E5: Special Reach" is set to "0 to 9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach," and only the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" are selectable.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol animation is executed, all possible values ("0 to 9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the following: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow-Speed Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Special Reach' animation elements'. Therefore, in the case of the "Special Reach" animation pattern for the first special symbol animation, the following animation pattern is always selected: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow-Speed Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Special Reach' animation elements'.

Furthermore, the variation pattern for a miss or minor win with the first special symbol is determined directly by the presentation mode, so it may be configured to determine the variation pattern without using the variation type counter CS1. Also, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, it is also possible to use multiple variation type counters in combination (to select whether or not to display a preview, etc.).

Next, referring to Figure 15(b), we will explain the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when a jackpot is hit with the first special symbol. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area containing the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that results in a jackpot, the special symbol 1 reserve number table 202c1 is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the number of reserve balls at that time, and the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected performance mode, the group (cluster) to be referenced in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined. In that group (cluster) of the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in that reserve area.

In the special feature 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E3: Normal Reach" offers two selectable variation patterns: one with a total variation time of "20 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements, and another with a total variation time of "30 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 15(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E3: Normal Reach" is as follows: "0 to 2" for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal Reach" fluctuation element, and "3 to 9" for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal Reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element.

Specifically, in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, if the "normal reach" effect is selected, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements is selected 30% of the time, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements" is selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Normal Reach" presentation mode selected during a jackpot in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" element + "low-speed variation" element + "Normal Reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" is more likely to be selected (70% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the game so that the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" element + "low-speed variation" element + "Normal Reach" variation element" is also selected, the game offers a play experience where a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special feature 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, two variation patterns are available for "E4: Super Reach": one with a total variation time of "60 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "super reach" variation elements, and another with a total variation time of "70 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "super reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements." The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 15(b), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E4: Super Reach" is as follows: "0-3" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Low-Speed Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach"; and "4-9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Low-Speed Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-Variation".

Specifically, in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, if the "Super Reach" effect is selected, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "super reach" variation elements is selected 40% of the time, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "super reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements" is selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected during a jackpot in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" is more likely to be selected (60% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the game so that the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element is also selected, the game offers a play experience where a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special feature 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, two variation patterns are available for "E5: Special Reach": one with a total variation time of "180 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements, and another with a total variation time of "190 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements." The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 15(b), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E5: Special Reach" is as follows: "0-4" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach"; and "5-9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" + "Re-Variation".

In other words, when the special symbol variation pattern table 202e2 for the special symbol 1 jackpot, which is referenced during the execution of the variation effect for the first special symbol, is selected, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements" is selected 50% of the time, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements" is selected 50% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when the first special symbol jackpot is hit, the following two patterns are selected equally (50% each): the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements + "low-speed variation" elements + "normal reach" elements + "special reach" elements, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements + "low-speed variation" elements + "normal reach" elements + "super reach" elements + "re-variation" elements. As a result, the game offers a gameplay experience where players can equally expect a jackpot regardless of the variation pattern.

Next, referring to Figure 16(a), we will explain the variable pattern table 202e3 for special symbol 2 misses and minor wins, which is referenced when the second special symbol is a miss or a minor win. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area containing the second reserve ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), that is, if it is a miss or a minor win value, the reserve number table 202c2 for special symbol 2 is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the number of reserve balls at that time, and the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected performance mode, the group (group) to be referenced in the variable pattern table 202e3 for special symbol 2 misses and minor wins is determined. In the group (cluster) of the special feature 2 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserve area is determined as the variation pattern for the variation effect held in that reserve area.

In the special symbol 2 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e3, which is referenced when the second special symbol is a miss or a minor win, "E0: Non-reach/Long" has one variation pattern (variation time; hereafter, "variation pattern" can be replaced with "variation time") which consists of a "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + a "low-speed variation" variation element, with a total variation time of "15 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E0: Non-Reach Long" is set to "0-9" for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element, meaning that only the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element can be selected.

In other words, when the "Non-Reach (Long)" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 2 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e3, which is referenced when the second special symbol animation is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the "High-Speed Animation (Long)" animation element plus the "Slow-Speed Animation" animation element. Therefore, in the case of the "Non-Reach (Long)" animation pattern for the second special symbol animation, the animation pattern will always consist of the "High-Speed Animation (Long)" animation element plus the "Slow-Speed Animation" animation element.

Furthermore, in the Special Feature 2 Miss/Minor Win Variation Pattern Table 202e3, "E1: Non-Reach/Middle" cannot be selected as a performance pattern, and therefore is not included in the Special Feature 2 Miss/Minor Win Variation Pattern Table 202e3, and no value is assigned to the Variation Type Counter CS1.

Next, in the special feature 2 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e3, "E2: Non-reach/Short" has one variation pattern prepared, consisting only of the "high-speed variation (short)" variation element, with a total variation time of "2 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E2: Non-Reach Short" is set to "0-9" for "only the fluctuation elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Short)'," indicating that only the fluctuation elements of "'High-Speed Fluctuation (Short)'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Non-Reach (Short)" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 2 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e3, which is referenced when the second special symbol animation is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with "only the 'High-Speed Animation (Short)' animation element." Therefore, in the case of the "Non-Reach (Short)" animation pattern for the second special symbol animation, only the "High-Speed Animation (Short)" animation element is always selected as the animation pattern.

Next, in the special feature 2 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e3, "E3: Normal Reach" has one variation pattern with a total variation time of "20 seconds," consisting of "high-speed variation (long) variation elements + low-speed variation elements + normal reach variation elements."

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E3: Normal Reach" is set to "0 to 9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach," and only the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" are selectable.

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 2 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e3, which is referenced when the second special symbol animation is executed, all possible values ("0 to 9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the "High-Speed (Long)" animation element, the "Slow-Speed" animation element, and the "Normal Reach" animation element. Therefore, in the case of the "Normal Reach" animation pattern for the second special symbol animation, the selected animation pattern will always consist of the "High-Speed (Long)" animation element, the "Slow-Speed" animation element, and the "Normal Reach" animation element.

Next, in the special feature 2 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e3, "E4: Super Reach" has one variation pattern with a total variation time of "60 seconds," consisting of "high-speed variation (long) variation elements + low-speed variation elements + normal reach variation elements + super reach variation elements."

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E4: Super Reach" is set to "0 to 9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach," and only the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" are selectable.

In other words, when the "Super Reach" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 2 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e3, which is referenced when the second special symbol animation is executed, all possible values ("0 to 9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the following: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow-Speed Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Super Reach' animation elements'. Therefore, in the case of the "Super Reach" animation pattern for the second special symbol animation, the following animation pattern is always selected: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow-Speed Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Super Reach' animation elements'.

Next, in the special feature 2 miss/minor win variation pattern table 202e3, "E5: Special Reach" has one variation pattern with a total variation time of "180 seconds," consisting of "high-speed variation (long) variation elements + low-speed variation elements + normal reach variation elements + special reach variation elements."

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E5: Special Reach" is set to "0 to 9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach," and only the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" are selectable.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" animation pattern is selected in the Special Symbol 2 Miss/Minor Win Animation Pattern Table 202e3, which is referenced when the second special symbol animation is executed, all possible values ("0 to 9") of the animation type counter CS1 are associated with the following: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow-Speed Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Special Reach' animation elements'. Therefore, in the case of the "Special Reach (Medium)" animation pattern for the second special symbol animation, the following animation pattern is always selected: 'High-Speed Animation (Long)' animation elements + 'Slow-Speed Animation' animation elements + 'Normal Reach' animation elements + 'Special Reach' animation elements'.

Next, referring to Figure 16(b), we will explain the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, which is referenced when a jackpot is hit with the second special symbol. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area containing the second reserve ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that results in a jackpot, the special symbol 2 reserve number table 202c2 is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the number of reserve balls at that time. Then, the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above stop pattern table 202d. Based on the selected performance mode, the group (cluster) to be referenced in the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 is determined. In that group (cluster) of the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in that reserve area.

In the special feature 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E3: Normal Reach" offers two selectable variation patterns: one with a total variation time of "20 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements, "low-speed variation" elements, and "normal reach" elements; and another with a total variation time of "30 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements, "low-speed variation" elements, "normal reach" elements, and "re-variation" elements. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E3: Normal Reach" is as follows: "0 to 2" for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal Reach" fluctuation element, and "3 to 9" for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal Reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element.

Specifically, in the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, which is referenced when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, if the "normal reach" effect is selected, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements is selected 30% of the time, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements" is selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Normal Reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol jackpot is hit, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long) element + low-speed variation element + normal reach variation element + re-variation variation element" is more likely to be selected (70% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the game so that the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long) element + low-speed variation element + normal reach variation element" is also selected, the game offers a play experience where a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special feature 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E4: Super Reach" offers two selectable variation patterns: one with a total variation time of "60 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements, "low-speed variation" elements, "normal reach" elements, and "super reach" elements; and another with a total variation time of "70 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements, "low-speed variation" elements, "normal reach" elements, "super reach" elements, and "re-variation" elements. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E4: Super Reach" is as follows: "0-3" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Low-Speed Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach"; and "4-9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Low-Speed Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-Variation".

Specifically, in the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, which is referenced when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, if the "Super Reach" effect is selected, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "super reach" variation elements is selected 40% of the time, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "super reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements" is selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol jackpot is hit, the following variation pattern is more likely to be selected (60% of the time): "High-speed variation (long)" variation element + "Slow variation" variation element + "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element. Furthermore, by configuring the game so that the variation pattern "High-speed variation (long)" variation element + "Slow variation" variation element + "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element" is also selected, the game offers a gameplay experience where a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special feature 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, two variation patterns are available for "E5: Special Reach": one with a total variation time of "180 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements, and another with a total variation time of "190 seconds" consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements." The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in "E5: Special Reach" is as follows: "0-4" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach"; and "5-9" for the variation elements of "High-Speed Variation (Long)" + "Slow Variation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" + "Re-Variation".

In other words, when the special symbol variation pattern table 202e4 for the special symbol 2 jackpot, which is referenced when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, is set so that when the "Special Reach" effect is selected, the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements" is selected 50% of the time, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" variation elements + "low-speed variation" variation elements + "normal reach" variation elements + "special reach" variation elements + "re-variation" variation elements" is selected 50% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol jackpot is hit, the following two patterns are selected equally (50% each): the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements + "low-speed variation" elements + "normal reach" elements + "special reach" elements, and the variation pattern consisting of "high-speed variation (long)" elements + "low-speed variation" elements + "normal reach" elements + "super reach" elements + "re-variation" elements. As a result, the game offers a gameplay experience where players can expect a jackpot equally well regardless of the variation pattern.

Here, referring to Figures 17 to 21, we will explain the relationship between the ball entry patterns into the through gate 67, the first starting opening 64, the upper second starting opening 71, or the lower second starting opening 71a in each game state, the progress of the variable display of the normal symbols, the progress of the variable display (dynamic display; the same applies hereinafter) of the first special symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special symbol 1") and the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special symbol 2"), and the driving patterns of the normal electric motor 72 and the variable prize-winning device 65. Furthermore, Figures 18 and 19 will explain the case where the ceiling is reached in the variable display of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 in the "normal game state".

Figure 17 is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the timing of ball detection at the through gate 67, the first start opening 64, the upper second start opening 71, or the lower second start opening 71a during left-handed play in "normal game state," the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of special symbol 1, and the variable display of special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the normal electric motor 72 or the variable prize winning device 65. Figure 18 is a timing chart for when the ceiling is reached by the variable display of special symbol 1 in "normal game state" and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Furthermore, Figure 19 is a timing chart for when the ceiling is reached by the variable display of special symbol 2 in "normal game state" and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Furthermore, Figure 20 is a schematic timing chart illustrating the relationship between the ball detection timing at the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of special symbol 1, and the variable display of special symbol 2, and the drive timing of the normal electric motor 72 or the variable prize winning device 65 during right-handed play in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state." Furthermore, Figure 21 is a schematic timing chart illustrating the relationship between the ball detection timing at the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of special symbol 1, and the variable display of special symbol 2, and the drive timing of the normal electric motor 72 or the variable prize winning device 65 during right-handed play in the "latent probability fluctuation state."

Furthermore, in the "Normal Play State," right-handed play is not encouraged (not recommended, prohibited), and since right-handed play in this state is practically difficult, the explanation regarding right-handed play in this state will be omitted. Also, in the "Probability Fluctuation State," "Normal High Probability Time Shortened State," "Latent Probability Fluctuation State," or "Normal Low Probability Time Shortened State," left-handed play is not encouraged (the game is designed in such a way that it is difficult for players to gain value from playing left-handed), and since left-handed play in these states is not encouraged as part of the game's specifications, the explanation regarding left-handed play in these states will be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 17, when a ball is launched in left-handed play during "normal gameplay," the ball is not detected in the through gate 67, which can only be passed through in right-handed play. As a result, the variable display of the normal symbols is not performed, and therefore the normal electric solenoid, which is opened based on the variable display result of the normal symbols, is not driven. Furthermore, when a ball is launched in left-handed play during "normal gameplay," the upper second start port 71 and the lower second start port 71a, which can only be passed through in right-handed play, are configured so that the ball is not detected.

On the other hand, in "normal gameplay," balls launched by left-handed play may enter the first starting port 64. Based on the ball entering the first starting port 64, the special symbol 1 is displayed in a variable form. This variable form of the special symbol 1 is displayed in a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 190 seconds, and is configured to produce one of the following results: a big win, a small win, or a loss.

Furthermore, if a losing outcome is determined during the variation display of Special Symbol 1, the variable prize entry device 65 does not open. Also, if a minor win is determined, the variable prize entry device 65 opens, but the opening time is very short ("0.1 seconds") (see Figure 23). Therefore, even if the player performs a right-handed shot when a minor win is achieved, the ball launched by the right-handed shot flows down the right side of the game board and reaches the variable prize entry device 65, which is closed by the time it reaches it. Thus, the machine is configured to make it difficult to enter the variable prize entry device 65. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a minor win is achieved during the variation display of Special Symbol 1, the right-handed shot notification lamp 37c of the Special Symbol Display Device 37 is de-lit, and the main display right-handed shot instruction 89 is also hidden. As mentioned above, a minor win during the variation display of Special Symbol 1 serves to stop the variation display of Special Symbol 2, which is being executed in the "normal game state."

Therefore, in "normal gameplay," a minor win with special symbol 1 is considered equivalent to a loss by the player. Consequently, when this minor win occurs, right-hand play is not performed; instead, left-hand play continues.

On the other hand, in the display of the special symbol 1, if a jackpot is won, the large prize slot solenoid 65b (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "large prize slot opening/closing solenoid") is turned on a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 or 10 rounds; a maximum of 30 seconds per round; an interval of 1 second; an opening time of 30 seconds; an ending time of 10 seconds), and the variable prize slot 65 is opened. At this time, the player is prompted to change their shooting method from left-handed to right-handed, allowing them to enter the opened variable prize slot 65 and win a large number of prize balls. Furthermore, in the jackpot ending, the system may be configured to execute a consecutive win count notification effect (a predetermined effect) that displays the total number of prize balls won by the player from the transition from "normal game state" to jackpot game state and then back to "normal game state".

Furthermore, in the "normal gameplay state," if a ball enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a and the special symbol 2 is displayed, the display of the special symbol 2 that results in a loss is uniformly configured to select a "normal reach" presentation mode of "20 seconds," and the display of the special symbol 1's "non-reach" presentation mode is configured to be executed for a maximum of "15 seconds." In addition, approximately half of the display of the special symbol 1 can result in a minor win (see Figure 7), and when the special symbol 1 wins a minor win, the display of the special symbol 2 that is currently being displayed stops as a losing symbol. By configuring the machine in this way, when a ball enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, which triggers the display of special symbols that are not recommended as part of the game's specifications, the efficiency of the display of special symbol 2 is reduced, thereby decreasing the efficiency of granting game value and prioritizing the granting of game value based on a jackpot display of special symbol 1.

Next, referring to Figure 18, we will explain the case where, in the "normal game state," the ceiling is reached by the fluctuation display of the special symbol 1, and the machine transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability of winning with the special symbol is in a low probability state, and the player fails to win a jackpot for a predetermined number of consecutive times (900 times in the first embodiment) in the dynamic display, that is, when either a miss or a minor win appears for a predetermined number of consecutive times in the dynamic display, as a relief measure for the player, the machine is configured to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," where, although the probability of winning with the special symbol and the probability of winning with the normal symbol remain in a low probability state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is lengthened.

As shown in Figure 18, the fluctuation displays at the "899th spin" and "900th spin" in the low probability state of the special symbol are executed by the fluctuation display of special symbol 1, and the ceiling is reached simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation display at the "900th spin," and the machine transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state," the fluctuation performance corresponding to the fluctuation display of special symbol 1 is executed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 18, the special symbol 1 variation animation is executed on the third symbol display device 81 at the "899th rotation" and "900th rotation." Simultaneously with the end of the "900th rotation," the ceiling is reached, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." To this end, the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the animation shooting instruction (main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and animation right-hand shooting instruction 81d; see Figure 57(d)) are displayed to suggest to the player that they should play by shooting to the right.

When this indication signal initiates right-handed play, the ball is first detected in a through gate 67, which is positioned so that almost all balls launched during right-handed play can pass through it. Then, based on the ball's passage through the through gate 67, a variable display of the normal symbols is executed. This variable display of the normal symbols is in a "low probability normal symbol time reduction state," and is executed in a uniform "0.1 seconds," similar to the "probability fluctuation state" and the "high probability normal symbol time reduction state," and is configured to produce either a win or a loss result. In this "low probability normal symbol time reduction state," although the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbols is in a low probability state, it is configured to win with a certain probability (i.e., "70%)." Furthermore, when a win is achieved, the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is "5.8 seconds," and it is configured to open once. Therefore, when the normal electric motor 72 opens, many of the balls launched during right-handed play can enter the lower second start opening 71a, which is located on the lower side of the normal electric motor 72 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, balls launched during right-handed play can also enter the upper second starting opening 71, which is always open directly above the ball's front view. Note that when a ball is launched during right-handed play, it is configured so that it is not detected in the first starting opening 64, which is only accessible during left-handed play.

Furthermore, in the "normal low probability time reduction state" during right-hand play, based on the entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable state. This variable state of special symbol 2 is executed in a minimum of "2 seconds" and a maximum of "190 seconds," and is configured to produce one of the following results: a big win, a small win, or a loss.

Furthermore, if a losing outcome is determined during the display of special symbol 2, the variable prize device 65 will not open. Also, if a minor win is determined during the display of special symbol 2, the large prize slot solenoid 65b will be turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum 1.5 seconds), and the variable prize device 65 will open.

As described above, the variable prize winning device 65 is located downstream of the normal electric payout device 72 in the direction of flow, and in the "normal low probability time reduction state," the normal electric payout device 72 is configured to open for "5.8 seconds" with a certain probability. Furthermore, it is configured to take approximately "2 seconds" for the ball to roll from the right end to the left end of the retractable plate 72a of the normal electric payout device 72. For this reason, while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the retractable plate 72a during the closed time of the normal electric payout device 72, the retractable plate 72a is likely to open, and many of the balls launched in right-handed play will enter the normal electric payout device 72, making it difficult for the ball to reach the variable prize winning device 65 located downstream of the normal electric payout device 72. Therefore, in the "normal low probability time reduction state," when a minor win occurs during the variation display of special symbol 2, even if the variable prize entry device 65 is opened due to the minor win, it becomes difficult to enter the variable prize entry device 65, and the prize balls awarded based on entry into the variable prize entry device 65 become difficult to obtain.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won during the variation display of special symbol 2, the jackpot game is activated, and the large prize slot solenoid 65b is turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 or 10 rounds; a maximum of 30 seconds per round; an interval of 1 second; an opening time and an ending time of 10 seconds). The variable prize device 65 is then opened. At this time, since the probability of winning and the variation time of the regular symbols are the same as in the "normal game state," the closed state of the regular electric motor 72 is extended. As a result, the ball launched during right-hand play can roll all the way from the right end to the left end of the upper surface of the retractable plate 72a and enter the open variable prize device 65. Therefore, a large number of prize balls can be won.

Next, referring to Figure 19, we will explain the case where, in the "normal game state," the ceiling is reached by the variation display of Special Symbol 2, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." As shown in Figure 19, after the variation display of Special Symbol 1 at the "899th rotation" is executed, a variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode is executed for "60 seconds." Then, while the variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode of Special Symbol 1 is being executed, the player makes an error in operating the operation handle 51 for launching the ball, and the ball is launched into the right-hand play area, and the ball launched in this right-hand play enters the upper second start opening 71. Then, based on the ball entering the upper second start opening 71, the variation display of Special Symbol 2 is executed, and this variation display of Special Symbol 2 is executed for a uniform "20 seconds" in the case of a miss or a minor win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during the "normal gameplay state," the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a variation performance corresponding to the variation display of special symbol 1. For this reason, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation performance of the "super reach" performance mode for special symbol 1, and the variation display of special symbol 2 that is started while the variation display of the "super reach" performance mode for special symbol 1 is being executed is executed only in the variation area 88b for special symbol 2 and the special symbol 2 mini-reel display (see the variation area 88b for special symbol 2 and the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b in Figure 57(c)). Furthermore, while the 20-second variation display of Special Symbol 2 is running, the variation display of Special Symbol 1 is running in the 60-second "Super Reach" mode. Therefore, the 20-second variation display of Special Symbol 2 finishes first, and although the variation display of Special Symbol 1 initially showed the variation for the 900th spin, the 20-second variation display of Special Symbol 2 then shows the variation for the 900th spin.

Then, simultaneously with the end of the "20-second" variation display for special symbol 2, the ceiling is reached, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." In other words, during the execution of the variation animation of the "super reach" animation mode for special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81, the game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state."

In the case of conventional pachinko machines, where the display control of the variable animation is handled by the third symbol display device 81, the machine transitions to a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" during the execution of the variable animation of the "super reach" animation of special symbol 1. Therefore, the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the animation shooting instruction are displayed during the execution of the "super reach" animation. When such an animation is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player, in the "normal game state," may become excited by the variable animation of the "super reach" animation, which has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot, when a display suggesting right-hand shooting suddenly appears, potentially dampening the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if a display suggesting right-hand shooting appears during the execution of a variable animation of the first special symbol, which has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot and was initiated by left-hand shooting, the player may become confused and hesitant about whether or not to start right-hand shooting.

Therefore, in the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, in order to suppress such loss of interest among players and avoid confusion regarding the gameplay method, if the game state changes while a variation animation is being displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the machine is configured to execute instructions for playing the animation after the variation animation has finished. This configuration allows players to maintain interest in the variation animation being played on the third symbol display device 81, and then, based on the instructions for playing the animation that are subsequently displayed, they can play the game appropriately. The method for controlling the display content of the variation animation on the third symbol display device 81 will be described in detail later in Figures 50 to 56. Furthermore, the timing chart after transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state" in Figure 19 is the same as the timing chart after transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state" in Figure 18, so its explanation is omitted.

In the example shown in Figure 19, the case where the ceiling is reached by the fluctuation display of Special Symbol 2 in the "normal game state" and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is explained. However, it is naturally possible to substitute the relationship between Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2 in the explanation in Figure 19.

Next, as shown in Figure 20, when a ball is launched during right-handed play in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the ball is first detected in a through gate 67, which is positioned so that almost all balls launched during right-handed play can pass through it. Then, based on the ball's passage through the through gate 67, a variable display of normal symbols is executed. This variable display of normal symbols is executed in a uniform "0.1 seconds" in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," and is configured to produce either a win or a loss result. In the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is high ("99%"), and furthermore, the opening time of the normal electric valve 72 in the event of a win is "5.8 seconds," and the number of openings is set to be 1. Therefore, when a ball is launched in right-handed play, the normal electric motor 72 opens, causing the ball to enter the lower second start port 71a, which is located below the normal electric motor 72 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, a ball launched in right-handed play can also enter the upper second start port 71, which is always open directly above it when viewed from the front. Note that when a ball is launched in right-handed play, the first start port 64, which can only receive balls in left-handed play, is not detected.

Furthermore, during right-hand play in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the special symbol 2 fluctuation display is executed based on the entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. This fluctuation display of special symbol 2 is executed in a minimum of "2 seconds" and a maximum of "190 seconds," and is configured to produce one of the following results: a big win, a small win, or a loss.

Furthermore, if a losing outcome is determined during the display of special symbol 2, the variable prize device 65 will not open. Also, if a minor win is determined during the display of special symbol 2, the large prize slot solenoid 65b will be turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum 1.5 seconds), and the variable prize device 65 will open.

As described above, the variable prize winning device 65 is located downstream of the normal electric motor 72 in the flow direction. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the normal electric motor 72 is configured to open for "5.8 seconds" at a certain probability. Therefore, when the normal electric motor 72 opens, balls launched during right-hand play enter the normal electric motor 72, making it difficult for them to reach the variable prize winning device 65 located downstream of the normal electric motor 72. For this reason, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," when a small win occurs due to a fluctuation in the special symbol 2 display, it becomes difficult to get the ball into the variable prize winning device 65, and thus difficult to obtain prize balls based on balls entering the variable prize winning device 65.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won during the variation display of special symbol 2, the jackpot game is activated by turning on the large prize slot solenoid 65b a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 or 10 rounds, with a maximum of 30 seconds per round, an interval of 1 second, and opening and ending times of 10 seconds). The variable prize slot 65 is then opened. At this time, the player is encouraged to continue playing with the right-hand side, allowing them to enter the open variable prize slot 65 and win a large number of prize balls.

Next, as shown in Figure 21, when a ball is launched during right-handed play in the "latent probability variation state," the ball is first detected in a through gate 67, which is positioned so that almost all balls launched during right-handed play can pass through it. Then, based on the ball's passage through the through gate 67, a variable display of the normal symbols is performed. This variable display of the normal symbols is performed uniformly for "15 seconds" in the "latent probability variation state," and is configured to produce either a win or a loss result. In the "latent probability variation state," the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbols is low ("70%"), and furthermore, the opening time of the normal electric valve 72 in the event of a win is "0.1 seconds," and the number of openings is set to be 1. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," the closing period of the normal electric motor 72 is extended, making it difficult for balls launched during right-handed play to enter the lower second start opening 71a, which becomes accessible when the normal electric motor 72 opens. While the normal electric motor 72 is closed, the balls roll across its top surface from right to left, allowing them to flow down towards the variable prize entry device 65 located on the left side of the normal electric motor 72 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, balls launched during right-handed play can enter the upper second start opening 71, which is always open directly above the ball when viewed from the front. Note that when a ball is launched during right-handed play, it is configured not to be detected in the first start opening 64, which can only be entered during left-handed play.

Furthermore, during right-hand play in the "latent probability fluctuation state," based on the ball entering the upper second start opening 71, the special symbol 2 fluctuation display is executed. This special symbol 2 fluctuation display is executed in a minimum of "2 seconds" and a maximum of "190 seconds," and is configured to produce one of the following results: a big win, a small win, or a loss.

Furthermore, if a losing outcome is determined during the display of special symbol 2, the variable prize device 65 will not open. Also, if a minor win is determined during the display of special symbol 2, the large prize slot solenoid 65b will be turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum 1.5 seconds), and the variable prize device 65 will open.

As described above, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," the closing period of the normal electric motor 72 is extended, and the ball launched in the right-hand play rolls across the top surface of the normal electric motor 72 from the right end to the left end, allowing it to flow down towards the variable prize entry device 65 located on the left side of the normal electric motor 72 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a minor win is derived in the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2, and the variable prize entry device 65 is opened, allowing the ball to enter the opened variable prize entry device 65 and win prize balls (a so-called minor win rush state). Here, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (for example, the first game state), if a minor win game that can occur in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is won (for example, the first event), the game transitions to a minor win game state (for example, the second game state) in which the variable prize entry device 65 can be opened. Furthermore, a special hidden probability variation sequence (e.g., a first sequence) that can be initiated under the condition that the game is in a "hidden probability variation state" is executed to determine whether a big win or a small win will occur. If the game transitions from the "hidden probability variation state" to a small win state while the hidden probability variation sequence is running, the system is configured to continue the hidden probability variation sequence (e.g., through a sequence continuation mechanism) and additionally execute a small win sequence (e.g., a second sequence) for the small win game. In this case, the small win sequence is configured to display both the number of acquired game balls and the number of small wins (e.g., related sequences) while the hidden probability variation sequence is running. The game ball count and small win count displays are configured to run in a smaller display area than the display area where the hidden probability variation sequence is displayed. Additionally, the game ball count and small win count displays are configured to continue displaying while the hidden probability variation sequence is running.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won during the special symbol 2 variation display, the jackpot game will be activated. The large prize slot solenoid 65b will be turned on a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 or 10 rounds, with a maximum of 30 seconds per round, an interval of 1 second, and opening and ending times of 10 seconds), and the variable prize device 65 will be opened. At this time, the player will be encouraged to continue playing with the right-hand side, allowing them to enter the open variable prize device 65 and win a large number of prize balls.

Returning to Figure 6, let's continue the explanation. The per-figure counter C4 is configured as a loop counter, where, for example, a value of 1 is added sequentially within the range of "0 to 99," and after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "99"), it returns to "0." Furthermore, when the per-figure counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 at that point is read as the initial value of the per-figure counter C4.

Furthermore, the second initial random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the regular counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"). It is updated once with each timer interrupt (see Figure 31) and repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 30).

The value of the ball hit counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 31) in the first embodiment), and when it is detected that a ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is stored in one of the ball hold areas 1 to 4 provided in the ball hold storage area 203i of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the ball hold execution area 203j in the order it was stored in the ball hold storage area 203i, and a hit determination is made based on the value of the ball hit counter C4 stored in the ball hold execution area 203j.

The random number value for a winning regular symbol is set by a regular symbol winning random number table 202h stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, 70/100 in a low probability state, 99/100 in a high probability state, etc.). A win is determined when the value of the regular symbol winning counter C4 stored in the regular symbol reserve ball execution area 203j of the RAM 203 matches the random number value for a win set by the regular symbol winning random number table 202h. Then, the regular symbol variation table 202i is referenced according to the game state to set the variable display time for the regular symbol (for example, "15 seconds" when the time-saving function is not activated, "0.1 seconds" when the time-saving function is activated, etc.). After the variable display time has elapsed, the regular symbol display device 83 lights up and displays the "○" symbol as the stopped symbol (regular symbol). Subsequently, the normal electric payload opening table 202j is referenced according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric payload 72 is set (for example, "0.1 seconds" x 1 time when the time-saving function is not activated, "5.8 seconds" x 1 time when the time-saving function is activated, etc.). During this opening time, the retractable plate 72a of the normal electric payload 72 opens, and during this time, balls can enter the lower second start opening 71a.

On the other hand, if the value of the regular symbol win counter C4 stored in the regular symbol hold area does not match the value of the winning random number set by the regular symbol win random number table 202h, it is determined to be a loss. Then, the regular symbol variation table 202i is referenced according to the game state to set a variable display time, and after the variable display time has elapsed, the regular symbol display device 83 lights up and displays the "×" symbol as the stopped symbol (regular symbol). The regular symbol win random number table 202h, the regular symbol variation table 202i, and the regular electric function release table 202j will be described later in Figure 24.

Returning to Figure 5, let's continue the explanation. The RAM 203 has a counter buffer 203c as shown in Figure 6, a stack area where the contents of the MPU 201's internal registers and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work region) where various flags, counters, input/output (I/O) values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115. All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main process (see Figure 30) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see Figure 28). The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see Figure 49) as a power outage process is immediately executed. Furthermore, when the power is restored, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a recovery screen (e.g., a black screen display, a suggestion display) specifically for power restoration for a predetermined period of time (e.g., fixed at "30 seconds") in order to wait for each control device 110, 111, 113, and 114 to start up normally (e.g., predetermined period execution means). If a trigger for starting the first special symbol or the second special symbol (starting win) is obtained while this recovery screen is displayed (e.g., the execution condition is met), the system is configured to maintain the display state of the recovery screen and wait (suspend) the execution of the normal variation performance (e.g., second performance) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. On the other hand, the special symbol display device 37 performs a dynamic display of the first or second special symbol, while the third symbol display device 81 does not start the normal variation effect (e.g., specific effect) (e.g., specific effect non-start means), but instead performs a variation display related to the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol (e.g., flashing/lighting of a circular symbol, so-called fourth symbol, related effect) in a predetermined area of the third symbol display device 81 (e.g., lower right portion of the screen) (e.g., related effect execution means). This predetermined area is a smaller display area than the area where the normal variation effect is performed. When the display time of the recovery screen has elapsed, the recovery screen is terminated (e.g., suggestion display termination means), and the normal variation effect (e.g., specific effect) of the first or second special symbol that was acquired during the recovery screen display is executed from where it left off (e.g., specific effect execution means). In this case, the system may be configured to continue executing the variation display that was displayed on the recovery screen even while the normal variation effect is being executed (e.g., related effect continuation means).

The RAM 203 further includes at least a first reserved ball counter 203a, a second reserved ball counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a first reserved ball execution area 203f, a second reserved ball execution area 203g, a normal reserved ball counter 203h, a normal reserved ball storage area 203i, a normal reserved ball execution area 203j, a probability variation flag 203k, a time-saving high probability flag 203m, a time-saving low probability flag 203n, a time-saving counter 203o, a ceiling reach count counter 203p, and a ceiling set flag 203q.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting count) up to four times for the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81), based on balls entering the first start port 64 detected during a timer interrupt process (see Figure 31) that is executed periodically every 4 milliseconds.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is initially set to "0" during the initial setup process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in Figure 28). Then, each time a starting entry into the first starting port 64 is detected and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, the counter is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of "4" (see S306 in Figure 32). Conversely, the first reserved ball counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5002 in Figure 35).

The second reserved ball counter 203b, like the first reserved ball counter 203a, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting count) up to four times for the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81), based on the start entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a detected in a timer interrupt process (see Figure 31) that is executed periodically every 4 milliseconds.

The second reserved ball counter 203b, like the first reserved ball counter 203a, is initially set to "0" during the initial setup process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in Figure 28). Then, each time a ball is detected entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, the counter is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of "4" (see S310 in Figure 32). Conversely, the second reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S5302 in Figure 36).

The value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol) is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the first reserved ball command or the second reserved ball command (see S313 in Figure 32). The first reserved ball command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 each time a start entry into the first start port 64 is detected and the first reserved ball counter 203a is incremented by 1. The second reserved ball command is a command transmitted each time the second reserved ball counter 203b for the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a is incremented by 1.

The audio lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first or second special symbol held in the main control device 110, via the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved dynamic display (variation effect) rounds for each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. Furthermore, each time a starting entry into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a is detected, the main control device 110 transmits the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command to the audio lamp control device 113. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to correct any discrepancies in the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol managed by the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or other factors, even if these discrepancies are corrected by the next received first or second reserved ball count command.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a first reserved ball count command or a second reserved ball count command to the audio lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command includes not only the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b that has been incremented by 1, but also the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 6) in connection with the start-up win that triggered the increment of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b.

In other words, when a starting win occurs, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110, are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 via the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 anticipates the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which are transmitted via the first or second reserved ball count command, before the variation animation based on these values is executed. It then determines what the variation animation will be (whether it will result in a jackpot, what the variation time will be, etc.) before the animation is executed. Based on the results of this pre-reading, it can then decide on the execution of various animations, including the content and timing of the "reserved ball change notification" animation.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to transmit separately a first or second reserved ball count command indicating the number of reserved balls for the variation effect, and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separate from the first or second reserved ball count command, the system may be configured to generate the first or second reserved ball count command at the timing of ball entry into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, and simultaneously generate commands similar to variation pattern commands and stop type commands (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) based on the ball entry, and transmit them to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command can be simplified by reusing the program for the variation pattern command and stop type command.

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, respectively, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a ball entering the first start opening 64. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the first start opening 64 (start entry) during timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), it obtains the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1-4) so that it can store (reserve) up to four sets of data (values of counters C1-C3 and CS1) corresponding to a start entry of the first special symbol (see Figure 6).

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, respectively, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a ball entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a (start entry) during timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), it obtains the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) that can store (reserve) up to four sets of data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the initial winning of the second special symbol (see Figure 6).

The first reserved ball execution area 203f is, as described above, a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) that should be referenced during processing such as starting or currently executing the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol, and setting the dynamic display and variation effects of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the variation animation for the first special symbol, it shifts the oldest data corresponding to the initial winning entry (counter values C1-C3, CS1) stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d to the first reserved ball execution area 203f in order to perform processes such as the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation animation. In the first embodiment, "shift" refers to moving data stored in one area to another.

The second ball-holding execution area 203g, as described above, is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) that should be referenced during processing such as starting execution, or during the execution of the second special symbol's jackpot or minor jackpot lottery, and setting the dynamic display and variation effects of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the variation animation for the second special symbol, it shifts the data corresponding to one of the starting entries (counter values C1-C3, CS1) stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e to the second reserved ball execution area 203g in order to perform processes such as the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation animation.

Here, referring again to Figure 6, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g will be explained. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 for purposes such as the lottery for the first or second special symbol jackpot, and the setting of dynamic display and variation effects for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the following are used for setting the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effects: a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d and the first reserved ball execution area 203f each store the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the first start opening 64 (start entry). The second reserved ball storage area 203e and the second reserved ball execution area 203g each store the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a (start entry).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 through 4). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 through 4) is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variable type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1.

Furthermore, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) is provided with, similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d, a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variable type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the variation type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are all grouped together within a single reserved ball storage area 203d, 203e. However, multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each counter C1 to C3, CS1.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d stores data (values of each counter C1-C3 and CS1) acquired at the time a ball enters the first start opening 64 (start entry), up to a maximum of four times. In this case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4th). In other words, the area with the smallest area number stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the first start opening 64, and the first reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the first start opening 64.

Furthermore, the first reserved ball execution area 203f consists of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d, this first reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variable type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the variation effect of the first special symbol, regardless of whether there is data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the second reserved ball execution area 203g, if data is stored in the first reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, it shifts the data stored in the first reserved area to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the first reserved ball execution area 203f, respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see Figure 35), and a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the referenced data and the game state, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. The special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, performs a dynamic display based on this determined variation pattern and stop type.

Furthermore, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 via the Special Feature 1 Variation Pattern Command and the Special Feature 1 Stop Type Command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation effect of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the Special Feature 1 Variation Pattern Command and the Special Feature 1 Stop Type Command.

The details of the data shift are explained below. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the execution of the first special symbol's variation effect, it determines whether data is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If data is found to be stored in the first reserved ball storage area, the random value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved ball storage area is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved ball storage area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved ball storage area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random value in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved ball storage area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, once the data shift to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is complete, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d into the area with the smallest area number (first to third). In the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed on each reserve area within the first reserve ball storage area 203d. For example, suppose the value of the first reserve ball counter 203a is "4" when the start of the variation effect for the first special symbol is determined, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the first reserve ball storage area 203d. In this state, when the data from the first reserve area 1 is shifted to the first reserve ball execution area 203f, and the first reserve area 1 becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data from the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area with the smaller area number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data from the first reserve area 2 is shifted to the first reserve area 1, the data from the first reserve area 3 is shifted to the first reserve area 2, and the data from the first reserve area 4 is shifted to the first reserve area 3.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is "2" when the start of the variation effect for the first special symbol is determined, the MPU 201 shifts only the data from the first reserved ball area 2 to the first reserved ball area 1, and then ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, since no data shifting is performed for the first reserved ball areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (reserved), the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

Furthermore, regardless of whether data exists or not, the system may be configured to shift each data point in the first holding area (second to fourth) to an area with a smaller area number. In this case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), thus simplifying program creation.

Next, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores data (values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the time a ball enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a (start entry), up to a maximum of four entries. In this case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4th). In other words, the area with the smallest area number stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, and the second reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a.

Furthermore, the second reserved ball execution area 203g consists of only one area. Similar to the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this second reserved ball execution area 203g includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203g1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203g2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variable type counter storage area 203g4 for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the execution of the second special symbol variation effect, regardless of whether there is data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d and the first reserved ball execution area 203f, if data is stored in the second reserved ball first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, it shifts the data stored in the second reserved ball first area to each of the areas 203g1 to 203g4 of the second reserved ball execution area 203g, respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203g is referenced in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see Figure 36), and a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the referenced data and the game state, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. The special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, performs a dynamic display based on this determined variation pattern and stop type.

Furthermore, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 via variation pattern commands and stop type commands. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs variation effects based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern commands and stop type commands.

The details of the data shift are explained below. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the execution of the second special symbol's variation effect, it determines whether data is stored in the second reserve ball storage area 1 of the second reserve ball storage area 203e. If data is found to be stored in the second reserve ball storage area 1, the random value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserve ball storage area 1 is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203g1 of the second reserve ball execution area 203g. Similarly, the random value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserve ball storage area 1 is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203g2, the random value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserve ball storage area 1 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3, and the random value in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserve ball storage area 1 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203g4.

Then, once the data shift to the second reserved ball execution area 203g is complete, the second reserved ball area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e into the area with the smaller area number (1st to 3rd). In the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the second reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed on each reserve area within the second reserve ball storage area 203e. For example, suppose the value of the second reserve ball counter 203b is "4" when the start of the second special symbol variation effect is determined, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the second reserve ball storage area 203e. In this state, when the data from the second reserve 1st area is shifted to the second reserve ball execution area 203g, and the second reserve 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data from the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area with the smaller area number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data from the second reserve 2nd area is shifted to the second reserve 1st area, the data from the second reserve 3rd area is shifted to the second reserve 2nd area, and the data from the second reserve 4th area is shifted to the second reserve 3rd area.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is "2" when the start of the variation effect for the second special symbol is determined, the MPU 201 shifts only the data from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, and then ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, since no data shifting is performed for the second reserved areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (reserved), the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

Furthermore, regardless of whether data exists or not, the system may be configured to shift each data point in the second holding area (second to fourth) to the area with the area number one less. In this case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), thus simplifying program creation.

In this way, by separately storing the data related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and performing the dynamic display based on each piece of data, it is possible to simultaneously execute the dynamic display of the first and second special symbols.

Returning to Figure 5, let's continue the explanation. The regular symbol hold ball counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of hold balls (waiting count) for the variable display of regular symbols on the regular symbol display device 83, up to a maximum of four times, based on the passage of balls through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31) which is performed periodically every 4 milliseconds.

The regular symbol reserved ball counter 203h, like the reserved ball counters 203a and 203b, is initially set to "0" during the initial setup process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in Figure 28). Then, each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls for the variable display related to the regular symbol increases, it is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of "4" (see S405 in Figure 33). Conversely, the regular symbol reserved ball counter 203h is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the regular symbol is executed (see S705 in Figure 47).

The regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203i is a memory for storing the regular symbol hit counter C4, which is obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a ball passing through the through gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has passed through the through gate 67 during timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), it obtains the value of the regular symbol hit counter C4 from the counter buffer 203c and stores it in the regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203i. The regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203i has four reserved areas (regular symbol reserved areas 1 to 4) so that it can store (reserve) data (value of the regular symbol hit counter C4) corresponding to one reserved ball of a regular symbol up to four times (see Figure 6).

The regular symbol hold ball execution area 203j is a memory for storing data (the value of the regular symbol win counter C4) that should be referenced when starting or during the process of drawing winning combinations or variable displays for regular symbols.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the variable display of the regular symbols, it shifts one data point from the data stored in the regular symbol reserve ball storage area 203i (the value of the regular symbol win counter C4) to the regular symbol reserve ball execution area 203j in order to perform processes such as the regular symbol winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the regular symbol display device 83. In the first embodiment, "shift" refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, referring again to Figure 6, the details of the regular symbol reserve ball storage area 203i and the regular symbol reserve ball execution area 203j will be explained. The regular symbol reserve ball storage area 203i and the regular symbol reserve ball execution area 203j are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform processes such as the lottery for winning regular symbols and the setting of the variable display of the regular symbol display device 83.

As described above, the regular symbol win counter C4, used for the regular symbol win lottery, is used for setting the variable display of the regular symbol display device 83. The regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203i stores the value of the regular symbol win counter C4, which is obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball passes through the through gate 67.

The regular ball retention area 203i is composed of four retention areas (regular ball retention areas 1 to 4). Each of the four retention areas (regular ball retention areas 1 to 4) is provided with a regular ball random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the regular ball retention counter C4.

This regular ball storage area 203i stores data (the value of the regular ball hit counter C4) acquired when a ball passes through the through gate 67, up to a maximum of four times. In this case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four empty storage areas (regular ball storage areas 1 to 4th). In other words, the area with the smallest area number stores data corresponding to the oldest ball passing through the through gate 67 in terms of time, and the regular ball storage area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest ball passing through the through gate 67 in terms of time.

On the other hand, the regular ball hold execution area 203j consists of only one area. Similar to the regular ball hold storage area 203i, this regular ball hold execution area 203j is provided with a regular ball per random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the regular ball per counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, it shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203i to the normal symbol hold ball execution area 203j.

Then, the data shifted to the regular symbol hold ball execution area 203j is referenced in the regular symbol variation processing (see Figure 47), and based on the referenced data and the game state, a winning lottery is conducted and the content of the variable display is determined. In the regular symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed based on this determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of the data shift are explained below. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the variable display of the normal symbols, it shifts the random value from the normal symbol winning random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203i to the normal symbol winning random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol hold ball execution area 203j.

Then, once the data shift to the regular ball hold execution area 203j is complete, the regular ball hold area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the data stored (held) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the regular ball hold storage area 203i into the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). In the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the regular ball hold areas (1st to 4th) in the regular ball hold storage area 203i where data is stored (held).

Here, we will explain the data shifts performed on each reserve area within the regular symbol reserve ball storage area 203i. For example, suppose the value of the regular symbol reserve ball counter 203h is "4" when the variable display of the regular symbol is initiated, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the regular symbol reserve ball storage area 203i. In this state, when the data from the regular symbol reserve area 1 is shifted to the regular symbol reserve ball execution area 203j, and the regular symbol reserve area 1 becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data from the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area with the smaller area number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data from the regular symbol reserve area 2 is shifted to the regular symbol reserve area 1, the data from the regular symbol reserve area 3 is shifted to the regular symbol reserve area 2, and the data from the regular symbol reserve area 4 is shifted to the regular symbol reserve area 3.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the normal symbol reserve ball counter 203h is "2" when the determination to start the variable display of normal symbols is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data from the second normal symbol reserve area to the first normal symbol reserve area, and then ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, since no data shifting is performed for normal symbol reserve areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (reserved), the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

Furthermore, regardless of whether data exists or not, the system may be configured to shift each data point in the general data hold area (2nd to 4th) to the area with the area number one less. In this case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the general data hold area (2nd to 4th), thus simplifying program creation.

Returning to Figure 5, let's continue the explanation. The probability variation flag 203k is a flag used to determine whether or not the special symbol is in a high-probability state. This probability variation flag 203k is initially set to off when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Then, at the end of a jackpot, if the jackpot type is "Probability Variation A" or "Hidden Probability Variation A," the probability variation flag 203k is set to on (see S6102 or S6105 in Figure 44). Then, if a jackpot is won, it is set to off (see S602 in Figure 41). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability variation flag 203k is on, the high-probability state of the jackpot random number table 202a is referenced to determine the high-probability state of the special symbol, and a jackpot lottery for the special symbol is conducted.

The time-saving high probability flag 203m, when turned on, is in a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "probability variation state," indicating a high probability state for normal symbols, a state of reduced variable display time for normal symbols, and a state of extended opening time for normal electric functions 72. This time-saving high probability flag 203m is initially set to off when the RAM is cleared when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see S116 in Figure 28). In the first embodiment, at the end of a jackpot, if the jackpot type is "probability variation A" or "time-saving A," the time-saving high probability flag 203m is set to on (see S6103 or S6106 in Figure 44). Subsequently, during the time-saving counting process (see S5513 in Figure 37) executed in the variable stop processing, which is the process when the dynamic display of the special symbols stops, if the value of the time-saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0", and the time-saving high probability flag 203m is set to ON (see S5704 in Figure 39), or if it is set to OFF at the beginning of the win processing when a jackpot is won (see S602 in Figure 41).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on, the normal symbol winning random number table 202h is referenced to perform a normal symbol winning lottery as a high probability state for normal symbols, the normal symbol variation table 202i is referenced to set the variable display time for normal symbols as a shortened state for normal symbols, and the normal electric role opening table 202j is referenced to perform the opening drive of the normal electric role 72 as a prolonged opening state for the normal electric role 72.

The time-saving low probability flag 203n, when turned on, is in a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," indicating a low probability state for normal symbols, while simultaneously shortening the variable display time for normal symbols and extending the opening time of the normal electric function 72. This time-saving low probability flag 203n is initially set to off when the RAM is cleared when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see S116 in Figure 28). In the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed a total of more than "899 times" (i.e., "900 times" or more) in the low probability state of the special symbol and the number of times the ceiling is reached is when the time-saving low probability flag 203n is set to on in order to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see S5806 in Figure 40). Subsequently, during the time-saving counting process (see S5513 in Figure 37) executed in the variation stop process when the dynamic display of the special symbols stops, if the value of the time-saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0", and the time-saving low probability flag 203n is set to ON (see S5705 in Figure 39), or if it is set to OFF at the beginning of the win process when a jackpot is won (see S602 in Figure 41).

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the time-saving low probability flag 203n is turned on, the special symbols are in a low probability state, and the normal symbols are also in a low probability state. The normal symbol winning random number table 202h is referenced to conduct a normal symbol winning lottery. However, the normal symbol variation table 202i is referenced to set the variable display time for the normal symbols, and the normal electric motor opening table 202j is referenced to drive the opening of the normal electric motor 72, resulting in a prolonged opening state for the normal electric motor 72.

The time-saving counter 203o is a counter for determining the termination condition of the "time-saving function." It counts the number of times the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed after a jackpot and when the ceiling is reached, and uses this count to determine the time-saving termination condition. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time-saving termination condition differs depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed for each type of jackpot. When the set number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol occurs, the currently running "time-saving function" is terminated, and the machine transitions from the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" to the "normal game state."

The time-saving counter 203o is initially set to "0" by the initial setup process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in Figure 28). Also, during the winning process (see S203 in Figure 31), the value of the time-saving counter 203o is cleared to "0" as part of the initialization process when a jackpot is won (see S603 in Figure 41). Then, after the jackpot ends when a jackpot of type "Time-Saving A" is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203o is set to "100" (see S6107 in Figure 44). Furthermore, in the low probability state of special symbols, if the number of dynamic display executions exceeds "899," that is, if the value of the ceiling reach count counter 203p (described later) becomes greater than "899," and the ceiling setting flag 203q (also described later) is not set to ON, the value of the time-saving counter 203o is set to "1140" (see S5804 in Figure 40). On the other hand, the value of the time-saving counter 203o is deducted by 1 each time the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed in the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" (see S5701 in Figure 39).

Then, when the value of the time-saving counter 203o becomes "0" (S5702: No. in Figure 39), it is determined that the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times each special symbol has been executed has been met. In this case, the time-saving high probability flag 203m or time-saving low probability flag 203n, which is currently on, is set to off (see S5704 or S5705 in Figure 39), and the "time-saving function" is terminated.

The ceiling reach counting counter 203p is a counter used to count whether or not to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" based on the number of times the special symbol's dynamic display is executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed "900 times" in the low probability state of the special symbol, that is, when the value of this ceiling reach counting counter 203p reaches "900", the game state is configured to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state".

The ceiling reach counter 203p is initially set to "0" during the startup process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S172 in Figure 28). Then, in the low probability state of special symbols, i.e., the "normal game state," the "high probability time reduction state for normal symbols," or the "low probability time reduction state for normal symbols," the counter is incremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of special symbols is executed (see S5801 in Figure 40). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of this ceiling reach counter 203p reaches "900," and the ceiling setting flag 203q (described later) is not set to ON (i.e., it is OFF), the value of the time reduction counter 203o is set to "1140," and the time reduction low probability flag 203n is set to ON (see S5804 and S5806 in Figure 40), and the machine transitions to the "low probability time reduction state for normal symbols."

Furthermore, this ceiling reach counter 203p is reset to "0" at the beginning of the win processing when a jackpot is won (see S603 in Figure 41). This resets the ceiling reach count each time a jackpot occurs. After a jackpot, when the special symbol enters a low probability state, counting of the value of this ceiling reach counter 203p begins. This allows for the generation of a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" as a relief measure for the player when a predetermined period of time has passed during the low probability state of the special symbol, without a jackpot being won in the dynamic display of the special symbol.

The ceiling setting flag 203q is used to determine whether the dynamic display of the special symbols has reached the ceiling count at least once after a jackpot game. This ceiling setting flag 203q is initially set to off during the startup process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S171 in Figure 28). Then, in a low-probability state for the special symbols, if the dynamic display of the special symbols does not result in a jackpot for 900 consecutive times, i.e., if the value of the ceiling count counter 203p reaches 900, the flag is set to on after a jackpot game, indicating that the ceiling function has been activated once (see S5805 in Figure 40). On the other hand, it is set to off at the beginning of the jackpot processing when a jackpot is won (see S602 in Figure 41).

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if the ceiling setting flag 203q is set to ON, that is, if the ceiling function has been activated even once after a jackpot, the machine is configured not to activate the ceiling function again. By referring to the ceiling setting flag 203q, the ceiling function that is activated after a jackpot can be limited to once. However, the machine may be configured to allow the ceiling function to be activated two or more times.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores a jackpot opening table 202f, which is referenced for controlling the opening of the large prize opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 when a jackpot is won in the lottery game for the first or second special symbols.

Here, with reference to Figure 22, the jackpot opening table 202f will be explained. Figure 22 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the jackpot opening table 202f stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot opening table 202f is referenced when a jackpot is hit with the first or second special symbol. Based on the type of jackpot that produced each special symbol jackpot, it specifies the opening pattern of the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 (number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of prize balls, number of prize balls), and the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot ends.

First, the jackpot opening table 202f is categorized based on the type of jackpot won, selected based on the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, or the lower second starting port 71a (hereinafter, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, and the lower second starting port 71a may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 64, 71, and 71a") which are most likely to result in a win depending on the game state.

Specifically, the opening behavior of the large prize entry opening plate 65a is defined for the "normal game state," which is referenced when a jackpot of type "Shortened Time A," "Probability Change A," or "Hidden Probability A" is won, and for the "Probability Change State," "Low Probability Time Reduction State," "High Probability Time Reduction State," or "Hidden Probability Change State," which is referenced when a jackpot of type "Shortened Time A" or "Hidden Probability A" is won.

As shown in Figure 22, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, if the jackpot type "Shortened Time A" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 (hereinafter, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 may be referred to as the "large prize opening") is opened and closed repeatedly over 5 rounds. The opening time of that jackpot (hereinafter, the opening time may be referred to as the "OP time") is set to "30 seconds", the interval time (hereinafter, the interval time may be referred to as the "IT time") which is the closing time between one round of that jackpot and the next round, is set to "1 second", and the ending time of that jackpot (hereinafter, the ending time may be referred to as the "ED time") is set to "10 seconds". Furthermore, the maximum opening time for one round is set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning ball is set to "10." In addition, in "normal gameplay," after winning a jackpot of type "Shortened Time A," the game is configured to transition to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State."

Next, in the "normal gameplay state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, if a jackpot of type "Probability Variation A" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. The OP time is set to "30 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "10 seconds." Furthermore, the maximum opening time per round is set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of prize balls won per round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one win is set to "10." Finally, in the "normal gameplay state," after the jackpot game ends when a jackpot of type "Probability Variation A" is won, the system is configured to transition to the "Probability Variation State."

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, if the jackpot type "Hidden Probability A" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. The OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time per round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of prize balls won per round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one win is set to "10". Furthermore, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot type "Hidden Probability A" is won, the system is configured to transition to the "Hidden Probability Fluctuation State". Furthermore, in "normal gameplay," the only way to win a jackpot of type "Hidden Probability A" is through the dynamic display of the second special symbol. This dynamic display of the second special symbol is designed to be less likely to occur during left-handed play, which is recommended in "normal gameplay."

Next, in the "Probability Fluctuation State," "Low Probability Time Reduction State," "Time Reduction State," and "Latent Probability Fluctuation State" sections of the jackpot opening table 202f, if the jackpot type "Time Reduction A" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 5 rounds. The OP time is set to "10 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "10 seconds." Furthermore, the maximum opening time per round is set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of prize balls won per round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one win is set to "10." Finally, in the "Probability Fluctuation State," "Normal Low Probability Time Reduction State," "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State," or "Latent Probability Fluctuation State," after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot type "Time Reduction A" is won, the system is configured to transition to the "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State."

Next, in the "Probability Fluctuation State," "Low Probability Time Reduction State," "Time Reduction State," and "Latent Probability Fluctuation State" sections of the jackpot opening table 202f, if a jackpot of type "Latent Probability A" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 5 rounds. The OP time is set to "10 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "10 seconds." Furthermore, the maximum opening time per round is set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of prize balls won per round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one win is set to "10." Finally, in the "Probability Fluctuation State," "Normal Low Probability Time Reduction State," "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State," or "Latent Probability Fluctuation State," after the jackpot game ends when a jackpot of type "Latent Probability A" is won, the system is configured to transition to the "Latent Probability Fluctuation State."

Thus, in a "consecutive win" state where right-hand play is maintained and special symbol jackpots occur frequently in succession, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time for any type of jackpot shorter than those for the first jackpot in "normal play," the overall time spent on jackpots during the "consecutive win" state is shortened, and the time to reach the next jackpot in the "consecutive win" state is shortened. This shortens the time until the next jackpot occurs in the "consecutive win" state, preventing the player from losing interest due to the long wait between jackpots despite being in a "consecutive win" state. Furthermore, by allowing consecutive jackpots to occur sooner, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by making the opening, initiation, and ending times for the first jackpot in "normal gameplay" longer than those for jackpots in "consecutive win" mode, it becomes possible to execute a wide variety of effects during that time. This configuration allows for, for example, during the opening and ending times of the first jackpot, explanations of how to play the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., hints about the firing pattern, hints to prevent forgetting to remove the card inserted in the card slot, explanations of future game states, etc.) and effects celebrating the first jackpot from "normal gameplay" to the first jackpot to be executed. This makes it easier for players to understand how to play the pachinko machine 10 and allows for effects that enhance the player's enjoyment by making them realize they have finally hit a jackpot.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the large prize slot opening/closing plate 65a during a jackpot (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of prize balls, number of prize balls awarded, and transition game state) based on the type of jackpot is not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of openings (number of rounds) may be configured to differ for each type of jackpot, the maximum opening time may be changed for each type of jackpot, or the maximum number of prize balls awarded may be changed. By having different numbers of prize balls that can be paid out for each type of jackpot won, it is possible to create differences in the game value directly awarded according to the type of jackpot won.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to transition to a different game state for each type of jackpot; the system may be configured to transition to a common game state for multiple types of jackpots. Additionally, the OP time and ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set to be longer than the OP time or ED time. Also, the minimum opening time for one round may be set to be shorter than the IT time, OP time, or ED time. Furthermore, at least one of the OP time, IT time, or ED time may be set to be the same for each type of jackpot. While the OP time, IT time, and ED time for jackpots in the "latent probability variation state" were previously configured to be shorter than those in the "normal game state," "probability variation state," or "normal high probability time reduction state," it is also possible to configure the system to shorten one or more of the OP time, IT time, or ED time, while making the other one or more of them equal or longer.

Next, the minor win opening table 202g will be explained with reference to Figure 23. Figure 23 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the minor win opening table 202g stored in ROM 202. The minor win opening table 202g is referenced when a minor win occurs with the first or second special symbol, and based on each special symbol, the opening mode of the large prize opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 (number of rounds, maximum opening time, maximum number of prize balls, number of prize balls) is defined. Note that even if a minor win is achieved with any of the special symbols (excluding the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), the game state is not transitioned.

First, the minor prize opening table 202g is divided into opening modes based on the type of special symbol, i.e., the starting openings 64, 71, and 71a into which the prize is won. Specifically, the opening modes of the main prize opening plate 65a are defined for "Special Symbol 1 Minor Prize," which is referenced when a minor prize is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and for "Special Symbol 2 Minor Prize," which is referenced when a minor prize is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 23, in the "Special Symbol 1 Small Win" section of the small win opening table 202g, when a small win is achieved through the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65, located on the left side of the front view of the normal electric motor 72, opens and closes once (1 round). The maximum opening time of the large prize opening opening plate 65a is set to "0.1 seconds," the maximum number of prize entries is set to "10," and the number of prize balls awarded based on the winnings is also set to "10." In the first embodiment, since the opening time of the large prize opening opening plate 65a based on a small win of the first special symbol is set so that 10 balls launched within that time cannot be awarded, the opened large prize opening opening plate 65a is configured to close more easily based on the maximum opening time condition than on the maximum number of prize entries condition.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 23, in the "Special Symbol 2 Small Win" section of the small win opening table 202g, even when a small win is achieved through the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize entry device 65, located on the left side of the front view of the normal electric motor 72, is opened and closed once (1 round). The maximum opening time of the large prize opening opening plate 65a is set to "1.5 seconds," the maximum number of prize entries is set to "10," and the number of prize balls awarded based on the winnings is also set to "10." In the first embodiment, since the opening time of the large prize opening opening plate 65a based on a small win of the second special symbol is set so that 10 balls launched within that time cannot be awarded, the opened large prize opening opening plate 65a is configured to be easier to close based on the maximum opening time condition than on the maximum number of prize entries condition.

Next, referring to Figures 24(a) to 24(c), the details of the general random number table 202h, the general variation table 202i, and the general power supply release table 202j will be explained. First, Figure 24(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the general random number table 202h stored in ROM 202.

As described above, the random number table 202h for normal symbols is divided into two types: one for "low probability normal symbol state" used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state for normal symbols (a period that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "high probability normal symbol time reduction state" (including during a special symbol jackpot)), and one for "high probability normal symbol state" used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a state in which the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than in the "low probability normal symbol state," such as a "probability fluctuation state" or a "high probability normal symbol time reduction state." The number of winning random numbers included in the "low probability normal symbol state" and "high probability normal symbol state" tables are set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a win different between the "low probability normal symbol state" and the "high probability normal symbol state," the probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is changed between the two states.

As shown in Figure 24(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values for the normal symbol win counter C4, which results in a win in the "normal symbol low probability state," is 70, and these values, "30 to 99," are defined (set) in the normal symbol win random number table 202h. In other words, the probability of a win with a normal symbol in the "normal symbol low probability state" (i.e., "normal game state," "latent probability fluctuation state," or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is 70/100, and this is set to make it easier to derive a win in the variable display of normal symbols.

On the other hand, in the "high probability state for normal symbols," the number of values for the normal symbol win counter C4 that result in a win is 99, and these values "1 to 99" are defined (set) in the normal symbol win random number table 202h. In other words, the probability of a normal symbol win in the "high probability state for normal symbols" (i.e., the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state") is 99/100, and it is set so that a win is almost always derived in the variable display of normal symbols.

This allows for variations in the probability of winning with regular symbols depending on the game state, creating differences in whether the regular electric mechanism 72 is more likely to open or less likely to open. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the game state can determine whether the ball can enter the lower second start opening 71a due to the regular electric mechanism 72 being more likely to open, or whether it is less likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a due to the regular electric mechanism 72 being less likely to open. This creates different gameplay characteristics for each game state.

In particular, in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is reached, the variable display time for normal symbols is longer, the normal electric valve 72 is less likely to open, and even when it does open, the normal electric valve 72 is only open for a short time. Therefore, even if a ball is launched using right-handed play, it is less likely to enter the lower second starting port 71a than in the "normal symbol high probability state". Furthermore, the first starting port 64 is not equipped with a device to assist in entry like the normal electric valve 72, and there is no through gate 67 in the flow area of balls launched using left-handed play. Therefore, the configuration does not make it easier for balls launched using left-handed play to enter the first starting port 64 due to a time-saving function. Therefore, in other words, in "normal gameplay," even if the game is played with the right-handed shot, the ball shot to the right is unlikely to enter the lower second start opening 71a. Similarly, balls shot with the left-handed shot must enter the first start opening 64 without using the time-saving function, and the game is configured to allow the player to enter the first start opening 64 on their own in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Furthermore, in "normal gameplay," it is preferable to provide multiple types of variable display times for the normal symbols and opening patterns for the normal electric valve 72, thereby making it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the ball can enter the lower second start opening 71a, and thus making it difficult to enter the lower second start opening 71a. Furthermore, in "normal gameplay," if the game is played using the right-hand shooting technique, the system may be configured to trigger an error notification when the ball passes through the through gate 67. This suggests to both the player and the arcade staff that this is an unencouraged gameplay method, thereby discouraging players from playing using the right-hand shooting technique.

Next, with reference to Figure 24(b), the details of the regular pattern variation table 202i for determining the variable display time of the regular pattern will be explained. Figure 24(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the regular pattern variation table 202i stored in the ROM 202.

The regular symbol variation table 202i is divided into two types: one for "Normal Game State/Latent Probability Variation State" (referenced in "Normal Game State" or "Latent Probability Variation State"), and another for "Probability Variation State/Low Probability Time Reduction State/Time Reduction State" (referenced in "Probability Variation State," "Regular Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," or "Regular Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State"). The variable display time for regular symbols is set differently for the "Normal Game State/Latent Probability Variation State" and the "Probability Variation State/Low Probability Time Reduction State/Time Reduction State" tables. By varying the variable display time for regular symbols in each game state, the time it takes to determine the win/loss result for regular symbols is altered for each game state.

As shown in Figure 24(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display time for the regular symbols, set in the "normal game state" or "latent probability variation state," is defined in the regular symbol variation table 202i as "15 seconds." In other words, the time from the start of the variable display of the regular symbols to the deriving of the stopping symbol in the "normal game state" or "latent probability variation state" is always set to "15 seconds."

Furthermore, the variable display time for normal symbols, set in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," is specified in the normal symbol fluctuation table 202i to be "0.1 seconds." In other words, in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the time from the start of the variable display of normal symbols to the deriving of the stopping symbol is always set to "0.1 seconds."

This allows the variable display time of the regular symbols to be changed according to the game state, thereby altering the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the regular electric valve 72 opens. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, a win is indicated by the variable display resulting from the passage through the through gate 67. Based on this win, the regular electric valve 72 opens, and whether or not the ball that passed through the through gate 67 can flow directly into the lower second start opening 71a can be varied depending on the game state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the regular symbols for each game state, the way a single ball enters the through gate 67 and the lower second start opening 71a can be varied, creating different gameplay for each game state.

In particular, in game states where right-handed play is encouraged, such as the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the variable display time of the normal symbols is short, making it easier to win, and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is also long. Therefore, while the ball is rolling over the top surface of the normal electric motor 72, the normal electric motor 72 opens (is retracted), allowing the ball launched by right-handed play to enter the lower second start opening 71a. In other words, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the ball shot to the right is more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a and less likely to enter the variable prize entry device 65.

Furthermore, in the game states where right-handed play is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is less likely to result in a win than the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state." However, because the variable display time of the normal symbols is shorter and the opening time of the normal electric mechanism 72 is longer, the system is configured so that balls launched by right-handed play can enter the lower second start opening 71a. In other words, balls shot to the right in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" are more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a and less likely to enter the variable prize entry device 65.

On the other hand, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," which is a game state in which right-handed play is encouraged, the variable display time of the normal symbols is long, making it difficult to win, and the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 is also short. Therefore, the system is configured so that balls launched by right-handed play are less likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a. Thus, while the normal electric motor 72 is closed, the balls can roll across the top surface of the normal electric motor 72 from the right end to the left end and flow down towards the variable prize entry device 65 located on the left side of the normal electric motor 72 when viewed from the front. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state," balls shot to the right are less likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a and more likely to enter the variable prize entry device 65.

Next, the normal electric payload release table 202j will be explained with reference to Figure 24(c). Figure 24(c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the normal electric payload release table 202j stored in the ROM 202. The normal electric payload release table 202j is referenced when a normal symbol win occurs, and the release (immersion) time and number of releases of the normal electric payload 72 are determined based on the game state at the time the normal symbol win occurs.

The normal electric payout opening table 202j is divided into groups based on the game state in which the normal symbols were drawn. Specifically, the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric payout 72 is changed for the "normal game state/latent probability variation state" (referenced in "normal game state" and "latent probability variation state") and for the "probability variation state/low probability time reduction state/time reduction state" (referenced in "probability variation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state").

As shown in Figure 24(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of times the normal electric valve 72 is opened when a normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability variation state" is set to 1, and the opening time is set to "0.1 seconds" as defined in the normal electric valve opening table 202j. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability variation state," the normal electric valve 72 is set to open for "0.1 seconds" x 1 = "0.1 seconds".

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the normal electric valve 72, which is set to open for a normal symbol win, is defined in the normal electric valve opening table 202j as having an opening time of "5.8 seconds" and opening time of 1. In other words, when a normal symbol wins in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the normal electric valve 72 is configured to open for "5.8 seconds" x 1 = "5.8 seconds."

This allows the opening mechanism of the standard electric valve 72 to be changed according to the game state, thereby creating differences in the length of time the standard electric valve 72 is open. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the game state can be altered to determine whether the ball is more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a due to a longer period of opening of the standard electric valve 72, or less likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a due to a shorter period of opening of the standard electric valve 72. This creates different gameplay characteristics for each game state.

In particular, in game states where right-handed play is encouraged, such as the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the normal symbol becomes highly probable, the variable display time is shortened, and the opening period of the normal electric valve 72 is lengthened, making it easier for balls launched by right-handed play to enter the lower second starting opening 71a.

Furthermore, in the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" among the game states where right-handed play is encouraged, although the probability of normal symbols is low, the variable display time is short, and the opening period of the normal electric mechanism 72 is extended, making it easier for balls launched by right-handed play to enter the lower second starting opening 71a.

Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," and "normal high probability time reduction state," balls shot to the right are more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol accumulates more easily. This makes the fluctuation reduction function more likely to activate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is more efficiently executed.

In this way, by providing various game states that combine high-probability or low-probability states for special symbols, high-probability or low-probability states for regular symbols, and long or short durations for variable display time and the opening time of the regular electric motor 72, the gameplay can be varied for each game state, providing a wide variety of games and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the probability of winning with the variable display of the regular symbols and the variable display time are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio is acceptable as long as the probability of winning with the regular symbols is higher in the "probability variation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the probability of winning with the regular symbols in the "normal game state" may be set to about 1/100 to make it harder to win, or the probability of winning with the regular symbols in the "probability variation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the system may be configured so that no win is achieved in the low probability state of the regular symbols. Also, any time is acceptable as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "probability variation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the variable display time of the regular symbols in the "normal game state" may be set to a long time of "30 seconds" or more (e.g., "100 seconds"), or to a short time of less than "10 seconds" (e.g., "1 second").

Furthermore, the opening time and number of openings of the standard electric motor 72 are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the opening time of the standard electric motor 72 can be any time that is more advantageous to the player in the "probability variation state" than in the "normal game state," etc. For example, the opening time of the standard electric motor 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (e.g., "1 second"), and the number of openings may be set to "1" or more (e.g., "3"). Also, the opening time of the standard electric motor 72 in the "probability variation state" etc. may be set to a longer time of "5.8 seconds" or more (e.g., "10 seconds"), or to a shorter time of less than "5.8 seconds" (e.g., "1 second"). Furthermore, the number of openings of the standard electric motor 72 in the "probability variation state" etc. may be set to a larger number of times than "1" (e.g., "5").

Next, with reference to Figure 25, the time-saving termination condition table 202k in the first embodiment will be described. Figure 25 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the time-saving termination condition table 202k stored in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. The time-saving termination condition table 202k is referenced when the jackpot state ends or when the number of times the ceiling is reached is reached, and it defines the termination conditions for the "time-saving function" that is granted according to the type of jackpot won or the ceiling function.

As shown in Figure 25, if a jackpot of type "Probability Variation A" is won in the "Normal Play State," the game is set to the "Probability Variation State," and the high probability time-saving function is activated until the next jackpot. Also, if the number of times the ceiling is reached in the "Normal Play State," the game is set to the "Normal Low Probability Time-Saving State," and the low probability time-saving function is activated for up to "1140 times." Furthermore, in all game states (i.e., "Normal Play State," "Normal Low Probability Time-Saving State," "Normal High Probability Time-Saving State," "Probability Variation State," or "Latent Probability Variation State"), if a jackpot of type "Time-Saving A" is won, the game is set to the "Normal High Probability Time-Saving State," and the high probability time-saving function is activated for up to "100 times." Furthermore, in all game states (i.e., "Normal Game State," "Normal Low Probability Time Reduction State," "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State," "Probability Fluctuation State," or "Latent Probability Fluctuation State"), if a jackpot of type "Latent Probability A" is won, the state will be set to "Latent Probability Fluctuation State," the time reduction function will not be granted, and the number of time reduction rounds will be set to "0."

Returning to Figure 5, let's continue the explanation. The RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, as well as the counter buffer 203c shown in Figure 6. It also has a work area (work region) where various flags, counters, and input/output (I/O) values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, by supplying backup voltage from the power supply unit 115. All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other issue, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. Conversely, when the power is restored (including power restoration after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to its state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main process (see Figure 30) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of the values written to RAM 203 is performed during the power-up process (see Figure 28). Furthermore, the NMI terminal of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or other issue. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see Figure 49) as a power outage process is immediately executed.

The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208, including a group of switches (e.g., a large prize slot switch 65c) and a group of sensors for detecting balls that have entered each prize slot 63, 64, 65, 71, 71a, balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and balls that have passed through the out slot 66 to the ball discharge path. It also includes a setting key 501 for setting the startup mode when the power is turned on, a setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value when pressed in "setting change mode," and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the output side of the input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol hold lamp 84, the large prize opening solenoid 65b for driving the large prize opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 to open and close forward around its lower edge, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the retractable plate 72a of the normal electric electric 72, and other solenoids 209. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208, 502, and 503, and the state of the setting key 501, and sets the display content of the probability display device 504 as one of the results of executing these processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211, which is the arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 used as work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) where various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by a backup voltage supplied from the power supply unit 115, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Furthermore, similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 49) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to input/output ports 215 via bus lines 214, which consist of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, and other components are connected to the input/output ports 215, respectively. Furthermore, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting dispensed prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that this prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and these are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and, under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping ball launching is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is energized in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (speaker, etc., not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing of lamps from the lamp display device (illumination units 29-33, indicator lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the settings of the display modes for effects performed on the third symbol display device 81, such as fluctuation effects, instructions for playing effects described later, and "hold change notification."

The MPU 221, which is the arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 that is used as work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, voice output device 226, lamp display device 227, and frame buttons 22 are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands from each other.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage of the animation displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or to change the background image such as the "Super Reach" animation pattern. It also instructs the display control device 114 to display the animation on the third symbol display device 81 based on the press of the frame button 22.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81. Based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113, it executes control of the display of the third symbol variation effect, instructions for playing the effect, and the "hold change notification" on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the instructions for playing the effect will be described later in Figures 57 to 59.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to various parts of the pachinko machine 10, and a power outage monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power outages, etc. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each control device 110-114, etc., through a power supply path (not shown). In essence, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24-volt AC voltage supplied from an external source, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies these 12-volt, 5-volt, and backup voltages to each control device 110-114, etc., as needed.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control unit 111 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage falls below 22 volts, and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Upon output of the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 49). The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the control system's drive voltage of 5 volts at a normal value for a sufficient amount of time for the execution of NMI interrupt processing, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

Here, with reference to Figure 26, the detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 26 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as well as fixed value data, including at least the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. These tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to perform pre-reading processing based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon a start-up win and transmitted by the held ball count command, as well as the jackpot random number table 222a, jackpot type table 222b, stop pattern table 222c, and variation pattern table 222d.

Then, this pre-reading process determines what kind of animation the pending animation that was the target of the pre-reading process will result in (whether it will result in a jackpot, a "reach" display, etc.) before the animation is executed. Based on this, the system determines the execution of various animations and controls the content (and timing) of the "pending animation change notification" which changes the display pattern of the pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4).

The RAM 223 is provided with at least the following flags: Special Feature 1 variation start flag 223a, Special Feature 2 variation start flag 223b, sub-first reserved ball counter 223c, sub-second reserved ball counter 223d, first reserved information storage area 223e, second reserved information storage area 223f, first execution information storage area 223g, second execution information storage area 223h, left-hand shooting instruction execution flag 223i, and right-hand shooting instruction execution flag 223j.

The Special Symbol 1 Variation Start Flag 223a is a flag that, when in the ON state, indicates that the variation effect of the first special symbol should begin. This Special Symbol 1 Variation Start Flag 223a is initially set to OFF when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a Special Symbol 1 Stop Type command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1225 in Figure 53). It is then turned OFF when the variation effect of the first special symbol is set, regardless of the execution status of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1302 in Figure 55).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, upon the activation of the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a, performs a setting process for the variation of the first special symbol (see S1307 to S1309 in Figure 55) to execute the variation of the first special symbol when a variation of the first special symbol exists in standby mode and the game state is in "normal game state" (see S1306: Yes in Figure 55), that is, when the game state is one in which the variation of the first special symbol is encouraged.

Furthermore, even if the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is ON, if the game state is one of the following states where the variation performance of the first special symbol is not recommended: "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "probability variation state," "latent probability variation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see S1306: No. in Figure 55), the shift processing of the first reserve information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g, as well as the subtraction processing of the sub-first reserve ball counter 223c, will be executed (see S1303 to S1305 in Figure 55), but the setting processing of the variation performance of the first special symbol (see S1307 to S1309 in Figure 55) will not be executed. With this configuration, in states where the variation animation of the first special symbol is not recommended, such as the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "probability variation state," "latent probability variation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," the third symbol display device 81 will not execute (display) the variation animation and the number of reserved balls related to the first special symbol, and will only execute (display) the variation animation and the number of reserved balls related to the recommended second special symbol.

The Special Symbol 2 Variation Start Flag 223b is a flag that, when turned on, indicates that the variation effect of the second special symbol should begin. This Special Symbol 2 Variation Start Flag 223b is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a Special Symbol 2 Stop Type command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1235 in Figure 54). It is then turned off when the variation effect of the second special symbol is set, regardless of the execution status of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1311 in Figure 55).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, upon the activation of the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b, performs a setting process for the variation of the second special symbol to execute the variation of the second special symbol (see S1316 to S1318 in Figure 55) when a variation of the second special symbol exists in standby mode and the game state is other than "normal game state" (see S1315: No. in Figure 55), that is, when the variation of the second special symbol is encouraged in a "probability variation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "latent probability variation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state."

Furthermore, even when the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is ON, if the game state is a "normal game state" where the variation effect of the first special symbol is encouraged (see S1315: Yes in Figure 55), the shift processing of the second reserve information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h, as well as the subtraction processing of the sub-second reserve ball counter 223d, are executed (see S1312 to S1314 in Figure 55), but the setting processing for the variation effect of the second special symbol (see S1316 to S1318 in Figure 55) is not executed. This configuration allows the third symbol display device 81 to not execute (display) the variation effect and reserve ball count related to the second special symbol in a "normal game state" where the variation effect of the second special symbol is not encouraged, and to only execute (display) the recommended variation effect and reserve ball count of the first special symbol.

The sub-first reserved ball counter 223c, similar to the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting counts) for the first special symbol variation performance (dynamic display) that can be executed on the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), up to a maximum of four times, in the first special symbol variation performance held in reserve by the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command (reserved ball command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages that number of reserved balls using the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c.

Specifically, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the first reserved ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol variation effect is increased by a ball entering the first start opening 64, and the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a in the main control device 110 is increased, the device stores the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol variation effect held in the main control device 110) included in the first reserved ball command into the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c (see S1207 in Figure 53).

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the special symbol 1 variation pattern command and special symbol 1 stop type command, which correspond to the variation performance of the first special symbol, transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is decremented in the main control device 110. Upon receiving these commands, regardless of the execution status on the third symbol display device 81, the audio lamp control device 113 decrements (updates) the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c by 1 when setting the variation performance of the first special symbol (see S1305 in Figure 55). In this way, the audio lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c according to the commands transmitted from the main control device 110 in conjunction with the update of the first reserved ball counter 203a. Therefore, the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c can be updated in synchronization with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110.

The sub-second reserved ball counter 223d, similar to the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting counts) for the second special symbol variation effect (dynamic display) that can be executed on the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), up to a maximum of four times, in the second special symbol variation effect that is held in reserve in the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages that number using the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d.

Specifically, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a second reserved ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol variation effect is increased by ball entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b in the main control device 110 is increased, the device stores the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol variation effect held in the main control device 110) included in the second reserved ball command in the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d (see S1211 in Figure 52).

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the special symbol 2 variation pattern command and special symbol 2 stop type command, which correspond to the variation performance of the second special symbol, transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is decreased in the main control device 110. Upon receiving these commands, regardless of the execution status on the third symbol display device 81, the audio lamp control device 113 decreases (updates) the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d by 1 when setting the variation performance of the second special symbol (see S1314 in Figure 55). In this way, the audio lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d according to the commands transmitted from the main control device 110 in conjunction with the update of the second reserved ball counter 203b. Therefore, the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d can be updated in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d are used to display the reserved symbols and the executed symbols on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable performance of each special symbol is encouraged during gameplay. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113, upon receiving a first reserved ball count command or a second reserved ball count command, stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c or sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in Figure 52). It also updates the values of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c or sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d upon receiving a special pattern command and a special type command for special symbols 1, or a special pattern command and a special type command for special symbols 2 (see S1305 or S1314 in Figure 55). At the timing of these updates, the device notifies the display control device 114 of the stored or updated values of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c and sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d corresponding to the special symbols recommended according to the game state, by transmitting a display first reserved ball count command or a display second reserved ball count command to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the first or second reserved ball count command for display, it controls the image rendering so that the reserved ball count values indicated by the command—that is, the values of the first and second reserved ball count counters 223c and 223d of the audio lamp control device 113—and the execution symbols indicating the currently running variation effect are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4(b)) of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110, and the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d is changed in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 4(b)) can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 related to the recommended special symbols. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the recommended special symbol variation effect is held according to the game state.

The first reserved information storage area 223e is an area for storing information necessary for performing the variation effects of the reserved first special symbol, specifically the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 related to the variation effects of the first special symbol, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon start of a winning combination and transmitted by the first reserved ball count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the variation effect of the first special symbol using the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is an area for storing information necessary for performing variation effects on the reserved second special symbol, specifically the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 related to the variation effects of the second special symbol, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon starting a win and transmitted by the second reserved ball count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the variation effect of the second special symbol using the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The first execution information storage area 223g is an area for storing information on the variation performance of the first special symbol, which is performed at least by the special symbol display device 37 and performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. Specifically, it stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon starting a win and transmitted by the first reserved ball count command.

When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 detects that it is time to start the execution of the variation effect for the first special symbol, it shifts the information for performing the variation effect (values such as counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first hold information storage area 223e to the first execution information storage area 223g in order to execute the settings for the variation effect of the first special symbol.

The second execution information storage area 223h is an area for storing information on the variation performance of the second special symbol, which is performed at least by the special symbol display device 37 and performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. Specifically, it stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon starting a win and transmitted by the second reserved ball count command.

When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 detects that it is time to start the execution of the second special symbol variation effect, it shifts the information for performing the variation effect (values such as counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the second hold information storage area 223f to the second execution information storage area 223h in order to execute the settings for the second special symbol variation effect.

The "Performance-Oriented Left-Handed Playing Instruction Completed" flag 223i is a flag used to determine whether or not the performance-oriented playing instruction has been completed, which is executed only once when transitioning from a right-handed playing state to a left-handed playing state, that is, when transitioning to a "normal playing state" where left-handed playing is performed after the time-saving condition is met in the "normal high probability time-shortened state" or "normal low probability time-shortened state" where right-handed playing is performed. This performance-oriented left-handed playing instruction completed flag 223i is set to "on" as an initial value during the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1051 in Figure 50). By setting it in this way, when starting left-handed playing after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 has been executed, for example, when the hall opens for business, the performance-oriented playing instruction does not need to be executed. Furthermore, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (i.e., the "high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," "low probability time reduction state," or jackpot state), and the "performance right-hand shooting instruction completed" flag 223j is not on, it is set to off (see S1407 in Figure 56). On the other hand, if the game is in the "normal game state" and the "performance left-hand shooting instruction completed" flag 223i is not on (i.e., the performance shooting instruction has not been performed), it is set to on after the performance left-hand shooting instruction command is set (see S1414 in Figure 54).

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if the "Performance Left-Handed Shooting Instruction Completed" flag 223i is set to ON, that is, if a performance shooting instruction has been executed at least once after transitioning from right-handed shooting to left-handed shooting (or after the startup process has been executed), the machine is configured not to execute the performance shooting instruction again. By referring to the "Performance Left-Handed Shooting Instruction Completed" flag 223i, the number of performance shooting instructions executed after transitioning from right-handed shooting to left-handed shooting can be limited to one.

The "Performance Right-Handed Play Instruction Completed" flag 223j is a flag used to determine whether or not the performance-oriented play instruction has been completed, which is executed only once when transitioning from a left-handed play state to a right-handed play state, that is, when a jackpot is won in the "normal play state" where left-handed play is performed, or when the ceiling is reached in the "normal play state" and the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state". This performance-oriented right-handed play instruction completed flag 223j is set to off as an initial value during the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1052 in Figure 50). Furthermore, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (i.e., the "normal high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," or jackpot state), and the flag 223j indicating that the right-hand shooting instruction for the performance has been implemented is not on (i.e., the performance shooting instruction has not been implemented), it is set to on after the right-hand shooting instruction command for the performance is set (see S1407 in Figure 56). On the other hand, if the game is in the "normal game state" and the flag 223i indicating that the left-hand shooting instruction for the performance has been implemented is not on, it is set to off (see S1415 in Figure 56).

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if the "Performance Right-Handed Shooting Instruction Completed" flag 223j is set to ON, that is, if a performance shooting instruction has been executed even once after transitioning to right-handed shooting, the machine is configured not to execute the performance shooting instruction again. By referring to the "Performance Right-Handed Shooting Instruction Completed" flag 223j, the number of performance shooting instructions executed after transitioning from left-handed shooting to right-handed shooting can be limited to one.

Here, with reference to Figure 27, the details of the first reserved information storage area 223e, the first execution information storage area 223g, and the second reserved information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h will be described. Figure 27 is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the first reserved information storage area 223e, the second reserved information storage area 223f, the first execution information storage area 223g, and the second execution information storage area 223h.

The first reserved information storage area 223e has four areas: the first to fourth reserved information storage areas. Each of the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 is provided with at least the following: a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored; a jackpot type counter storage area 223e2 where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored; a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored; and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, the second reserved information storage area 223f, like the first reserved information storage area 223e, has four areas: the first to fourth second reserved information storage areas. Each of the first to fourth second reserved information storage areas is provided with at least the following: a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored; a jackpot type counter storage area 223f2 where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored; a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored; and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, the first execution information storage area 223g includes at least the following: a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1, which stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the currently running variation effect of the first special symbol; a jackpot type counter storage area 223g2, which stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2; a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3, which stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3; and a variation type counter storage area 223g4, which stores the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Furthermore, the second execution information storage area 223h includes at least the following: a jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1, which stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the currently running variation effect of the second special symbol; a jackpot type counter storage area 223h2, which stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2; a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3, which stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3; and a variation type counter storage area 223h4, which stores the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, the first execution information storage area 223g is the area corresponding to the currently running variation animation of the first special symbol. The second execution information storage area 223h is the area related to the currently running variation animation of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the first hold information storage area 223e corresponds to the variation animation of the first special symbol that was chronologically the first to be held among the held variation animations; the second hold information storage area corresponds to the variation animation of the first special symbol that was chronologically the second oldest to be held among the held variation animations; the third hold information storage area corresponds to the variation animation of the first special symbol that was chronologically the third oldest to be held among the held variation animations; and the fourth hold information storage area corresponds to the variation animation of the first special symbol that was chronologically the fourth oldest to be held among the held variation animations.

Furthermore, the first area of the second reserved information storage area 223f corresponds to the first reserved special symbol variation animation among the reserved special symbol variation animations, the second area of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the second oldest reserved special symbol variation animation among the reserved special symbol variation animations, the third area of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the third oldest reserved special symbol variation animation among the reserved special symbol variation animations, and the fourth area of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the fourth oldest reserved special symbol variation animation among the reserved special symbol variation animations.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the first reserved ball count command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 from the first reserved ball count command. The audio lamp control device 113 then stores the extracted values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, respectively, in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and variation type counter storage area 223e4, which are areas within the first reserved ball count storage area 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball information storage area that correspond to the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved ball count command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved ball count command is X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4), then the number of reserved special symbol variation animations at that time is X. The values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command correspond to the variation animation of the first special symbol that was reserved Xth in time. Therefore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 in the first reserved ball information storage area X are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command in the first reserved ball storage area X of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In other words, the same values as those of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area X of the main control device 110 are stored in the first reserved ball information storage area X.

Furthermore, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball count command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 from the second reserved ball count command. The audio lamp control device 113 then stores the extracted values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, respectively, in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, and variation type counter storage area 223f4, which correspond to the reserved ball count included in the third reserved ball count command, within the corresponding third reserved ball information storage areas 1 to 4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball count command is X (1 ≤ Y ≤ 4), then the number of reserved special symbol variation animations at that time is Y. The values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command correspond to the variation animation of the first special symbol that was reserved Y times in time. Therefore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to each counter storage area 223f1 to 223f4 in the first reserved ball information storage area Y are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command in the second reserved ball storage area Y of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In other words, the same values as those of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved ball area Y of the main control device 110 are stored in the second reserved ball information storage area Y.

On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the Special Symbol 1 variation pattern command and the Special Symbol 1 stop type command from the main control device 110, which signify the start of the variation performance of the first special symbol, it executes a process to shift the information stored in the first reserved information storage area 223e to the first execution information storage area 223g. In other words, if reserved information related to the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variation performance of the first special symbol that was reserved first in time begins. Therefore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area corresponding to the variation performance of the first reserved special symbol are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g, which corresponds to the variation performance of the first special symbol currently being executed.

Then, if the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area are moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the second reserved information storage area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area. The system moves the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage third area to each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage second area, and moves the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage fourth area to each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage third area.

Furthermore, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the Special Symbol 2 Variation Pattern command and the Special Symbol 2 Stop Type command from the main control device 110, which signify the start of the variation performance of the second special symbol, it executes a process to shift the information stored in the second hold information storage area 223f to the second execution information storage area 223h. In other words, if hold information related to the second special symbol exists, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that was chronologically held first begins. Therefore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage area 1, corresponding to the variation performance of the first held second special symbol, are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h, corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol currently being executed.

Then, if the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage area 1 are moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage area 2 are moved to each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage area 1. The system moves the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1-223f4 of the second reserved information storage area 3 to the respective storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the second reserved information storage area 2, and moves the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1-223f4 of the second reserved information storage area 4 to the respective storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the second reserved information storage area 3 to the respective storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the second reserved information storage area 3.

As a result, the first execution information storage area 223g will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first held ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110. Similarly, the second execution information storage area 223h will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second held ball execution area 203g of the main control device 110. Furthermore, the first to fourth held information storage areas and the second to fourth held information storage areas will each store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first held ball storage area 203d and the second held ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first and second special symbols currently being executed and held in the main control device 110 in the first execution information storage area 223g, the second execution information storage area 223h, and the first held information storage area 223e and the second held information storage area 223f.

In the sound lamp control device 113, when performing a pre-reading process (not shown), the number of reserved special symbol variation effects (reserved ball count) for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined from the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d. Based on this number of reserved balls, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area where the variation effects for the first special symbol or the second special symbol are reserved, among the first to fourth reserved information storage areas or the second reserved information storage areas, are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not a jackpot will occur in that variation effect, the variation time, etc. For example, if the value of sub-first reserved ball counter 223c is "1" and the value of sub-second reserved ball counter 223d is "0", then the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol's variation animation is 1, and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol's variation animation is 0. Therefore, for the first reserved ball information storage area, the values of the stored counters C1-C3 and CS1 are read ahead and a determination is made. Similarly, if the value of sub-first reserved ball counter 223c is "0" and the value of sub-second reserved ball counter 223d is "4", then the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol's variation animation is 0, and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol's variation animation is 4. Therefore, for the fourth reserved ball information storage area, the values of the stored counters C1-C3 and CS1 are read ahead and a determination is made.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to transmit commands in only one direction from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113, and the sound lamp control unit 113 cannot access the RAM 203, etc., of the main control unit 110. However, the sound lamp control unit 113 is provided with a first reserved information storage area 223e and a second reserved information storage area 223f, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first and second special symbols reserved by the main control unit 110 in the sound lamp control unit 113 as well. By referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved information storage area 223e and the second reserved information storage area 223f, the sound lamp control unit 113 can perform pre-reading processing. That is, when the variation effect of the reserved first and/or second special symbols is executed, the result of that variation effect (whether or not it results in a jackpot, what the variation time will be, etc.) can be determined before the variation effect is executed, and the execution of various effects can be decided.

Furthermore, the aforementioned shift processing in the first reserved information storage area 223e or the second reserved information storage area 223f, and the first execution information storage area 223g or the second execution information storage area 223h, is performed based on the number of reserved balls when the Special Feature 1 variation pattern command and Special Feature 2 stop type command or Special Feature 2 variation pattern command and Special Feature 2 stop type command are received (the values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c and sub-second reserved ball counter 223d before the update based on the reception of the Special Feature 1 variation pattern command and Special Feature 1 stop type command or Special Feature 2 variation pattern command and Special Feature 2 stop type command). The data movement (shift) is performed only for the areas corresponding to the reserved variation effects among the first to fourth reserved information storage areas or the first to fourth reserved information storage areas of the second reserved information storage area.

For example, suppose the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c before the update, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, is "4", and data is stored in all areas of the first reserved information storage area 223e (first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4). In this case, the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, the data in the first reserved information storage area 3 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 2, and the data in the first reserved information storage area 4 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c before the update is "2" when the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, and the data in the second reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, thereby ending the data shift. As described above, in this embodiment, since data shifting is not performed for the third and fourth reserved information storage areas where no variation effects are reserved, the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

Furthermore, regardless of whether data exists or not, the system may be configured to shift each data point in the first reserved information storage areas 1-4 or the second reserved information storage areas 1-4 to an area with an area number one less (first execution information storage area 223g or second execution information storage area 223h, or first reserved information storage areas 1-3 or second reserved information storage areas 1-3). In this case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (reserved) in each area of the first reserved information storage areas 1-4 or the second reserved information storage areas 1-4, thus simplifying program creation.

Returning to Figure 5, let's continue the explanation. The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until the corresponding processing is performed.

The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using the FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see Figure 52) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first unprocessed command stored in the command memory area is read. The command determination process analyzes this command, and processing is performed according to that command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81. Based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113, it controls the special symbol variation and continuous予告 (pre-announcement) effects on the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation pattern of the variation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 differs depending on the game state, and the recommended ball launching pattern for each game state is shown to the player. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is encouraged, the main display right-handed play instruction 89 (see Figure 4) is hidden, and each variation symbol, composed of Arabic numerals, changes with vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form only one effective line (a so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, in the "probability variation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "latent probability variation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where right-handed play is encouraged, the main display right-handed play instruction 89 is displayed, and each variation symbol, composed of Chinese numerals, changes with vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form one effective line (a so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In this way, by clearly differentiating the display patterns of the fluctuating symbols in each game state, it becomes easier for players to recognize the game state, and also easier for them to recognize the game mode (launch mode) necessary for playing the game in the recommended manner.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in addition to the main display right-hand play instruction 89, a performance-oriented play instruction (performance-oriented right-hand play instruction 81d; see Figure 57(d)) is also provided to make it easier for the player to understand whether to play left-handed or right-handed, and when to start. This performance-oriented play instruction displays a play suggestion only at specific timings, such as when switching from left-handed to right-handed play, or conversely, when switching from right-handed to left-handed play.

The main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance-oriented shooting instructions are important display information that suggests how to play to the player. Therefore, they are prioritized over other display content executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the third symbol in each symbol row or the super reach effect) and are configured to be displayed at the forefront. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the performance-oriented shooting instructions only suggest how to play at specific timings. Therefore, they are displayed largely within the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to make the instructions easier for the player to understand.

Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, in the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when executing this performance-oriented playing instruction, the system is configured to determine at what timing to execute the instruction by referring to the current game state, the execution state of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the type of special symbol being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 56). This prevents the execution of the performance-oriented playing instruction from diminishing the player's enjoyment by interrupting the execution of the special symbol variation performance on the third symbol display device 81, and prevents the appearance of a right-handed play suggestion during left-handed play while the first special symbol variation performance is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, thus preventing the player from becoming confused.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a special symbol variation effect is set to be executed (recommended) according to the game state, and the variation effects of other special symbols (not recommended) are configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm. Specifically, in the "normal game state" in which left-handed play is encouraged and balls can be entered into the first start opening 64, only the variation effect and hold display of the first special symbol can be executed in the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect and hold display of the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm and the cockpit display area Db. Furthermore, in "probability fluctuation states," "normal symbol high probability time reduction states," "latent probability fluctuation states," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction states," where right-handed play is encouraged and balls can enter the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, only the fluctuation animation and hold display of the second special symbol can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the fluctuation animation and hold display of the first special symbol are not executed in the main display area Dm and the cockpit display area Db. This configuration prevents players from experiencing discomfort (a negative impression) caused by the execution of unencouraged fluctuation animations (which make it difficult to derive the game result due to the long fluctuation time) in the main display area Dm and the cockpit display area Db, which are the primary display areas for game results. This provides a comfortable gaming experience and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 28 to 49. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly categorized into: a startup process initiated upon power-on; a main process executed after the startup process; a timer interrupt process initiated periodically (at a 2-millisecond interval in this embodiment); and an NMI interrupt process initiated by the input of a power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this startup process, first, an initial value setting process is performed upon power-on (S101). For example, permission to access RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process ("1 second" in this embodiment) is performed to wait for the sub-control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational (S102). Then, access to RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

Next, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 503 (see Figure 5) on the main control unit 110 is turned on (S104). If the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether the power outage information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), it is possible that the processing during the previous power outage did not complete successfully. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203.

If information about a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S107: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case, the process proceeds to S116.

Furthermore, as will be described later in the process of S156 in Figure 30, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Alternatively, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined by whether or not the keyword written to a predetermined area of RAM 203 is correctly stored.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power outage information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S107: Yes), the power outage information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on or not (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is ON (S109: Yes), since the RAM erase switch 503 was OFF and the setting key 501 was ON when the power was turned on, in order to start the startup mode in "setting confirmation mode", first the probability display device 504 starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is OFF (S111), and the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned OFF (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned OFF (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 ends (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" ends, and the process moves to S113. Furthermore, in the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the process will skip steps S110 to S112 and proceed to S113 in order to start the system in "normal mode".

In the S113 process, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value and set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 (S113). Then, interrupts are enabled (S114). Finally, the process proceeds to the main processing described later (see Figure 30).

The setting value command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing described later (see S201 in Figure 31). Upon receiving this setting value command, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to store (remember) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in the setting value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, in the process of S104, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is ON (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is ON or OFF in order to determine whether to start the system in "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode" (S115).

If, during the process in S115, it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 in order to start the system in "RAM Clear Mode".

In the process of S116, the initialization process of RAM 203 (S116, S117, S171, and S172) is executed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when initializing RAM data at power-on, regardless of any setting changes, such as at the start of hall operations, the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed while the power is turned on. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed during the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117, S171, and S172) is executed. Similarly, if no power outage information is set (S105: No) or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the RAM 203 initialization process (S116, S117, S171, and S172) is executed.

During the RAM initialization process (S116, S117, S171, and S172), i.e., in "RAM Clear Mode," the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then initial values are set in RAM 203 (for example, the first reserved ball counter 203a is cleared to "0") (S117). Furthermore, the ceiling setting flag 203q is set to off (S171), and the value of the ceiling reach count counter 203p is cleared to "0" (S172). After the RAM 203 initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the S115 process that the setting key 501 is ON (S115: Yes), the setting change process is performed to set the startup mode to "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, referring to Figure 29, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. Figure 29 is a flowchart of this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is executed when the startup mode is "setting change mode," and it is a process for receiving and confirming changes (updates) to the probability setting values from hall staff, etc.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the start of displaying the current probability setting value is set on the probability display device 504 (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. This setting of the start of displaying the probability setting value causes the probability display device 504 to begin displaying the probability setting value.

Furthermore, the probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value, rather than being the value set before the power was cut off. That is, when the startup mode is set to "setting change mode," the probability display device 504 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. This specific probability setting value could be, for example, the minimum value of the probability setting value ("1" to "3"), "1," the intermediate value, "2," or the maximum value, "3." This allows hall staff and others to change the probability setting value from a specific value, regardless of the value set before the power was cut off.

On the other hand, if the startup mode is set to "setting change mode," the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off. This allows hall staff and others to change the probability setting value while considering the setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

Furthermore, when the startup mode is set to "setting change mode," the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value as "2" if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off was "2" or higher, and start displaying the probability setting value as it was set before the power was cut off if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off was "1." For example, if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is high, such as "3," there are many cases where it may be desirable to slightly decrease the probability setting value (for example, by 1). In such cases, if the probability setting value is displayed as it was before the power was cut off, the following problem arises. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and if the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on when the probability setting value is "3," the probability setting value is reset to "1." Therefore, for example, if you want to change the probability setting value from "3" to "2," you have to repeatedly turn the RAM erase switch 503 on and off until the probability setting value has almost completed a full cycle. In contrast, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off is high, the probability setting value can be updated while minimizing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on by starting the display of the probability setting value as "2".

Next, in process S122, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122). If it is not within the predetermined range, i.e., if it is an abnormal probability setting value (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. This initial value may be the minimum value of the probability setting value ("1" to "3"), which is "1", the midpoint of the probability setting value, which is "2", or the maximum value of the probability setting value, which is "3". On the other hand, if the result of process S122 is determined to be within the range of "1" to "3" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the process of S123 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In step S124, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

If the result of S125 determines that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. However, if it determines that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

The probability setting update in S126 is performed by adding 1 to the previous probability setting if it was between "1" and "2", and resetting it to "1" if it was previously "3". The probability setting updated by the S126 process is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The loop process S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues until it is determined in the S124 process that the RAM erase switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes). If the S124 process determines that the RAM erase switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is confirmed as the probability setting value to be used in the game (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a is set according to that probability setting value (S128).

After the process in S128, it is then determined whether the setting key 501 has entered the off state (S129). In the process of S129, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has entered the off state when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, or it may be determined that the setting key 501 has entered the off state when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As long as the result of processing S129 determines that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S129: No), processing S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, if the result of processing S129 determines that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S129: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is terminated (S130), and this setting change process (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is complete, the system returns to the startup process (see Figure 28), proceeds to S116, and executes the RAM 203 initialization process (S116, S117, S171, and S172) to erase (clear) the data in RAM 203. In this way, by having hall staff or other personnel turn on the RAM erase switch 503 in the S124 process to confirm the probability setting value, it is possible to strongly inform them that the data in RAM 203 will be erased afterward.

Furthermore, in the process of S124, the probability setting value was determined by detecting the ON state of the RAM erase switch 503. However, it may also be configured to determine the probability setting value by detecting the OFF state of the setting key 501.

Next, referring to Figure 30, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 after the startup process described above will be explained. Figure 30 is a flowchart of this main processing. This main processing broadly consists of counter update processing and power outage processing.

In the main processing, first, it is determined whether or not power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S151). If power outage information is not stored in RAM 203 (S151: No), then the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in this case, the first initial random number counter CINI1, the second initial random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, 1 is added to both the first and second initial random number counters CINI1 and CINI2, and when their values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, "9999" and "99"), they are cleared to "0". Then, the updated values of the first and second initial random number counters CINI1 and CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the timer interrupt processing in S207 (see Figure 31) described later (S153), and the process proceeds to S151.

While this main process is running, the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31), described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). The timer interrupt process executes different processes depending on the game state. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the variable prize entry device 65 is controlled, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 83 is controlled. Furthermore, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 begins, the number of jackpot random values compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is a high-probability or low-probability state. Therefore, the time required for one timer interrupt process to execute varies depending on the game state. Consequently, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the game state at that time.

The processes S152 and S153 described above, which are part of the main processing, will be executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt processing. In other words, the updates of the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 will be repeatedly performed using this remaining time. Therefore, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular win counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2, randomness can be introduced to the updates of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular win counter C4, which use these as initial values for updates.

In the process of S151, if the RAM 203 has stored information about a power outage (S151: Yes), then the power is cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing described later in Figure 49 is executed, and the power outage processing from S154 onwards is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S155). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved (S156), access to RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, the checksum value of the backed-up stack area and work area of RAM 203.

The S151 process is executed at the end of one cycle of the S152 and S153 processes, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31). This allows the main control unit 110 to confirm the power outage information at the time when the various settings via the timer interrupt process are completed and the updates of counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished. Therefore, when recovering from a power outage, processing can begin from the S151 process after the startup process is complete. In other words, processing can begin from the S151 process, similar to when the system is initialized during the startup process.

Therefore, during power-off processing, even without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer, the process can start from S151 because the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) during the initial setup process (S101). As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and the main control unit 110 can perform accurate control without malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, referring to Figure 31, the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt processing, the external output processing is performed first (S201). The timer interrupt processing and main processing (see Figure 30) generate commands or signals to be sent to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc., based on various processes. If a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. If a signal is generated, the signal is output to the device corresponding to that signal (for example, an external output terminal board (not shown) for connecting the hall computer and the pachinko machine 10). In the external output processing of S201, the output data of the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub-side, and the above signals are output to the various devices.

After the processing in S201, the system then reads the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 (S202), and then executes the win processing for each special symbol when a win occurs (S203). This win processing (S203) will be described later in Figure 41.

Following S203, the next step is to execute the normal electric motor control process (S204), which controls the drive of the normal electric motor 72. In short, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 displays a variable normal symbol. If a winning normal symbol (e.g., a "○" symbol) appears as a result of the variable normal symbol display, the normal electric motor 72 is opened for a predetermined time. Conversely, if a losing normal symbol (e.g., a "×" symbol) appears, the normal electric motor 72 remains closed. This normal electric motor control process will be described later with reference to Figure 48.

After the processing in S204, the next step is to read the various prize-winning switches (S205). Specifically, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 are read, and the state of these switches 208 is determined to store detection information (prize-winning detection information). Furthermore, based on the prize-winning detection information, a prize-winning command corresponding to the number of balls won to be sent to the payout control unit 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. As a result, the predetermined prize-winning command is transmitted to the payout control unit 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next.

Next, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value (9999 in the first embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value (99 in the first embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1, and normal hit counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1, and normal hit counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in the first embodiment, "9999", "99", "99", "9", "9", "99", respectively), they are each cleared to "0". Also, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or normal hit counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or normal hit counter C4, and that initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or normal hit counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the starting prize-winning process is executed in response to the winning ball entering the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, or the lower second starting port 71a (S208). Details of this starting prize-winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to Figure 32.

Next, a gate passage process is executed to determine whether a ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S209). If this gate passage process (S209) determines that a ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the normal symbol payout counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c. This value is then stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203i (see Figure 6), and the number of hold balls for the variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol hold lamp 84. Details of this gate passage process (S209) will be described later with reference to Figure 33.

After executing the gate passage process (S209), the system executes a special symbol variation process (S210) that includes dynamic display of the special symbols using the special symbol display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third symbol using the third symbol display device 81, based on the processing details of the start-up prize entry process (S208). Details of the special symbol variation process (S210) will be described later with reference to Figure 34.

Next, based on the processing content of the gate passage process (S209), a determination of whether the regular symbols are correct or incorrect is made, and a regular symbol variation process is executed (S211), which is a setting process for performing a variable display of the regular symbols on the regular symbol display device 83 based on the determination result. In this regular symbol variation process (S211), the probability of a regular symbol winning is set to either a high probability (for example, 99/100) or a low probability (70/100) depending on the game state described above. Then, the regular symbols are displayed variably based on the correct or incorrect result, and the display result corresponding to the correct or incorrect result is displayed on the regular symbol display device 83. Details of the regular symbol variation process (S211) will be described later with reference to Figure 47.

After executing the general pattern change processing (S211), the launch control processing is executed (S212), and then other processing that should be performed periodically is executed (S213), after which this timer interrupt processing ends.

The launch control process (S212) detects, via the touch sensor 51a, that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and determines whether to turn the ball launch on or off, provided that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. If the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to send a ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the next timer interrupt process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, we have described a case where periodically executed processes are performed using timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), and the updates of counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are performed in the main process during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, it is also possible to configure some or all of the processes that were executed in the timer interrupt processing to be executed in the main process at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 milliseconds). For example, in this embodiment, some or all of the prize ball counting signal, payout abnormality signal reading process (S202), winning process (S203), normal power control process (S204), and switch reading process (S205), which were executed in the timer interrupt processing, may be configured to be executed in the main process at 2 millisecond intervals instead of using timer interrupt processing.

In this case, a step may be included in the main processing to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing that is executed at predetermined intervals may be executed only. The updates of each counter, CINI1, CINI2, and CS1, may be performed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. This means that the updates of each counter, CINI1, CINI2, and CS1, will be performed during the remaining time of the processing that is executed at predetermined intervals. However, since the time required for the processing that is executed at predetermined intervals varies depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter, CINI1, CINI2, and CS1, can be updated randomly.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 32, we will explain the start-up award processing (S208), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 32 is a flowchart of this start-up award processing (S208).

The start-up prize-winning process (S208) determines whether a ball has entered the first start-up port 64, the upper second start-up port 71, or the lower second start-up port 71a. If a ball has entered, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the start-up port 64, 71, or 71a where the ball entered. Furthermore, the values of the reserved counters C1 to C3 and CS1, along with the number of reserved balls, are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this start-up prize-winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the first start-up slot 64 (start-up prize-winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the first start-up slot switch (not shown), which detects ball entry into the first start-up slot 64 (prize-winning), read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 31), the ball entry into the first start-up slot 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 31).

If the determination in S301 indicates that the ball has entered the first starting gate 64 (i.e., a starting entry has occurred) (S301: Yes), then the system determines whether the game state is "normal game state" or not, that is, whether left-handed play is encouraged or not (S302). If the determination is not "normal game state" (S302: No), it means that the ball entered the first starting gate 64 using left-handed play, which is not encouraged (prohibited), rather than the encouraged right-handed play. In this case, the system outputs an alarm sound from the audio output device 226 (see Figure 5) and performs left-handed error processing, such as executing a special playing instruction "Please play to the right" on the third symbol display device 81 (S303), and then proceeds to S305.

By configuring the system in this way, when a ball is detected by the first start-up switch (not shown) in the "normal high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," or "normal low probability time reduction state," where left-handed play is not encouraged, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed. This discourages players from playing left-handed in game states where left-handed play is not encouraged (encouraging them to play right-handed), minimizes gameplay deviating from the recommended game specifications, and achieves the intended gameplay in each game state.

Furthermore, if the game state is determined to be "normal game state" during processing S302 (S302: Yes), then left-handed play is recommended. Therefore, processing S303 is skipped, the left-handed play error processing in S303 is not performed, and the process proceeds to S305.

If, as a result of the processing in S301, it is determined that a ball has entered the first start opening 64 (a start entry has occurred) (S301: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N1 for the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is less than the upper limit (4 in the first embodiment) (S305). If, even though a ball has entered the first start opening 64, the number of reserved balls N1 < 4 (S305: No), then this start entry processing (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31).

On the other hand, if the number of balls held for operation N1 < 4 (S305: Yes), the value of the first ball held counter 203a (number of balls held for operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S306). Then, since this is a win in the first starting opening 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first ball storage area 203d is set as the storage location for each random value C1 to C3 and CS1 (S307), and the process proceeds to S312.

In the process of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first start opening 64 (S301: No), then it is determined whether the ball has entered the upper second start opening 71 (start win) (S304). Here, similar to the first start opening 64, the ball entering the upper second start opening 71 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 31) based on the output signal of the upper second start opening switch (not shown), which detects ball entry (win) into the upper second start opening 71, read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 31).

If it is determined that the ball has entered the upper second starting port 71 (i.e., a starting entry has occurred) (S304: Yes), the process proceeds to S309.

Furthermore, in the process of S304, if it is determined that a ball has entered the upper second starting opening 71 (S304: Yes), it is possible to determine whether the game state is "normal game state" or not. If it is determined that the game state is "normal game state," then, since left-handed play is encouraged in this game state, the system may be configured to perform a normal right-handed play error processing.

In the process of S304, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the upper second start port 71 (S304: No), then it is determined whether the ball has entered the lower second start port 71a (start entry) (S308). Here, similar to the first start port 64 and the upper second start port 71, the entry of the ball into the lower second start port 71a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 31) based on the output signal of the lower second start port switch (not shown) that detects ball entry into the lower second start port 71a, which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 31).

If it is determined that a ball has entered the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a (i.e., a start-up has occurred) (S304: Yes or S308: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (the number of reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is less than the upper limit (4 in the first embodiment) (S309). If there is no entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a (S304: No and S308: No), or if there is an entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a but the number of reserved balls N2 < 4 (S309: No), then this start-up process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

On the other hand, if the number of balls held for operation N2 < 4 (S309: Yes), the value of the second ball held counter 203b (number of balls held for operation N2) is incremented by 1 (S310). Then, since this is a win in the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a corresponding to the second special symbol, the second ball held storage area 203e is set as the storage location for each random value C1 to C3 and CS1 (S311), and the process proceeds to S312.

Furthermore, in the processes of S301 and S304, if a ball enters both the first start port 64 and the upper second start port 71 simultaneously, or in the processes of S301 and S308, if a ball enters both the first start port 64 and the lower second start port 71a simultaneously, the process for awarding a ball to the first start port 64 may be prioritized, and the process for awarding a ball to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a may be kept awaited. The process for awarding a ball to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a may then be executed in the start awarding process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

In the S312 process, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 5) and stored in the respective reserved ball storage areas. Specifically, the values are reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and variation type counter storage area 203d4, respectively, within the first reserved ball storage area 203d, which was set as the storage destination in S307 (S312).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S307 based on a ball entering the first starting opening 64, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination. Furthermore, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition in processing S306 is "1", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved ball area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved ball area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the third reserved ball area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the fourth reserved ball area.

Furthermore, the balls are stored in the following areas within the second reserved ball storage area 203e, which was set as the storage destination in S311: the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4, which correspond to the value indicated by the second reserved ball counter 203b (S312).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S311 based on a ball entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination. Furthermore, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition in the processing of S310 is "1", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved ball area 1, respectively. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved ball area 2, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved ball area 3, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved ball area 4, respectively.

Next, in order to send a first reserved ball count command to the audio lamp control device 113, which includes the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a after addition by the processing in S306 (operating reserved ball count N1) and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the processing in S307, the first reserved ball count command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S313). Furthermore, in order to send a second reserved ball count command to the audio lamp control device 113, which includes the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b after addition by the processing in S310 (operating reserved ball count N1), and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the processing in S311, the second reserved ball count command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 (S313). As a result, the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 31). After the processing in S313 is completed, this start-up prize processing (S208) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31).

Furthermore, in the processing of S313, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command may be the values read directly from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S312, or the values read from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the processing of S312 may be used.

Next, referring to Figure 33, we will explain the gate passage process (S209), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 33 is a flowchart of this gate passage process (S209). The gate passage process (S209) determines whether a ball has passed through (entered) the through gate 67. If a ball has passed through (entered), it executes a process to store (reserve) the value of the ball per ball counter C4 in the ball reserve storage area 203i.

In this gate passage process (S209), it is first determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the ball's passage (entry) into the through gate 67, which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 31), the passage (entry) into the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 31).

In the process of S401, if the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), this gate passage process (S209) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered) (S401: Yes), the next step is to determine whether the game state is the "normal game state," that is, whether the game state is one in which left-handed shooting is encouraged (S402). If the result of the determination is the "normal game state" (S402: Yes), it means that the ball that passed through the through gate 67 was shot using the unencouraged (prohibited) right-handed shooting method, rather than the encouraged left-handed shooting method. Therefore, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 226 (see Figure 5), and the third symbol display device 81 executes a normal right-handed shooting error processing, such as executing a special shooting instruction like "Please return to left-handed shooting" (S403), and the process moves to S404.

By configuring the system in this way, when a ball is detected at the through gate 67 during "normal gameplay" where right-handed play is not recommended, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed. This discourages players from using right-handed play in gameplay states where it is not encouraged, thereby minimizing gameplay that deviates from the recommended gameplay specifications and achieving the intended gameplay in each gameplay state.

Furthermore, in the processing of S402, if the game state is not "normal game state" (S402: No), it is a "probability variation state," "normal high probability time reduction state," "latent probability variation state," or "normal low probability time reduction state," where right-hand play is encouraged. Therefore, the normal right-hand play error processing in S403 is not performed, processing of S403 is skipped, and processing proceeds to S404.

In the S404 process, it is determined whether the value of the normal symbol reserve ball counter 203h (the number of reserve balls HN for the variable display of normal symbols held in reserve in the main control device 110) is less than the upper limit ("4" in the first embodiment) (S404). If, even if a ball passes through the through gate 67 (enters), the number of reserve balls HN is not less than 4 (S404: No), this gate passage process (S209) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

On the other hand, if the number of balls held in operation HN < 4 (S404: Yes), the value of the normal ball hold counter 203h (number of balls held in operation HN) is incremented by 1 (S405). Then, the value of the normal ball per counter C4 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 5), and the read data is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the normal ball hold counter 203h among the normal ball hold areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal ball hold storage area 203i (S406).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal ball reserve counter 203h after the addition in processing S405 is "1", the value of the normal ball per hit counter C4 is reserved in the normal ball reserve area 1. If the value of the normal ball reserve counter 203h after the addition is "2", the value of the normal ball per hit counter C4 is reserved in the normal ball reserve area 2. If the value of the normal ball reserve counter 203h after the addition is "3", the value is reserved in the normal ball reserve area 3. If the value of the normal ball reserve counter 203h after the addition is "4", the value is reserved in the normal ball reserve area 4. After the completion of processing S406, this gate passage processing (S209) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31).

In the first embodiment, the system is configured not to transmit the command for the number of reserved balls related to the variable display of regular symbols to the audio lamp control device 113. However, it may be configured to transmit the command for the number of reserved balls related to the variable display of regular symbols to the audio lamp control device 113 to perform effects (notifications) related to the reserved symbols related to the variable display of regular symbols. In this case, by including the value of the regular symbol hit counter C4 in the command for the number of reserved balls related to regular symbols, the audio lamp control device 113 can be configured to perform so-called pre-reading processing related to regular symbols, thereby providing variations in the effects related to regular symbols.

Next, referring to Figure 34, we will explain the special diagram variation processing (S210), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 34 is a flowchart of this special diagram variation processing (S210).

This special symbol variation processing (S210) controls the dynamic display of the first and second special symbols on the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effects performed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state.

In this special symbol variation processing (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in a jackpot state (S501). A jackpot state includes the period during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37, the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (i.e., the jackpot opening), and the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (i.e., the jackpot ending). If the determination in S501 indicates that either special symbol is in a jackpot state (S501: Yes), the special symbol variation processing (S210) terminates, and the system returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31).

In the process of S501, if it is determined that a jackpot is not currently in progress (S501: No), the next step is to determine whether either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in a minor win state (S551). A minor win state includes the period during the minor win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37, the predetermined time before the start of the minor win game (i.e., the minor win opening), and the predetermined time after the end of the minor win game (i.e., the minor win ending). If the determination in S551 indicates that either special symbol is in a minor win state (S551: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S210) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

In the process of S551, if it is determined that a minor win is not occurring (S551: No), the next step is to determine whether the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1) is being dynamically displayed in the special symbol display device 37 (S502). If the first special symbol is being dynamically displayed in the special symbol display device 37 (S502: Yes), the setting process related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not performed, so the processes of S503 and S504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, if the first special symbol is not being dynamically displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (S502: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 stopped (S503). If, as a result, the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped (S503: No), the process proceeds to S505. This allows the stopped symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol to be displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (or the third symbol display device 81 if it is in "normal game state") for a predetermined time, enabling the player to visually confirm the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, if, as a result of the processing in S503, a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display has stopped (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 variation start processing is performed to determine whether or not to perform the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and if so, to perform various setting processing for the dynamic display (S504). After that, the process proceeds to S505.

Here, referring to Figure 35, we will explain the Special Feature 1 variation start process (S504), which is one of the special feature variation processing (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 35 is a flowchart showing this Special Feature 1 variation start process (S504).

In this special symbol 1 variation start process (S504), as described above, the process involves determining whether or not to perform a dynamic display of the first special symbol, and, if a dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed, setting the dynamic display settings.

In this special figure 1 variation start process (S504), it is first determined whether the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N1 for the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is greater than "0" (S5001). If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operational reserved balls N1) is not greater than "0" (S5001: No), then there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed, and this special figure 1 variation start process (S504) is terminated, returning to the special figure variation process (see Figure 34).

Furthermore, in the processing of S5001, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operating reserved ball count N1) is determined to be "0" (S5001: No), the system is configured to perform a demo animation on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. This demo animation is performed when there is no first special symbol variation animation (dynamic display) to be performed in a game state in which the first special symbol variation animation can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, i.e., the "normal game state".

Specifically, in the "normal game state," if there are no reserved balls for the first special symbol to be executed, a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. The system then determines that a demo is in progress until the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operated reserved ball count N1) is determined to be greater than "0".

The configured demo command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the next timer interrupt (see S201 in Figure 31).

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a demo command, it transmits a display demo command to the display control device 114. Based on the receipt of the display demo command, the display control device 114 controls the display to show a demo effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, if neither the dynamic display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being executed, a predetermined standby screen is displayed. When the player grasps the operating handle 51 (for example, the first game state), a demo performance (for example, the first performance) is executed from the standby screen. During the execution of the demo performance, if a ball enters the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a (for example, the second game state), the system may be configured to switch to and execute a variation performance (for example, the second performance) corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, when each variation performance is executed based on the content of the demo performance, a performance different from the content of the demo performance (for example, a cut-in performance, etc., the third performance) may be executed immediately after the start of the variation performance to make it easier for the player to understand that the demo performance has ended (that the variation performance has started), so that the system is configured to make it easier for the player to understand that the demo performance has ended (that the variation performance has started). This variation sequence determines whether or not a winning symbol appears, transitioning the game from a non-winning state to a winning state.

In the process of S5001, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operated reserved ball count N1) is greater than "0" (S5001: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start the execution of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operated reserved ball count N1) is deducted by 1 (S5002). This is because, due to the process described later, the execution of one of the dynamic displays (variation effects) related to the first special symbol that was being held will begin, thus decreasing the number of reserved balls related to the first special symbol by 1.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S5003). This data shifting process (S5003) sequentially shifts the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 1 to 4 towards the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The data within each area is shifted as follows: first reserved ball area 1 → first reserved ball execution area 203f, first reserved ball area 2 → first reserved ball area 1, first reserved ball area 3 → first reserved ball area 2, first reserved ball area 4 → first reserved ball area 3, and so on.

After the data shift processing in S5003, in order to perform the dynamic display setting processing for the first special symbol, which is executed on the special symbol display device 37 (or the third symbol display device 81 if it is in "normal game state") based on the values of various counters stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing, first, in order to determine the game state, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203k provided in RAM 203 is turned on (S5004). If the determination is made and it is determined that the probability variation flag 203k is not turned on (S5004: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", and the probability of a special symbol jackpot is in a low probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5005), and the process moves on to S5007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203k is on (S5004: Yes), the game state is either a "probability variation state" or a "latent probability variation state," and the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols is in a high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high-probability state is set (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007.

In the S5007 process, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display indicating a jackpot is currently running for the second special symbol (S5007). If the determination is that the dynamic display indicating a jackpot is not currently running for the second special symbol (S5007: No), a jackpot lottery (win/loss determination) process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5005 or S5006 (S5008).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a jackpot has been hit is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a, which is set based on the probability setting value, and based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal high probability time shortened state", or "normal low probability time shortened state"), the jackpot random number table 202a is set such that the jackpot random value is 32/10000 when the jackpot probability is set to value "1" and 36/10000 when the jackpot probability is set to value "3". Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state ("probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state"), the jackpot random number table 202a is configured such that the jackpot probability is 221/10000 for setting value "1" and 225/10000 for setting value "3".

In the S5008 process, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. If they match, it is determined that a jackpot has been won. If the S5008 process determines that a jackpot has been won (S5008: Yes), the display mode for the jackpot is set based on the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see Figure 8(a)) corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f (S5009).

In this process, the type of jackpot associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined to be either a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, which transitions to a "normal figure high probability time reduction state" after the jackpot, where the "time reduction function" is applied until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed 100 times, or a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, which transitions to a "probability variation state" after the jackpot, where the special symbols are in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "time reduction function" is also applied until the next jackpot, or a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, which transitions to a "latent probability variation state" after the jackpot, where the special symbols are in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "time reduction function" is also applied until the next jackpot, or a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, which transitions to a "latent probability variation state" after the jackpot, where the special symbols are in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "time reduction function" is not applied. Then, based on the determined type of jackpot, the display mode for a jackpot (the display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set on the special symbol display device 37.

Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see Figure 8(a)).

Next, the variation pattern for a jackpot is determined (S5010). Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 select a performance mode based on the display mode (stop type) for a jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. From the selected performance mode, the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern for a jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used (see Figures 13 and 14) is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for jackpots, a performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected performance mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Finally, based on the predetermined relationship between the variation pattern and variation time, the variation time is set, and the process proceeds to S5016.

On the other hand, if, in the process of S5007, it is determined that a dynamic display indicating a jackpot is being executed for the second special symbol (S5007: Yes), or if, in the process of S5008, it is determined that it is not a jackpot (S5008: No), then a minor win lottery process is performed to determine whether it is a minor win or not based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5005 or S5006 (S5011).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a minor win is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f, by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a, which is set based on the probability setting value. As described above, regardless of the play state (mode) and setting value that the pachinko machine 10 can take, the jackpot random number table 202a is defined such that the minor win probability for the first special symbol is 5000/10000.

In the S5011 process, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the minor win random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. If they match, it is determined to be a minor win. If the S5011 process determines that it is a minor win (S5011: Yes), the display mode for minor wins is set (S5012). Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only one type of minor win is provided, so the display mode is set without referring to the minor win type table, etc.

Next, the variation pattern for minor wins is determined (S5013). Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 select a performance mode based on the display mode (stop type) for minor wins and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. From the selected performance mode, the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern for minor wins, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used (see Figures 13 and 14) is selected according to the stop type of the minor win.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for minor wins, a performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Furthermore, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected performance mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, based on the predetermined relationship between the variation pattern and variation time, the variation time is set, and the process proceeds to S5016.

On the other hand, if the result of the minor win lottery process in S5011 is determined not to be a minor win (S5011: No), the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss. Therefore, the process moves to S5014 to set the display mode for losses. In the process of S5014, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f, the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a, and the current game state, one of the following display modes is set for the third symbol display device 81: "non-reach" display mode, "normal reach" display mode, "super reach" display mode, or "special reach" display mode (S5014). In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each display mode differs depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the variation pattern for when a losing outcome occurs is determined (S5015), and the process proceeds to S5016. In S5015, the variation time until the losing symbol is displayed is determined in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e, which is provided for each display mode (presentation mode) for when a losing outcome occurs as determined in S5014, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the predetermined relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time.

In this way, by using the same random values C3 and CS1 and the same judgment program to determine the presentation and variation patterns for big wins, small wins, and losses, the programs can be standardized, reducing development time during development.

Next, in the S5016 process, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol determined in the S5010, S5013, or S5015 processes, a special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation time corresponding to that variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113 (S5016). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, and the jackpot is "Probability Variation A", and furthermore, the variation pattern of "Super Reach" with a "25-second" variation is selected, then a special symbol 1 variation pattern command indicating jackpot, "Probability Variation A", and "Super Reach" with a "25-second" variation is set. Also, if the jackpot lottery and the minor jackpot lottery are lost, and furthermore, the variation pattern of "Super Reach" with a "25-second" variation is selected, then a special symbol 1 variation pattern command indicating loss and "Super Reach" with a "25-second" variation is set.

Then, after processing in S5016, a stop type command (Figure 1) is set to notify the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in processing S5009, S5012, or S5014 (S5017). This Figure 1 variation start processing (S504) is then terminated, and the process returns to the Figure variation processing (see Figure 34).

In this way, by setting a general stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the Special Symbol 1 stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the success or failure, and then determine the stop result of the variation effect in more detail based on that information.

These special feature 1 variation pattern commands and special feature 1 stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. These commands are then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the next timer interrupt (see S201 in Figure 31). Upon receiving the special feature 1 variation pattern commands and special feature 1 stop type commands, the audio lamp control device 113 generates display special feature 1 variation pattern commands and display special feature 1 type commands according to the game state and transmits them to the display control device 114.

In this way, when a dynamic display indicating a jackpot is being executed for the second special symbol, the dynamic display result for the first special symbol is configured to be either a minor win or a loss. This prevents the dynamic displays of the two special symbols from resulting in a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while a dynamic display indicating a jackpot is being executed for one of the second special symbols or the first special symbol, the dynamic display result for the other first special symbol or second special symbol is configured to be a minor win or a loss. However, it may also be configured so that a jackpot is possible even with the dynamic display of the other first special symbol or second special symbol.

Returning to Figure 34, let's continue the explanation. In process S505, the special symbol display device 37 determines whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is currently being dynamically displayed (S505). If the special symbol display device 37 is currently dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S505: Yes), the setting process related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed. Therefore, processes S506 and S507 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S508.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if the second special symbol is not being dynamically displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (S505: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 stopped (S506). If, as a result, the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped (S506: No), the process proceeds to S508. This ensures that the stopped symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (or the third symbol display device 81 if it is in a "probability variation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "latent probability variation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state") for a predetermined time, allowing the player to visually confirm the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, if, as a result of the processing in S506, a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display has stopped (S506: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation start processing is performed to determine whether or not to perform the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and if so, to perform various setting processing for the dynamic display (S507). After that, the process proceeds to S508.

Next, referring to Figure 36, we will explain the Special Feature 2 variation start process (S507), which is one of the special feature variation processing (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing this Special Feature 2 variation start process (S507).

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (S507), as described above, the process involves determining whether or not to dynamically display the second special symbol, and, if dynamic display of the second special symbol is to be performed, setting the dynamic display settings.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (S507), first, it is determined whether the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (the number of reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is greater than "0" (S5301). If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operational reserved balls N2) is not greater than "0" (S5301: No), then there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed, and this special symbol 2 variation start process (S507) is terminated, returning to the special symbol variation process (see Figure 34).

Furthermore, in the processing of S5301, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operating reserved ball count N1) is determined to be "0" (S5301: No), the system is configured to perform a demo animation on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. This demo animation is performed when there is no second special symbol variation animation (dynamic display) to be performed in a game state in which the second special symbol variation animation can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, namely, the "probability variation state," the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the "latent probability variation state," or the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state."

Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "latent probability fluctuation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," if there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol to be executed, a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. The system determines that a demo is in progress until the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operated reserved ball count N2) is determined to be greater than "0."

The configured demo command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the next timer interrupt (see S201 in Figure 31).

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a demo command, it transmits a display demo command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol to the display control device 114. Based on the receipt of the display demo command, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the demo effect for the variation effect of the second special symbol.

In the process of S5301, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operated reserved ball count N2) is greater than "0" (S5301: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start the execution of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol. First, the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operated reserved ball count N2) is deducted by 1 (S5302). This is because, due to the process described later, the execution of one of the dynamic displays (variation effects) related to the reserved second special symbol will begin, and the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol will decrease by 1.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S5303). This data shifting process (S5303) sequentially shifts the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e's second reserved ball areas 1 through 4 toward the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The data within each area is shifted as follows: second reserved ball area 1 → second reserved ball execution area 203g, second reserved ball area 2 → second reserved ball area 1, second reserved ball area 3 → second reserved ball area 2, second reserved ball area 4 → second reserved ball area 3, and so on.

After the data shift processing in S5303, based on the values of various counters stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g by the data shift processing, the system first determines whether the probability variation flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 is turned on or not in order to perform the setting processing for the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 (or the third symbol display device 81 if the state is "probability variation state", "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", "latent probability variation state", or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"). If the determination is made and it is determined that the probability variation flag 203k is not turned on (S5304: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", and the probability of a special symbol jackpot is in a low probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5305), and the process moves to S5307. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203k is on (S5304: Yes), the game state is either a "probability variation state" or a "latent probability variation state," and the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols is in a high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high-probability state is set (S5306), and the process proceeds to S5307.

In the process of S5307, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display indicating a jackpot is currently running for the first special symbol (S5307). If, as a result of the determination, the dynamic display indicating a jackpot for the first special symbol is not currently running (S5307: No), a jackpot lottery (win/loss determination) process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5305 or S5306 (S5308).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a jackpot has been hit is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a, which is set based on the probability setting value, and based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal high probability time shortened state", or "normal low probability time shortened state"), the jackpot random number table 202a is set such that the jackpot random value is 32/10000 when the jackpot probability is set to value "1" and 36/10000 when the jackpot probability is set to value "3". Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state ("probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state"), the jackpot random number table 202a is configured such that the jackpot probability is 221/10000 for setting value "1" and 225/10000 for setting value "3".

In the S5308 process, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. If they match, it is determined that a jackpot has been won. If the S5308 process determines that a jackpot has been won (S5308: Yes), the display mode for the jackpot is set based on the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see Figure 8(b)) corresponding to the second special symbol and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g (S5309).

In this process, the type of jackpot is determined by the special symbol type table 202b2, which corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "Time-Saving A," where the maximum number of rounds is 5 and the "Time-Saving Function" is applied until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed 100 times, transitioning to a "Normal Symbol High Probability Time-Saving State," or whether it is "Latent Probability A," where the maximum number of rounds is 10 and the special symbols remain in a high probability state until the next jackpot, while the "Time-Saving Function" is not applied, transitioning to a "Latent Probability Fluctuation State." Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode for the jackpot (the display mode of the special LED group 37b) in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the special feature 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see Figure 8(b)).

Next, the variation pattern for a jackpot is determined (S5310). Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 select a performance mode based on the display mode (stop type) for a jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. From the selected performance mode, the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern for a jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used (see Figures 13 and 14) is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for jackpots, a performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected performance mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Finally, based on the predetermined relationship between the variation pattern and variation time, the variation time is set, and the process proceeds to S5316.

On the other hand, if, in the process of S5307, it is determined that a dynamic display indicating a jackpot is being executed for the first special symbol (S5307: Yes), or if, in the process of S5308, it is determined that it is not a jackpot (S5308: No), then a minor win lottery process is performed to determine whether it is a minor win or not based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5305 or S5306 (S5311).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a minor win occurs is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g, by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a, which is set based on the probability setting value. As described above, regardless of the play state (mode) and setting value that the pachinko machine 10 can take, the jackpot random number table 202a is defined such that the minor win probability for the second special symbol is 7500/10000.

In the S5311 process, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the minor win random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. If they match, it is determined to be a minor win. If the S5311 process determines that it is a minor win (S5311: Yes), the display mode for minor wins is set (S5312). Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only one type of minor win is provided, so the display mode is set without referring to the minor win type table, etc.

Next, the variation pattern for minor wins is determined (S5313). Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 select a performance mode based on the display mode (stop type) for minor wins and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. From the selected performance mode, the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern for minor wins, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used (see Figures 13-14) is selected according to the stop type of the minor win.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for minor wins, a performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Furthermore, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected performance mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, based on the predetermined relationship between the variation pattern and variation time, the variation time is set, and the process proceeds to S5316.

On the other hand, if the result of the minor win lottery process in S5311 is determined not to be a minor win (S5311: No), the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a miss, so the display mode for a miss is set (S5314). In the process of S5314, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the miss symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g, the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b, and the current game state, one of the following performance modes is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81: "non-reach" performance mode, "normal reach" performance mode, "super reach" performance mode, or "special reach" performance mode. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each performance mode differs depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the variation pattern for a losing outcome is determined (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5316. In S5315, the variation time until the losing outcome is displayed is determined in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e, which is provided for each display mode (presentation mode) for losing outcomes determined in S5314, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the predetermined relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time.

In this way, by using the same random values C3 and CS1 and the same judgment program to determine the presentation and variation patterns for big wins, small wins, and losses, the programs can be standardized, reducing development time. Furthermore, by using the same judgment program to determine the first and second special symbols, the programs can be standardized, further reducing development time.

Next, in the S5316 process, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol determined in the S5310, S5313, or S5315 processes, a special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation time corresponding to that variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113 (S5316). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, and the jackpot is of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", and furthermore, the variation pattern of "Super Reach" with a "25-second" duration is selected, then a special symbol 2 variation pattern command indicating jackpot, "Probability Variation A", and "Super Reach" with a "25-second" duration is set. Also, if the jackpot lottery and the minor jackpot lottery are lost, and furthermore, the variation pattern of "Super Reach" with a "25-second" duration is selected, then a special symbol 2 variation pattern command indicating loss and "Super Reach" with a "25-second" duration is set.

After processing in S5316, a stop type command (Figure 2) is set to notify the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in processing S5309, S5312, or S5314 (S5317). This Figure 2 variation start processing (S507) then ends, and the process returns to the Figure variation processing (see Figure 34).

In this way, by setting a general stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the Special Symbol 2 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the success or failure, and based on that information, it can determine the stop result of the variation effect in more detail.

These special feature 2 variation pattern commands and special feature 2 stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. These commands are then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the next timer interrupt (see S201 in Figure 31). Upon receiving the special feature 2 variation pattern commands and special feature 2 stop type commands, the audio lamp control device 113 generates display special feature 2 variation pattern commands, display special feature 2 type commands, and display special feature 2 effect commands based on these commands and transmits them to the display control device 114.

Returning to Figure 34, let's continue the explanation. In the S508 process, it is determined whether the dynamic display time for the currently running first special symbol has elapsed, and whether the dynamic display time for the currently running second special symbol has elapsed. Based on the determination result, a variation stop process is performed to stop the dynamic display of either the first or second special symbol (S508). This special symbol variation process (S210) then ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

Here, referring to Figure 37, we will explain the fluctuation stop process (S508), which is one of the special pattern fluctuation processing (see Figure 34) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 37 is a flowchart of this fluctuation stop process (S508).

In this variation stop process (S508), it is determined whether the variation time for the dynamic display of each special symbol has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the stop result corresponding to each stop type is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, and each confirmation command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, if the dynamic display of one of the first special symbols whose variation time has elapsed is a jackpot or a minor win, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol is also being executed in parallel, or if the dynamic display of one of the second special symbols whose variation time has elapsed is a jackpot, and the dynamic display of the other first special symbol is also being executed in parallel, the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or first special symbol is stopped as a loss. Furthermore, if the game is in a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" or a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," it determines whether the time reduction termination condition for the "time reduction function" has been met based on the count of the number of variations in the dynamic display of the special symbol. If the time reduction termination condition for the "time reduction function" has been met, the "time reduction function" is switched from enabled to disabled. Also, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, it determines whether the number of variations in the dynamic display of the special symbol has reached the ceiling count. If the ceiling count has been reached, the game transitions to a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state."

In the variation stop processing (S508), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is currently being performed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501). If the determination is made and it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not being performed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501: No), the process proceeds to S5506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is currently displaying the first special symbol (S5501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has elapsed (S5502). The display time for the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1, etc. (determined according to the special symbol 1 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) for the dynamic display of this first special symbol has not elapsed (S5502: No), the display of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S5505), this variation stop process (S508) is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see Figure 34).

In the first embodiment, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is configured to light up or turn off in a predetermined pattern until the change time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the first special symbol begins.

On the other hand, in the process of S5502, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5502: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped for the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5503). The stopped symbol is predetermined by the processes of S5009, S5012, or S5014 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see Figure 35).

In the first embodiment, if the dynamic display result of the first special symbol is a miss, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is illuminated. If the result is a jackpot, the upper LED group 37b1 is illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. If the result is a minor win, each LED group is illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of minor win.

In the process of S5503, when the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S5504) to confirm the stop symbol of the variation effect of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37, and the process moves to S5511. The special symbol 1 confirmation command is a command to confirm the variation effect of the first special symbol if the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this special symbol 1 confirmation command, if the variation animation of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (i.e., the game state is "normal game state", or in the "normal game state" the variation animation of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ceiling is reached by the variation animation of the second special symbol, transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), it sends a display special symbol 1 confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation animation of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and confirm the stopped symbol by displaying it. Note that if the variation animation of the first special symbol is not being performed on the third symbol display device 81, in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", the audio lamp control device 113 is configured not to send a display special symbol 1 confirmation command to the display control device 114 even if it receives the special symbol 1 confirmation command. By configuring it this way, the processing of commands related to unexecuted variable animations can be reduced, thereby lowering the processing load.

On the other hand, if, in the process of S5501, it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not being performed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501: No), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being performed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5506). If, as a result of the determination, it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not being performed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5506: No), then this variation stop process (S508) is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see Figure 34).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S5506: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has elapsed (S5507). The display time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1, etc. (determined according to the special symbol 2 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not elapsed (S5507: No), the display of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S5510), this variation stop process (S508) is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see Figure 34).

In the first embodiment, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is configured so that the lower LED group 37b2 lights up or turns off in a predetermined pattern until the change time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the second special symbol begins.

On the other hand, in the process of S5507, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5507: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped for the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5508). The stopped symbol is set in advance by the processes of S5309, S5312, or S5314 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see Figure 36).

In the first embodiment, if the dynamic display result of the second special symbol is a miss, only the leftmost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 is lit. If the result is a jackpot, the lower LED group 37b2 is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. If the result is a minor win, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of minor win.

In the process of S5508, when the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set (S5509) to confirm the stop symbol of the variation effect of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37, and the process moves to S5511. The special symbol 2 confirmation command is a command to confirm the variation effect of the second special symbol if the variation effect of the second special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this special symbol 2 confirmation command, if the variation animation of the second special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (i.e., if the game state is "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", "probability variation state", "latent probability variation state", or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", or if the variation animation of the second special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", the time reduction termination condition is met by the variation animation of the first special symbol and the game transitions to "normal game state"), it sends a display special symbol 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to receive the display special symbol 2 confirmation command and stop the variation animation of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and to display the stopped symbol as confirmed. Furthermore, if the variation effect for the second special symbol is not executed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured not to send a display special symbol 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114, even if it receives a special symbol 2 confirmation command. This configuration reduces the processing of commands related to variations that are not being executed, thereby easing the processing burden.

Here, referring to Figure 38, we will explain the other-side stop process (S5511), which is one of the processes of the variable stop process (see Figure 37) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 38 is a flowchart of this other-side stop process (S5511).

In this other-side stopping process (S5511), if the dynamic display of one of the first special symbols, after the time has elapsed, indicates a jackpot or a minor win, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol is also running in parallel, or if the dynamic display of one of the second special symbols, after the time has elapsed, indicates a jackpot, and the dynamic display of the other first special symbol is also running in parallel, then the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or the first special symbol is stopped as a loss.

In this other-side stopping process (S5511), first, it is determined whether the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (whether the dynamic display variation time has elapsed) (S5601). If the determination is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (the dynamic display variation time has elapsed) (S5601: Yes), then it is determined whether the dynamic display of the second special symbol is in progress (S5602). If the determination is that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is in progress (S5602: Yes), then it is further determined whether the dynamic display of the first special symbol, whose variation time has elapsed, has resulted in a big win or a small win (S5603). If the determination shows that the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicates a win (S5603: Yes), the system stops the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is currently running, by stopping the display mode corresponding to a losing symbol for the lower LED group 37b2 (S5604). This other-stopping process (S5511) is then terminated, and the system returns to the variation stopping process (see Figure 37), proceeding to S5512.

By configuring the machine in this way, the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is performed in the "normal game state," can be stopped as a losing symbol by the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicating a big win or a small win. As a result, it is possible to prevent unexpected payouts that occur when playing right-handed, which is not recommended in the "normal game state," causing the ball to enter the upper second start opening 71, triggering the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and then entering the variable prize entry device 65 (which opens up when a small win is achieved) to win prize balls.

On the other hand, if, during the processing of S5602, it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not currently running (S5602: No), the processing of S5603 and S5604 is skipped, this other-side stop processing (S5511) is terminated, the process returns to the variation stop processing (see Figure 37), and the process proceeds to S5512. Also, if, during the processing of S5603, it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not resulted in a big or small win (S5603: No), in this case as well, the processing of S5604 is skipped, this other-side stop processing (S5511) is terminated, the process returns to the variation stop processing (see Figure 37), and the process proceeds to S5512.

In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not stopped (S5601: No), that is, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (the dynamic display change time has elapsed), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is currently running (S5605). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is currently running (S5605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol has resulted in a jackpot (S5606). If the determination results in the dynamic display of the second special symbol indicating a jackpot (S5606: Yes), the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is currently running, is stopped as a losing symbol. The upper LED group 37b1 is then stopped to display the first special symbol in the manner corresponding to a losing symbol (S5607). This other-stopping process (S5511) is then terminated, and the process returns to the variation stopping process (see Figure 37), proceeding to S5512.

On the other hand, if, during the processing of S5605, it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not currently running (S5605: No), the processing of S5606 and S5607 is skipped, this other-side stop processing (S5511) is terminated, the process returns to the variation stop processing (see Figure 37), and the process proceeds to S5512. Also, if, during the processing of S5606, it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not resulted in a jackpot (S5606: No), in this case as well, the processing of S5607 is skipped, this other-side stop processing (S5511) is terminated, the process returns to the variation stop processing (see Figure 37), and the process proceeds to S5512.

Returning to Figure 37, let's continue the explanation. In process S5512, it is determined whether the game state is in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" or the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" (S5512). If the determination result is that the state is neither the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" nor the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" (S5512: No), then the game state is not one in which the time reduction termination condition can be met, and process S5513 is skipped, proceeding to process S5514. On the other hand, if process S5512 determines that the game state is in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" or the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" (S5512: Yes), then the special symbol has stopped its dynamic display in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" or the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state." Therefore, a time reduction counting process is executed to determine whether the time reduction termination condition has been met due to the stopping of the special symbol (S5513), and then the process proceeds to S5514.

Here, referring to Figure 39, we will explain the time-saving counting process (S5513), which is one of the processes performed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 (see Figure 37) during the fluctuation stop process. Figure 39 is a flowchart of this time-saving counting process (S5513).

In this time-saving counting process (S5513), it is determined whether the time-saving termination condition for the "time-saving function" has been met based on the counting result of the number of variations in the dynamic display of the special symbols. If the time-saving termination condition for the "time-saving function" has been met, the process switches the "time-saving function" from enabled to disabled.

In this time-saving counting process (S5513), first, the value of the time-saving counter 203o is subtracted by 1 (S5701), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5702). If the result of the determination is that the value of the time-saving counter 203o subtracted in process S5701 is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the time-saving counter 203o is "0" or less (S5702: No), then the time-saving termination condition is met. Next, it is determined whether the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S5703). If the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S5703: Yes), the time-saving high probability flag 203m is set to off (S5704), and this time-saving counting process (S5513) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation stop process (see Figure 37).

Furthermore, if it is determined in the S5703 process that the time-saving high probability flag 203m is not turned on (S5703: No), it is determined that the time-saving low probability flag 203n is turned on, and the time-saving low probability flag 203n is set to off (S5705). This time-saving counting process (S5513) is then terminated, and the process returns to the variation stop process (see Figure 37).

Furthermore, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203o, which was subtracted in the process of S5701, is greater than "0" (S5702: Yes), the time-saving termination condition is not met. Therefore, processes S5703 to S5705 are skipped, this time-saving counting process (S5513) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation stop process (see Figure 37).

Returning to Figure 37, let's continue the explanation. In process S5514, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S5514). If the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S5514: Yes), it is a high-probability state for special symbols, and the game state is one in which the ceiling cannot be reached. Therefore, process S5515 is skipped, this variation stop process (S508) is terminated, and the game returns to the special symbol variation process (see Figure 34). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203k is not turned on (S5514: No), it is a low-probability state for special symbols, and the game state is one in which the ceiling can be reached. Therefore, it is determined whether the number of times the dynamic display of special symbols has been executed has reached the number of times the ceiling has been reached. Based on the determination result, the ceiling reach counting process is executed to transition to the "normal symbol low-probability time reduction state" (S5515), this variation stop process (S508) is terminated, and the game returns to the special symbol variation process (see Figure 34).

Next, referring to Figure 40, we will explain the ceiling reach counting process (S5515), which is one of the processes of the fluctuation stop process (see Figure 37) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 40 is a flowchart of this ceiling reach counting process (S5515).

In this ceiling reach counting process (S5515), the number of times the dynamic display of special symbols is executed is counted, and it is determined whether the count has reached the ceiling. Based on the determination result, a process is performed to set the number of time reductions based on the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state".

In this ceiling reach counting process (S5515), first, the value of the ceiling reach counter 203p is incremented by 1 (S5801). Next, it is determined whether the incremented value of the ceiling reach counter 203p is less than "900" (S5802).

If the result of the determination in S5802 is that the value of the ceiling reach counter 203p added in the process of S5801 is less than "900" (S5802: Yes), then the processes of S5803 to S5806 are skipped, this ceiling reach counting process (S5515) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see Figure 37).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5802, if the value of the ceiling reached count counter 203p added in the processing of S5801 is not less than "900", that is, if the value of the ceiling reached count counter 203p is "900" or more (S5802: No), the ceiling has been reached, and therefore, it is determined whether or not the ceiling set flag 203q is turned on (S5803). If, as a result of the determination, the ceiling set flag 203q is not turned on (S5803: No), it means that the special symbol has not yet transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" since it entered the low probability state, so in order to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", first, the value of the time reduction counter 203o is set to "1140" (S5804), and the ceiling set flag 203q is turned on to indicate that it has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (S5805). Then, in order to transition the game state to the "normal low probability time reduction state," the time reduction low probability flag 203n is set to ON (S5806), and this ceiling reach counting process (S5515) is terminated, returning to the variation stop process (see Figure 37). This allows the "normal low probability time reduction state" based on the number of times the ceiling has been reached to be generated.

On the other hand, if the determination in S5803 indicates that the ceiling setting flag 203q is ON (S5803: Yes), then the state has already transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state." Therefore, processes S5804 to S5806 are skipped, the ceiling reach counting process (S5515) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation stop process (see Figure 37).

Next, referring to Figure 41, we will explain the hit process (S203), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing this hit process (S203).

This win process (S203) sets the number of times (rounds) the variable prize entry device 65 (large prize slot) opens according to the type of win, and also sets the opening time of the variable prize entry device 65, when a jackpot occurs for each special symbol. Then, when a jackpot state (game) is in progress, a jackpot opening/closing control process (S608) is executed to open or close the variable prize entry device 65, and at the timing when the jackpot state ends, a jackpot termination process (S610) is executed to set the end of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, this win processing (S203) sets the number of times the variable prize device 65 opens (number of rounds) according to the win, and also sets the opening time of the variable prize device 65, when a minor win occurs for each special symbol. Then, when a minor win state (game) is in progress, a minor win opening/closing control process (S616) is executed to open or close the variable prize device 65, and at the timing when the minor win state ends, a minor win termination process (S618) is executed to set the end of the minor win state.

In the hit processing (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the dynamic display of any special symbols (S601). If, as a result of the determination, a jackpot has been won (S601: Yes), in order to play the jackpot game, first, in order to disable the "probability change function," "time reduction function," and "ceiling function" during the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203k, the time reduction high probability flag 203m, the time reduction low probability flag 203n, and the ceiling set flag 203q are set to OFF (S602), and furthermore, the values of the time reduction counter 203o and the ceiling reached count counter 203p are cleared to "0" (S603). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the round counter (not shown) provided in RAM 203 (S604). Then, in order to send a jackpot opening command to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate the start of a jackpot, the jackpot opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S604). Next, the opening time according to the type of jackpot (for example, "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") is set (S606), and the process proceeds to S611. As a result, the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing executed next (see S201 in Figure 31) transmits the jackpot opening command according to the type of jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113.

The round counter mentioned above is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the round counter, and if a value is set in the round counter (i.e., "1" or greater), it controls the opening of the variable prize entry device 65 according to the jackpot game, while simultaneously deducting 1 from the round counter value. The system is configured to terminate the ongoing jackpot when the round counter value becomes "0".

In the process of S601, if it is determined that a jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S601: No), then it is determined whether a minor prize has been won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S607). If the determination is made and a minor prize has been won (S607: Yes), the system sets the entry point to be opened (i.e., the variable entry device 65) in order to play the minor prize game, and sets the number of times the variable entry device 65 is opened according to the type of minor prize (the type of special symbol that won the minor prize) in the opening counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S608).

Then, in order to send a small win opening command to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate that a small win has begun, the small win opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S609), and then the opening time for the small win (for example, "0.5 seconds") is set (S610), and the process proceeds to S611. As a result, the small win opening command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 31).

The aforementioned opening counter is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the opening counter. If a value is set in the opening counter (i.e., "1" or greater), it controls the opening of the variable prize entry device 65 according to the mini-win game, while simultaneously decrementing the value of the opening counter by 1. The system is configured to terminate the ongoing mini-win game when the value of the opening counter becomes "0".

Next, in step S611, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently in progress (S611). If the determination is made that a jackpot is in progress (S611: Yes), the jackpot opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the variable prize entry device 65 (S612).

Here, referring to Figure 42, we will explain the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), which is one of the processes performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 as part of the hit process (S203). Figure 42 is a flowchart showing this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), the opening and closing control of the variable prize-winning device 65 is executed based on the number of times the variable prize-winning device 65 was opened in the win process (S203).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), it is first determined whether the opening time set in S605 of the win process (S203), or the interval time set in S6020 (see Figure 43) of the jackpot opening process (S6007) described later, has elapsed (S6001). If, as a result of this determination, the opening time or interval time for a jackpot has not elapsed (S6001: No), then it is not the timing for opening the variable prize device 65. Therefore, the variable prize device 65 remains closed, skipping processes S6002 to S6005 and proceeding to S6006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6001, if the opening time or interval time for a jackpot has elapsed (S6001: Yes), it is time for the variable prize device 65 to open, so the variable prize device 65 is set to open (S6002), and then "10" is set in the prize counter (not shown) (S6003). Then, the maximum opening time of the variable prize device 65 for a jackpot (30 seconds in the first embodiment) is set (S6004), a large prize opening command indicating that the variable prize device 65 has been opened is generated and set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S6005), and the processing moves on to S6006. Upon receiving this large prize opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a message on the third symbol display device 81 indicating that the variable prize device 65 has been opened, prompting the player to enter the open variable prize device 65 into the variable prize device 65.

In process S6006, it is determined whether the variable prize device 65 is open or not (S6006). If the determination is that the variable prize device 65 is not open (S6006: No), then the variable prize device 65 is not open, but is in the opening time or interval time, so process S6007 is skipped, this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) is terminated, and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 41). On the other hand, if it is determined in process S6006 that the variable prize device 65 is open (S6006: Yes), then the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) is terminated to determine the closing conditions of the open variable prize device 65 (S6007), and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 41).

Here, referring to Figure 43, we will explain the process of opening the jackpot gate (S6007), which is one of the processes of the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing this process of opening the jackpot gate (S6007).

In this large prize slot opening process (S6007), a process is executed to determine whether or not the closing condition for the variable prize device 65, which is currently open, is met.

In this large prize slot opening process (S6007), first, it is determined (S6011) whether the opening time for the variable prize device 65, set in S6004 of the aforementioned jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), has elapsed. If the determination shows that the opening time for the variable prize device 65 has elapsed (S6011: Yes), then the closing condition for the variable prize device 65 is met, and it is time to close the variable prize device 65 for that round. Therefore, the prize counter value is cleared to "0" (S6012), and the process proceeds to S6016 to close the variable prize device 65. The closing process for the variable prize device 65 from S6016 onwards will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S6011, if the opening time of the variable prize-winning device 65 has not elapsed (S6011: No), then it is determined whether the large prize-winning slot switch 65c was turned on, that is, whether a ball entered the variable prize-winning device 65 (S6013).

In the process of S6013, if a ball is detected by the large prize slot switch 65c and the ball has entered the variable prize device 65 (S6013: Yes), the value of the prize counter is decremented by 1 (S6014), and then it is determined whether the value of the prize counter is greater than "0" (S6015). If the value of the prize counter is not greater than "0" (S6015: No), that is, if the value of the prize counter is "0" or less, then 10 or more balls have entered the variable prize device 65, and the closing condition for the variable prize device 65 has been met. Therefore, the process proceeds to S6016 in order to close the variable prize device 65.

In the process of S6015, if it is determined that the value of the prize counter is greater than "0" (S6015: Yes), the closing condition for the variable prize device 65 is not met. Therefore, in order to continue keeping the variable prize device 65 open, processes S6016 to S6020 are skipped, and this large prize opening open process (S6007) is terminated. After the termination of this large prize opening open process (S6007), the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see Figure 42).

Next, in the closing process of the variable prize device 65 starting from S6016, first, the closing setting for the variable prize device 65 is performed (S6016), and then a large prize gate closing command is set to indicate to the audio lamp control device 113 that the variable prize device 65 has been closed (S6017), and the process proceeds to S6018. The large prize gate closing command set in the S6017 process is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt process executed next (see S201 in Figure 31).

Next, in the process of S6018, since one round of the variable prize device 65 has been completed, the value of the round counter is deducted by 1 (S6018). Then, it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019: Yes). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019: Yes), then the number of rounds for that jackpot (the remaining number of times the variable prize device 65 will open) remains, so an interval time (for example, "1 second") is set before opening the variable prize device 65 again (S6020), and this jackpot opening process (S6007) ends, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see Figure 42).

On the other hand, in the process of S6019, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S6019: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less, then all opening operations of the variable prize device 65 in this jackpot have been completed. Therefore, in order to end the jackpot state, the interval time is not set (i.e., S6020 is skipped), and the process of opening the jackpot opening (S6007) is terminated, returning to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see Figure 42).

Returning to the winning process (S203) in Figure 41, let's continue the explanation. After the completion of the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612, see Figure 42), it is then determined whether the round counter value is greater than "0" (S613). If the result of the determination is that the round counter value is greater than "0" (S613: Yes), the jackpot state continues, and the process of setting the end of the jackpot (S614) is skipped, ending this winning process (S203).

On the other hand, in the process of S613, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S613: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less, then all opening operations of the variable prize device 65 in this jackpot have been completed. Therefore, in order to end the jackpot state, the jackpot termination process is performed (S614), and this jackpot process (S203) is terminated.

Here, referring to Figure 44, we will explain the jackpot termination process (S614), which is one of the processes performed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 during the win process (S203). Figure 44 is a flowchart showing this jackpot termination process (S610).

In this jackpot termination process (S614), the probability variation flag 203k, the time reduction high probability flag 203m, and the time reduction counter 203o are set based on the type of jackpot won.

In this jackpot termination process (S614), first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is of the "Probability Variation A" type (S6101). If the determination is that the current jackpot is of the "Probability Variation A" type (S6101: Yes), the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S6102) to set the game state after the jackpot to the "Probability Variation State," and then the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the processing of S6101, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot type "Kaku-hen A" (S6101: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot type "Hidden Kaku-hen A" (S6104). If the current jackpot type is jackpot type "Hidden Kaku-hen A" (S6104: Yes), the Kaku-hen flag 203k is turned on (S6105), and the process proceeds to S6108.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6104, if it is determined that the type of jackpot this time is not jackpot type "Hidden Probability A" (S6104: No), it is determined that the type of jackpot this time is jackpot type "Short Time A," the Short Time High Probability Flag 203m is turned on (S6106), the Short Time Counter 203o is set to "100" (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the process of S6108, an ending command is set to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate the start of the jackpot ending sequence (S6108). The ending command set in the process of S6108 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the next timer interrupt process (see S201 in Figure 31).

The audio lamp control device 113 executes the jackpot ending sequence upon receiving the ending command.

After the processing in S6108 is completed, the ending time (for example, "10 seconds") is set according to the game state (S6109), and a jackpot termination setting process is performed to execute various processes at the end of the jackpot (S6110). This jackpot termination process (S614) then ends, and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 41).

Returning to Figure 41, let's continue the explanation. In the process of S611, if it is not a big win (S611: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small win (S615). If the determination is that it is not a small win (S615: No), this win process (S203) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31). On the other hand, if it is a small win (S615: Yes), then the small win opening/closing control process is executed, which controls the opening and closing of the variable prize device 65 according to the small win game of each special symbol (S616).

Here, referring to Figure 45, we will describe the minor win opening/closing control process (S616), which is one of the processes of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the minor win opening/closing control process (S616) in the first embodiment.

In this minor win opening/closing control process (S616), the opening and closing control of the variable prize winning device 65 is executed based on the number of times the variable prize winning device 65 was opened in the win process (S203).

In this minor win opening/closing control process (S616), it is first determined whether the opening time set in S609 of the win process (S203), or the interval time set in S6320 of the minor win opening process (S6306) (see Figure 46 below), has elapsed (S6301). If, as a result of this determination, the opening time or interval time for the minor win has not elapsed (S6301: No), then it is not the timing for opening the variable prize device 65. Therefore, the variable prize device 65 remains closed, skipping processes S6302 to S6304 and proceeding to S6305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301, if the opening time or interval time for a minor win has elapsed (S6301: Yes), it is time for the variable prize device 65 to open. Therefore, first, "10" is set in the prize counter (not shown) (S6302), and then the opening time of the variable prize device 65 is set (S6303). Then, a command to open the large prize opening, indicating that the variable prize device 65 has opened, is generated and set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 (S6304), and the process proceeds to S6305.

In process S6305, it is determined whether the variable prize device 65 is open during a minor win (S6305). If the determination is that the variable prize device 65 is not open during a minor win (S6305: No), then the variable prize device 65 is not open during the minor win, but rather in the opening time or interval time. Therefore, process S6306 is skipped, this minor win opening/closing control process (S616) is terminated, and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 41). On the other hand, if process S6305 determines that the variable prize device 65 is open during a minor win (S6305: Yes), then the minor win open process is performed (S6306) to determine the closing conditions for the open variable prize device 65, this minor win opening/closing control process (S616) is terminated, and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 41).

Here, referring to Figure 46, we will describe the minor win opening/closing control process (S616) performed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the first embodiment, specifically the minor win opening process (S6306). Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the minor win opening process (S6306) in the first embodiment.

In the small prize opening process (S6306) of the first embodiment, a process is executed to determine whether or not the closing condition for the variable prize device 65, which is open, is met.

In this minor prize opening process (S6306), first, it is determined whether the opening time for the variable prize device 65, set in S6303 of the aforementioned minor prize opening/closing control process (S616), has elapsed (S6311). If the determination shows that the opening time for the variable prize device 65 has elapsed (S6311: Yes), then the closing condition for the variable prize device 65 is met. Since this is the closing time for the variable prize device 65 in that round, the prize counter value is cleared to "0" (S6312), and the process proceeds to S6316 to close the variable prize device 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S6311, if the opening time of the variable prize device 65 has not elapsed (S6311: No), then it is determined whether the large prize slot switch 65c (see Figure 5) was turned on, that is, whether a ball entered the variable prize device 65 (S6313).

In the process of S6313, if a ball is detected by the large prize slot switch 65c and enters the variable prize device 65 (S6313: Yes), the value of the prize counter is decremented by 1 (S6314), and then it is determined whether the value of the prize counter after decrementing by 1 is greater than "0" (S6315). If the value of the prize counter is not greater than "0" (S6315: No), that is, if the value of the prize counter is "0" or less, then 10 or more balls have entered the variable prize device 65, and the closing condition for the variable prize device 65 has been met. Therefore, the process proceeds to S6316 to close the variable prize device 65.

In the closing process of the variable prize device 65 starting from S6316, first, the closing setting for the variable prize device 65 is performed (S6316), and then a command to close the main prize slot is set to indicate to the audio lamp control device 113 that the variable prize device 65 has been closed (S6317), and the process proceeds to S6318. The main prize slot closing command set in the process of S6317 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 31).

Next, in the process of S6318, since one round of the variable prize device 65 has been completed, the value of the round counter is deducted by 1 (S6318), and the process proceeds to S6319.

In the process of S6319, it is determined whether the value of the round counter, which was decremented by 1 in the process of S6318, is greater than "0" (S6319). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6319: Yes), it is determined that there are still rounds remaining for the small win (the remaining number of times the variable prize device 65 will open), so an interval time (for example, "1 second") is set until the next variable prize device 65 is opened (S6320), the small win opening process (S6306) is terminated, and the process returns to the small win opening/closing control process (see Figure 45). On the other hand, in the process of S6319, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0," that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less (S6319: No), then there are no remaining rounds (remaining openings of the variable prize device 65) for that minor win. Therefore, the process of S6320 is skipped, and this minor win opening process (S6306) is terminated, returning to the minor win opening/closing control process (see Figure 45).

Furthermore, if, during processing S6313, it is determined that no ball has entered the variable prize device 65 (S6313: No), or if, during processing S6315, it is determined that the value of the prize counter is greater than "0" (S6315: Yes), then the closing condition for the variable prize device 65 is not met. In order to continue keeping the variable prize device 65 open, processing S6316 to S6320 is skipped, this minor prize opening processing (S6306) is terminated, and the process returns to the minor prize opening/closing control processing (see Figure 45).

Furthermore, in the minor prize game for each special symbol in the first embodiment, the opening time of the large prize opening plate 65a is set so that no more than 10 balls launched within the maximum opening time based on the minor prize win of each special symbol cannot enter (i.e., 0.1 seconds for special symbol 1 minor prize, and 1.5 seconds for special symbol 2 minor prize). Therefore, the closing condition of the variable prize device 65, which is based on the elapsed opening time of the variable prize device 65, rather than the closing condition based on the number of balls that enter, is more likely to be met.

Returning to the hit process (S203) in Figure 41, let's continue the explanation. After the completion of the minor hit opening/closing control process (S616) (see Figure 45), it is determined whether the round counter value is greater than "0" (S617). If the result of the determination is that the round counter value is greater than "0" (S617: Yes), the minor hit continues, so the process of setting the end of the minor hit (S618) is skipped, this hit process (S203) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S617: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less, then all opening operations of the variable prize device 65 for this minor win have been completed. Therefore, in order to end the minor win state, the minor win termination process is performed (S618), and this win process (S203) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 41).

Next, referring to Figure 47, we will explain the graph fluctuation processing (S211), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 47 is a flowchart showing this graph fluctuation processing (S211).

This symbol variation processing (S211) controls the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 83 in response to the passage of a ball through the through gate 67.

In this regular symbol variation process (S211), it is first determined whether the regular electric motor 72 is currently in operation, that is, whether a regular symbol is currently in a winning state (S701). If the result of this determination is that the regular electric motor 72 is in operation (S701: Yes), then a regular symbol is currently in a winning state, and the regular symbol variation process (S211) is terminated, returning to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

On the other hand, if the normal electric symbol 72 is not protruding (S701: No), it is not a normal symbol win. Therefore, it is then determined whether the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in the variable display mode of the normal symbol (S702). If the result of this determination is that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is not in the variable display mode of the normal symbol (S702: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, "1 second") has elapsed since the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stopped (S703). If the result is that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the variable display stopped (S703: No), this normal symbol variation processing (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31). As a result, the stopped symbol in the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, allowing the player to see the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, if, as a result of the processing in S703, a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display stopped (S703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the normal symbol reserve ball counter 203h (the number of reserve balls HN for the variable display related to the normal symbols held in reserve in the main control device 110) is greater than "0" (S704).

If the value of the normal symbol reserve ball counter 203h (operated reserve ball count HN) is not greater than "0" as a result of the processing in S704 (S704: No), it means that there are no reserved balls for the variable display of the normal symbol to be executed. Therefore, this normal symbol variation processing (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserve ball counter 203h (operated reserve ball count HN) is greater than "0" (S704: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable display related to the reserved normal symbol. First, the value of the normal symbol reserve ball counter 203h (operated reserve ball count HN) is deducted by 1 (S705). This is because, as described later (S706-S712), the execution of one of the variable displays related to the reserved normal symbol begins, and the number of reserved balls related to the normal symbol decreases by 1.

Next, the data stored in the regular-role reserved ball storage area 203i is shifted (S706). This data shifting process sequentially shifts the data stored in the regular-role reserved ball storage area 203i's regular-role reserved ball areas 1 to 4 toward the regular-role reserved ball execution area 203j. The data within each area is shifted as follows: regular-role reserved ball area 1 → regular-role reserved ball execution area 203j, regular-role reserved ball area 2 → regular-role reserved ball area 1, regular-role reserved ball area 3 → regular-role reserved ball area 2, regular-role reserved ball area 4 → regular-role reserved ball area 3, and so on.

After the data shift processing in S706, based on the data stored in the regular symbol hold ball execution area 203j by the data shift processing (i.e., the value of the regular symbol hit counter C4), it is first determined whether the time-saving low probability flag 203n or the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S707). If, as a result of the determination, the time-saving low probability flag 203n and the time-saving high probability flag 203m are not turned on (S707: No), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is disabled in a "normal game state" or a "latent probability fluctuation state," and the variable display time for the regular symbols is set to "15 seconds" (S708), and the process moves to S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving low probability flag 203n or the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S707: Yes), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is active in a "probability fluctuation state," a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," and the variable display time of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 seconds" (S709), and the process proceeds to S710.

In the processing of S710, it is determined whether the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S710). If the time-saving high probability flag 203m is not turned on (S710: No), that is, in the low probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal symbol hit counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203j is determined by referring to the group for the low probability state in the normal symbol hit random number table 202h, and the stop symbol of the variable display of normal symbols (i.e., whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss) is determined (S711). Also, if the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S710: Yes), that is, in the high probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal symbol hit counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203j is determined by referring to the group for the high probability state in the normal symbol hit random number table 202h, and the stop symbol of the variable display of normal symbols (i.e., whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss) is determined (S712). After processing S711 and S712, this general diagram variation processing (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31).

This allows for variations in the probability of winning with regular symbols depending on the game state. When a player shoots to the right, this creates a difference in how easily the regular electric payload 72 opens when the ball passes through the through gate 67. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the game can be divided into two states: one where the regular electric payload 72 is more likely to open (i.e., a high probability state for regular symbols), allowing the ball to easily flow into the lower second start opening 71a; and another where the regular electric payload 72 is less likely to open (i.e., a low probability state for regular symbols), allowing the ball to roll from the left end to the right end of the closed (protruding) upper surface of the regular electric payload 72 and flow into the variable prize entry device 65. This difference in gameplay depending on the game state creates different gameplay characteristics for each game state.

In the process of S702, if it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display mode (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the process of S708 or S709. If this variable display time has not elapsed (S713: No), the display of the normal symbol display device 83 is updated (S714), this normal symbol variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

On the other hand, if the variable display time for the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S713: Yes), the normal symbol display device 83 is set to a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol that was set in advance by S711 or S712 (S715), and this normal symbol variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is set based on this normal symbol variation process (S211). From the start of the variable display until the variable display time has elapsed, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are illuminated alternately. If the variable display result is a win, the "○" symbol is illuminated; if it is a loss, the "×" symbol is illuminated.

Next, referring to Figure 48, we will explain the normal power supply control process (S204), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing this normal power supply control process (S204).

This standard electric motor control process (S204) executes opening and closing (protrusion and retraction) drive control of the standard electric motor 72 according to the game state when a win occurs with a standard symbol. Specifically, it sets the opening (retraction) time of the standard electric motor 72 according to the game state, drives the standard electric motor 72 to open based on the set time, and executes control to close (protrude) the standard electric motor 72 while it is open (retracted) after the set protrusion time has elapsed.

In this standard electric payload control process (S204), first, it is determined whether the standard electric payload 72 is open (recessed), that is, whether a regular symbol is in a winning state (S801). If the determination is that the standard electric payload 72 is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that a regular symbol is not in a winning state, then it is determined whether the variable display of the regular symbol has finished (S802).

If the determination in S802 indicates that the variable display of the normal symbols has not finished (S802: No), then this normal electric control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31). However, if the variable display of the normal symbols has finished (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether a win has been achieved in the variable display (S803).

If the determination in S803 indicates that the variable display has not resulted in a win (S803: No), this normal electric control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31). On the other hand, if the variable display indicates that a win has been achieved (S803: Yes), in order to execute the control related to the win, it is first determined whether the time-saving low probability flag 203n or the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S804).

If, as a result of the determination in S804, it is determined that the time-saving low probability flag 203n and the time-saving high probability flag 203m are not turned on (S804: No), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is disabled in either the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state." Based on the contents of the normal electric motor opening table 202j, the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 in the winning state is set to "0.1 seconds" (S805). To perform one opening of the normal electric motor 72 based on this win, the value of the electric motor counter (not shown) is set to "1" (S806), and the process proceeds to S809.

On the other hand, in the processing of S804, if it is determined that the time-saving low probability flag 203n or the time-saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S804: Yes), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is active in a "probability fluctuation state," a "normal high probability time reduction state," or a "normal low probability time reduction state." Based on the contents of the normal electric role release table 202j, the release (immersion) time of the normal electric role 72 in the winning state is set to "5.8 seconds" (S807). In order to perform one release of the normal electric role 72 based on this win, the value of the electric role counter (not shown) is set to "1" (S808), and the process proceeds to S809.

In the S809 process, the ordinary electric power supply 72 is opened (immersed) (S809), driving the ordinary electric power supply 72, which was in the closed (protruding) state, to the open state. This ordinary electric power supply control process (S204) then ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

This allows for a difference in the duration of the open state of the ball when the player shoots to the right, specifically whether the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the location of the standard electric valve 72 and remains open for a longer or shorter period. As a result, by varying the conditions of the game—whether the ball passing through the through gate 67 is easily guided towards the lower second start opening 71a, or whether, in the closed state of the standard electric valve 72, it rolls completely across its upper surface from left to right, allowing it to flow down towards the variable prize-winning device 65—different gameplay characteristics can be created for each game state.

In the process of S801, if it is determined that the normal electric valve 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that a normal symbol is in play, then it is determined in S805 or S807 whether the set opening time for the normal electric valve 72 has elapsed (S810). If the result of the determination is that the set opening time for the normal electric valve 72 has not elapsed (S810: No), then in order to maintain the open state of the normal electric valve 72, the processes of S811 to S813 are skipped, this normal electric valve control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

On the other hand, in the process of S810, if it is determined that the set opening time for one normal electric valve 72 has elapsed (S810: Yes), first, the normal electric valve 72 is closed (extended) (S811), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the electric valve counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether the value of the subtracted electric valve counter is greater than "0" (S813). If, as a result of the determination, it is determined that the value of the electric valve counter is greater than "0" (S813: Yes), since there are still opening counts of the normal electric valve 72 based on that win, the process moves to S809, a predetermined interval process is performed, and then the normal electric valve 72 is opened again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power supply counter is not greater than "0" (S813: No), that is, if the value of the power supply counter is "0" or less, it means that all of the normal power supply 72 openings based on that win have been completed. Therefore, the normal power supply 72 is not opened again, and this normal power supply control process (S204) is terminated, returning to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 31).

Next, with reference to Figure 49, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 110 in the event of a power outage or the like will be explained. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt processing is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power outage or the like.

This NMI interrupt processing stores power outage information in RAM 203. Specifically, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Upon receiving the power outage signal SG1 at the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts its ongoing control and begins NMI interrupt processing. It stores the power outage information in RAM 203 (S901) as a setting for power outage information, and then terminates the NMI interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing stores information about the power outage in the RAM 213. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111. The MPU 211 then interrupts its ongoing control and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to Figures 50 to 56, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 within the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. The processes of the MPU 221 can be broadly divided into a startup process (see Figure 50) that is initiated when the power is turned on, and a main process (see Figure 51) that is executed after the startup process.

First, referring to Figure 50, the startup process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 50 is a flowchart illustrating this startup process. This startup process is initiated when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, the initial setup process associated with power-on is performed first (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set to the stack pointer. Then, based on whether the power-off process flag is on or off, it is determined whether the startup process was started during the execution of the power-off process (see Figure 51) in S1116 due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power outage, a so-called "instantaneous interruption") (S1002). As will be described later with reference to Figure 51, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, it executes the power-off process in S1116. Before the execution of this power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned on, and after the completion of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off process in S1116 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), then the current startup process started either after the power was completely cut off, after a momentary power outage occurred and after the power-off processing in S1116 was completed, or because noise caused a reset only on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is necessary to check whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003).

The verification of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows: Specifically, data with the keyword "55AAh" is written to a particular area of RAM 223 by the process in S1006. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked. If the data is "55AAh", then there is no data corruption in RAM 223; conversely, if it is not "55AAh", then data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 to start initializing RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

Furthermore, if this startup process begins after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory in RAM 223 is lost due to the power outage), so it will be judged as data corruption in RAM 223 (S1003: Yes), and the process will proceed to S1004. On the other hand, if this startup process begins after a momentary power outage and after the power cut-off process in S1116 has been completed, or if it begins due to a reset only on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 caused by noise, the keyword "55AAh" will be stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 will be judged as normal (S1003: No), and the process will proceed to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), this startup process began after a momentary power outage, during the execution of the power-off process in S1116, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset. In this case, since the power-off process is still in progress, the memory state of RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, control cannot be continued in this case, and the process moves to S1004 to begin initializing RAM 223.

In process S1004, the entire memory area of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The check method involves first writing "0FFh" to each byte, then reading it back one byte at a time to verify if it is "0FFh". If it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This byte-by-byte writing and verification is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all memory areas of RAM 223 to "0".

If read/write checks are determined to be normal for all memory areas of RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written to a specific area of RAM 223 to set RAM corruption check data (S1006). By checking the "55AAh" keyword written to this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality is detected in the read/write check of any memory area of RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in RAM 223 is reported (S1007), and an infinite loop occurs until the power is cut off. The abnormality in RAM 223 is indicated by the indicator lamp 34. Alternatively, the abnormality in RAM 223 may be indicated by an audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in Figure 51). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, so the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on only if the current startup process starts after a momentary power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S1010), the left-hit instruction execution flag 223i is set to on (S1051), and the right-hit instruction execution flag 223j is set to off (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process moves to S1012. The working area of RAM 223 refers to the area other than the area used to store commands received from the main control unit 110.

On the other hand, the process leading to S1008 with the power-off flag turned off occurs when, for example, the startup process started after the power was completely cut off, and proceeded to S1008 via processes S1004 through S1006, or when only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise, etc. (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such cases (S1008: No), S1009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process moves to S1010. After setting the initial value of RAM 223 (S1010), the left-hit instruction execution flag 223i is set to ON (S1051), and the right-hit instruction execution flag 223j is set to OFF (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process moves to S1012.

The reason for skipping the clear process in S1009 is that, if the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, the entire memory area of RAM 223 has already been cleared by the process in S1004. Furthermore, if only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or other factors, and the startup process begins, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is not cleared but saved, allowing control of the audio lamp control device 113 to continue.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and the system waits until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). If a setting value command is received from the main control unit 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in the setting value memory (not shown) (S1013), and the system proceeds to the main process (see Figure 51).

In this way, during the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113, the transition to the main process (see Figure 51) is delayed until a setting value command generated at the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 (see Figure 28) is received. This ensures that the audio lamp control device 113 reliably grasps the probability setting value set by the main control device 110 and can execute subsequent processes based on this probability setting value. Furthermore, if the setting value command is not received from the main control device 110, the startup process of the main control device 110 has not reached its end, and therefore the startup process of the main control device 110 has not completed normally. Consequently, the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will not complete normally, and the transition to the main process will not be allowed. This configuration allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine whether the startup process of the main control device 110 has been executed normally, and prevents runaway operation of the audio lamp control device 113 when the main control device 110 has not started up properly.

Next, referring to Figure 51, the main processing performed by the MPU 221 within the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 51 is a flowchart illustrating this main processing.

When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed since the previous execution of process S1101 (S1101). If "1 millisecond" or more has not elapsed (S1101: No), the process proceeds to process S1110 without executing processes S1102 to S1109. The reason for determining whether "1 millisecond" has elapsed in process S1101 is that while processes S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed at short intervals (within "1 millisecond"), the fluctuation effect processing in S1110 and the command judgment processing in S1111 are processes that are preferable to be executed at short intervals. Executing process S1111 at short intervals prevents missed reception of commands transmitted from the main control unit 110, and executing process S1110 at short intervals allows for the setting of fluctuation effects based on the commands received by the command judgment processing without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that more than "1 millisecond" has elapsed since the previous execution of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. However, if the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the startup process shown in Figure 50, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In process S1102, various commands for the display control device 114, which were set in processes S1103 to S1112, are sent to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting pattern of the indicator lamps 34 and the lamp lighting pattern edited in process S1107 (described later) (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process provides a notification for a predetermined time (e.g., "30 seconds") indicating that power has been supplied when power is turned on. This notification is provided by the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If power is not being turned on, the power-on notification process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1105.

Next, in the S1105 process, a winning animation process is performed (S1105) that executes the animation related to the jackpot set by the command determination process in S1111, which will be described later, and then the process proceeds to S1106. In the first embodiment, a predetermined animation (for example, an animation indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened, or a right-hand shooting notification animation) is executed while the variable prize winning device 65 related to the jackpot by the first and second special symbols is open.

Next, in the S1106 process, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S1106). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors whether the frame button 22, which is operated by the player to enhance the effect, has been pressed during its validity period. If input of the frame button 22 is confirmed during the validity period, the system is configured to perform the corresponding effect.

After the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), followed by the sound editing and output processing (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29-33 are set to correspond to the display on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing and output processing, the output patterns of the sound output device 226 are set to correspond to the display on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to these settings.

After processing in S1108, the LCD effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and then the process proceeds to S1110. In the LCD effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in this LCD effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1107 is executed, and the sound editing and output process in S1108 is also executed with a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the S1110 process, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the system executes the variation effect processing corresponding to the first or second special symbol based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern command and special symbol 1 stop type command, or the special symbol 2 variation pattern command and special symbol 2 stop type command received from the main control device 110 (S1110), and then proceeds to S1151. Details of this variation effect processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to Figure 55.

In the process of S1151, the current game state and the display content on the third symbol display device 81 are determined in order to display the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance shooting instruction on the third symbol display device 81. Commands for each shooting instruction are then set, and the process proceeds to S1111. Details of this shooting instruction display process (S1151) will be described later with reference to Figure 56.

In process S1111, a command determination process is performed (S1111) to determine the processing corresponding to the command received from the main control unit 110, and then the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to Figure 52.

In S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, the update of the counter that determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, and the update of the hold change counter (not shown) that draws the "hold change notification," are performed in this counter update process. The update of these counters is performed by sequentially incrementing by 1 within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, "0 to 99"), and then resetting to "0" after reaching the maximum value ("99").

After processing in S1112, it is determined whether or not power outage information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). Power outage information is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If power outage information is stored in processing S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power outage process is executed (S1116). After the power outage process is executed, the power outage processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the process enters an infinite loop. During the power outage process, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, turning off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored power outage information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage information is not stored in the S1113 process (S1113: No), it is determined whether RAM 223 is corrupted or not based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S1114). If RAM 223 is not corrupted (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 223 is corrupted (S1114: Yes), the process enters an infinite loop to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

If RAM corruption is detected and an infinite loop occurs, the main process will not execute, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 will not change. Therefore, the player will know that an abnormality has occurred and can call a hall employee to request repairs to the pachinko machine 10. Alternatively, if RAM 223 is confirmed to be corrupted, the audio output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM corruption.

Next, referring to Figure 52, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 52 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed within the main process (see Figure 51) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114, as described above.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 110 in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). If the determination result is that a command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed to determine whether or not a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol (i.e., a special symbol 1 variation pattern command, a special symbol 1 stop type command, or a special symbol 1 confirmation command, etc.) has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1202). If it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has been received (S1202: Yes), the special symbol 1 command processing is performed to execute the respective processes related to that command (S1203), and the command determination process (S1111) ends, returning to the main process (see Figure 51).

Here, referring to Figure 53, the command processing (S1203) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 53 is a flowchart showing this command processing (S1203).

This special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) executes various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110.

In the Special Symbol 1 command processing (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not a Special Symbol 1 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1221). If the determination result is that a Special Symbol 1 variation pattern command has been received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received Special Symbol 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and used in the variation effect processing (see Figure 55) described later to set a display special symbol 1 variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type according to the game state. After this, the special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) ends and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the Specifications 1 Variable Pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the Specifications 1 Stop Type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1223). If it is determined that the Specifications 1 Stop Type command has been received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the Specifications 1 Stop Type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and used in the variable effect processing (see Figure 55) described later to set a display special symbol 1 stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect of the first special symbol according to the game state. After that, the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a, which indicates that the variable effect of the first special symbol has started, is set to ON (S1225), and this special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) ends, returning to the command judgment processing (see Figure 52).

The Special Symbol 1 Stop Type command is a command that is always sent by the main control device 110 after the main control device 110 sends the Special Symbol 1 Variation Pattern command when the variation performance of the first special symbol is started. The command indicates the stop type of the variation performance of the first special symbol whose variation pattern is indicated by the Special Symbol 1 Variation Pattern command. By setting the Special Symbol 1 Variation Start Flag 223a to ON through the processing in S1225, the variation performance processing (see Figure 55) that is executed later will determine whether the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the first reserved ball count command matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received Special Symbol 1 Variation Pattern command. In addition, it will determine whether the stop type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the first reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received Special Symbol 1 Stop Type command. Based on these judgments, if the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball count command and the variation pattern based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern command do not match in the variation performance of the first special symbol 1, or if the stop type based on the first reserved ball count command and the stop type based on the special symbol 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (for example, a command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the system is configured to perform error processing to indicate the abnormality.

If the result of processing in S1223 determines that a Special Symbol 1 stop type command has not been received (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not a Special Symbol 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1226). The Special Symbol 1 confirmation command is a command used to confirm the display of the variation animation of the first special symbol if the variation animation of the first special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this Special Symbol 1 confirmation command has been received (S1226: Yes), a display Special Symbol 1 confirmation command is set for the display control device 114 to confirm the display of the variation animation of the first special symbol if the variation animation of the first special symbol is being executed (S1227), and this Special Symbol 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, returning to the command determination processing (see Figure 52).

When the display control device 114 receives a command to confirm the display special symbol 1 from the audio lamp control device 113, if the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, it displays the variation effect of the first special symbol as confirmed. However, if the variation effect of the first special symbol is not being executed on the third symbol display device 81, it ignores the command to confirm the display special symbol 1 (i.e., does not execute any processing based on it, and does not change the display content based on it).

If the result of processing in S1226 determines that the Special Symbol 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1226: No), then other processing related to the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed (S1228), and this Special Symbol 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, returning to the command determination processing (see Figure 52).

Returning to Figure 52, let's continue the explanation. If, in the process of S1202, it is determined that no command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has been received (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol (i.e., a special symbol 2 variation pattern command, a special symbol 2 stop type command, or a special symbol 2 confirmation command, etc.) has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). If it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has been received (S1204: Yes), then the special symbol 2 command processing is performed to execute each process related to that command (S1205), and the command determination process (S1111) ends, returning to the main process (see Figure 51).

Here, referring to Figure 54, the command processing (S1205) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 54 is a flowchart showing this command processing (S1205).

This special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) executes various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110.

In the Special Symbol 2 command processing (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not a Special Symbol 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1231). If the determination result is that a Special Symbol 2 variation pattern command has been received (S1231: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received Special Symbol 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and used in the variation effect processing (see Figure 55) described later to set a display special symbol 2 variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type according to the game state. After this, the special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) ends and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the Specifications 2 Variable Pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), then it is determined whether or not the Specifications 2 Stop Type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1233). If it is determined that the Specifications 2 Stop Type command has been received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the Specifications 2 Stop Type command (S1234).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and used in the variable effect processing (see Figure 55) described later to set a display special symbol 2 stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect of the second special symbol according to the game state. After that, the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b, which indicates that the variable effect of the second special symbol has started, is set to ON (S1235), and this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) ends, returning to the command judgment processing (see Figure 52).

The Special Symbol 2 Stop Type command is a command that is always sent by the main control device 110 to start the variation performance of the second special symbol after the main control device 110 sends the Special Symbol 2 Variation Pattern command. This command indicates the stop type of the variation performance of the second special symbol whose variation pattern is indicated by the Special Symbol 2 Variation Pattern command. By setting the Special Symbol 2 Variation Start Flag 223b to ON through the processing in S1235, the variation performance processing (see Figure 55) that is executed later will determine whether the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the second reserved ball count command matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received Special Symbol 2 Variation Pattern command. It will also determine whether the stop type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the second reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received Special Symbol 2 Stop Type command. Based on these judgments, if the variation pattern based on the second special symbol variation command does not match the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball count command, or if the stop type based on the second reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the special symbol variation type command, then it is determined that some kind of abnormality (for example, a command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the system is configured to perform error processing to indicate the abnormality.

If the result of processing in S1233 determines that the Special Figure 2 Stop Type command has not been received (S1233: No), then it is determined whether or not the Special Figure 2 Confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1236). The Special Figure 2 Confirmation command is a command to confirm and display the variation animation of the second special symbol if the variation animation of the second special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this Special Figure 2 Confirmation command has been received (S1236: Yes), a display Special Figure 2 Confirmation command is set for the display control device 114 to confirm and display the variation animation of the second special symbol if the variation animation of the second special symbol is being executed (S1237), and this Special Figure 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see Figure 52).

When the display control device 114 receives a command to confirm the display of special symbol 2 from the audio lamp control device 113, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, it displays the variation effect of the second special symbol as confirmed. However, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is not being executed on the third symbol display device 81, it ignores the command to confirm the display of special symbol 2 (i.e., does not execute any processing based on it, and does not change the display content based on it).

If the result of processing in S1236 determines that a Special Symbol 2 confirmation command has not been received (S1236: No), then other processing related to the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed (S1238), and this Special Symbol 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, returning to the command determination processing (see Figure 52).

Returning to Figure 52, let's continue the explanation. If, in the process of S1204, it is determined that no command has been received regarding the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the first reserved ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1206). If it is determined that the first reserved ball count command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) included in the first reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, all included in the first reserved ball count command, are stored in the first to fourth reserved ball storage areas of the first reserved ball storage area 223e, indicated by the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c updated in S1207 (S1208). Then, a display-use first reserved ball count command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the first special symbol (S1209), and the command judgment process (S1111) ends, returning to the main process (see Figure 51).

Here, the first reserved ball count command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first start opening 64 (start entry). Therefore, each time a start entry occurs, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c of the audio lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to match the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 through the processing in S1207. Thus, even if the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c of the audio lamp control unit 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to noise or other factors, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c of the audio lamp control unit 113 can be corrected and matched to the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 when a start entry is detected.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first reserved information storage area 223e. That is, it can determine what the result of the reserved first special symbol variation effect will be (whether or not it will result in a jackpot, what the variation time will be, etc.) before the variation effect is executed, and then decide whether to execute various effects.

If the result of processing in S1206 determines that the first reserved ball count command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1210). If it is determined that the second reserved ball count command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) included in the second reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol variation effect held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the second reserved ball count command, are stored in the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved information storage area 223f, indicated by the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d updated in S1211 (S1212). Then, a display-use second reserved ball count command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball count for the variation effect of the second special symbol (S1213), and the command judgment process (S1111) ends, returning to the main process (see Figure 51).

Here, the second reserved ball count command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a (start entry). Therefore, each time a start entry occurs, the processing in S1211 allows the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 to be adjusted to the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110. Thus, even if the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to noise or other factors, the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected and adjusted to match the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 when a start entry is detected.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the second reserved information storage area 223f. That is, it can determine what the result of the reserved second special symbol variation effect will be (whether or not it will result in a jackpot, what the variation time will be, etc.) before the variation effect is executed, and then decide whether to execute various effects.

If the processing in S1210 determines that the second reserved ball count command has not been received (S1210: No), then processing according to other commands is performed (S1216), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51). Here, if the received other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, the corresponding processing is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114. For example, a demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing in S1216, temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1102) of the main process.

Next, referring to Figure 55, the variable effect processing (S1110) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 55 is a flowchart showing this variable effect processing (S1110).

This variation effect processing (S1110) is executed within the main processing (see Figure 51) and performs various processes to execute variation effects for the first or second special symbol in the main display area Dm (see Figure 4) of the third symbol display device 81, depending on the game state. Specifically, if the game state is "normal game state," the variation effect for the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, while the display related to the variation effect for the second special symbol is not shown. Furthermore, if the game state is "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," "probability variation state," "latent probability variation state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," the variation effect for the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, while the display related to the variation effect for the first special symbol is not shown.

In the variation effect processing (S1110), it is first determined whether the special feature 1 variation start flag 223a, which is provided in the RAM 223, is on or off (S1301). If the determination results in the Special Symbol 1 variation start flag 223a being ON (S1301: Yes), and both the Special Symbol 1 variation pattern command and the Special Symbol 1 stop type command have been received, the Special Symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is turned OFF to start the variation performance of the first special symbol (S1302). Next, the data contained in the first reserved information storage area 1 of the first reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g (S1303). Furthermore, the data contained in the second to fourth reserved information storage areas 223e of the first reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the first to third reserved information storage areas (S1304). The value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c is then deducted by 1 (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1306.

In other words, in this case, the number of pending special symbol variation animations is reduced by one, and the execution of the first pending special symbol variation animation is started. Therefore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information first area corresponding to the first pending variation animation are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the currently executing special symbol variation animation. Furthermore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage second area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage first area; the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage third area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage second area; and the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage fourth area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage third area.

As a result, the first execution information storage area 223g will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first held ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110, and the first to fourth held information storage areas of the first held information storage area 223e will each store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first held ball storage areas 1 to 4 of the first held ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110.

In the S1306 process, it is determined whether the current game state is a "normal game state" or not (S1306). If the determination is that it is not a "normal game state" (S1306: No), that is, if it is determined to be a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," a "probability fluctuation state," a "latent probability fluctuation state," or a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," then the game state is one in which the second special symbol fluctuation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the first special symbol fluctuation effect is not performed. Therefore, processes S1307 to S1309 are skipped, this fluctuation effect processing (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

On the other hand, if, in the process of S1306, it is determined that the current game state is a "normal game state" (S1306: Yes), then, since this is a game state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, first, the display first reserved ball count command is set based on the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c that was subtracted in the process of S1305 (S1307), and then the process proceeds to S1308.

The first reserved ball count command for display, set here, is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 51). The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol indicated by this first reserved ball count command for display.

Next, in the S1308 process, based on the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed is obtained. Based on this variation pattern, a special symbol 1 variation pattern command for display is set in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation effect of the first special symbol (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1309.

The display special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 51). The display control device 114 then starts display control of the variation effect of the first special figure so that the variation of the third figure corresponding to the first special figure is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third figure display device 81 according to the variation pattern indicated by this display special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1309, based on the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed is obtained. Based on this stop type, a display special symbol 1 stop type command is set in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation effect of the first special symbol (S1309). This variation effect processing (S1110) is then terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

The display symbol 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 51). The display control device 114 sets the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display symbol 1 stop type command when confirming the display of the first special symbol variation effect executed by the display symbol 1 variation pattern command set in processing S1309.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation start flag 223b provided in RAM 223 is on or not (S1310). If the determination results in the Special Symbol 2 variation start flag 223b being ON (S1310: Yes), and both the Special Symbol 2 variation pattern command and the Special Symbol 2 stop type command have been received, the Special Symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is turned OFF (S1311) in order to start the variation performance of the second special symbol. Next, the data contained in the second reserved information storage area 1 of the second reserved information storage area 223f is shifted to the second execution information storage area 223h (S1312). Furthermore, the data contained in the second to fourth reserved information storage areas 223f of the second reserved information storage area 223f is shifted to the first to third reserved information storage areas (S1313). The value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d is then deducted by 1 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315.

In other words, in this case, one of the reserved second special symbol variation animations is removed, and the first reserved second special symbol variation animation is executed. Therefore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to that first reserved variation animation are moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the second special symbol variation animation currently being executed. Furthermore, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area of the second reserved information storage are moved to each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the first area of the second reserved information storage; the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area of the second reserved information storage are moved to each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area of the second reserved information storage; and the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth area of the second reserved information storage are moved to each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area of the second reserved information storage.

As a result, the second execution information storage area 223h will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g of the main control device 110, and the first to fourth reserved information storage areas of the second reserved information storage area 223f will each store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110.

In process S1315, it is determined whether the current game state is a "normal game state" (S1315). If the determination is that it is a "normal game state" (S1315: Yes), the game state is one in which the first special symbol variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second special symbol variation effect is not performed. Therefore, processes S1316 to S1318 are skipped, this variation effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

On the other hand, if, during the processing of S1315, it is determined that the current game state is not the "normal game state" (S1316: No), that is, if it is determined to be the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the "probability fluctuation state," the "latent probability fluctuation state," or the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," then the game state is one in which the second special symbol fluctuation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, first, the display second reserved ball count command is set based on the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d subtracted in the processing of S1314 (S1316), and the process proceeds to S1317.

The second reserved ball count command for display, set here, is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 via the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 51). The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the second special symbol indicated by this second reserved ball count command for display.

Next, in the S1317 process, based on the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation effect to be executed is obtained. Based on this variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern command for display is set in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation effect of the second special symbol (S1317), and the process proceeds to S1318.

The special symbol 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 51). The display control device 114 then starts display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol so that the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation pattern indicated by this special symbol 2 variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1318, based on the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the stop type of the second special symbol variation effect to be executed is obtained. Based on this stop type, a display special symbol 2 stop type command is set in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to display the second special symbol variation effect (S1318). This variation effect processing (S1110) is then terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

The display symbol 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 51). The display control device 114 sets the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display symbol 2 stop type command when confirming the display of the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display symbol 2 variation pattern command set in processing S1317.

Next, referring to Figure 56, the button-pressing instruction display process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 56 is a flowchart showing this button-pressing instruction display process (S1151).

In this playing instruction display process (S1151), the current game state is determined. If the game state is for right-handed play, the main display right-handed play instruction 89 is displayed. If no performance-oriented playing instruction has been executed since the start of the right-handed play, the performance-oriented playing instruction is executed. If the game state is for left-handed play, the main display right-handed play instruction 89 is cleared. If no performance-oriented playing instruction has been executed since the start of the left-handed play, the performance-oriented playing instruction is executed.

In this play instruction display process (S1151), first, it is determined whether the player is in a "normal play state" where left-handed play is performed (S1401). If the result of the determination is that the player is not in a "normal play state" (S1401: No), i.e., in a "normal high probability time reduction state," "probability fluctuation state," "latent probability fluctuation state," or "normal low probability time reduction state," then the player is in a play state where right-handed play is performed. Therefore, it is determined whether the main display right-handed play instruction 89 has already been displayed (S1402). If the main display right-handed play instruction 89 has not already been displayed (S1402: No), the main display right-handed play instruction display command is set (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1402 is that the main display right-handed play instruction 89 has already been displayed (S1402: Yes), the process in S1403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the S1404 process, it is determined whether the "Performance Right-Handed Play Instruction Completed Flag 223j" is turned on (S1404). If the "Performance Right-Handed Play Instruction Completed Flag 223j" is turned on (S1404: Yes), then the performance play instruction has been executed at least once since the game state transitioned from left-handed play to right-handed play. Therefore, processes S1405 to S1408 are skipped, this play instruction display process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1404 is that the flag 223j indicating that the right-hand play instruction for the performance has been executed is not turned on (S1404: No), then since the game state has transitioned from left-hand play to right-hand play, the performance play instruction has not been executed even once. Therefore, in order to execute the performance play instruction, the third symbol display device 81 determines whether or not the variation performance of the first special symbol is currently being executed (S1405). If, as a result of the determination, the third symbol display device 81 is executing the variation animation for the first special symbol (S1405: Yes), that is, the ceiling has been reached in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is performed, and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where right-handed play is performed. However, since the variation animation for the first special symbol that was being executed on the third symbol display device 81 during left-handed play is still being performed (see timing 5 in Figure 19 and Figure 58(d)), in this state, no instructions for how to play for the animation are given, the processing in S1406 to S1408 is skipped, this play instruction display processing (S1151) is terminated, and the game returns to the main processing (see Figure 51).

As a result of the determination in S1405, if the third symbol display device 81 is not currently executing the variation animation for the first special symbol (S1405: No), that is, the ceiling has been reached in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is performed, and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where right-handed play is performed, and the variation animation for the first special symbol that was being executed on the third symbol display device 81 during left-handed play has finished (see timing 6 in Figure 19 and Figure 59(c)). Therefore, in order to issue a play instruction for the animation, the right-handed play instruction command for the animation is set (S1406), the right-handed play instruction completion flag 223j is set to ON (S1407), and the left-handed play instruction completion flag 223i is set to OFF (S1408), and this play instruction display process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

With this configuration, when the game state switches from left-handed play to right-handed play, if the variation animation of the first special symbol that was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 during left-handed play is still running, the animation instructions for playing the animation will not be displayed. Also, when the game state switches from left-handed play to right-handed play, if the variation animation of the first special symbol that was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 during left-handed play is not running, the animation instructions for playing the animation will be displayed only once. As a result, when a player reaches the ceiling in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is performed and transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state" where right-handed play is performed, players who are still playing left-handed will not see the animation instructions for playing the animation while the variation animation of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the variation animation of the first special symbol being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, when the variation animation for the first special symbol, which was being executed on the third symbol display device 81, finishes, instructions for how to play the animation will be displayed, allowing the player to start playing by shooting to the right without any sense of unease.

In the process of S1401, if it is determined that the system is in a "normal game state" (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the main display right-hand play instruction 89 has been cleared (S1409). If the main display right-hand play instruction 89 has not been cleared (S1409: No), the main display right-hand play instruction clear command is set (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, if the determination in S1409 indicates that the main display right-hand play instruction 89 has been cleared (S1409: Yes), the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the S1411 process, it is determined whether the "Performance Left-Handed Instruction Execution Completed" flag 223i is set to ON (S1411). If the flag 223i is ON (S1411: Yes), then since the performance-oriented playing instruction has been executed at least once since the game state transitioned from right-handed to left-handed play, the processes S1413 to S1415 are skipped, this playing instruction display process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1411 is that the flag 223i indicating that the left-hand play instruction for the performance has been executed is not turned on (S1411: No), then since the game state has transitioned from right-hand play to left-hand play, the performance play instruction has not been executed even once. Therefore, in order to execute the performance play instruction, the third symbol display device 81 determines whether or not the variation performance of the second special symbol is currently being executed (S1412). If, as a result of the determination, the third symbol display device 81 is executing the variation animation for the second special symbol (S1412: Yes), that is, the time reduction termination condition is met in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where right-hand play is performed, and the game transitions to the "normal play state" where left-hand play is performed. However, since the variation animation for the second special symbol that was being executed on the third symbol display device 81 during right-hand play is still being performed, no instructions for how to play the animation are given in this state. Therefore, the processes S1413 to S1415 are skipped, this play instruction display process (S1151) is terminated, and the game returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

As a result of the determination in S1412, if the third symbol display device 81 is not currently executing the variation animation for the second special symbol (S1412: No), that is, if the time reduction termination condition is met in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where right-handed play is performed, and the game transitions to the "normal play state" where left-handed play is performed, and the variation animation for the second special symbol that was being executed on the third symbol display device 81 during right-handed play has ended, then, in order to issue a play instruction for the animation, the left-handed play instruction command for the animation is set (S1413), the left-handed play instruction completion flag 223i is set to ON (S1414), and the right-handed play instruction completion flag 223j is set to OFF (S1415), and this play instruction display process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

With this configuration, at the timing when the game state switches from right-handed play to left-handed play, if the second special symbol variation animation that was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 during right-handed play is still running, the animation instructions for playing the animation will not be displayed. Also, at the timing when the game state switches from right-handed play to left-handed play, if the second special symbol variation animation that was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 during right-handed play is not currently running, the animation instructions for playing the animation will be displayed. As a result, when the time reduction termination condition is met in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where right-handed play is performed, and the game transitions to the "normal game state" where left-handed play is performed, players who are still playing right-handed will not see the animation instructions for playing the animation while the second special symbol variation animation is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the second special symbol variation animation being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, at the moment the variation animation for the second special symbol, which was being executed on the third symbol display device 81, ends, instructions for left-handed play will be displayed, allowing the player to start playing left-handed without any difficulty.

As mentioned above, the display of the performance-oriented playing instructions is configured to control whether or not it is displayed by determining the game state and the special symbol variation performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81. However, the main display right-hand play instruction 89 is configured to always be displayed in synchronization with the right-hand play notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37. Therefore, for example, as shown in timing 5 of Figure 19, even if the game state has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" and the main display right-hand play instruction 89 is already displayed, the third symbol display device 81 is still executing the first special symbol variation performance, and the performance-oriented playing instructions have not yet been implemented, the player can switch to right-hand play by confirming that the main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed.

Furthermore, in "normal gameplay," if right-handed play is performed, the system may be configured to display instructions for left-handed play, even if the first special symbol's variation animation is in progress. Since right-handed play in "normal gameplay" is not a recommended firing method, if the system were to withhold instructions such as "Please return to left-handed play" after determining whether the first special symbol's variation animation is in progress, these instructions would not be displayed during the first special symbol's variation animation. Therefore, the instructions for warning the player are configured to be displayed immediately, regardless of whether the special symbol's variation animation is in progress.

Next, referring to Figures 57 to 59, we will explain the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling of the "normal game state" is reached. Figures 57 to 59 show the progression of the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol when the ceiling of the "normal game state" is reached.

Figures 57(a) to 57(d) show the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol during "normal gameplay" in a conventional pachinko machine. Figure 57(a) shows the state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more executions of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Figure 57(b) shows the state from Figure 57(a) where the variation display of the first special symbol has finished, and the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached is... Figure 57(c) shows the state after the number of reels has decreased to one. Figure 57(b) shows the state after the next reel movement of the first special symbol has begun, with the "Super Reach" reel movement being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the reel movement of the second special symbol has also begun. Figure 57(d) shows the state after the reel movement of the second special symbol has finished, reaching the ceiling, and transitioning to the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," with the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance shooting instruction displayed.

Figures 58(a) to 59(d) show the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment during "normal gameplay". Figure 58(a) shows the state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more executions of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Figure 58(b) shows the state from Figure 58(a) to the end of the variation display of the first special symbol and the execution of the variation display of the special symbol until the ceiling is reached. Figure 58(c) shows the state where the number of attempts has decreased to one. Figure 58(b) shows the state where, from the state in Figure 58(b), the next variation display of the first special symbol has begun, the variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also begun. Figure 58(d) shows the state where, from the state in Figure 58(c), only the variation display of the second special symbol has finished, the ceiling has been reached, and the state has transitioned to the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," with only the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 displayed, and the performance shooting instruction is not being executed.

Figure 59(a) shows the state from Figure 58(d) where the "Super Reach" performance mode variation display for the first special symbol has resulted in a loss, and Figure 59(b) shows the state from Figure 59(a) where the "Super Reach" performance mode variation display for the first special symbol has ended, and the third symbol, which is a loss, is displayed in the main display area Dm, and Figure 59(c) Figure 59(b) shows the state in the main display area Dm where the ceiling has been reached and the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" has been announced, and the instructions for playing the special effects are being executed. Figure 59(d) shows the state in the state of Figure 59(c) where the announcement of the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" and the instructions for playing the special effects have ended, and the third symbol displayed in the "normal low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Figure 57(a) shows a state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is currently running. Also, Figure 57(a) is in the same gameplay state as timing 1 in Figure 19. In Figure 57(a), since the variation display of the first special symbol is running, the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is running. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not running, the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, displays the previously stopped symbol "261", showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not running (stopped). Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the reserve count display 87a for special symbol 1 shows "4," and the reserve count display 88a for special symbol 2 shows "0," indicating that the reserve counts for the first and second special symbols are "4" and "0," respectively. Also, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays that there are "2" more attempts until the ceiling is reached. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" that can be entered upon reaching the ceiling is sometimes referred to as "playtime."

Next, Figure 57(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished, and the number of special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. Figure 57(b) is in the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 19. In Figure 57(b), the variation display of the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 57(a), has finished, and "871" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Furthermore, due to the completion of the variation display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is one less than the state in Figure 57(a). Additionally, similar to Figure 57(a), the variation display of the second special symbol is not yet running (stopped), so "261" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b.

Next, Figure 57(c) shows the state from Figure 57(b) where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, the variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started. Furthermore, Figure 57(c) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 19. In Figure 57(c), one of the four reserved variation displays of the first special symbol that were stored in Figure 57(b) has been consumed, so "3" is displayed on the reserve count display 87a for special symbol 1, and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, the variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode of the first special symbol is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, Figure 57(c) shows the "normal game state," which is a game state where left-handed play is performed. However, the player made an error in operating the control handle 51 to launch the ball, and the ball was launched into the right-handed play area. Because the ball launched in this right-handed play entered the upper second start opening 71, the second special symbol variation display was executed, and the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b shows the second special symbol variation display in progress.

Next, Figure 57(d) shows the state from Figure 57(c) where only the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has finished, reaching the ceiling, and transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," with the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance shooting instruction displayed. Also, Figure 57(d) is in the same game state as timing 4 in Figure 19. In Figure 57(d), the fluctuation performance of the "super reach" performance mode of the first special symbol, which was in progress in Figure 57(c), continues to be in progress, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is shown on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, the fluctuation performance of the "super reach" performance mode of the first special symbol is in progress in the central part of the main display area Dm. Also, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which started in Figure 57(c), has finished, and "582" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, upon completion of the second special symbol's variation display, the ceiling counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached, a decrease of 1 from the state shown in Figure 57(c), indicating that the ceiling has been reached and the game has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state." Therefore, the main display right-hand play instruction 89, suggesting right-hand play, is displayed, and the right-hand play instruction 81d for the performance is displayed in front of the variation display of the first special symbol's "super reach" performance mode in the central part of the main display area Dm.

Thus, in conventional pachinko machines, regardless of the execution status of the third symbol display device 81, the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance shooting instruction are displayed at the moment the machine transitions from the "normal game state" to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" after reaching the ceiling. Therefore, from the player's perspective, while they are enjoying the execution of the "super reach" performance, which has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot, a display suggesting right-hand shooting suddenly appears, potentially dampening their enthusiasm for the game. Furthermore, even while the first special symbol's high-probability jackpot performance is in progress during left-hand shooting, the performance shooting instruction may appear in the center of the main display area Dm, potentially causing confusion about whether or not to start right-hand shooting.

Next, Figure 58(a) shows a state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is currently running. Also, Figure 58(a) is in the same gameplay state as timing 1 in Figure 19. In Figure 58(a), since the variation display of the first special symbol is running, the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is running. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not running, the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, shows "261", which was the stopping symbol in the previous variation table, indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is not running (stopped). Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the reserve count display 87a for Special Feature 1 shows "4," and the reserve count display 88a for Special Feature 2 shows "0," indicating that the reserve counts for the first and second special symbols are "4" and "0," respectively. Also, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays that there are "2" more attempts until the ceiling is reached.

Next, Figure 58(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished, and the number of special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. Figure 58(b) is in the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 19. In Figure 58(b), the variation display of the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 58(a), has finished, and "871" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Furthermore, due to the completion of the variation display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is one less than the state in Figure 58(a). Additionally, similar to Figure 58(a), the variation display of the second special symbol is not yet running (stopped), so "261" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b.

Next, Figure 58(c) shows the state from Figure 58(b) onwards, where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, the variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started. Furthermore, Figure 58(c) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 19. In Figure 58(c), one of the four reserved variation displays of the first special symbol that were stored in Figure 58(b) has been consumed, so "3" is displayed on the reserve count display 87a for special symbol 1, and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, the variation display of the "Super Reach" performance mode of the first special symbol is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, Figure 58(c) shows the "normal game state," which is a game state where left-handed play is performed. However, the player made an error in operating the control handle 51 to launch the ball, and the ball was launched into the right-handed play area. Because the ball launched in this right-handed play entered the upper second start opening 71, the second special symbol variation display was executed, and the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b shows that the second special symbol variation display is currently being executed.

Next, Figure 58(d) shows that, starting from the state in Figure 58(c), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has finished first, reaching the ceiling, and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," with only the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 being displayed, and the performance shooting instruction not being executed. Also, Figure 58(d) is in the same game state as timing 4 in Figure 19. In Figure 58(d), the fluctuation performance of the "super reach" performance mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in Figure 58(c), continues to be executed, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is shown on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, the fluctuation performance of the "super reach" performance mode of the first special symbol is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. Also, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which started in Figure 58(c), has finished, and "582" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, upon completion of the display of the second special symbol's variation, the ceiling counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached. This represents a decrease of 1 from the state shown in Figure 58(c), indicating that the ceiling has been reached and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Therefore, although the main display's right-hand play instruction 89, which suggests right-hand play, is displayed, the first special symbol's variation display is still running in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the performance-oriented right-hand play instruction 81d is not displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm, as shown in Figure 57(d).

Next, Figure 59(a) shows the state from Figure 58(d) where the "Super Reach" performance variation of the first special symbol is being executed and a losing result is displayed. Also, Figure 59(a) is in the same game state as timing 5 in Figure 19. In Figure 59(a), the "Super Reach" performance variation of the first special symbol, which was being executed in Figure 58(d), is still being executed, and the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Furthermore, the central part of the main display area Dm shows the state where a losing result is being displayed in the "Super Reach" performance variation of the first special symbol. Furthermore, in Figure 58(d), the variation display of the second special symbol, which has finished execution, is not executed again because the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". Therefore, "582" is displayed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is not being executed (stopped). In addition, a right-hand play instruction 89 for the main display, suggesting right-hand play, is displayed. In Figure 59(a), the ceiling reach counter 81c, which was displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm in Figures 58(a) to 58(d), has been erased. This configuration enhances the player's enjoyment of the variation performance of the first special symbol, which is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, Figure 59(b) shows the state after the "Super Reach" animation for the first special symbol has finished, and the third symbol, which represents a loss, is displayed in the main display area Dm, following the state shown in Figure 59(a). Figure 59(b) is in the same game state as timing 6 in Figure 19. In Figure 59(b), the "Super Reach" animation for the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 59(a), has finished, and "434" is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm and on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a, indicating that the animation for the first special symbol has finished and stopped. Furthermore, the animation for the second special symbol has not been performed, and "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm and on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, indicating that the animation for the second special symbol is not yet performed (stopped).

Next, Figure 59(c) shows that, from the state in Figure 59(b), the main display area Dm has been notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state," and that the performance play instructions are being executed. Also, Figure 59(c) is the same game state as timing 6 in Figure 19, and is the state immediately after Figure 59(b). In Figure 59(c), one of the three reserve numbers for the variable display of the first special symbol that was stored in Figure 59(b) has been consumed, so "2" is displayed in the reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol is not being executed, and "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol is not being executed (stopped). On the other hand, unlike Figures 58(a) to 59(b), in Figure 59(c), the first special symbol is a variable display that started after transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Therefore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, and the text message 81e indicating that the ceiling has been reached, along with the right-hand shooting instruction 81d and text message 81f for the performance suggesting right-hand shooting, are displayed. The main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 continues to be displayed even when the right-hand shooting instruction 81d and text message 81f for the performance are displayed. This allows for the simultaneous display of the performance-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 81d and text message 81f, as well as the main display-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 89. This enables accurate indication of the game content to the player through either display. Furthermore, by continuously displaying the main display-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 89 regardless of the display status of the performance-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 81d and text message 81f, control measures such as erasing the main display-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 89 upon execution of the performance-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 81d and text message 81f are unnecessary, thus reducing the control burden.

Next, Figure 59(d) shows the state after the notification of entering the "normal low probability time reduction state" and the instructions for playing the game have finished, and the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Also, Figure 59(d) is the same game state as timing 6 in Figure 19, and is the state immediately after Figure 59(c). In Figure 59(d), the variation display of the first special symbol, which started in Figure 59(c), is still running, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not running, "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not running (stopped). Furthermore, the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm is the same as the second special symbol. During the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" when playing with the right-hand side, the display area Dm shows the variation animation corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during "normal gameplay" and the machine transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state," the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is started during the "normal gameplay" state and executed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, is configured not to display any instructions for playing the performance even if the machine transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state" due to the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. This configuration allows players playing left-handed to enhance their interest in the variation performance of the first special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, when the variation performance of the first special symbol, which was being executed on the third symbol display device 81, ends, instructions for playing the performance are displayed, allowing the player to start playing right-handed without any discomfort.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time reduction termination condition is met in the "normal high probability time reduction state" and the machine transitions to the "normal game state," the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which started during the "normal high probability time reduction state" and is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, is configured not to display performance-oriented playing instructions (performance-oriented playing instructions) even if the machine transitions to the "normal game state" due to the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. This configuration allows players performing right-handed play to enhance their interest in the variation performance of the second special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, when the variation performance of the second special symbol, which was being executed on the third symbol display device 81, ends, performance-oriented playing instructions are displayed, allowing the player to start left-handed play without any discomfort.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figures 60 to 69, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" and the state is changed to the "normal low probability time reduction state", the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a variation effect of whether or not a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed for "900 times", which is the number of times the ceiling has been reached.

In contrast, in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" and the state transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state," the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable animation indicating whether or not a jackpot is won with the dynamic display of the first special symbol until the dynamic display of the special symbol has been performed 899 times out of the 900 times the ceiling has been reached. At the 900th dynamic display of the first special symbol, an animation is performed to announce that the ceiling has been reached.

The following description focuses on the differences between the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 and the first embodiment. In the following description of the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, components and processes identical to those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted.

First, with reference to Figure 60, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment. The main difference between the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment and the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment is that a ceiling reach counting counter 223k and a ceiling reach notification flag 223m have been added to the RAM 223.

The ceiling reach counting counter 223k counts whether or not the machine will transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" based on the number of times the special symbol's variation display is executed. It is a counter for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the ceiling has been reached when the variation display of the first special symbol occurs for the 900th time, which will result in a transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state." In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol is executed for the 900th time in the low probability state of the special symbol—that is, when the value of the ceiling reach counting counter 223k reaches 899—the third symbol display device 81 is configured to notify the machine that the ceiling has been reached.

The ceiling reach counter 223k is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on and when the ceiling count start command is received (see S1010 in Figure 50 and S1252 in Figure 62). Then, when a special symbol 1 confirmation command or a special symbol 2 confirmation command is received during a low probability state for special symbols, i.e., the "normal game state," "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," 1 is added to the counter (see S1262 in Figure 63 or S1272 in Figure 64). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the value of this ceiling reach counter 223k reaches "899" and the first special symbol variation display starts, i.e., when the 900th variation display of the first special symbol in the low probability state for special symbols starts, a ceiling reach performance command is set (see S1503 in Figure 66), and the third symbol display device 81 is configured to notify that the ceiling has been reached.

Then, during the 900th variation of the first special symbol, the system announces that the ceiling has been reached. Once the 900th variation display ends, the system transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," and the instructions for playing the game are executed.

The "Ceiling Reached Notification Flag 223m" is a flag used to determine whether the third symbol display device 81 has once notified that the ceiling has been reached during the low probability state of the special symbol. This "Ceiling Reached Notification Flag 223m" is set to off when the power is turned on and when the ceiling counting start command is received (see S1010 in Figure 50 and S1253 in Figure 62). Then, when the 900th variation display of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol begins, and the "Ceiling Reached Notification Flag 223m" is set to off, it is set to on (see S1504 in Figure 66).

In the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if the ceiling reach notification flag 223m is set to ON, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 has already notified that the ceiling has been reached at least once when the variation display of the first special symbol starts after the 900th time in the low probability state of the special symbol (see S1502: Yes in Figure 66), the ceiling reach notification effect will not be executed again. By referring to the ceiling reach notification flag 223m, the execution of the ceiling reach notification effect can be limited to once.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 61, we will explain the jackpot termination process (S610), which is one of the processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment (see Figure 41). Figure 61 is a flowchart of the jackpot termination process (S610) in the second embodiment. The difference between the jackpot termination process of the second embodiment and the jackpot termination process of the first embodiment is that a process to set the ceiling count start command has been added when the jackpot type "Time Reduction A" is won.

In the jackpot termination process (S610) of the second embodiment, if the S6104 process determines that the current jackpot type is not "Hidden Probability A" (S6104: No), it is determined that the current jackpot type is "Time Reduction A". Following the S6106 and S6107 processes, a ceiling count start command is set (S6151), and the process proceeds to S6108. The ceiling count start command set in the S6151 process is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the next timer interrupt process (see S201 in Figure 31).

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ceiling count start command, in the command determination process of the second embodiment described later, it sets the ceiling reach count counter 223k to "0", turns off the ceiling reach notification flag, and prepares to count the number of times the special symbol variation display is executed (see Figure 62).

Next, with reference to Figures 62 to 66, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The main differences between the control processes in the second embodiment and those in the first embodiment are that the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 adds a counting process for the number of times the special symbol variation display is executed, and that a ceiling reach notification process is added, in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached based on the number of times the special symbol variation display has been executed.

First, referring to the flowchart in Figure 62, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained. Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1111) in the second embodiment. The difference between the command determination process of the second embodiment and the command determination process of the first embodiment is that a process has been added to determine whether or not a ceiling count start command has been received, and if the ceiling count start command has been received, to set the ceiling reach count counter 223k to "0" and turn off the ceiling reach notification flag.

In the command determination process (S1111) of the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1210 that the second reserved ball count command has not been received (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling count start command has been received (S1251). If the ceiling count start command has been received (S1251: Yes), the ceiling reach count counter 223k is set to "0" (S1252) to start counting the number of times the special symbol variation display is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, the ceiling reach notification flag is set to off (S1253), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 63, the command processing (S1203) of the Feature Figure 1 command executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the command processing (S1203) of the Feature Figure 1 command in the second embodiment. The difference between the Feature Figure 1 command processing of the second embodiment and the Feature Figure 1 command processing of the first embodiment is that, upon receiving the Feature Figure 1 confirmation command, an addition process for the ceiling reach count counter 223k is added.

In the second embodiment's special symbol 1 command processing (S1203), if it is determined in processing S1226 that a special symbol 1 confirmation command has been received (S1226: Yes), after executing processing S1227, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1261). If the determination result is that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1261: Yes), 1 is added to the ceiling reach count counter 223k (S1262), and this special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) ends, returning to the command determination processing (see Figure 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the S1261 process that the special symbol is not in a low probability state (S1261: No), the S1262 process is not performed, the other corresponding process in S1228 is executed, and this special symbol 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, returning to the command determination process (see Figure 52).

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 64, the command processing (S1205) of the Feature Figure 2 command executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the command processing (S1205) of the Feature Figure 2 command in the second embodiment. The difference between the Feature Figure 2 command processing of the second embodiment and the Feature Figure 2 command processing of the first embodiment is that, upon receiving the Feature Figure 2 confirmation command, an addition process for the ceiling reach count counter 223k is added.

In the second embodiment's special symbol 2 command processing (S1205), if it is determined in processing S1236 that a special symbol 2 confirmation command has been received (S1236: Yes), after executing processing S1237, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1271). If the determination result is that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1271: Yes), 1 is added to the ceiling reach count counter 223k (S1272), and this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, returning to the command determination processing (see Figure 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the S1271 process that the special symbol is not in a low probability state (S1271: No), the S1272 process is not performed, the other corresponding process in S1238 is executed, and this special symbol 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, returning to the command determination process (see Figure 52).

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 65, the fluctuation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation effect processing (S1110) in the second embodiment. The difference between the fluctuation effect processing of the second embodiment and the fluctuation effect processing of the first embodiment is that, in the fluctuation that reaches the ceiling (i.e., the "900th" fluctuation in the low probability state of the special symbol), an effect is added in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached.

In the second embodiment's variation effect processing (S1110), after completing the processing in S1309, the number of rotations remaining until reaching the ceiling is determined, and based on the determination result, a ceiling reach notification process is executed to notify that the ceiling has been reached (S1351). This variation effect processing (S1110) then ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see Figure 51).

Here, referring to Figure 66, the ceiling arrival notification process (S1351) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 66 is a flowchart showing this ceiling arrival notification process (S1351).

In this ceiling reach notification process (S1351), the number of rotations remaining until the ceiling is reached is determined, and based on the determination result, a ceiling reach notification command is set to announce that the ceiling has been reached.

In this ceiling reach notification process (S1351), first, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling reach counter 223k is less than "899" (S1501). If the value of the ceiling reach counter 223k is less than "899" (S1501: Yes), the 900th variation for executing the ceiling reach notification effect has not yet been reached. Therefore, processes S1502 to S1504 are skipped, and this ceiling reach notification process (S1351) ends, returning to the variation effect process (see Figure 65).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1501 is that the value of the ceiling reach count counter 223k is not less than "899", that is, if the value of the ceiling reach count counter 223k is "899" or greater (S1501: No), then the 900th variation, which is the time to execute the ceiling reach notification animation, has been reached. Next, it is determined whether the ceiling reach notification flag 223m is turned on (S1502). If the ceiling reach notification flag 223m is not turned on (S1502: No), then since the 900th variation, which is the time to reach the ceiling, has not been executed even once, the ceiling reach notification animation command is set (S1503), the ceiling reach notification flag 223m is turned on (S1504), and this ceiling reach notification process (S1351) is terminated, returning to the variation animation process (see Figure 65).

If, as a result of processing in S1502, it is determined that the "ceiling reached" flag 223m is turned on (S1502: Yes), then the ceiling reached notification animation has already been performed at least once since reaching the "900th" variation, and there is no need to perform the ceiling reached notification animation again. Therefore, processes S1503 and S1504 are skipped, and this ceiling reached notification process (S1351) is terminated, returning to the variation animation process (see Figure 65).

By configuring it in this way, the execution of the ceiling reach notification animation can be limited to once, from the time the game transitions to the low probability state for special symbols until it reaches the ceiling and transitions to the "reduced time state for normal symbols."

Furthermore, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to allow for winning a minor prize in addition to a big win, and a variable prize-winning device for minor prizes may be provided that opens based on the winning of the minor prize game. A pachinko machine (a so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed machine) may be used that has a time-saving area (a so-called V area) where a big win and a "time-saving function" are granted when a ball passes through the variable prize-winning device for minor prizes, and it may be configured to transition from a "time-saving state" (for example, the first game state) to a "normal game state" (for example, the second game state) based on the number of times the "time-saving function" is granted. In this case, in the "time-reduced state," the termination condition for the "time-reduced variation" is set to when the second special symbol has varied a predetermined number of times (for example, "7 times"). When the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times and the dynamic display (hereinafter referred to as the "reached dynamic display") begins, the system is configured to acquire the start condition for the dynamic display of the second special symbol even while the reached dynamic display is being executed. The system is configured to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol for more than the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, which is the termination condition for the "time-reduced state" (for example, the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol; so-called remaining reserved balls. Hereinafter, the performance for the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol may be referred to as the "remaining reserved performance"). In such models, in the variation performance related to the reached dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time-reduced state," the remaining reserved performance may be extended not only to the performance related to the reached dynamic display, but also to the dynamic display of the remaining reserved balls of the second special symbol. Specifically, the system is configured to execute a series of dynamic effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "series of dynamic effects" or "transition suggestion effects") that include the dynamic display of the arrival of the second special symbol and the dynamic display of the remaining reserved second special symbols. Here, when the dynamic display of arrival is completed, even if the player does not win a big win or a small win (for example, a favorable state), the game state changes from the "time-reduced state" to the "normal game state" (for example, a non-derivation transition means), but the system is configured to continue the above series of dynamic effects while the dynamic display of the remaining reserved second special symbols is being executed (for example, an effect continuation means). After the above series of dynamic effects is completed, the system suggests to the player that the game has returned to the "normal game state" (for example, the screen layout of the "normal game state" or similar; a post-transition effect), and also executes an effect that prompts the player to change their shooting method from right-handed shooting in the "time-reduced state" to left-handed shooting (for example, "Please return to left-handed shooting" or similar; a correction effect). By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to achieve gameplay that is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, the above-mentioned series of variation sequences can be used to display the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of game balls acquired during the "time-reduced state" (for example, through situational animations), allowing players to understand the game value and number of consecutive wins they have acquired during the "time-reduced state." This makes the game results recognizable to the player, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Additionally, if a jackpot (or minor win) is achieved through the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the remaining reserved spins, the system may be configured to suddenly announce the jackpot or minor win just before the game state transitions by switching the animation screen or displaying character symbols during the above-mentioned series of variation sequences. This configuration creates an element of surprise in the gameplay, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the system is configured to execute the above-mentioned series of variation effects triggered by the dynamic display of the first special symbol (for example, the first condition). If there are remaining reserves (for example, the number of winning combinations counting means) of the dynamically displayed second special symbol (for example, the second condition), the execution period of the end screen of the series of variation effects (for example, the first effect) is extended by the amount of the dynamically displayed second special symbol (for example, the execution period effect means). If a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the remaining reserves of the second special symbol, a special effect (for example, the third effect) in which a predetermined character suddenly appears is executed during the execution of the end screen of the series of variation effects, indicating to the player that a jackpot has been won (for example, the game state has changed). This configuration provides an element of surprise in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, referring to Figures 67 to 69, the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the second embodiment will be explained. Figures 67 to 69 show the progression of the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the second embodiment, based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Figures 67(a) to 67(d) show the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol during "normal gameplay" in a conventional pachinko machine. Figure 67(a) shows the state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed. Figure 67(b) shows the state from Figure 67(a) where the variation display of the first special symbol has finished, and there is one more special symbol variation display remaining until the ceiling is reached. Figure 67(c) shows a state where the probability has decreased. Figure 67(b) shows the state where the next variation display of the first special symbol has begun, and a performance indicating that the ceiling has been reached is in progress in the central part of the main display area Dm, with the variation display of the second special symbol also starting. Figure 67(d) shows the state where, from the state of Figure 67(c), only the variation display of the second special symbol has finished during the execution of the ceiling reach notification performance, the ceiling has been reached, and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state," with the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance shooting instruction displayed.

Figures 68(a) to 69(d) show the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment during "normal gameplay". Figure 68(a) shows the state in "normal gameplay" where there are 2 more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Figure 68(b) shows the state from Figure 68(a) where the variation display of the first special symbol has finished, and there is 1 more special symbol variation display remaining until the ceiling is reached. Figure 68(c) shows a state where the number of symbols has decreased. Figure 68(b) shows the state where the next variation display of the first special symbol has begun, and a performance indicating that the ceiling has been reached is in progress in the central part of the main display area Dm, with the variation display of the second special symbol also starting. Figure 68(d) shows the state where, from the state of Figure 68(c), only the variation display of the second special symbol has finished while the ceiling reach notification performance is running, the ceiling has been reached, and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state," with only the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 displayed, and the performance shooting instruction is not being executed.

Figure 69(a) shows the state from Figure 68(d) where the ceiling reach notification effect for the first special symbol's fluctuation display is still running, and the ceiling reach counter 81c, which was displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm in Figures 68(a) to 68(d), has been erased. Figure 69(b) shows the state from Figure 69(a) where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol has ended. Figure 69(c) shows the state from Figure 69(b) where the ceiling reach notification effect has ended, the ceiling has been reached and the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" has been announced, and the instructions for playing the effect are being executed. Figure 69(d) shows the state from Figure 69(c) where the transition notification to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" and the instructions for playing the effect have ended, and the third symbol displayed in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Figure 67(a) shows a state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is currently running. Also, Figure 67(a) is in the same gameplay state as timing 1 in Figure 19. In Figure 67(a), since the variation display of the first special symbol is running, the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is running. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not running, "261" is displayed on the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not running (stopped). Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the reserve count display 87a for Special Feature 1 shows "4," and the reserve count display 88a for Special Feature 2 shows "0," indicating that the reserve counts for the first and second special symbols are "4" and "0," respectively. Also, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays that there are "2" more attempts until the ceiling is reached.

Next, Figure 67(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished, and the number of special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. Furthermore, Figure 67(b) represents the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 19. In Figure 67(b), the variation display of the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 67(a), has finished, and "871" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Also, due to the completion of the variation display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is one less than the state in Figure 67(a). Furthermore, similar to Figure 67(a), since the variation display of the second special symbol is not yet running (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b.

Next, Figure 67(c) shows the state from Figure 67(b) where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, and an effect indicating that the ceiling has been reached is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started. Furthermore, Figure 67(c) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 19. In Figure 67(c), one of the four reserved variation displays of the first special symbol that were stored in Figure 67(b) has been consumed, so "3" is displayed on the reserve count display 87a for special symbol 1, and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Moreover, in Figure 67(c), with "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, the variation display of the first special symbol has started, and since the ceiling will be reached when this variation display of the first special symbol finishes, the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, Figure 67(c) shows the "normal game state," which is a game state where left-handed play is performed. However, the player made an error in operating the control handle 51 for launching the ball, and the ball was launched into the right-handed play area. Because the ball launched in this right-handed play entered the upper second start opening 71, the second special symbol variation display was activated, and the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b shows that the second special symbol variation display is currently being executed.

Next, Figure 67(d) shows the state from Figure 67(c) where the display of the second special symbol's variation has finished first, reaching the ceiling, and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," with the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance shooting instruction being displayed. Also, Figure 67(d) is in the same game state as timing 4 in Figure 19. In Figure 67(d), the ceiling reach notification performance for the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 67(c), continues to run, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, which was running in Figure 67(c), has finished, and "582" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, upon completion of the display of the second special symbol's variation, the ceiling counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached, a decrease of 1 from the state shown in Figure 67(c). This indicates that the ceiling has been reached and the game has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state." Therefore, the main display right-hand play instruction 89, suggesting right-hand play, is displayed, and the right-hand play instruction 81d for the performance is displayed in front of the ceiling reach notification performance caused by the variation of the first special symbol in the central part of the main display area Dm.

Thus, in conventional pachinko machines, regardless of the execution content in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the performance shooting instruction are displayed at the moment the machine transitions from the "normal game state" to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" upon reaching the ceiling. From the player's perspective, this means that a display suggesting right-hand shooting suddenly appears, interrupting the ceiling-reaching notification performance, potentially spoiling the game.

Next, Figures 68(a) to 69(d) show the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the second special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment during "normal gameplay". Figure 68(a) shows the state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more executions of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, and only the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Also, Figure 68(a) is in the same game state as timing 1 in Figure 19. In Figure 68(a), since the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Furthermore, since the variation display for the second special symbol is not being executed, "261" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, indicating that the variation display for the second special symbol is not being executed (stopped). Additionally, in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, "4" is displayed on the special symbol 1 reserve count display 87a, and "0" is displayed on the special symbol 2 reserve count display 88a, indicating that the reserve counts for the first and second special symbols are "4" and "0," respectively. Finally, in the upper left part of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays that there are "2" more spins until the ceiling is reached.

Next, Figure 68(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished, and the number of special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. Furthermore, Figure 68(b) represents the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 19. In Figure 68(b), the variation display of the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 68(a), has finished, and "871" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Also, due to the completion of the variation display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is one less than the state in Figure 68(a). Furthermore, similar to Figure 68(a), since the variation display of the second special symbol is not yet running (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b.

Next, Figure 68(c) shows the state from Figure 68(b) where the next variation display of the first special symbol has started, and an effect indicating that the ceiling has been reached is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variation display of the second special symbol has also started. Furthermore, Figure 68(c) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 19. In Figure 68(c), one of the four reserved variation displays of the first special symbol that were stored in Figure 68(b) has been consumed, so "3" is displayed on the reserve count display 87a for special symbol 1, and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Moreover, in Figure 68(c), with "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, the variation display of the first special symbol has started, and since the ceiling will be reached when this variation display of the first special symbol finishes, the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, Figure 68(c) shows the "normal game state," which is a game state where left-handed play is performed. However, the player made an error in operating the control handle 51 to launch the ball, and the ball was launched into the right-handed play area. Because the ball launched in this right-handed play entered the upper second start opening 71, the second special symbol variation display was activated, and the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b shows the second special symbol variation display in progress.

Next, Figure 68(d) shows that, from the state in Figure 68(c), only the display of the second special symbol's variation has finished and the ceiling has been reached, transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," with only the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 being displayed, and the performance shooting instruction not being executed. Also, Figure 68(d) is in the same game state as timing 4 in Figure 19. In Figure 68(d), the ceiling reach notification performance for the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 68(c), continues to run, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown running on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, which started in Figure 68(c), has finished, and "582" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, upon completion of the display of the second special symbol's variation, the ceiling counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached. This represents a decrease of 1 from the state shown in Figure 68(c), indicating that the ceiling has been reached and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Therefore, although the main display's right-hand play instruction 89, which suggests right-hand play, is displayed, the ceiling reach notification effect, which is the variation display of the first special symbol, is currently running in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Consequently, the right-hand play instruction 81d for the effect is not displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm, as in the example of a conventional pachinko machine shown in Figure 67(d).

Next, Figure 69(a) shows that, continuing from the state in Figure 68(d), the ceiling reach notification effect for the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is still being executed, and the ceiling reach counter 81c, which was displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm in Figures 68(a) to 68(d), has been erased. Also, Figure 69(a) is in the same game state as timing 5 in Figure 19. In Figure 69(a), the ceiling reach notification effect that was being executed in Figure 68(d) is still being executed, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Also, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which finished execution in Figure 68(d), has not been executed since the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol is "0", and "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, indicating that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not being executed (stopped). Furthermore, the ceiling reach counter 81c, which was displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm in Figures 68(a) to 68(d), has been erased. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, unlike in Figure 67(d), an example of a conventional pachinko machine, the right-hand shooting instruction 81d for the performance is not displayed in a way that interrupts the ceiling reach notification performance, allowing the player to enhance their enjoyment of the ceiling reach notification performance.

Next, Figure 69(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished, following the state in Figure 69(a). Figure 69(b) also shows the same game state as timing 6 in Figure 19. In Figure 69(b), the variation display of the first special symbol, which was running in Figure 69(a), has finished, and "434" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a, indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol has finished and stopped. Furthermore, the variation display of the second special symbol is not running, and "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is not running (stopped).

Next, Figure 69(c) shows the state after the ceiling reach notification animation has finished, the ceiling has been reached and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state" has been announced, and the animation instructions for playing the game are being executed. Also, Figure 69(c) is the same game state as timing 6 in Figure 19, and is the state immediately after Figure 69(b). In Figure 69(c), one of the three reserve numbers for the first special symbol's variation display that was stored in Figure 69(b) has been consumed, so "2" is displayed in the reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown to be in progress on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, the variation display of the second special symbol is not being executed, and "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not being executed (stopped). Furthermore, in Figure 69(b), the ceiling reach notification animation, which was in progress, has ended, and the text message 81e indicating "Entering Playtime" has been displayed, along with the animation's right-hand shooting instruction 81d and text message 81f suggesting right-hand shooting.

Next, Figure 69(d) shows the state after the notification of entering the "normal low probability time reduction state" and the instructions for playing the game have finished, and the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Also, Figure 69(d) is the same game state as timing 6 in Figure 19, and is the state immediately after Figure 69(c). In Figure 69(d), the variation display of the first special symbol, which started in Figure 69(c), is still running, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not running, "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not running (stopped). Furthermore, the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm is the same as the second special symbol. During the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" when playing with the right-hand side, the display area Dm shows the variation animation corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Here, we assume that the jackpot random number table 202a contains random values that result in winning a time-saving symbol, and in the example shown in Figure 19, we assume that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that reaches the ceiling has resulted in winning a time-saving symbol. That is, in the "normal game state" (for example, the first game state), if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol wins a time-saving symbol (for example, under specific conditions) while the ceiling reach notification performance (for example, the first performance) is being executed for the fluctuation display that results in the first special symbol reaching the ceiling (for example, a specific state), then the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (for example, the second game state) due to reaching the ceiling and the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (for example, the second game state) due to winning a time-saving symbol will occur simultaneously. Furthermore, if we assume that the number of time-saving rounds that can be granted by winning a time-saving symbol is "500 rounds," then the number of time-saving rounds that can be granted by reaching the ceiling ("1140 rounds") will be greater than the number of time-saving rounds that can be granted by winning a time-saving symbol. Therefore, if the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" due to reaching the ceiling and the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" due to winning a time-saving symbol occur simultaneously, the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" due to reaching the ceiling will be prioritized and executed in a state that is more advantageous to the player. With this configuration, even if the second special symbol's fluctuation display results in a time-saving symbol (for example, under specific conditions) while the ceiling reach notification演出 (for example, the first演出) is being executed for the first special symbol's fluctuation display (specific state), the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" due to reaching the ceiling will occur after the second special symbol's fluctuation display ends. Therefore, the ceiling reach notification演出 for the first special symbol's fluctuation display can be continued without interruption.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the "normal game state" and the machine transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state", the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect that notifies the player that the ceiling has been reached during the dynamic display of the first special symbol that will reach the ceiling, that is, during the dynamic display of the special symbol that is scheduled to be the 900th time in the low probability state. Furthermore, while the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed (while the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, is being executed), even if the ceiling is reached and the machine transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state" due to the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the machine is configured not to issue instructions on how to play for the effect. With this configuration, the ceiling reach notification effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 will not be interrupted by instructions on how to play for the effect, and the player will be able to enjoy the ceiling reach notification effect more. Furthermore, when the ceiling-reaching notification animation, which was being executed on the third symbol display device 81, finishes, the animation instructions for playing the game are displayed, allowing the player to start playing by shooting to the right without any sense of unease.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figures 70 to 75, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state", the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect on whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol will result in a jackpot until the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed 899 times out of the "900 times" the ceiling is reached. At the "900th" dynamic display of the first special symbol, an effect is performed to notify that the ceiling has been reached, and this ceiling reach notification effect is configured to end at the same time as the end of the "900th" dynamic display of the first special symbol.

In contrast, in the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed for the 900th time, a ceiling arrival notification is performed in the same manner as in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being performed concurrently with the execution of the ceiling arrival notification, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol finishes after the dynamic display of the first special symbol (which is performing the ceiling arrival notification), the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification is extended until the dynamic display of the second special symbol finishes.

The following description focuses on the differences between the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 and the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, components and processes identical to those of the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted.

First, referring to Figure 70, we will explain the timing chart for when the ceiling is reached by the variable display of special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and the machine transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Note that the relationship between the ball entry pattern into the through gate 67, first start opening 64, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a, the progress of the variable display of the normal symbols, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the driving patterns of the normal electric motor 72 and variable prize entry device 65 in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as in the first and second embodiments, so we will omit the explanation.

Figure 70 is a timing chart for the third embodiment, where, during "normal gameplay," the ceiling is reached by the fluctuation display of special symbol 1, transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," and where the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 is running concurrently with the timing when the fluctuation display of special symbol 1 that leads to reaching the ceiling ends.

As shown in Figure 70, the fluctuation display at the 899th and 900th spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is performed by the fluctuation display of special symbol 1. Simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation display at the 900th spin, the ceiling is reached, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see Timing 2 in Figure 70).

Here, we assume that in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display of each special symbol, as shown in the timing chart in Figure 70, is performed. As described above, in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to notify that the ceiling has been reached when the fluctuation display of special symbol 1 reaches the "900th" occurrence. Therefore, the ceiling reach notification effect is performed when the fluctuation display of special symbol 1 reaches the "900th" occurrence, and the ceiling reach notification effect ends simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation display for the "900th" occurrence (see Figures 73(a) to (b)).

Then, simultaneously with the end of the 900th variation display, the ceiling is reached and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state." Therefore, at the end of the 900th variation display (see timing 2 in Figure 70), the ceiling reach notification effect ends, followed by the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and the effect shooting instruction (see Figure 73(c)). Furthermore, after the effect shooting instruction ends, the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 switches from special symbol 1 to special symbol 2 (see Figure 73(d)).

Furthermore, at timing 2 shown in Figure 70, the variation display of special symbol 2, which is executed in the main display area Dm, should ideally perform a variation effect (for example, a character conversation) in the "normal low probability time reduction state." However, the variation display of special symbol 2 that is being executed at timing 2 shown in Figure 70 is a variation display that started in the "normal game state." Therefore, the display special symbol 2 variation pattern command and display special symbol 2 stop type command for performing the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm during the "normal low probability time reduction state" are not set (see S1315: Yes in Figure 65), and the variation effect in the "normal low probability time reduction state" cannot be executed in the main display area Dm.

Furthermore, in this Timing 2 situation, if the player starts playing with the ball to the right based on the performance instructions, and the ball launched during the right-handed play enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, the special symbol 2 is currently executing the "20-second" variation display that was started in the "normal game state." Therefore, the variation display of the special symbol 2 in the "normal low probability time reduction state" cannot be executed on the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously with the ball entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a.

Thus, in the state shown in Figure 70, where the variable display of special symbols 1 and 2 is being executed, that is, when the variable display of special symbol 2, which is not recommended in the "normal game state," is being executed, and the variable display of special symbol 1 reaches the ceiling and transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," if the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variable display of special symbol 2 immediately after the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" cannot be performed appropriately by the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, if the player immediately starts playing to the right because the instruction for the performance was executed immediately after the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," even if a ball enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, the variable display of special symbol 2 in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" cannot be executed by the third symbol display device 81 at the same time as the ball enters.

Therefore, in the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are being displayed in the same state as shown in Figure 70, that is, when the special symbol 2 display, which is not recommended in the "normal game state," is being displayed, and the ceiling is reached by the special symbol 1 display, leading to a transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," the ceiling reach notification effect being displayed on the 900th special symbol 1 display is not terminated at the end of the 900th special symbol 1 display, but is extended until the end of the special symbol 2 display which is running in parallel (see Figures 74(a) to 75(a)), and after the special symbol 2 display ends, instructions for playing the effect are executed (see Figure 75(b)).

With this configuration, the display of the special symbol 2's variation, which is currently running when transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state," is not executed by the third symbol display device 81. Instead, the display of the special symbol 2's variation, which begins after transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state," is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 75(c)).

Furthermore, when transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state," the ceiling arrival notification effect is executed while the special symbol 2 fluctuation display is running. When the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 ends, the ceiling arrival notification effect ends and instructions for playing the effect are displayed. Based on this display, the player begins playing with the ball to the right. By playing with the ball to the right and entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 becomes immediately available on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, even when the ceiling is reached while the special symbols 1 and 2 are being displayed in a variable state as shown in Figure 70, the player can be smoothly allowed to start playing by shooting to the right without causing any discomfort. The control details of the variable display effect in the third symbol display device 81 while the special symbols 1 and 2 are being displayed in a variable state as shown in Figure 70 will be described in detail later in Figures 71 and 72.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 70, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2.

Next, with reference to Figures 71 and 72, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

First, referring to the flowchart in Figure 71, the command processing (S1203) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be explained. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the command processing (S1203) in the third embodiment. The difference between the command processing in the third embodiment and the command processing in the second embodiment is the addition of an extension process for the ceiling arrival notification effect.

In the command processing of Figure 1 in the third embodiment (S1203), after the processing in S1262 is completed, the execution status of the variation display of special symbol 2 is determined during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect. Based on the determination result, a ceiling arrival notification extension process is executed to extend the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification effect (S1281), and this command processing of Figure 1 (S1203) is terminated, returning to the command determination process (see Figure 52).

Here, referring to Figure 72, the ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 72 is a flowchart showing this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281).

In this ceiling reach notification extension process (S1281), while the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed for the variation display of special symbol 1 that will reach the ceiling, the execution status of the variation display of special symbol 2 is determined, and the execution time of the ceiling reach notification effect is extended based on the determination result.

In this ceiling reach notification extension process (S1281), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling reach notification effect is currently being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1551). If the ceiling reach notification effect is not currently being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1551: No), then processes S1552 to S1554 are skipped, and this ceiling reach notification extension process (S1281) is terminated, returning to the special figure 1 command process (see Figure 71).

On the other hand, in the process of S1551, if it is determined that the third symbol display device 81 is currently executing the ceiling arrival notification effect (S1551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation effect of special symbol 2 is currently being executed (S1552). If the variation effect of special symbol 2 is not currently being executed (S1552: No), there is no need to extend the ceiling arrival notification effect, so the processes of S1553 and S1554 are skipped, and this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281) is terminated, returning to the special symbol 1 command process (see Figure 71).

If the determination in S1552 indicates that the variation animation for Special Symbol 2 is currently running (S1552: Yes), then it is determined in S1553 whether the variation animation for Special Symbol 2, which is currently running, will end after the variation animation for Special Symbol 1, which is currently running the ceiling arrival notification animation. If the determination indicates that the variation animation for Special Symbol 2 will not end after the variation animation for Special Symbol 1, i.e., if the variation animation for Special Symbol 2 will end before the variation animation for Special Symbol 1 (S1553: No), then there is no need to extend the ceiling arrival notification animation. Therefore, the process in S1554 is skipped, and this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281) is terminated, returning to the Special Symbol 1 command process (see Figure 71).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1553, if it is determined that the variation animation of special symbol 2 will end after the variation animation of special symbol 1 (S1553: Yes), then, at the timing of the end of the ceiling arrival notification animation caused by the variation animation of special symbol 1, the variation animation of special symbol 2 will still be in progress. Therefore, the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification animation is extended until the end of the variation animation of special symbol 2 (S1554), and this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281) is terminated, returning to the special symbol 1 command processing (see Figure 71).

With this configuration, when transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state," if the ceiling arrival notification effect is being executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation display of special symbol 1, and the fluctuation effect of special symbol 2 is also being executed, and the fluctuation effect of special symbol 1, which is executing the ceiling arrival notification effect, finishes first, the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification effect can be extended until the end of the fluctuation effect of special symbol 2.

As a result, even when the ceiling is reached while the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are being displayed in the state shown in Figure 70—that is, when the special symbol 2 display, which is not recommended in the "normal game state," is being displayed—and the ceiling is reached by the special symbol 1 display, leading to a transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"—the right-hand play can be started smoothly without causing any discomfort to the player.

Next, referring to Figures 73 to 75, the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment will be explained. Figures 73 to 75 show the progression of the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment.

Figures 73(a) to 73(d) show the progression of the variation animation on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation animation of the first special symbol while the variation animation of the second special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. Figure 73(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there is one more execution of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, the variation displays of the first and second special symbols are being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reach notification animation is being executed in the main display area Dm. These are diagrams illustrating the state of the game. Figure 73(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished and the ceiling has been reached, transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state" from the state of Figure 73(a). Figure 73(c) shows the state after the ceiling arrival notification display has finished and the performance play instructions are being executed from the state of Figure 73(b). Figure 73(d) shows the state after the performance play instructions have finished and the ongoing variation display of the second special symbol is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 73(c).

Figures 74(a) to 75(c) show the progression of the variation effects on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation effect of the first special symbol while the variation effect of the second special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. Figure 74(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there is one more execution of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, the variation displays of the first and second special symbols are being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 74(b) shows the state from Figure 74(a) where only the variation display of the first special symbol has finished and the ceiling has been reached. The diagram shows the state after transitioning to the "Normal low probability time reduction state." Figures 74(c) and 74(d) show the state from the state of Figure 74(b) where the display of the second special symbol variation is continuing and the ceiling arrival notification effect is continuing. Figure 75(a) shows the state from the state of Figure 74(d) where the display of the second special symbol variation has ended. Figure 75(b) shows the state from the state of Figure 75(a) where the ceiling arrival notification effect has ended and the effect play instructions are being executed. Figure 75(c) shows the state from the state of Figure 75(b) where the effect play instructions have ended and the display of the second special symbol variation has started.

Figure 73(a) shows a state in "normal gameplay" where there is one more special symbol variation display to be executed until the ceiling is reached, with the variation displays of the first and second special symbols being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reach notification effect being executed in the main display area Dm. Also, Figure 73(a) is in the same gameplay state as timing 1 in Figure 70. In Figure 73(a), since the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, shows that the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed. Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the reserve count display 87a for Special Symbol 1 shows "0," and the reserve count display 88a for Special Symbol 2 also shows "0," indicating that the reserve counts for both the first and second special symbols are "0." Also, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays that there is "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, in Figure 73(a), with "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, the variation display of the first special symbol begins. Since the ceiling is reached when this variation display of the first special symbol finishes, the ceiling reach notification effect is currently running in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, Figure 73(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished and the ceiling has been reached, following the state in Figure 73(a), and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state". Also, Figure 73(b) is in the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 70. In Figure 73(b), the execution of the first special symbol's variation display, which was running in Figure 73(a), has finished, and "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, with the completion of the first special symbol's variation display, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is one less than the state in Figure 73(a), and the game has reached the ceiling and transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89, which suggests right-hand shooting, is displayed, the performance right-hand shooting instruction 81d is not displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 because the ceiling reach notification effect is being performed. Furthermore, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which was running in Figure 73(a), continues to run, and the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b shows that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is in progress.

Next, Figure 73(c) shows the state after the ceiling reach notification animation has finished and the animation's play instructions are being executed, following the state in Figure 73(b). Figure 73(c) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 70. In Figure 73(c), the variation display of the first special symbol that stopped in Figure 73(b) remains unexecuted (stopped), so "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Furthermore, the variation display of the second special symbol continues from Figure 73(b), so the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, shows that the variation display of the second special symbol is in progress. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, since the ceiling reach notification animation has finished, the text message 81e indicating "Playtime Entry" (indicating the ceiling has been reached), the animation's right-hand play instructions 81d, and the text message 81f are displayed, suggesting right-hand play.

Next, Figure 73(d) shows the state after the performance-oriented playing instructions have finished and the second special symbol's variation display, which is currently running, is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, following the state in Figure 73(c). Furthermore, Figure 73(d) represents the same game state as timing 4 in Figure 70. In Figure 73(d), the variation display of the first special symbol, which stopped in Figure 73(b), remains unexecuted (stopped), so "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol continues from Figure 73(b), the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, shows the variation display of the second special symbol in progress. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the performance-oriented playing instructions have finished, and the variation display of the second special symbol, recommended in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," is being executed.

Here, in the state shown in Figure 73(d) (see Timing 4 in Figure 70), the variation display of the second special symbol, which is currently running, is a variation display that started in the "normal game state." Therefore, the display special symbol 2 variation pattern command and the display special symbol 2 stop type command for performing the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm during the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" are not set (see S1315: Yes in Figure 65). As a result, the variation effect during the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" cannot be performed in the main display area Dm. For this reason, while the variation display of the second special symbol, which started in the "normal game state," is running, the main display area Dm will only display the state in which the third symbol is changing.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the first and second special symbols are displayed in the variation state as shown in Figure 70, the player is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has been shortened to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Even though the player is in a state where consecutive wins are possible, only monotonous variation effects are performed for a while, which may be disappointing.

Next, Figures 74(a) to 75(c) show the progression of the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation display of the first special symbol while the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. Figure 74(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there is one more execution of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, the variation displays of the first and second special symbols are being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reach notification display is being executed in the main display area Dm. Also, Figure 74(a) is in the same game state as timing 1 in Figure 70. In Figure 74(a), since the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. Furthermore, since the variation display of the second special symbol is also in progress, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, specifically the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, shows that the variation display of the second special symbol is in progress. Additionally, the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, specifically the special symbol 1 reserve count display 87a, shows "0," and the special symbol 2 reserve count display 88a also shows "0," indicating that the reserve counts for both the first and second special symbols are "0." Also, the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c, displays that there is "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, in Figure 74(a), with "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, the variation display of the first special symbol begins. Since the ceiling will be reached when this variation display of the first special symbol finishes, the ceiling reach notification effect is in progress in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, Figure 74(b) shows the state after the first special symbol's variation display has finished first, reaching the ceiling, and transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" from the state in Figure 74(a). Also, Figure 74(b) is in the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 70. In Figure 74(b), the execution of the first special symbol's variation display, which was running in Figure 74(a), has finished, and "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, with the completion of the first special symbol's variation display, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is one less than the state in Figure 74(a), indicating that the ceiling has been reached and transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-hand play instruction 89, which suggests right-hand play, is displayed, the performance right-hand play instruction 81d is not displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 because the ceiling reach notification effect is being performed. Furthermore, the variation display of the second special symbol, which was running in Figure 74(a), continues to run, and the variation display of the second special symbol is shown to be running on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b.

Next, Figures 74(c) and 74(d) show that, starting from the state in Figure 74(b), the display of the second special symbol's variation continues to run, and the ceiling reach notification effect continues to run. Also, Figure 74(c) is the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 70, and Figure 74(d) is the same game state as timing 4 in Figure 70. In Figures 74(c) and 74(d), the display of the first special symbol's variation, which stopped in Figure 74(b), remains unexecuted (stopped), so "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, since the display of the second special symbol's variation continues to run from Figure 74(b), the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, shows that the display of the second special symbol's variation is running. In addition, the ceiling reach notification effect continues to run in the central part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, in Figures 74(c) and 74(d), the ceiling reach counter 81c, which was displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm in Figures 74(a) and 74(b), has been erased. In this way, when the ceiling reach notification effect is running, displaying "0 times" on the ceiling reach counter 81c and then erasing it after a short delay enhances the player's interest in the ceiling reach notification effect running in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, Figure 75(a) shows the state after the second special symbol's variation display has finished, following the state in Figure 74(d). Figure 75(a) also shows the same game state as timing 5 in Figure 70. In Figure 75(a), the variation display of the first special symbol, which stopped in Figure 74(b), remains unexecuted (stopped), so "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Furthermore, the variation display of the second special symbol, which was running in Figures 74(a) to (d), has finished, and "336" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b. In addition, the ceiling reach notification effect continues to run in the central part of the main display area Dm.

Next, Figure 75(b) shows the state after the ceiling reach notification animation has finished and the animation's play instructions have been executed, following the state in Figure 75(a). Figure 75(b) is in the same game state as timing 5 in Figure 70, and is the state immediately following Figure 75(a). In Figure 75(b), the variation display of the first special symbol that stopped in Figure 74(b) remains unexecuted (stopped), so "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Similarly, the variation display of the second special symbol that stopped in Figure 75(a) also remains unexecuted (stopped), so "336" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, since the ceiling reach notification animation has finished, the text message 81e indicating "Playtime Entry" indicating the ceiling has been reached, and the animation's right-hand play instructions 81d and text message 81f suggesting right-hand play are displayed.

Next, Figure 75(c) shows the state after the performance-oriented playing instructions have finished and the display of the second special symbol's variation has started, following the state in Figure 75(b). Also, Figure 75(c) is in the same game state as timing 6 in Figure 70. In Figure 75(c), the display of the first special symbol's variation, which stopped in Figure 74(b), remains unexecuted (stopped), so "174" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, in Figure 75(b), the performance-oriented playing instructions were executed and the player started playing to the right, causing the ball to enter the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, and the display of the second special symbol's variation has started. Therefore, the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b shows that the display of the second special symbol's variation is currently running. In addition, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the third symbol has started to vary because the display of the second special symbol's variation has started.

As explained above, in the state shown in Figure 70, where the fluctuation display of the first and second special symbols is in progress, that is, in the "normal gameplay state" where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which is not recommended, is in progress, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol reaches the ceiling and transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," the ceiling arrival notification effect, which is being executed at the 900th fluctuation display of the first special symbol that results in reaching the ceiling, is not terminated at the end of the 900th fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Instead, it is extended until the end of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which is running in parallel, and the instructions for how to play the effect are executed after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has finished.

With this configuration, the display of the second special symbol's variation, which is currently running when transitioning to the "low probability time reduction state," is not executed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead, the ceiling reach notification effect is executed. Then, at the timing when the display of the second special symbol's variation ends, the ceiling reach notification effect also ends, and subsequently, the instructions for how to play the effect are executed, allowing the player to begin playing with the ball to the right. Furthermore, by starting to play with the ball to the right, a ball enters either the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, making the display of the second special symbol's variation immediately available on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, even when the ceiling is reached during the execution state of the variable display of the first and second special symbols as shown in Figure 70, the right-hand side game can be suitably started without causing any discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and achieves the same effects.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figures 76 to 82, a pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state", the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect on whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol will result in a jackpot until the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed 899 times out of the "900 times" the ceiling is reached. At the "900th" dynamic display of the first special symbol, an effect is performed to notify that the ceiling has been reached, and this ceiling reach notification effect is configured to end at the same time as the end of the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the "900th" time.

In contrast, in the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, a standby animation is performed during the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the 900th spin, preparing for the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" upon reaching the ceiling. This ceiling-reaching standby animation is configured to end when either the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol ends. Furthermore, after the end of the ceiling-reaching standby animation, the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is immediately executed by the third symbol display device 81.

The following description focuses on the differences between the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, components and processes identical to those of the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted.

First, referring to Figure 76, the timing chart for the transition to the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment, where the ceiling is reached by the variable display of special symbol 2 and the state transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," will be explained. Note that the relationship between the ball entry patterns into the through gate 67, first start port 64, upper second start port 71, or lower second start port 71a, the progress of the variable display of the normal symbols, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the driving patterns of the normal electric motor 72 and variable prize entry device 65 in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is the same as in the first and second embodiments, and therefore its explanation will be omitted.

Figure 76 is a timing chart for the fourth embodiment, showing the transition to the "normal game state" when the ceiling is reached due to the variation display of special symbol 2, and the game moves to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." As shown in Figure 76, the variation display of special symbol 1 performs the variation displays at the 898th and 899th rotations in the low probability state of the special symbol, and then, at the variation display scheduled for the 900th rotation, it performs a variation display that results in a "60-second" loss (see timing 2 in Figure 76).

Furthermore, during the execution of the variation display for the 899th spin of special symbol 1, if the player makes an error in operating the control handle 51 to launch the ball, the ball is launched into the right-hand shooting area, and the ball launched in this right-hand shooting game enters the upper second start opening 71. Based on the ball entering the upper second start opening 71, the variation display for special symbol 2, indicating a "20-second" minor win, is then executed.

The variation display for Special Symbol 2 occurs after the end of the variation display for Special Symbol 1 at its 899th rotation, and ends after the start (while the "60-second" losing variation display for Special Symbol 1 is running) (see Timing 3 in Figure 76). In other words, this variation display for Special Symbol 2 becomes the variation display at its 900th rotation in the low probability state of the special symbol, and upon the end of the variation display for Special Symbol 2, the ceiling is reached, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state."

Furthermore, in the timing chart of Figure 76, right-hand play begins immediately after transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state." That is, the player confirms the main display right-hand play instruction 89 displayed upon transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state" and begins right-hand play. Then, the ball launched during right-hand play enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, and the special symbol 2 variation display in the "normal low probability time reduction state" is executed. Meanwhile, at the point when the variation display of special symbol 2 in the "normal low probability time reduction state" begins, the variation display for special symbol 1, indicating a "60-second" loss, is still being executed (see timing 4 in Figure 76).

Here, we assume that in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display of each special symbol, as shown in the timing chart in Figure 76, is executed. As described above, in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to notify that the ceiling has been reached at the 900th fluctuation display of special symbol 1, which will result in reaching the ceiling. In Figure 76, the fluctuation display of special symbol 1 that results in a "60-second" loss becomes the fluctuation display scheduled for the 900th time, and therefore, the ceiling reach notification effect is executed at this 60-second loss fluctuation display.

Then, while the ceiling reach notification animation is running on the third symbol display device 81, the ceiling is reached by the fluctuation display of special symbol 2, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see timing 3 in Figure 76). Furthermore, the player confirms the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 displayed when transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" and begins right-hand shooting, and when a ball enters the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a, the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 is executed.

As mentioned above, in the "normal low probability time reduction state," the variation display for special symbol 2, which results in a minor win, is uniformly configured to select a "2-second" "non-reach" presentation mode (see Figures 12-16). Therefore, playing with the right-hand side will result in the variation display of special symbol 2 being executed consecutively.

In other words, when the third symbol display device 81 is executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, even though the special symbol 2, which is recommended for right-hand play, is displayed multiple times from the time the ceiling is reached and the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is entered until the "60-second" variation display of special symbol 1 ends, the third symbol display device 81 will execute the ceiling reach notification performance based on the variation display of special symbol 1.

Thus, in the case of the variable display state of special symbols 1 and 2 as shown in Figure 76, that is, when the variable display of special symbol 1 that triggers the ceiling arrival notification effect is a long-duration ("60 seconds") variable display, and when the ceiling is reached by the variable display of special symbol 2 during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," and the player immediately starts playing with the right-hand side, even though the variable display of special symbol 2, which is recommended in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" where a "consecutive win" state can occur, is being executed, the third symbol display device 81 will still be executing the ceiling arrival notification effect.

In this case, even though the player has started playing with the right-hand side, which could lead to a "winning streak," the display of the special symbol 2 will not start to change while the ceiling reach notification animation is running on the third symbol display device 81, which could be disappointing for the player.

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are in the state of execution of the variation display as shown in Figure 76, if the variation display of special symbol 1 that is scheduled to be the "900th time" begins to be executed, instead of an effect that notifies that the ceiling has been reached, a standby effect is executed to prepare for the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" after reaching the ceiling. When the variation display of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 ends, the standby effect is terminated, and the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is notified, and the third symbol display device 81 is configured to immediately execute the variation display of special symbol 2 in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state".

This configuration allows the third symbol display device 81 to immediately execute the variation animation for special symbol 2 in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" even when right-hand play is started immediately after transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment. The control details of the variation animation in the third symbol display device 81 when the variation display of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 is being executed, as shown in Figure 76, will be described in detail later in Figures 77 to 80.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 76, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2.

Next, with reference to Figures 77 to 80, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

First, referring to the flowchart in Figure 77, the variable animation processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be explained. Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the variable animation processing (S1110) of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the variable animation processing of the fourth embodiment and the variable animation processing of the second embodiment is that, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling arrival notification processing that notifies that the ceiling has been reached is not performed, and instead, a ceiling arrival standby processing is performed, which is a preparatory animation for transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" after reaching the ceiling.

In the variation effect processing (S1110) of the fourth embodiment, after the processing in S1309 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached, and based on the determination result, a ceiling reach waiting process is executed (S1371) to wait until the ceiling is reached. This variation effect processing (S1110) then ends, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 51).

Here, referring to Figure 78, the ceiling arrival standby process (S1371) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 78 is a flowchart showing this ceiling arrival standby process (S1371).

In this ceiling reach waiting process (S1371), the number of spins remaining until the ceiling is reached is determined, and based on the determination result, a ceiling reach waiting command is set to execute a waiting animation until the ceiling is reached and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state."

In this ceiling reach waiting process (S1371), first, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling reach counter 223k is less than "899" (S1571). If the value of the ceiling reach counter 223k is less than "899" (S1571: Yes), the 900th variation for executing the ceiling waiting animation has not yet been reached. Therefore, processes S1572 to S1574 are skipped, and this ceiling reach waiting process (S1371) ends, returning to the variation animation process (see Figure 77).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1571 is that the value of the ceiling reach counter 223k is not less than "899", that is, if the value of the ceiling reach counter 223k is "899" or greater (S1571: No), then the 900th variation to execute the ceiling wait animation has been reached. Next, it is determined whether the ceiling reach notification flag 223m is turned on (S1572). If the ceiling reach notification flag 223m is not turned on (S1572: No), then since the 900th variation to execute the ceiling wait animation has not been executed even once, the ceiling reach wait command is set (S1573), the ceiling reach notification flag 223m is set to on (S1574), and this ceiling reach wait process (S1371) is terminated, returning to the variation animation process (see Figure 77).

Furthermore, if the result of processing in S1572 determines that the "ceiling reached" notification flag 223m is turned on (S1572: Yes), then since the "900th" variation that would trigger the ceiling waiting animation has already been executed at least once, and there is no need to execute the ceiling waiting animation again, processing in S1573 and S1574 is skipped, and this ceiling reach waiting process (S1371) is terminated, returning to the variation animation process (see Figure 77).

By configuring it in this way, the execution of the ceiling waiting animation from the time the game transitions to the low probability state for special symbols until it reaches the ceiling and transitions to the "reduced time state for normal symbols" can be limited to just one time.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 79, the command processing (S1203) of the Feature Figure 1 command executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the Feature Figure 1 command processing (S1203) of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the Feature Figure 1 command processing of the fourth embodiment and the Feature Figure 1 command processing of the second embodiment is that, upon receiving the Feature Figure 1 confirmation command, a process is added to determine whether or not the ceiling arrival waiting effect is currently being executed, terminate the ceiling arrival waiting effect based on the determination result, and set the ceiling effect start command.

In the command processing (S1203) of the fourth embodiment, after the processing in S1262 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ceiling arrival waiting animation, which is executed in the ceiling arrival waiting processing (see Figure 78) described above, is currently running (S1291). If the determination result is that the ceiling arrival waiting animation is not running (S1291: No), the processing in S1292 and S1293 is skipped, other corresponding processing is executed (S1228), and this command processing (S1203) of the fourth embodiment (see Figure 1) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 62).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the S1291 process that the ceiling arrival waiting animation is currently running (S1291: Yes), the ceiling arrival waiting animation is terminated (S1292), the ceiling animation start command is set (S1293), this Special Feature 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see Figure 62).

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 80, the command processing (S1205) of the Feature Figure 2 command executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the command processing (S1205) of the Feature Figure 2 command in the fourth embodiment. The difference between the Feature Figure 2 command processing of the fourth embodiment and the Feature Figure 2 command processing of the second embodiment is that, upon receiving the Feature Figure 2 confirmation command, a process is added to determine whether or not the ceiling arrival waiting effect is currently being executed, terminate the ceiling arrival waiting effect based on the determination result, and set the ceiling effect start command.

In the command processing shown in Figure 2 of the fourth embodiment (S1205), after the processing in S1272 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ceiling arrival waiting animation, which is executed in the ceiling arrival waiting processing (see Figure 78) described above, is currently running (S1295). If the determination result is that the ceiling arrival waiting animation is not running (S1295: No), the processing in S1296 and S1297 is skipped, other corresponding processing is executed (S1238), and this command processing shown in Figure 2 (S1205) is terminated, returning to the command determination processing (see Figure 62).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the S1295 process that the ceiling arrival waiting animation is currently running (S1295: Yes), the ceiling arrival waiting animation is terminated (S1296), the ceiling animation start command is set (S1297), this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see Figure 62).

By configuring it in this way, the ceiling arrival waiting animation, which is executed at the start of the 900th variation display of the first special symbol in the low probability state of special symbols, is terminated when the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol finishes, that is, when transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." This allows the variation animation to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the dynamic display of the second special symbol that follows.

Next, with reference to Figures 81 to 82, the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment will be described. Figures 81 to 82 show the progression of the variation effects on the third symbol display device 81 that are performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the fourth embodiment. Figure 81(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there are two more executions of the variation display of special symbols until the ceiling is reached, and the variation displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being executed in parallel. Figure 81(b) shows the state from Figure 81(a) to the first special Figure 81(b) shows the state where only the display of the other symbols has finished, and the number of special symbol display executions until reaching the ceiling has decreased to one. Figure 81(c) shows the state where, from the state of Figure 81(b), the next display of the first special symbol has started, and the ceiling arrival waiting animation is being executed. Figure 81(d) shows the state where, from the state of Figure 81(c), only the display of the second special symbol has finished, the ceiling has been reached, and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," with the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 being displayed.

Furthermore, Figure 82(a) shows the state after the ceiling arrival waiting animation has ended, the ceiling has been reached and the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" has been announced, and the animation instructions for playing the animation are being executed. Figure 82(b) shows the state after the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" announcement and the animation instructions for playing the animation have ended, and the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm during the "normal low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Figure 82(c) shows the state after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has started, from the state in Figure 82(b).

Figure 81(a) shows a state in "normal gameplay" where there are two more special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the variation displays of the first and second special symbols are running in parallel. Also, Figure 81(a) is in the same gameplay state as timing 1 in Figure 76. In Figure 81(a), since the variation display of the first special symbol is running, the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, shows that the variation display of the first special symbol is running. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is running, the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, shows that the variation display of the second special symbol is running. Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the reserve count display 87a for Special Symbol 1 shows "1," and the reserve count display 88a for Special Symbol 2 shows "0," indicating that there is "1" reserve for the first special symbol and "0" reserves for the second special symbol. Also, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays that there are "2" more attempts until the ceiling is reached. Finally, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed as the third symbol.

Next, Figure 81(b) shows the state from Figure 81(a) where only the display of the first special symbol variation has finished, and the number of special symbol variation displays remaining until the ceiling is reached has decreased to one. Furthermore, Figure 81(b) is in the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 76. In Figure 81(b), the display of the first special symbol variation, which was running in Figure 81(a), has finished, and "517" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Furthermore, with the completion of the display of the first special symbol variation, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is one less than the state in Figure 81(a). Also, the display of the second special symbol variation, which was running in Figure 81(a), continues to run, and the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b shows that the display of the second special symbol variation is currently running.

Next, Figure 81(c) shows the state in which the next variation display of the first special symbol has started to be executed from the state in Figure 81(b), and the ceiling arrival waiting animation is being executed. Also, Figure 81(c) is in the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 76, and is the state immediately after Figure 81(b). In Figure 81(c), since the remaining one of the reserved variation displays of the first special symbol that was stored in Figure 81(b) has been consumed, "0" is displayed on the reserve count display 87a for special symbol 1, and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, this variation display of the first special symbol is a variation display that was started when there was "1" more to go until the ceiling was reached, that is, it is a variation display that will reach the ceiling when the execution of this variation display is completed. Therefore, the ceiling arrival waiting animation is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the words "Waiting for playtime" are displayed. Furthermore, the display of the second special symbol's variation, which was in progress in Figure 81(b), continues to be in progress, and the display of the second special symbol's variation is shown in the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b.

Next, Figure 81(d) shows the state after the second special symbol's variation display has finished, reaching the ceiling, and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," with the main display's right-hand shooting instruction 89 displayed. Figure 81(d) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 76. In Figure 81(d), the first special symbol's variation display, which began in Figure 81(c), is still running, and the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a shows that the first special symbol's variation display is in progress. Furthermore, the second special symbol's variation display, which was running in Figure 81(c), has finished, and "582" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b. The completion of the second special symbol's variation display has reached the ceiling, transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Therefore, the main display's right-hand shooting instruction 89, suggesting right-hand shooting, is displayed.

Next, Figure 82(a) shows that, from the state in Figure 81(d), the main display area Dm has been notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has transitioned to the "normal low probability time reduction state," and that the performance play instructions are being executed. Also, Figure 82(a) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 76, and is the state immediately after Figure 81(d). In Figure 82(a), the variation display of the first special symbol, which started execution in Figure 81(c), is still being executed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown to be in progress on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not being executed, "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not being executed (stopped). Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the text message 81e indicating "Playtime activated" signifying the ceiling has been reached, and the right-hand shooting instruction 81d and text message 81f for the performance suggesting right-hand shooting are displayed.

Next, Figure 82(b) shows the state after the transition notification to the "normal low probability time reduction state" and the instructions for playing the game have finished, and the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm during the "normal low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Also, Figure 82(b) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 76, and is the state immediately after Figure 82(a). In Figure 82(b), the variation display of the first special symbol, which started in Figure 81(c), is still running, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown to be running on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Also, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not running, "582" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not running (stopped). Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the notification of the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" and the instructions for playing the game have finished, and the third symbol displayed in the "normal low probability time reduction state" has switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Next, Figure 82(c) shows the state after the second special symbol's variation display has started, following the state in Figure 82(b). Figure 82(c) also shows the same game state as timing 4 in Figure 76. In Figure 82(c), the variation display of the first special symbol, which started in Figure 81(c), continues to run, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown running on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Furthermore, the variation display of the second special symbol has started due to right-hand play, and the variation display of the second special symbol is shown running on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. Additionally, the variation display of the second special symbol has started running in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and simultaneously with the start of right-hand play, the variation display of the third symbol is shown running in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

As explained above, in the case of the dynamic display execution state of the first and second special symbols as shown in Figure 76, that is, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is scheduled to be the 900th time in the low probability state of the special symbols, is a long-duration ("60 seconds") dynamic display, and during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ceiling is reached by the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is made, and the player immediately starts playing with the right-hand side, the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is scheduled to be the "900th time," will execute a standby performance to prepare for the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" upon reaching the ceiling. When the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol ends, the standby performance ends, and the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is announced, and the system is configured to immediately execute the variation performance of the second special symbol in the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" on the third symbol display device 81.

By configuring the game in this way, even if the player starts playing with the right-hand side immediately after transitioning to the "normal low probability time reduction state," the variation animation of the second special symbol in the "normal low probability time reduction state" can be immediately executed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and achieves the same effects.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figures 83 to 87, a fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state", the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect on whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol will result in a jackpot until the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed 899 times out of the "900 times" the ceiling is reached. At the "900th" dynamic display of the first special symbol, an effect is performed to notify that the ceiling has been reached, and this ceiling reach notification effect is configured to end at the same time as the end of the "900th" dynamic display of the first special symbol.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, a ceiling reach notification is performed during the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the 900th spin. This ceiling reach notification is configured to end when the dynamic display of the first special symbol ends, or when the dynamic display indicating a jackpot for the second special symbol begins.

The following description focuses on the differences between the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 and the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, components and processes identical to those of the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted.

First, referring to Figure 83, we will explain the timing chart for when the ceiling is reached by the variable display of special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and the machine transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." Note that the relationship between the ball entry pattern into the through gate 67, first start opening 64, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a, the progress of the variable display of the normal symbols, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the driving patterns of the normal electric motor 72 and variable prize entry device 65 in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the same as in the first and second embodiments, so we will omit the explanation.

Figure 83 is a timing chart for a scenario where, during "normal gameplay," the ceiling is reached by the display of special symbol 1's variation, transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state." However, while the display of special symbol 1 is still running, a jackpot occurs with the display of special symbol 2's variation. As shown in Figure 83, the display of special symbol 1 executes the variation display for the 899th spin in the low probability state of the special symbol, and then, at the 900th spin, it executes a variation display that results in a "15-second" loss (see timing 1 in Figure 83).

Furthermore, during the execution of the 900th rotation variation display for Special Symbol 1, if the player makes an error operating the control handle 51 for launching the ball, the ball is launched into the right-hand play area, and the ball launched in this right-hand play enters the upper second start opening 71. Based on the ball entering the upper second start opening 71, the variation display for Special Symbol 2, indicating a "70-second" jackpot, is then executed.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the ceiling is reached and the machine transitions to the "normal low probability time reduction state," 1140 time reduction spins are granted (see Figure 25). Furthermore, if the type of jackpot based on the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 is jackpot type "time reduction A," 100 time reduction spins are granted (see Figure 25).

In other words, in the state of the variable display of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 as shown in Figure 83, if the jackpot type for special symbol 2 is "Time Reduction A," the ceiling is reached at the end of the variable display of special symbol 1 at the 900th spin, and the game transitions to the "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," granting 1140 time reduction spins. However, since a jackpot of type "Time Reduction A" is won in the variable display of special symbol 2 immediately after reaching the ceiling, the number of time reduction spins granted after the end of that jackpot will be 100.

Here, we assume that in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display of each special symbol, as shown in the timing chart in Figure 83, is performed. As described above, in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to notify that the ceiling has been reached at the 900th fluctuation display of special symbol 1. Therefore, the ceiling reach notification effect is performed at the 900th fluctuation display of special symbol 1, and the ceiling reach notification effect ends simultaneously with the end of the 900th fluctuation display.

Therefore, when a player sees the ceiling reach notification animation that occurs during the 900th special symbol 1 variation display, they would recognize that 1140 time-saving rounds would be granted, assuming they were aware of the number of time-saving rounds that could be granted upon reaching the ceiling. However, if they win a "Time-Saving A" jackpot during the special symbol 2 variation display that occurs immediately afterward, the number of time-saving rounds that can be granted after that jackpot becomes 100. While they do gain payouts from winning a "Time-Saving A" jackpot, some players might feel that the number of time-saving rounds they can be granted has decreased significantly, leading to a decreased expectation of consecutive wins and potentially disappointment.

Therefore, in the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are in the state of execution of the variation display as shown in Figure 83, specifically, when the variation display of special symbol 1 is at the "900th" variation display, and the variation display of special symbol 2 indicates a jackpot, the machine is configured to interrupt the ceiling reach notification effect simultaneously with the start of the variation display of special symbol 2, and to notify that a jackpot has been won with the variation display of special symbol 2.

This configuration reduces the execution time of the ceiling reach notification animation, decreasing the time it takes for the player to realize they have reached the ceiling, and allowing for earlier notification of a jackpot in the special symbol 2's variation display. Furthermore, by interrupting the ceiling reach notification animation before it continues until the end of the special symbol 1's variation animation, the player can recognize that something else has happened while they are on their way to reaching the ceiling. This reduces the feeling, as seen in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, that the number of time-saving spins has decreased from the 1140 spins that may be granted upon reaching the ceiling to the 100 spins granted based on the jackpot type "Time-Saving A". The control details of the variation animation in the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variation displays of special symbols 1 and 2, as shown in Figure 83, will be described in detail in Figures 84 and 85.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 83, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2.

Next, with reference to Figures 84 and 85, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

First, referring to the flowchart in Figure 84, the variable animation processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the variable animation processing (S1110) of the fifth embodiment. The difference between the variable animation processing of the fifth embodiment and the variable animation processing of the second embodiment is that, at the start of the variable animation of the second special symbol in the "normal game state," a process has been added to determine whether the variable animation of the second special symbol is successful or not, and whether the ceiling arrival notification animation is currently being executed, and to switch the ceiling arrival notification animation based on the determination result.

In the variation effect processing (S1110) of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined in the S1315 process that the state is "normal gameplay" (S1315: Yes), it is determined whether the variation effect of the second special symbol is successful and whether the ceiling reach notification effect is currently running. Based on the determination result, a ceiling reach notification effect switching process is executed to switch the ceiling reach notification effect (S1391), and this variation effect processing (S1110) ends, returning to the main process (see Figure 51).

Here, referring to Figure 85, the ceiling-reaching effect switching process (S1391) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be explained. Figure 85 is a flowchart showing this ceiling-reaching effect switching process (S1391).

In this ceiling-reaching animation switching process (S1391), the system determines whether the second special symbol's variation animation is successful or not, and whether the ceiling-reaching notification animation is currently running. Based on the determination result, the ceiling-reaching notification animation is switched accordingly.

In this ceiling reach animation switching process (S1391), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation display of the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (S1591). If the fluctuation display of the second special symbol does not indicate a jackpot (S1591: No), processes S1592 and S1593 are skipped, and this ceiling reach animation switching process (S1391) is terminated, returning to the fluctuation animation process (see Figure 84).

On the other hand, if the determination in S1591 indicates that the second special symbol's variation display has resulted in a jackpot (S1591: Yes), then it is determined whether the third symbol display device 81 is currently executing the ceiling reach notification effect (S1592). If the third symbol display device 81 is not currently executing the ceiling reach notification effect (S1592: No), then the process in S1593 is skipped, and this ceiling reach effect switching process (S1391) is terminated, returning to the variation effect process (see Figure 84).

Furthermore, if the determination in S1592 indicates that the third symbol display device 81 was executing a ceiling reach notification animation (S1592: Yes), the ceiling reach notification animation is interrupted, a ceiling reach animation switching command is set to indicate that the second special symbol's variation display has resulted in a jackpot (S1593), and this ceiling reach animation switching process (S1391) is terminated, returning to the variation animation process (see Figure 84).

With this configuration, if the second special symbol's variation display indicates a jackpot while the third symbol display device 81 is executing the ceiling arrival notification animation, the ceiling arrival notification animation can be interrupted, and the second special symbol's variation display can notify the player that a jackpot has been won. As a result, the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification animation is reduced, and the time it takes for the player to realize that the ceiling has been reached is also reduced. Furthermore, by interrupting the ceiling arrival notification animation before it continues until the end of the variation animation of special symbol 1, the player can recognize that something else has happened while on the way to reaching the ceiling. Therefore, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the feeling that the number of time-saving spins has decreased from the 1140 spins that may be granted upon reaching the ceiling to the 100 spins granted based on the jackpot type "Time-Saving A" can be mitigated.

Next, with reference to Figures 86 and 87, the variation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment will be described. Figures 86 and 87 show the progression of the variation effects on the third symbol display device 81, which are performed based on the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" of the fifth embodiment. Figure 86(a) shows the state in the "normal game state" where there is one more execution of the variation display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached, and both the variation displays of the first and second special symbols are stopped. Figure 86(b) shows the state from Figure 86(a) where the variation display of the first special symbol begins and the ceiling reach notification effect is being performed. Figure 86(c) shows the state from Figure 86(b) where the variation display indicating a jackpot for the second special symbol begins and the ceiling reach notification effect is interrupted. Figure 86(d) shows the state from Figure 86(c) where the variation display indicating a jackpot for the second special symbol has stopped.

Furthermore, Figure 87(a) shows the state in the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State" which was entered after a jackpot was hit by the fluctuation display of the second special symbol from the state in Figure 86(d), with the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display has been executed being 99. Figure 87(b) shows the state in the state of Figure 87(a) after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has stopped, the time reduction termination condition has been met, and the game has transitioned to the "Normal Game State". Figure 87(c) shows the state in the state of Figure 87(b) after the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm has switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol.

Figure 86(a) shows a state in "normal gameplay" where there is one more special symbol variation display to be executed until the ceiling is reached, and both the first and second special symbol variation displays are stopped. Also, Figure 86(a) is in the same gameplay state as timing 1 in Figure 83. In Figure 86(a), the variation display of the first special symbol has just stopped, and "871" is displayed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, since the variation display of the second special symbol has not been executed, "193" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b, showing that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the reserve count display 87a for Special Feature 1 shows "1," and the reserve count display 88a for Special Feature 2 shows "0," indicating that the reserve counts for the first and second special symbols are "1" and "0," respectively. Also, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reach counter 81c displays that there is "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached.

Next, Figure 86(b) shows the state from Figure 86(a) where the display of the first special symbol's variation has started and the ceiling arrival notification effect is being executed. Also, Figure 86(b) is in the same game state as timing 1 in Figure 83, and is the state immediately after Figure 86(a). In Figure 86(b), since the remaining one of the reserved number of display of the first special symbol's variation that was stored in Figure 87(a) has been consumed, "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 87a for special symbol 1, and the display of the first special symbol's variation is being executed on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, in Figure 86(b), with "1" remaining until the ceiling is reached, the display of the first special symbol's variation has started, and since the ceiling will be reached when the execution of this display of the first special symbol's variation is completed, the ceiling arrival notification effect is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, in Figure 86(b), similar to Figure 86(a), the display of the second special symbol is not yet executed (stopped), therefore, "193" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b.

Next, Figure 86(c) shows the state in Figure 86(b) where the variation display indicating a win of the second special symbol jackpot has begun, and the ceiling reach notification performance has been interrupted. Also, Figure 86(c) is in the same game state as timing 2 in Figure 83. In Figure 86(c), the variation display of the first special symbol, which was performing the ceiling reach notification performance that started in Figure 86(b), is still running, and the variation display of the first special symbol is shown to be running on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, Figure 86(c) shows the "normal game state," where left-handed play is being performed. However, the player made an error operating the control handle 51 to launch the ball, causing the ball to be launched into the right-handed play area. This ball entered the upper second start opening 71, triggering the display of the second special symbol variation. The special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b shows the second special symbol variation display in progress. Moreover, since this second special symbol variation indicates a jackpot, the central part of the main display area Dm shows the ceiling arrival notification effect, which began in Figure 86(b), being interrupted by a screen blackout effect, based on the start of the jackpot variation display for the second special symbol.

Next, Figure 86(d) shows the state after the fluctuation display indicating a jackpot for the second special symbol has stopped, following the state in Figure 86(c). Figure 86(d) is in the same game state as timing 3 in Figure 83. In Figure 86(d), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which began in Figure 86(b), has finished, and "562" is displayed on the special symbol 1 mini-reel 81a. Furthermore, the completion of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol has reached the ceiling, and the game has transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," resulting in the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 being displayed. Additionally, the fluctuation display indicating a jackpot for the second special symbol, which began in Figure 86(c), has finished, and "666" is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b and in the center of the main display area Dm.

Next, Figure 87(a) shows the state in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" which was entered when a jackpot was hit by the fluctuation display of the second special symbol from the state in Figure 86(d), and the number of times the fluctuation display of the special symbol has been executed is 99. In Figure 87(a), the state in Figure 86(c) was entered when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol resulted in a jackpot, and in this "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed 99 times. Therefore, in the upper left part of the main display area Dm, the time reduction counter 81g displays that there is "1" time remaining. Also, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol has not been executed, "145" is displayed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, indicating that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, since the second special symbol's variation display is currently running, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, specifically the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b, shows that the variation display for the second special symbol is in progress. Also, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 reserve count display 87a shows "0," and the special symbol 2 reserve count display 88a shows "4," indicating that the reserve counts for the first and second special symbols are "0" and "4," respectively. Additionally, since the game is in a "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" where right-hand play is performed, the main display's right-hand play instruction 89 and text message 81f are displayed.

Next, Figure 87(b) shows the state after the second special symbol's variation display has stopped, the time-saving mode termination condition has been met, and the game has transitioned to the "normal game state." In Figure 87(b), since the variation display of the second special symbol, which was executed for the 100th time in the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state," has finished, "582" is displayed on the lower right part of the main display area Dm, on the special symbol 2 mini-reel 81b. Also, because the variation display of the second special symbol has stopped, the time-saving mode termination condition has been met and the game has transitioned to the "normal game state." Therefore, the time-saving counter 81g in the upper left part of the main display area Dm displays that there are "0" remaining time-saving rounds, and the main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 and text message 81f that were displayed in Figure 87(a) have been erased.

Next, Figure 87(c) shows the state in Figure 87(b) where the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm has switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol. In Figure 87(c), the game has transitioned from the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" (right-handed play) to the "normal play state" (left-handed play), and therefore the left-handed play instruction 81h for the performance is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the third symbol displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm is now the first special symbol, and in the "normal play state" (left-handed play), the variation performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is shown being executed in the main display area Dm.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol 1 is displayed for the 900th time in a low probability state for special symbols, and the ceiling reach notification effect is being executed, if the special symbol 2 display indicates a jackpot, the ceiling reach notification effect is interrupted simultaneously with the start of the special symbol 2 display, and the jackpot is announced by the special symbol 2 display.

This configuration reduces the execution time of the ceiling reach notification animation, decreasing the time it takes for the player to realize they have reached the ceiling, and allowing for earlier notification of a jackpot in the special symbol 2's variation display. Furthermore, by interrupting the ceiling reach notification animation before it continues until the end of the special symbol 1's variation animation, the player can recognize that something else has happened while they are on their way to reaching the ceiling. This reduces the feeling that the number of time-saving spins has decreased from the 1140 spins that may be granted upon reaching the ceiling to the 100 spins granted based on the jackpot type "Time-Saving A," as seen in the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10. Additionally, in the rare case of the second special symbol's dynamic display occurring upon reaching the ceiling, the ceiling reach notification animation is immediately terminated to ensure consistency in the animation content, preventing inconsistencies and providing a more easily understandable animation for the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and achieves the same effects.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figures 88 and 89, a sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments, in left-handed play, the machine is configured such that a ball can enter or enters easily into the first start port 64, while it is difficult or impossible for a ball to enter the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. In this left-handed play, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult or impossible to execute based on a ball entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments, the opening time of the normal electric motor 72 when a normal symbol is won in a low probability state of a normal symbol is short (i.e., "0.1 seconds"), making it difficult for a ball to enter the lower second start port 71a.

In contrast, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, a standard electric motor 72b is positioned below the first start port 64. During left-handed play, the standard electric motor 72b opens, allowing the ball to enter the lower second start port 71a. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the standard electric motor 72b when a standard symbol is won during a low-probability state for standard symbols is longer than the opening time of the standard electric motor 72 in the first embodiment (i.e., "1.0 second"). This configuration allows the ball to enter the lower second start port 71a even during "normal play" when left-handed play is performed.

The following description focuses on the differences between the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 and the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description of the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, components and processes identical to those of the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted.

First, with reference to Figure 88, the specific configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10. The difference between the game board 13 of the first to fifth embodiments and the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment is that the ordinary electric device 72b, which allows entry into the lower second start opening 71a when open, is located below the first start opening 64.

In the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, a lower second start opening 71a is provided below the first start opening 64, allowing balls to enter only when the normal electric motor 72b is open. In the "normal game state" where left-handed play is performed and the normal electric motor 72b is open, game pins are planted around this lower second start opening 71a so that approximately two balls per minute enter the opening when playing left-handed. The lower second start opening 71a also serves as one of the prize entry points, dispensing one ball as a prize when a ball enters it.

Below the front view of the first start port 64, there is a standard electric valve 72b that can be displaced to open (expanded) or close (contracted) the lower second start port 71a by opening and closing two vane members that cover the opening through which the ball enters the lower second start port 71a. Normally, the standard electric valve 72b is in a closed state with its vanes closed (vertically upright), making it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the lower second start port 71a.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops on the "○" symbol, the normal electric motor 72b operates for a predetermined time. While the normal electric motor 72b is operating, its wings move from an upward-standing position to a roughly V-shape (inverted V-shape), and the normal electric motor 72b opens. When the normal electric motor 72b opens, the ball can enter the lower second start opening 71a, or it becomes easier for the ball to enter than when it is closed. In other words, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops on the "○" symbol, resulting in a win, and the normal electric motor 72b opens, it is possible to allow the ball to enter not only the first start opening 64 but also the lower second start opening 71a, allowing for more jackpot draws.

Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the probability of hitting a regular symbol in the low probability state of regular symbols is 70/100 (see Figure 89), and it is set so that a win is easily derived in the variable display of regular symbols. In addition, the opening time of the regular electric valve 72b when a regular symbol is hit in the low probability state of regular symbols is "1.0 second" (see Figure 89), and in the "normal game state," it is configured so that balls launched by left-handed play can enter the lower second start opening 71a.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, both the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is performed based on a ball entering the first start opening 64, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is performed based on a ball entering the lower second start opening 71a, are configured to be executed in the "normal game state."

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling, as described above in the first to fifth embodiments (see Figures 19, 70, 76, and 83), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel during "normal gameplay," is more likely to occur even when playing normally. As a result, the control content of the dynamic display variation effects and the instructions for playing effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling is more likely to function effectively than in the rare case of performing the unrecommended right-hand play just before reaching the ceiling, as in the first to fifth embodiments of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to Figures 89(a) to 89(c), the details of the per-chart random number table 202h, the per-chart variation table 202i, and the normal power supply release table 202j of the sixth embodiment will be described. First, Figure 89(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the per-chart random number table 202h stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment. Since this is the same as the per-chart random number table 202h stored in the ROM 202 of the first embodiment, the explanation will be omitted.

Next, Figure 89(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the general-purpose variation table 202i stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment. Since this is the same as the general-purpose variation table 202i stored in the ROM 202 of the first embodiment, a detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, Figure 89(c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the normal electric payout table 202j stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the normal electric payout table 202j of the sixth embodiment and the normal electric payout table 202j of the first embodiment is that the opening times of the normal electric payout 72 and normal electric payout 72b in the low probability state of normal symbols are different.

The normal electric payout table 202j of the sixth embodiment is referenced when a normal symbol win occurs, and the opening (immersion) time and number of openings of the normal electric payout 72b are defined based on the game state at the time the normal symbol win occurs.

In the sixth embodiment, the normal electric payout opening table 202j is divided into groups based on the game state in which a normal symbol was drawn. Specifically, the opening mode (opening time) of the normal electric payout 72b is changed for the "normal game state/latent probability variation state" (referenced in "normal game state" and "latent probability variation state") and for the "probability variation state/low probability time reduction state/time reduction state" (referenced in "probability variation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state").

As shown in Figure 89(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the number of times the normal electric motor 72b is opened when a normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability variation state" is set to 1, and the opening time is set to "1.0 second" as defined in the normal electric motor opening table 202j. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability variation state," the normal electric motor 72b is set to open for "1.0 second" x 1 = "1.0 second".

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the normal electric valve 72b, which is set to open for "5.8 seconds" when a normal symbol is won, is specified in the normal electric valve opening table 202j to open only once. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," or "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the normal electric valve 72b is configured to open for "5.8 seconds" x 1 = "5.8 seconds."

This allows the opening mechanism of the standard electric valve 72b to be changed according to the game state, thereby creating differences in the length of time the standard electric valve 72b is open. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the game state can be altered to determine whether the ball is more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a due to a longer period of the standard electric valve 72b's openness, or whether it is possible for the ball to enter the lower second start opening 71a due to a shorter period of the standard electric valve 72b's openness. This creates different gameplay characteristics for each game state.

In particular, in game states where right-handed play is encouraged, such as the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state," the normal symbol becomes highly probable, the variable display time is shortened, and the opening period of the normal electric mechanism 72b is lengthened, making it easier for balls launched by right-handed play to enter the lower second starting opening 71a.

Furthermore, in the "normal gameplay state" where left-handed play is recommended, although the probability of hitting a regular symbol is low, the machine is set so that a win is relatively easy to obtain (70/100). Because the opening period of the regular electric mechanism 72b is set to a certain length ("1.0 second"), the machine is configured so that balls launched by left-handed play can enter the lower second starting opening 71a.

Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state," "normal low probability time reduction state," and "normal high probability time reduction state," balls shot to the right are more likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol accumulates more easily. This makes the fluctuation reduction function more likely to activate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is more efficiently executed.

Furthermore, in "normal gameplay mode," balls shot to the left can enter the first starting port 64 and the lower second starting port 71a (approximately 6 balls and 2 balls per minute, respectively), thereby enabling the dynamic display of both the first and second special symbols.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the ceiling is reached, as described above in the first to fifth embodiments (see Figures 19, 70, 76, and 83), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel during "normal gameplay," is more likely to occur. As a result, in the first to fifth embodiments of the pachinko machine 10, the control content of the dynamic display variation effects and the instructions for playing the effects, executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached, is more likely to function effectively.

Furthermore, the probability of winning with the variable display of the regular symbols and the variable display time are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio is acceptable as long as the probability of winning with the regular symbols is higher in the "probability variation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the probability of winning with the regular symbols in the "normal game state" may be set to about 1/100 to make it harder to win, or the probability of winning with the regular symbols in the "probability variation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the system may be configured so that no win is achieved in the low probability state of the regular symbols. Also, any time is acceptable as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "probability variation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the variable display time of the regular symbols in the "normal game state" may be set to a long time of "30 seconds" or more (e.g., "100 seconds"), or to a short time of less than "10 seconds" (e.g., "1 second").

Furthermore, the opening time and number of openings of the standard electric motor 72 are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the opening time of the standard electric motor 72 can be any time that is more advantageous to the player in the "probability variation state" than in the "normal game state." For example, the opening time of the standard electric motor 72 in the "normal game state" may be set to "1 second" or more (e.g., "5 seconds"), and the number of openings may be set to "1 time" or more (e.g., "3 times"). Also, the opening time of the standard electric motor 72 in the "probability variation state" may be set to a longer time of "5.8 seconds" or more (e.g., "10 seconds"), or to a shorter time of less than "5.8 seconds" (e.g., "1 second"). Furthermore, the number of openings of the standard electric motor 72 in the "probability variation state" may be set to a larger number of times, such as "1 time" or more (e.g., "5 times").

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a lower second start opening 71a is provided below the first start opening 64, into which a ball can only enter when the normal electric motor 72b is open. Furthermore, the probability of winning with a normal symbol in the low probability state of normal symbols is 70/100 (see Figure 89), and the variable display of normal symbols is set to make it easier to derive a win. In the low probability state of normal symbols, the opening time of the normal electric motor 72b when a normal symbol is won is set to "1.0 second". For this reason, in the "normal game state", the machine is configured so that a ball launched by left-handed play can enter the lower second start opening 71a. As a result, when a ball is shot to the left in "normal gameplay mode," it can enter the first starting port 64 and the lower second starting port 71a (approximately 6 balls and 2 balls per minute, respectively), thereby enabling the dynamic display of both the first and second special symbols.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the ceiling is reached, as described above in the first to fifth embodiments (see Figures 19, 70, 76, and 83), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel during "normal gameplay," is more likely to occur. As a result, in the first to fifth embodiments of the pachinko machine 10, the control content of the dynamic display variation effects and the instructions for playing the effects, executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached, is more likely to function effectively.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first through fifth embodiments and achieves the same effects.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited in any way to the above embodiments, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. For example, each embodiment may be configured by modifying the embodiment by adding some or more parts of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment, or by replacing some or more parts of the configuration of that embodiment. Also, the numerical values given in the above embodiments are just examples, and it is naturally possible to use other numerical values.

<Variation 1>
In the above embodiment, the upper second start port 71, the lower second start port 71a, and the variable prize winning device 65 are arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, as prize winning openings into which balls launched during right-handed play can be awarded. In contrast, a general prize winning opening 63 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, as a prize winning opening into which balls launched during right-handed play can be awarded. The general prize winning opening 63 is configured to allow a certain number of balls (for example, 10 out of 100 balls) to be awarded during right-handed play, and is configured to dispense prize balls to the player in addition to the upper second start port 71, the lower second start port 71a, and the variable prize winning device 65 during right-handed play. This configuration allows the player to play while suppressing the consumption of their balls during right-handed play. In particular, by being able to pay out prize balls based on winning into the general prize slot 63 during the "latent probability fluctuation state" when the prize-winning assistance function is not activated, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the player's remaining balls.

<Modified Example 2>
In the above embodiment, if the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or first special symbol starts while the dynamic display of one of the first special symbols is being executed, the drawing for the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or first special symbol is configured to draw only from random values other than those for a jackpot (i.e., random values that result in a loss). In contrast, if the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or first special symbol starts while the dynamic display of one of the first special symbols or second special symbol is being executed, the system may be configured so that the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or first special symbol can also result in a jackpot. In this case, if a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the other special symbol while the dynamic display of one special symbol is showing a loss, the dynamic display of the loss may be temporarily stopped when the dynamic display of the jackpot ends, and the dynamic display of the loss may be resumed when the jackpot game ends.

<Example 3>
In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to generate a "probability fluctuation state" using a first special symbol and a second special symbol. In contrast, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to win a minor prize in addition to a big win, and a variable prize entry device for minor prizes is provided that opens based on the win of the minor prize game. Furthermore, a pachinko machine (a so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed machine) is used that has a time-saving area (a so-called V area) in which a big win and a "time-saving function" are granted when a ball passes through the variable prize entry device for minor prizes, and the machine is configured so that whether or not the "time-saving function" is granted differs depending on the number of times the "time-saving function" has been granted. By configuring it in this way, the variety of games in which the "time-saving function" is granted can be increased, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the above embodiment, the termination condition for the "probability variation state" is configured to terminate based on the number of times the dynamic display of special symbols is executed (so-called ST type) or by winning the next jackpot (so-called loop type). Alternatively, a pachinko machine (so-called fall type) may be used in which the "probability variation state" terminates (so-called fall function) when a predetermined lottery result other than a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of special symbols. By configuring it in this way, the variety of games can be enriched and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. In this case, even if the "probability variation state" or "latent probability variation state" (for example, first game state) is affected by the fall lottery (for example, non-derivation transition means) and transitions to the "time reduction state" or "normal game state" (for example, second game state), the game does not immediately transition to the "time reduction state" or "normal game state" presentation, but continues to perform the presentation in the "probability variation state" or "latent probability variation state" (for example, first presentation) (for example, presentation continuation means). Furthermore, the system is configured to execute a screen (for example, a second animation) corresponding to the "time-saving state" or "normal game state" when predetermined conditions are met (for example, when the "time-saving function" ends or when the animation change lottery is won). By configuring it in this way, even if the player is selected for a fall-out lottery in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state," it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not they have fallen out, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. At the same time, when predetermined conditions are met, it becomes possible to make the player clearly aware of the game state (game result), and to execute game specifications and animations that are easy for the player to understand. In addition, the system may be configured to execute an animation that can suggest to the player that the player has been selected for a fall-out lottery in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state."

<Example 5>
In the above embodiment, the system is configured such that a high probability state for special symbols occurs when a type of jackpot to which the "probability variation function" is granted is selected. Alternatively, the system may be configured to include a so-called probability variation limiter function, in which a type of jackpot to which the "probability variation function" does not occur is selected for each predetermined number of times the "probability variation function" is granted. Alternatively, the system may be configured to include a so-called time-saving limiter function, in which a type of jackpot to which a high probability state for normal symbols does not occur is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuous granting of excessive game value to the player, while also enriching the variety of games and improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the ordinary electric mechanism 72 and the variable prize winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning combination of an ordinary symbol or a special symbol. Alternatively, a pachinko machine may be used that is equipped with a passage that opens a movable mechanism (a so-called non-electric mechanism) that is blocking other prize winning openings when a ball passes through it.

<Example 7>
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a game state is created in which a "time-saving function" is applied after the jackpot ends. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that when a predetermined symbol other than a jackpot (or minor jackpot) (for example, a time-saving symbol) is displayed in the dynamic display of special symbols, the system transitions to a state in which the "time-saving function" is applied without going through a jackpot. With this configuration, while the dynamic display of one special symbol is in progress, the phenomenon of reaching the ceiling based on the dynamic display of the other special symbol, which is more likely to be executed by the "time-saving function," can occur. This allows for a rich variety of situations in which the "time-saving function" is applied, and when the variation performance of the first special symbol that was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 ends, instructions on how to play the performance are displayed, allowing the player to start playing with the right-hand side without any discomfort.

<Difference 8>
In the above embodiment, if the total number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed in a low probability state of special symbols is a predetermined number of times (for example, "1000 times") without winning a jackpot, a "time-saving function" is granted without going through a jackpot (a so-called ceiling function). Alternatively, the predetermined number of times may be counted individually for the cumulative number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the cumulative number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed. Furthermore, the predetermined number of times may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By configuring it in this way, the variety of games can be increased and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

<Difference 9>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously and in parallel. Alternatively, the dynamic display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation), and the control of each dynamic display may be performed accordingly. Specifically, if an opportunity to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol (for example, a specific effect) is obtained while the dynamic display of the second special symbol (for example, a game result suggestion effect) is being executed, the start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be suspended while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed. Alternatively, the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the second special symbol (so-called special symbol 1 priority variation). Specifically, even if a trigger (e.g., occurrence condition) for the dynamic display of a second special symbol (e.g., a specific effect) that suggests whether or not a jackpot has occurred is obtained while the dynamic display of a first special symbol (e.g., game result indication) that suggests whether or not a jackpot has occurred is being executed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol may continue (e.g., continuation means), and while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, the start of the dynamic display of the second special symbol may be suspended (e.g., specific effect waiting means), and when the dynamic display of the first special symbol ends, the suspended dynamic display of the second special symbol may be started (e.g., specific effect execution means). In this case, a suspension indicator (e.g., related effect) indicating that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended may be displayed (e.g., related effect execution means). Furthermore, the dynamic display may be executed in the order in which the winning combinations are obtained (so-called winning order variation), and control of each dynamic display may be performed. By configuring it in this way, the variety of games can be increased and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Furthermore, when performing a dynamic display (variation effect) of the reserved second special symbol or first special symbol, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to continue displaying the corresponding reserved symbol as the execution reserved symbol (for example, related continuation means), and to erase the execution reserved symbol at the end of the variation effect, or at an appropriate timing during the variation effect (for example, at the start of the variation element of "Super Reach").

<Modification 10>
In the above embodiment, the "time-saving function" is configured to terminate based on a predetermined number of executions of the dynamic display of special symbols or on winning a jackpot. Alternatively, the "time-saving function" may be configured to terminate based on the number of times a minor win is achieved or on the derivation of a time-saving termination symbol different from that of a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, the termination conditions of the prize-winning assistance state can be diversified, enriching the variety of games and improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the "time-saving function" is active, the "time-saving function" may be configured to terminate when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, when the reserve is full (i.e., 4 balls) or when a certain number of reserved balls are stored relative to the full reserve (for example, 2 balls)).

<Variation 11>
In the above embodiment, the value of the ceiling reach counter 81c displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated when the execution of the dynamic display of each special symbol in the "normal game state" is completed. Alternatively, it may be configured to be updated when the execution of the dynamic display of each special symbol begins.

<Modified example 12>
In the above embodiment, the variation pattern that can be selected when the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" is configured to allow for a variety of variation times, similar to the variation pattern that can be selected before reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, the variation pattern that can be selected when reaching the ceiling may be configured to be constant. By configuring it this way, the variation time when reaching the ceiling is fixed, and the ceiling arrival notification effect can be executed for a fixed period of time. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the variation effect of the first special symbol continues to be executed for a long time on the third symbol display device 81, even though the ceiling has been reached, such as when the ceiling is reached by the dynamic display of the second special symbol while a long-lasting miss or small win variation is being executed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

<Modification 13>
In the above embodiment, the machine is configured so that a win occurs 70/100 of the time in the low probability state of a normal symbol, and the normal electric motor 72 can be activated. Alternatively, the machine may be configured so that a win does not occur in the low probability state of a normal symbol, and a win occurs only in the high probability state of a normal symbol (for example, a 100% win rate). By configuring the machine in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the normal electric motor 72 from activating in the low probability state of a normal symbol and causing a ball to enter the lower second start port 71a. As a result, it is possible to reliably achieve gameplay as specified in the game specifications.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, one variable prize entry device 65 is configured to open during a jackpot game. Alternatively, multiple prize entry points that can be opened during a jackpot game may be provided, and these multiple entry points may be configured to open according to the type of jackpot or the type of minor win. By configuring it in this way, the interval time can be minimized and the duration of the jackpot game can be shortened by immediately opening the other variable prize entry device after the other variable prize entry device has closed.

<Modified example 15>
In the above embodiment, one variable display time for the regular symbols is provided for each game state. Alternatively, the variable display time for the regular symbols may be selected by lottery from multiple types of variable display times depending on the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state," the variable display time for the regular symbols is determined by lottery from "1 second,""3seconds,""5seconds,""10seconds," or "30 seconds." With this configuration, even in the "normal game state" where right-handed play is not encouraged, if a player plays right-handed, passes the ball through the through gate 67 to display the variable regular symbols, and fires the ball towards the regular electric prize 72 which can be opened according to the timing of its output, the opening timing of the lower second start port 71a will be multiple, thereby suppressing entry into the lower second start port 71a.

<Variation 16>
In the above embodiment, the winning combination is selected from among a big win (or a small win) or a loss in the drawing of the first special symbol, and the winning combination is also selected from among a big win (or a small win) or a loss in the drawing of the second special symbol. Alternatively, a small win may be provided only in the drawing of the first special symbol, and the winning combination may be selected from among a big win, a small win, or a loss; or a small win may be provided only in the drawing of the second special symbol, and the winning combination may be selected from among a big win, a small win, or a loss; or a small win may be provided in the drawing of either special symbol, and the winning combination may be selected from among a big win or a loss; or a small win may be provided in the drawing of either special symbol, and the winning combination may be selected from among a big win, a small win, or a loss.

<Variation 17>
In the above embodiment, the game state is configured to change (for example, from "probability fluctuation state" to "normal game state") depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Alternatively, the game state may be configured to change depending on the number of times a predetermined effect other than the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed (for example, "reach display" or a specific effect based on winning a specific role).

<Variation 18>
In the above embodiment, the number of reserved balls is counted for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation time and reach probability of each special symbol are changed according to the number of reserved balls for each. Alternatively, the variation time and reach probability of each special symbol may be changed according to the total number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modified example 19>
In the above embodiment, the ceiling reach notification effect is configured to be performed during the special symbol variation effect one round prior to reaching the "normal low probability time reduction state". Alternatively, the ceiling reach notification effect may be configured to be continuously executed from the special symbol variation effects multiple rounds prior to reaching the "normal low probability time reduction state" and across multiple special symbol variation effects.

In the above embodiment, the type of minor win in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, or the type of minor win in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, is configured to be one type each. Alternatively, the system may be configured to provide multiple types of minor wins for the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and/or the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the system may be configured to terminate the "time-saving function" differently depending on the type of minor win. This configuration allows for a richer variety of gameplay and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the special symbol variation animations recommended for each game state are executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, while the special symbol variation animations not recommended are not executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, the special symbol variation animations not recommended may be configured to be executed in a predetermined manner in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, the special symbol variation animations recommended may be executed conspicuously in the main display area Dm (central portion, large portion, larger area than the special symbol variation animations not recommended, with a darker symbol display), while the special symbol variation animations not recommended may be executed less conspicuously in the main display area Dm (corner, small portion, smaller area than the special symbol variation animations recommended, with a lighter symbol display). This configuration makes it possible for the third symbol display device 81 to grasp the execution patterns of multiple special symbol variation animations.

In the above embodiment, the dynamic display time of the first special symbol is configured to change according to the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display time of the second special symbol is configured to change according to the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the second special symbol. In other words, the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the second special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the number of balls held for the dynamic display of one special symbol may be configured to affect the dynamic display time of the other special symbol. Specifically, the dynamic display time of the first special symbol is configured to change according to the total number of balls held, which is the sum of the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the second special symbol. By configuring the game in this way, it becomes possible to select a unique variation time when the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of balls held for the dynamic display of the second special symbol are mixed, thereby enriching the game's variations and enhancing its appeal.

In the above embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6," thereby changing the probability of a big win and/or the probability of winning with the second symbol. However, the number of stages in which the probability setting value can be changed is not limited to six; it may be changed to any number of stages.

In the above embodiment, we described a case where the probability of hitting the jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value. However, it is also possible to change the probability of hitting a regular symbol or the probability of winning a minor prize.

Furthermore, if the probability setting value is determined to be outside the normal range during the startup process, it may be possible to forcibly set a specific probability setting value (e.g., "1") from the range of "1" to "6" as the probability setting value. However, if the probability setting value is determined to be outside the normal range during gameplay (e.g., during timer interrupt processing), it is preferable not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during gameplay.

In the above embodiment, the case in which the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum) was described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal or not, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range. If it is not within the normal range, a setting change process may be forcibly executed to have hall staff change the probability setting value, or hall staff may be prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or a specific probability setting value within the normal range may be forcibly set as the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM checksum was described, but the probability setting value may also be included in the calculation of the RAM checksum.

In the above embodiment, the probability setting value was described as being updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or the setting change switch when the pachinko machine 10 is started in "setting change mode." However, this can also be done using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 can be rotated from the ON state to a setting change position located in the opposite direction to the OFF side. When the setting key 501 is rotated to the setting change position, it is configured to automatically return to the ON state. The probability setting value is then updated each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the ON state to the setting change position. This also allows for easy modification of the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in "setting change mode," the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or by turning on the RAM erase switch 503. However, this can also be done by operating a separate switch, such as a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch that is operated during "setting change mode" to determine the probability setting value. It may be provided protruding from the main board through a hole in the circuit board box 100, allowing it to be operated by hall staff or others without opening the circuit board box 100. This also makes it easy to determine the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the startup mode is set according to the detection pattern of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 when starting up in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode". Alternatively, the startup mode may be configured to require at least the opening of the inner frame 12 as a condition, and to set the startup mode according to the detection pattern of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the hall can select whether or not to make the opening of the inner frame 12 a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was mounted on the main control device 110. Alternatively, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply unit 115 or the payout control device 111.

In the above embodiments, the setting key 501 was configured to allow changes to the probability of winning a jackpot, etc. In contrast, the setting key 501 may be configured to allow changes in multiple stages to settings related to the degree of advantage for the player, such as the number of prize balls dispensed when a ball enters one of the prize slots (for example, changing from 3 to 5 balls), the driving time (for example, changing from 3 seconds to 5 seconds) and driving width (for example, changing from 20 mm to 30 mm) of the movable mechanism that assists in entering the prize slots, or the inclination of a component that affects the ball's descent (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), or the inclination of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees).

In the embodiments described above, the keyhole of the setting key 501 was configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the orientation of the keyhole of the setting key 501 may be configured to face the side of the pachinko machine 10 (left or right), diagonally, or towards the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the random values for big wins, small wins, and losing spins were set as continuous values, allowing for range determination of whether it was a big win or a small win (for example, "0" or more and "49" or less), thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110. In contrast, the random values that assign game value (i.e., big win random values and small win random values) may be configured to be dispersed (dispersed) rather than arranged continuously. Specifically, for example, in the case of a big win random number counter C1 updated between "0" and "999", the big win random values may be "7, 341, 555, 777, 831", and the small win random values may be "77, 175, 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845".

Here, if there were a continuous stream of values that would result in a jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a jackpot if the value is between 0 and 50 in both low-probability and high-probability states), there is a possibility that these values could be predicted from the outside, increasing the likelihood of fraudulently winning a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring the machine as shown in the modified example above, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random value that assigns game value from the outside, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraud and improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in the modified example described above, the random jackpot values for the low-probability state and the high-probability state, as defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a, may be set so as not to result in overlapping values. By configuring it in this way, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot can be changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), making it difficult to predict the value of the random number that results in a jackpot, thereby improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 were updated by software processing such as timer interrupt handling (so-called software random number generation). Alternatively, the jackpot random number counter C1 and other counters may be updated using a random number generation IC with a faster update cycle than the software random number generation (so-called hardware random number generation). This configuration makes it difficult to ascertain the random number values being updated from the outside, thereby improving security performance.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random value was configured to increase uniformly with each increase in the set value. In contrast, the jackpot random value (or minor jackpot random value) may be configured to increase unevenly or at a predetermined rate with each increase in the set value. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random value could be increased by "2" for set values "1" through "3," while it could be increased by "5" for set values "4" through "6." This configuration significantly alters the game value that can be provided by the setting difference, allowing for a more dynamic and engaging gameplay experience and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the system was configured to change the corresponding role in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value. Alternatively, the system may be configured to change the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the minor win type counter (not shown) that determines the content of minor wins, thereby creating a difference in settings due to a change in the selection ratio of the jackpot type or minor win type.

In the above embodiment, the system was configured to change the random number value that assigns game value (i.e., the jackpot random number) when the settings were changed, and to compensate for this change from the random number value that does not assign game value (i.e., the losing random number). Alternatively, when the random number value that assigns game value (e.g., the jackpot random number) is changed in conjunction with a setting change, the system may be configured to compensate for this change from other random numbers that assign game value (e.g., the minor win random number). By configuring the system in this way, differences in the game value that can be assigned for each setting can be created, providing a more varied and engaging gameplay experience for each setting, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a were defined (set) so that they were in the order of "range of jackpot random numbers", "range of losing random numbers", and "range of minor jackpot random numbers". In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured so that the random numbers are defined (set) so that they are in the order of "range of jackpot random numbers", "range of minor jackpot random numbers", "range of jackpot random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "range of second jackpot random numbers")", and "range of losing random numbers". Here, the "range of second jackpot random numbers" is configured to correspond to the increase in jackpot random numbers due to the setting change. By configuring it in this way, the random numbers that increase due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in jackpot random numbers) are adjacent to the random numbers that decrease due to the setting difference (i.e., losing random numbers), and the range of random numbers that do not change due to the setting change (i.e., jackpot random numbers and minor jackpot random numbers that do not change even with a setting change) can be fixed. This allows, for example, a control program for determining whether a win or loss is achieved to standardize the basic win/loss determination of fixed random values across all settings, while also allowing for additional determination of the increase in the jackpot random value resulting from setting changes, according to the setting value. This simplifies the design of the control program and reduces development time.

In the above embodiment, the random number table 202a was configured such that each random number was set in the order of "range of random numbers for big wins," "range of random numbers for losing spins," and "range of random numbers for small wins." Alternatively, the random number table could be configured to set each random number in descending order of the number of random numbers (or in descending order of the number of random numbers).

In the above embodiment, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a were defined (set) so that they were in the order of "range of jackpot random numbers," "range of losing random numbers," and "range of minor jackpot random numbers." In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured so that the "range of jackpot random numbers," which increases with a change in settings, is adjacent to the random numbers that decrease with a change in settings (i.e., the "range of losing random numbers"). Specifically, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a are defined (set) so that they are in the order of "range of minor jackpot random numbers," "range of jackpot random numbers," and "range of losing random numbers." By configuring it in this way, the random numbers that increase due to the difference in settings (i.e., the increase in jackpot random numbers) are adjacent to the random numbers that decrease due to the difference in settings (i.e., losing random numbers), and the range of random numbers that do not change with a change in settings (i.e., minor jackpot random numbers) can be fixed. This allows, for example, a control program for determining whether a minor win occurs to standardize the determination of minor win random values across all settings, while also allowing for additional determination of the increase in major win random values resulting from setting changes, thereby simplifying the design of the control program and reducing development time.

In the above embodiment, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability variation state," the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols was increased (by more than double). Alternatively, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability variation state," the probability of hitting a minor jackpot with special symbols may be increased. Furthermore, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability variation state," the increase in the probability of hitting a jackpot with special symbols may be set to more than double (for example, 10 times). Additionally, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability variation state," both the jackpot probability and the minor jackpot probability may be increased (for example, the jackpot probability and the minor jackpot probability may both be increased by 5 times).

In the above embodiment, the probability of winning a minor prize with the first special symbol was configured to be the same as the probability of winning a minor prize with the second special symbol. Alternatively, the probability of winning a minor prize with the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than that with the second special symbol, or the probability of winning a minor prize with the first special symbol may be configured to be lower than that with the second special symbol.

In the above embodiment, the setting was configured so that a difference in the jackpot probability occurred in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state for special symbols. Alternatively, the setting may be configured so that the difference in the jackpot probability in one state (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated, while a difference in the jackpot probability is provided in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state).

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number was increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number was compensated for by the loss random number. Alternatively, the jackpot random number may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number may be compensated for by the minor win random number and the loss random number. With this configuration, the change in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change can be compensated for by both the minor win random number and the loss random number, eliminating the need to compensate for the change in the jackpot random number from a fixed predetermined random number of 1. Therefore, since it is no longer necessary to secure the predetermined number of random numbers from the change in the jackpot random number and the predetermined random number of 1, constraints during the design of the game specifications are eliminated, increasing the design freedom of the game specifications and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, a standard electric charger 72 is installed at the lower second start port 71a, and the flow of balls into the lower second start port 71a is configured to differ depending on the opening and closing mode of the standard electric charger 72. Alternatively, a standard electric charger 72 may be installed at the upper second start port 71, and the flow of balls into the upper second start port 71 may differ depending on the opening and closing mode of the standard electric charger 72. Or, a standard electric charger 72 may be installed at the first start port 64, and the flow of balls into the first start port 64 may differ depending on the opening and closing mode of the standard electric charger 72.

In the above embodiment, a standard electric motor 72 that displaces between a protruding state and a retracted state is used, and the gameplay of the present invention is realized by changing the retraction timing and retraction time of the standard electric motor 72 in each game state. Alternatively, a rotating wing member may be used, and the gameplay of the present invention may be realized by changing the operation timing and operation time of the wing member in each game state. Specifically, for example, wing members are arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower second start opening 71a, and when the wing member is in a non-operating state (for example, upright state), the ball collides with the outside (non-rolling side) of the wing member and flows downstream. On the other hand, when the wing member is in an operating state that has rotated (tilted 120 degrees to the right from the upright state), the ball collides with the inside (rolling side) of the wing member and rolls along the inside of the wing member toward the lower second start opening 71a. With this configuration, the rotational movement of the wing element is easier to recognize than that driven by the retraction and retraction of the ordinary electric motor 72, as the range of motion of the wing element itself is larger, making it easier for the player to recognize whether or not they have been driven. Therefore, it is easier for the player to recognize whether or not they have won using the variable display of the ordinary symbols.

The display mode and position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 may be configured to change according to the first or second special symbol that is being displayed in the main display area Dm. Specifically, for example, the fourth symbol display area 87 and 88 corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in the main display area Dm may be positioned higher, displayed with Arabic numerals, or displayed in red, while the fourth symbol display area 88 and 87 that is not being displayed may be positioned lower, displayed with different notation than the Arabic numerals (e.g., Chinese numerals or Roman numerals), or displayed in a different color than red (e.g., blue). This configuration allows for the identification and display of the currently displayed variation, while making it difficult to recognize which special symbol is being displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the current game state, creating a gameplay element that encourages guessing the game state and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, instead of automatically outputting the alarm every time a ball passes through the through gate 67 in a game state where left-handed play is recommended, the system may be configured to output the alarm sound only when specific conditions are met. Specifically, for example, by configuring it in this way, the alarm sound can be output only in response to malicious players attempting to obtain more balls than the game's specifications dictate, while not outputting the alarm sound for well-intentioned right-handed play by inexperienced players or those making operational errors. This suppresses fraudulent play while also preventing a decline in players' motivation to play, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The probability of winning with a regular symbol may be configured to be approximately the same in all game states. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "reduced regular symbol high probability time state," where the probability of a special symbol jackpot is low, the probability of a regular symbol jackpot may be set to 50/100. Conversely, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state," where the probability of a special symbol jackpot is high, the probability of a regular symbol jackpot may be set to 50/100 or 51/100, etc., to be the same as or approximately the same as the probability of a regular symbol jackpot in the "normal game state," etc. By configuring it this way, regarding the opening of the regular electric payout mechanism 72 based on a regular symbol win, it becomes possible to calculate the payout rate, etc., without considering the probability of a regular symbol jackpot, by taking into account the variable display time of the regular symbol and the opening time of the regular electric payout mechanism 72, thereby simplifying the design of game specifications for each game state.

The system may be configured so that the set of special symbol variation patterns (variation times) selected after the jackpot differs depending on the winning symbol. Specifically, for example, among the winning symbols 1, 3, 5, and 7, which can generate a "probability variation state," if the win is with symbol 1, the system is configured to transition to a "double long variation probability variation state" in which both the first and second special symbols are more likely to have relatively long variation times during the "probability variation state." If the win is with symbol 3, the system is configured to transition to a "special 1 long special 2 short variation probability variation state" in which the first special symbol is more likely to have a relatively long variation time during the "probability variation state," while the second special symbol is more likely to have a relatively short variation time. Furthermore, if the win is with symbol 5, the system is configured to transition to a "double short variation probability variation state" in which both the first and second special symbols are more likely to have relatively short variation times during the "probability variation state." Furthermore, when the 7 symbol is drawn, the game transitions to a "probability variation state" where the first special symbol is more likely to have a relatively short variation time, while the second special symbol is more likely to have a relatively long variation time. This configuration allows the game to differentiate the special symbols that may appear first in the post-jackpot game state depending on the type of winning symbol. For example, the probability of a jackpot appearing first can be varied depending on which special symbol stops first in each game state. Therefore, the game offers greater variety and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The special symbol's variation patterns (variation times) may be configured to differ based on the number of times the special symbol has varied. Specifically, for example, in a "latent probability variation state," the special symbol variation animations from the 1st to the 10th time after a big win may be configured to have relatively longer variation times, while the special symbol variation animations from the 11th time onward may be configured to have relatively shorter variation times. This configuration allows for greater variety in gameplay and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Multiple types of winning combinations for regular symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, a single-opening win where the regular electric symbol 72 opens once, a triple-opening win where the retractable plate 72a opens three times, and a triple-long-opening win where the regular electric symbol 72 opens three times for an extended period could be provided. This configuration enriches the gameplay variations in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "regular symbol high probability time reduction state," thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the game states were arranged in the following order from most advantageous to the player: "normal game state" → "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" → "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" → "probability fluctuation state" → "latent probability fluctuation state". In contrast, the game specifications may be set so that "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "probability fluctuation state" are positioned as game states that are less advantageous to the player than the "normal game state". Specifically, for example, the starting port for the first special symbol may be set upstream of the starting port for the second special symbol, which is equipped with a normal electric motor 72. In the "normal game state", the normal electric motor 72 is less likely to operate, making it easier for the player to receive a chance to draw the first special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", the normal electric motor 72 is more likely to operate, making it easier for the player to receive a chance to draw the second special symbol, which is less advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. By structuring the game in this way, the variety of gameplay can be increased, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The display position of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed when a right-handed play suggestion display appears. Specifically, in "normal gameplay" states where left-handed play is encouraged, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right sub-display area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds. Conversely, in "probability fluctuation states" states where right-handed play is encouraged, the right-handed play suggestion display is displayed in the right sub-display area Ds3, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left sub-display area Ds1. This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize the game specifications according to the game state.

In the above embodiment, with regard to the dynamic display of multiple special symbols that can be executed simultaneously, the system is configured to perform special symbol variation effects that are encouraged according to the game state in the main display area Dm, and to not perform special symbol variation effects that are not encouraged in the main display area Dm. In contrast, with regard to the effects of multiple symbols (for example, special symbols and regular symbols) that can be executed simultaneously, a priority order for the effects to be executed may be set in advance according to the game state, game specifications, the game value to be assigned, or the execution frequency, and effects according to the priority order may be executed preferentially. For effects with a lower priority, the scale of the effect may be reduced or the effect itself may not be executed, so that it is more difficult for the player to recognize compared to effects with a higher priority. Specifically, when the variation effect for the first special symbol is being executed in the main display area Dm, the variation display effects for ordinary symbols, which have a lower potential game value to the player than the first special symbol, may be omitted or displayed at a reduced scale by the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output device 226. Similarly, when the variation effect for the second special symbol is being executed in the main display area Dm, the variation display effects for ordinary symbols, which have a lower potential game value to the player than the second special symbol, may be omitted or displayed at a reduced scale by the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output device 226. This configuration allows for the execution of effects that players should be aware of while playing, while reducing (or eliminating) the scale of lower-priority effects, thus ensuring that players do not find the effects bothersome.

In the above embodiment, commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113, and the sound lamp control unit 113 then issues display instructions to the display control unit 114. However, commands may also be transmitted directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114. Alternatively, the sound lamp control unit may be connected to the display control unit, and the display control unit may be configured to transmit commands to the sound lamp control unit instructing the output of each sound and the illumination of the lamps. Furthermore, the sound lamp control unit and the display control unit may be configured as a single control unit. By combining these into a single control unit, the number of parts can be reduced, thereby suppressing the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine.

In the above embodiment, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 described a case where the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON when any stop type command is received. However, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may also be set to ON when each fluctuation pattern command is received and then the corresponding stop type command is received. This prevents the execution of abnormal fluctuation effects when no fluctuation pattern commands are received but any stop type command is received.

Furthermore, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON at the time each fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, the fluctuation effect processing (S1110) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 may generate a display fluctuation pattern command to notify the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by each fluctuation pattern command, based on the fact that each fluctuation start flag 223a and 223b has been set to ON, and send it to the display control device 114. This allows the sound lamp control device 113 to execute each fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on these display fluctuation pattern commands without waiting for the reception of each stop type command. In this case, the sound lamp control device 113 may generate a display stop type command to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the time each stop type command is received, and send it to the display control device 114. Furthermore, the display control device 114 may determine the stopping symbol for the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the demo display may consist of a third symbol consisting of main symbols without the numbers "0" through "9" attached, displayed in a stationary state. Alternatively, the third symbol consisting of main symbols with or without numbers attached may be displayed in a semi-transparent state. Furthermore, the third symbol may not be displayed at all, and only the background image may change. Additionally, a character or background image completely different from the third symbol or background image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) may be executed using the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided, and the continuous予告演出 may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device in conjunction with the variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Furthermore, a mechanism that operates according to various effects may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the continuous予告演出 may be executed by operating this mechanism in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variation effect. Also, the continuous予告演出 may be executed by outputting sound for the continuous予告演出 from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, or by lighting or flashing the illuminated parts 29-33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variation effect.

This allows the player to anticipate a big win by having symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or by having the special symbol display device operate in a predetermined manner, or by having the sound output device 226 output sound, or by having the illuminated parts 29-33 light up or flash each time a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37). Furthermore, while the player normally focuses on the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, the continuous notification effect is easily recognized by the player as an unusual effect occurring through the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device (separate from the third symbol display device 81), the operation of the special effect device, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/flashing of the illuminated parts 29-33. Moreover, the continuous notification effect can be easily controlled through simple actions such as the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the special effect device, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/flashing of the illuminated parts 29-33.

Furthermore, if the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is performed by sound output from the sound output device 226 or by the lighting or flashing of the illuminated sections 29-33, the control of the continuous予告演出 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, by having the main control device 110 perform the win/loss determination at the start of a winning combination and the lottery processing at the start of a variation, the continuous予告演出 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation is performed by the display control device 114, the processing can be distributed among the various control devices when the pachinko machine 10 performs a continuous予告演出. This prevents the load from concentrating on a single control device, thus reducing the performance requirements for the MPUs of each control device.

Furthermore, the continuous予告演出 (continuous予告演出) may be executed by combining at least two of the following: the display of symbols for the continuous予告演出 on the third symbol display device 81, the display of symbols for the continuous予告演出 on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the mechanical device in a predetermined manner, the sound output from the sound output device 226, and the lighting or flashing of the illuminated sections 29-33, and controlling them in conjunction with each other. This allows for the execution of a wider variety of continuous予告演出. Additionally, by changing the method of executing the continuous予告演出 (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the mechanical device, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or flashing of the illuminated sections 29-33, or a combination thereof), multiple modes of continuous予告演出 may be provided, selected according to the game state after the completion of the continuous予告演出.

Furthermore, when a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) is performed, a separate image for the continuous予告演出, distinct from the one used for the reel spinning animation, may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, the continuous予告演出 may be performed by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols, a so-called "chance symbol," as the stop symbol displayed when the reel spinning animation ends. In this case, when the command judgment process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114 detects the reception of a continuous予告 command, it may be configured to turn on the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance symbol and turn off other stop symbol discrimination flags. Since the command judgment process executes the processing corresponding to the continuous予告 command within the other command processing after the stop identification command processing, the chance symbol is set as the stop symbol instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance symbol can be confirmed and displayed when the reel spinning stops. And, if the chance symbol is displayed consecutively as the stop symbol for each reel spinning animation on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be given the expectation that they will ultimately win a jackpot.

In the above embodiment, when the main control device 110 receives a prize (start prize) in the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, it sends a reserved ball count command to the voice lamp control device 113 that adds "1" to the reserved ball count. This command includes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in connection with the start prize. However, the types of counters to include in the reserved ball count command may be only a portion of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or other counter values may be included. Furthermore, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in connection with the start prize, instead of including information indicating the values of each counter in the reserved ball count command, the information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a separate command from the reserved ball count command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, the command could be a dedicated command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired upon a starting win, or the values of each counter acquired upon a starting win could be added to commands for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of other information, such as variation pattern commands or stop symbol commands. When notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired upon a starting win using an alternative command, the command may include information indicating which variation effect corresponds to which number of hold counts the notified counter values relate to. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to store the values of each counter included in the command in one of the pre-read information areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of hold counts, based on the information regarding the number of hold counts included in the command.

In the above embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, it may store the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the reserved ball count command directly into the RAM 223. Alternatively, when the reserved ball count command (or a command indicating the values of each counter) is received, the device may determine, based on the values of each counter indicated by the command, whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, the type of loss if it is a loss, etc., and store these determination results in the RAM 223 either in place of, or together with, some or all of, the values of each counter indicated by the command.

In the above embodiment, the entry into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, and the passage through the through gate 67 are each configured to be held for a maximum of four times. However, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or fewer times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, the maximum number of held balls may be set separately for each start port for entry into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, and the maximum number of held balls at each start port may be any number other than "4". Also, the maximum number of held balls at each start port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed based on winnings in the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a, may be displayed numerically or in four divided areas, each with a different pattern (e.g., color or lighting pattern) corresponding to the number of reserved balls, on a part of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by this light-emitting element.

Furthermore, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbols as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but may also be performed by moving and displaying the symbols horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Also, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, but also includes, for example, performance displays in which one or more characters are displayed in various ways, either together with the symbols or separately from the symbols. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbols.

In the embodiments described above, when a variation effect is performed, a high-speed variation is displayed in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll at a speed that makes them invisible to the player. However, instead of this high-speed variation display, all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed at a scale that makes them invisible, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image with many white dots displayed randomly.

The present invention may be implemented in pachinko machines and the like of a different type than those described in the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a "two-prize machine" or "three-prize machine") in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (e.g., two or three times), including the initial jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that, after a jackpot symbol is displayed, generates a special game that grants the player a predetermined game value, provided that the ball enters a predetermined area. Furthermore, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine having a prize-winning device with a special area such as a V-zone, where entering the ball into that special area is required to enter a special game state. In addition, it may be implemented as various types of gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as Arepachi, Mahjong Ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines.

Slot machines are well-known machines where, for example, coins are inserted to determine the winning lines, and the symbols change when the operating lever is operated. The symbols then stop and are finalized when the stop button is operated. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is: "A display device equipped with a variable display of identification information consisting of multiple identification pieces, followed by a final display of the identification information. The variable display of identification information begins when a starting operation means (e.g., the operating lever) is operated, and stops and finalizes when a stopping operation means (e.g., the stop button) is operated, or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game is generated that grants the player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of stopping is specific." In this case, typical game media include coins and tokens.

In slot machines, the payout ratio is the ratio of the number of game tokens (coins, medals) paid out through bonuses (prizes) to the total number of game tokens paid out during a predetermined period. Therefore, instead of a payout table, the number of game tokens paid out when each prize combination is achieved may be stored in the ROM of the main control unit. A prize ratio management chip or a control unit performing equivalent functions may then count the number of prize combinations achieved during non-bonus game periods (normal periods) (symbols aligning on active lines), the number of prize combinations achieved during bonus game periods, and the number of prize combinations achieved during AT periods to manage the prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio.

Furthermore, a specific example of a gaming machine that combines pachinko and slot machines is one equipped with a display device that shows a sequence of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the final symbol, but without a handle for launching balls. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are inserted based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbols begin to change, for example due to the operation of the control lever, and the symbols stop changing, for example due to the operation of the stop button, or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game is triggered that grants the player a predetermined gaming value, provided that the final symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and a large number of balls are dispensed into the tray below. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can treat only the balls as the gaming value, thus eliminating the problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on equipment and the constraints on the placement of gaming machines due to the separate handling of tokens and balls, which represent the gaming value.

The following describes the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention. Note that the concepts of the various inventions described below may be constructed by modifying the concept of an invention by adding some or more components of the concepts of other inventions to that invention's concept, or by replacing some or more components of the concepts of other inventions with those components.

<Group A: No specific animation is performed during the animation indicating the game result>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group A were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, an audio lamp control device 113 or a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
The aforementioned predetermined performance execution means is
A means for executing a suggestion effect that can perform a game result suggestion effect (for example, a special symbol variation effect) that can suggest the game result to the player,
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a performance-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f)) whose occurrence conditions differ from the aforementioned game result suggestion performance,
If the conditions for initiating the specific performance are met during the execution of the aforementioned game result indication performance, a continuation means for continuing the game result indication performance (for example, continuing the special symbol variation performance) is provided,
When the conditions for initiating the specific performance are met during the execution of the game result indication performance, the system includes, at a minimum, a specific performance waiting means that causes the start of the specific performance to wait while the game result indication performance is being executed (for example, waiting for a performance right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f) during a special symbol variation performance),
The aforementioned specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine A0 is characterized in that the specific performance, which is waiting to be started by the specific performance waiting means, is configured to be executable at least on the condition that the game result suggestion performance has finished.

According to gaming machine A0, the gaming machine comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing predetermined performances on a display means, wherein the predetermined performance execution means comprises: suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a game result suggestion performance capable of suggesting the game result to the player; specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance with different occurrence conditions from the game result suggestion performance; continuation means for continuing the game result suggestion performance when occurrence conditions that allow the specific performance to be started are met during the execution of the game result suggestion performance; and specific performance waiting means for the start of the specific performance to be waited for at least during the execution of the game result suggestion performance, wherein the specific performance execution means is configured to execute the specific performance, which is being waited for to be started by the specific performance waiting means, at least on the condition that the game result suggestion performance has ended. This allows the game to wait for the start of a specific event to begin even if the conditions for initiating a specific event are met while a game result indication event is running. This allows players to enjoy the ongoing game result indication event without losing focus, thus enhancing its appeal. Furthermore, since the specific event can be executed after the game result indication event has finished, players can recognize the content of the specific event without any sense of incongruity, effectively increasing their attention to the game.

In gaming machine A0,
The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a related performance execution means that, when the start of the specific performance is waiting by the specific performance waiting means, executes a related performance (for example, a right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c or a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89) that can suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance.

According to gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a related performance execution means that, when the start of the specific performance is waiting via the specific performance waiting means, executes a related performance that can suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance. This allows the related performance to suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance, even if the conditions for the occurrence of the specific performance are met and the specific performance is waiting during the execution of the game result suggestion performance. Therefore, even if the conditions for starting the specific performance are met during the execution of the game result suggestion performance, the start of the specific performance can be put on hold (suspended), allowing the player to enjoy the ongoing game result suggestion performance without losing focus. Furthermore, the related performance makes the player aware that the start of the specific performance is waiting, and the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the game result suggestion performance ends, allowing the player to recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The aforementioned specific performance is,
Game machine A2 is characterized by a presentation that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 or A1, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the aforementioned specific effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state may change. This allows the system to be configured to wait for the player to be informed that the game state may change while the game result suggestion effect is running, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the running game result suggestion effect and enhancing the enjoyment of the effect. Furthermore, by subsequently suggesting to the player that the game state may change through the specific effect, the system can ensure that the player accurately understands the content of the game.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
Game machine A3 is characterized in that it performs the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance in the display means.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means executes the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance on the display means. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance through the related performance, even when the conditions for the occurrence of the specific performance are met and the specific performance is waiting to be performed during the execution of the game result suggestion performance. Therefore, even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are met during the execution of the game result suggestion performance, the specific performance is not immediately performed. Instead, the related performance is executed in a less conspicuous manner than the specific performance, allowing the player to enjoy the ongoing game result suggestion performance without losing focus. Furthermore, by executing the related performance in a less conspicuous manner in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance, it is possible to make the player aware that the start of the specific performance is waiting, thereby allowing the player to accurately understand the content of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
The gaming machine A4 is characterized by having related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue to be performed even while the specific performance is being performed (for example, simultaneously displaying a performance right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f) and a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 on the third symbol display device 81).

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means includes a related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue execution even while the specific performance is being executed. This allows the player to accurately perceive the content of the game through the specific performance and related performance. Furthermore, by continuously displaying the related performance regardless of whether the specific performance is being executed, the need to control whether or not to execute the related performance based on the execution status of the specific performance is eliminated, thereby reducing the control burden.

In gaming machines A0 to A4,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) that enables the execution of the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is met,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) that enables the execution of a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) when a second condition different from the first condition is met,
The system includes a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of Figure 1 and Figure 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time,
The aforementioned suggestive presentation execution means is
Game machine A5 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the game result suggestion performance.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 to A4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is met, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is met, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestion performance execution means is configured to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the game result suggestion performance. This allows the start of a specific performance to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating a specific performance are met during a game result indication performance that is being executed based on the success of the first or second lottery. This allows the player to enjoy the ongoing game result indication performance without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game result indication performance. Furthermore, since the specific performance can be executed after the execution of the game result indication performance has finished, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A5,
At a minimum, the game state is changeable between a first game state (for example, a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), and a game state transition means (for example, a time reduction low probability flag 203n),
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed play) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed play),
The aforementioned specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, as the aforementioned specific performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 to A5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises at least a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a launching means capable of launching a game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode, and the specific performance execution means executes a performance as the specific performance that can suggest to the player that they switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. As a result, even if the conditions for initiating a specific performance that can suggest to the player that they switch the launching mode by the launching means are met during the execution of a game result suggestion performance, the start of the specific performance can be postponed, allowing the player to enjoy the game result suggestion performance in progress without losing attention, and by suggesting to the player that they switch the launching mode when the execution of the game result suggestion performance ends, the player can switch the launching mode without feeling any discomfort.

In gaming machine A6,
The gaming machine A7 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine A6 or A7,
The system includes a counting means (for example, a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine A8 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are achieved: namely, it is equipped with a counting means capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed, and the game state transition means is equipped with a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times has been counted by the counting means in the first game state. This allows the game to wait (suspend) the start of a specific performance that suggests the transition to the second game state, even if, for example, the counting result of the other (second or first) lottery reaches a predetermined number of times during a game result suggestion performance, without the player losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery. This enhances the enjoyment of the game result suggestion performance, and since the specific performance can be executed after the game result suggestion performance has finished, the player can recognize the transition to the second game state without any sense of incongruity.

<Group B: No specific effects are performed during the display of indicators that suggest the state of the game.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of playing them, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group B were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, an audio lamp control device 113 or a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
The aforementioned predetermined performance execution means is
An indication display execution means capable of displaying indications that can suggest the status of the game to the player (for example, a special symbol variation effect),
A specific performance execution means capable of displaying a specific performance (for example, a right-hand hitting instruction 81d (text message 81f) for performance) with different display conditions from the aforementioned suggestion display,
The aforementioned suggestion display is provided by a predetermined period display means (e.g., a variation pattern command) that can display the suggestion for at least a predetermined period.
A means for terminating the suggestion display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a confirmation command),
If the display conditions that allow the specific performance to be started are met within the predetermined period, the system includes, at least, a means for not starting the specific performance during the predetermined period (for example, not starting the performance right-hand-shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f) during the variation performance of the first special symbol),
The aforementioned specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine B0 is characterized in that, when the suggestion display is terminated by the suggestion display termination means, the machine is configured to execute the specific performance if the conditions for executing the specific performance are met.

According to gaming machine B0, the gaming machine comprises an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance on a display means, wherein the predetermined performance execution means comprises a suggestion display execution means capable of displaying a suggestion display capable of suggesting the status of the game to the player, a specific performance execution means capable of displaying a specific performance with display conditions different from the suggestion display, a predetermined period display means capable of displaying the suggestion display for at least a predetermined period, a suggestion display termination means for terminating the suggestion display after the predetermined period has elapsed, and a specific performance non-start means that, if display conditions that allow the specific performance to be started are met within the predetermined period, does not start the specific performance for at least the predetermined period, wherein the specific performance execution means is configured to execute the specific performance if the execution conditions for the specific performance are met when the suggestion display is terminated by the suggestion display termination means. This allows the game to prevent the initiation of a specific animation even if the conditions for starting that animation are met while the suggestion display is running. This ensures that the player can clearly recognize the content of the suggestion display and understand the game's content. Furthermore, since the specific animation can be executed only after the suggestion display ends, the player can recognize the content of the animation without any sense of incongruity, effectively increasing their attention to the game.

In gaming machine B0,
The aforementioned suggestion display execution means is
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that, when a predetermined condition different from the execution condition is met, the suggestion display with a fixed execution time (for example, "60 seconds") can be executed.

According to gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B0, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the suggestion display execution means is configured to execute the suggestion display with a fixed execution time when predetermined conditions different from the execution conditions are met. This allows for a fixed execution time for the suggestion display executed when predetermined conditions different from the execution conditions for a specific performance are met. If the execution conditions for a specific performance are met while the suggestion display is being executed for the fixed execution time, the specific performance cannot be started. This allows the player to clearly recognize the content of the suggestion display during the fixed execution time, enabling them to clearly grasp the content of the game. Furthermore, since the specific performance can be executed when the suggestion display with the fixed execution time ends, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity, effectively increasing their attention to the game.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
The gaming machine B2 is characterized by having related performance execution means that, when the specific performance has not been started by the specific performance non-starting means, can execute related performances (for example, a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89) that can suggest to the player a game situation related to the specific performance.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B0 or B1, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a related performance execution means capable of executing a related performance that can suggest to the player a game situation related to the specific performance, even when the specific performance has not been initiated by the specific performance non-initiation means. This allows the related performance to suggest to the player a game situation related to the specific performance, even if the display conditions for the specific performance are met but the specific performance has not been initiated while the suggestion display is being shown. Therefore, even if the conditions for initiating the specific performance are met while the suggestion display is being shown, the start of the specific performance can be put on hold (suspended), allowing the player to clearly recognize the content without losing attention to the suggestion display. Furthermore, the related performance makes the player aware that the start of the specific performance is on hold. Since the specific performance can be executed when the suggestion display ends, while the player is aware that the specific performance is on hold, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B2,
The aforementioned specific performance is,
Game machine B3 is characterized by a presentation that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, the aforementioned specific effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state is changing. This allows the system to be configured to wait for the suggestion display to indicate to the player that the game state may change while the suggestion display is being shown. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the suggestion display during its display, allowing them to clearly understand the content of the suggestion display. Furthermore, the subsequent specific effect can suggest to the player that the game state may change, thus allowing the player to accurately understand the content of the game.

In gaming machine B2 or B3,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
Game machine B4 characterized in that it performs the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance in the display means.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B2 or B3, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means executes the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance on the display means. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance through the related performance, even when the conditions for the occurrence of the specific performance are met and the specific performance is waiting to be performed during the execution of the game result suggestion performance. Therefore, even if the conditions for starting the specific performance are met while the suggestion display is being shown, the specific performance is not performed immediately. Instead, the related performance is executed in a less conspicuous manner than the specific performance, allowing the player to recognize the content of the suggestion display without it being obstructed. Furthermore, by executing the related performance in a less conspicuous manner in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance, it is possible to make the player aware that the start of the specific performance is waiting, thus allowing the player to recognize that the specific performance is waiting and to accurately understand the content of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
The gaming machine B5 is characterized by having related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue to be performed even while the specific performance is being performed (for example, simultaneously displaying a performance right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f) and a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 on the third symbol display device 81).

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means includes a related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue execution even while the specific performance is being executed. This allows the player to accurately perceive the content of the game through the specific performance and related performance. Furthermore, by continuously displaying the related performance regardless of whether the specific performance is being executed, the need to control whether or not to execute the related performance based on the execution status of the specific performance is eliminated, thereby reducing the control burden.

In gaming machines B0 to B5,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) that enables the execution of the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is met,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) that enables the execution of a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) when a second condition different from the first condition is met,
The system includes a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of Figure 1 and Figure 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time,
The aforementioned suggestion display execution means is
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the result of the first lottery or the second lottery in the suggestion display.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B0 to BA3, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is met, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is met, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestion display execution means is configured to suggest to the player the result of the first lottery or the second lottery in the suggestion display. As a result, even if the conditions for starting a specific performance are met during the suggestion display which is being executed based on the success of the first lottery or the second lottery, the start of the specific performance can be postponed, and the player can enjoy the suggestion display in progress without losing attention to what the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, thereby improving the interest of the suggestion display. Furthermore, since the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the suggestion display is completed, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machines B0 to B6,
At a minimum, the game state is changeable between a first game state (for example, a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), and a game state transition means (for example, a time reduction low probability flag 203n),
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed play) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed play),
The aforementioned specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that, as the aforementioned specific performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B0 to B6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises at least a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a launching means capable of launching the game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The specific performance execution means executes a performance as the specific performance that suggests to the player that they switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. This allows the start of the specific performance to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating a specific performance that suggests to the player that they switch the launching mode by the launching means are met while the suggestion display is being shown. Furthermore, by suggesting a switch in the launching mode to the player when the execution of the suggestion display ends, the player can switch the launching mode without feeling any discomfort.

In gaming machine B7,
The gaming machine B8 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine B7 or B8,
The system includes a counting means (for example, a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine B9 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are achieved: namely, it is equipped with a counting means capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed, and the game state transition means is equipped with a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times has been counted by the counting means in the first game state. This allows the start of a specific animation that suggests the transition to the second game state to the second game state to be withheld, even if, for example, the counting result of the other (second or first) lottery reaches a predetermined number of times during the suggestive display that is executed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state. This allows the player to fully enjoy the suggestive display without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the suggestive display. Furthermore, since the specific animation can be executed after the suggestive display has finished, the player can recognize the transition to the second game state without any sense of incongruity.

<Group C: No specific animation is performed during the animation indicating the game result>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group C were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine comprising a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
The aforementioned predetermined performance execution means is
At a minimum, the system includes a means for continuing a game result suggestion animation that can hint at the game result to the player until the trigger for the execution of a predetermined event (for example, the reception of a confirmation command), and a means for continuing a game result suggestion animation that can hint at the game result to the player (for example, executing a variation animation corresponding to a variation pattern command).
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a performance-oriented right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f)) that can suggest to the player the occurrence of a predetermined game state (for example, a "normal low probability time reduction state"),
Even if the conditions for occurrence that can suggest to the player that the specific performance will occur (for example, reaching the ceiling) are met during the execution of the aforementioned game result suggestion performance, the system includes a means for not starting the performance during the execution of the aforementioned game result suggestion performance (for example, not starting the performance right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f) during the first special symbol variation performance),
The aforementioned specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine C0 is characterized by having a switching means (for example, switching from the game result suggestion effect to the specific effect) when the trigger for the execution of the predetermined event arrives.

According to the gaming machine C0, the gaming machine comprises an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance on a display means, wherein the predetermined performance execution means comprises at least a performance continuation means for continuing a game result suggestion performance capable of suggesting the game result to the player until the trigger for the execution of a predetermined event, a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance capable of suggesting the occurrence of a predetermined game state to the player, and a performance non-start means for not starting the specific performance while the game result suggestion performance is being executed, even if the occurrence conditions that can suggest to the player that the specific performance will occur are met during the execution of the game result suggestion performance, and the specific performance execution means comprises a switching means for switching from the game result suggestion performance to the specific performance when the trigger for the execution of the predetermined event arrives. This allows the system to prevent the initiation of a specific event even if the conditions for triggering a particular event are met during the execution of a game result indication event. This allows players to fully enjoy the ongoing game result indication event without losing focus, enhancing its appeal. Furthermore, after the trigger for a predetermined event occurs, the system can switch to executing the specific event, allowing players to recognize the content of the specific event without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine C0,
The game includes a game state means capable of generating a normal game state (for example, a "normal game state") that is different from the predetermined game state,
The aforementioned predetermined game state is,
The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

According to gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C0, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it is equipped with a game state means capable of generating a normal game state different from the predetermined game state, where the predetermined game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. This allows the game to prevent the initiation of a specific performance that suggests to the player that a predetermined game state (more advantageous to the player than the normal game state) will occur, even when the conditions for initiating such a performance are met during the execution of a game result suggestion performance. This allows the player to enjoy the ongoing game result suggestion performance without losing focus, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the performance. Furthermore, after the trigger for the predetermined event occurs, switching to the specific performance suggests to the player that a predetermined game state advantageous to the player will occur, allowing the player to recognize the occurrence of the predetermined game state without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine C0 or C1,
It includes detection means (for example, a first start switch) capable of detecting a game medium passing through a predetermined area,
The aforementioned predetermined event is,
The gaming machine C2 is characterized by an event that occurs as a result of the detection of a gaming medium by the aforementioned detection means.

According to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machines C0 or C1, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it is equipped with detection means capable of detecting a game medium passing through a predetermined area, and the predetermined event is an event that occurs when the game medium is detected by the detection means. This allows the game machine to prevent the initiation of a specific event even when the conditions for initiating a specific event are met during the execution of a game result indication event. This allows the player to enjoy the ongoing game result indication event without losing focus, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the event. Furthermore, after the event triggered by the detection of the game medium passing through the predetermined area occurs, the game machine can switch to executing the specific event, allowing the player to recognize the content of the specific event without any sense of incongruity.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C2,
The gaming machine C3 is characterized by having a related performance execution means that, when the specific performance has not been started by the performance non-start means, executes a related performance (for example, a right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c or a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89) that can suggest to the player a game situation related to the specific performance.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a related performance execution means that, when the specific performance has not been started by the performance non-start means, executes a related performance that can suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance. This allows the related performance to suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance, even if the conditions for starting the specific performance are met but the specific performance has not started during the execution of the game result suggestion performance. Therefore, even if the conditions for starting the specific performance are met during the execution of the game result suggestion performance, the specific performance can not be started, allowing the player to enjoy the ongoing game result suggestion performance without losing focus. Furthermore, the related performance makes the player aware that the start of the specific performance is pending. Since the specific performance can be executed after the execution of the game result suggestion performance has finished, while the player is aware that the specific performance is pending, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C3,
The aforementioned specific performance is,
Game machine C4 is characterized by a presentation that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C0 to C3, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, the aforementioned specific effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state may change. This allows the system to be configured to wait for the player to be informed that the game state may change while the game result suggestion effect is running, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the running game result suggestion effect and enhancing the enjoyment of the effect. Furthermore, by subsequently suggesting to the player that the game state may change through the specific effect, the system can ensure that the player accurately understands the content of the game.

In gaming machine C3 or C4,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
Game machine C5 is characterized in that it performs the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance in the display means.

According to gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C3 or C4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means executes the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance on the display means. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the game situation related to the specific performance through the related performance, even when the conditions for the occurrence of the specific performance are met and the specific performance is waiting to be performed during the execution of the game result suggestion performance. Therefore, even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are met during the execution of the game result suggestion performance, the specific performance is not immediately performed. Instead, the related performance is executed in a less conspicuous manner than the specific performance, allowing the player to enjoy the ongoing game result suggestion performance without losing focus. Furthermore, by executing the related performance in a less conspicuous manner in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific performance, it is possible to make the player aware that the start of the specific performance is waiting, thereby allowing the player to accurately understand the content of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
The gaming machine C6 is characterized by having a related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue to be performed even while the specific performance is being performed (for example, simultaneously displaying a performance right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f) and a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 on the third symbol display device 81).

According to gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C3 to C5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means includes a related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue execution even while the specific performance is being executed. This allows the player to accurately perceive the content of the game through the specific performance and the related performance. Furthermore, by continuously displaying the related performance regardless of whether the specific performance is being executed, the need to control whether or not to execute the related performance based on the execution status of the specific performance is eliminated, thereby reducing the control burden.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C6,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) that enables the execution of the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is met,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) that enables the execution of a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) when a second condition different from the first condition is met,
The system includes a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of Figure 1 and Figure 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time,
The aforementioned suggestive presentation execution means is
The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the game result suggestion performance.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C0 to C6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is met, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is met, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestion performance execution means is configured to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the game result suggestion performance. This allows the start of a specific performance to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating a specific performance are met during a game result indication performance that is being executed based on the success of the first or second lottery. This allows the player to enjoy the ongoing game result indication performance without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game result indication performance. Furthermore, since the specific performance can be executed after the execution of the game result indication performance has finished, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C7,
At a minimum, the game state is changeable between a first game state (for example, a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), and a game state transition means (for example, a time reduction low probability flag 203n),
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed play) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed play),
The aforementioned specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, as the aforementioned specific performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C0 to C7, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises at least a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing a game medium in a first firing mode and a second firing mode different from the first firing mode, and the specific performance execution means executes a performance as the specific performance that can suggest to the player that they switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. As a result, even if the conditions for initiating a specific performance that can suggest to the player that they switch firing modes by the firing means are met during the execution of a game result suggestion performance, the start of the specific performance can be postponed, allowing the player to enjoy the game result suggestion performance in progress without losing attention, and by suggesting to the player that they switch firing modes when the execution of the game result suggestion performance ends, the player can switch firing modes without feeling any discomfort.

In the gaming machine C8,
The gaming machine C9 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to left-handed firing").

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C8, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine C8 or C9,
The system includes a counting means (for example, a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine C10 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C8 or C9, the following effects are achieved: namely, it is equipped with a counting means capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed, and the gaming state transition means is equipped with a second gaming state transition means that, in the first gaming state, can transition to the second gaming state when a predetermined number of times has been counted by the counting means. This allows the game to wait (suspend) the start of a specific performance that suggests the transition to the second game state, even if, for example, the counting result of the other (second or first) lottery reaches a predetermined number of times during a game result suggestion performance, without the player losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery. This enhances the enjoyment of the game result suggestion performance, and since the specific performance can be executed after the game result suggestion performance has finished, the player can recognize the transition to the second game state without any sense of incongruity.

<Group D: Even if the game state changes while the transition indication animation is running, the transition indication animation will continue.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group D were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine comprising a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
When a first event (e.g., a special symbol variation animation) is executed a first time (e.g., "900 times") in a first game state (e.g., a low probability state for special symbols), a game state transition means (e.g., a time-saving low probability flag 203n) that can transition to a second game state different from the first game state (e.g., a "normal symbol low probability time-saving state") is provided,
A means for executing a suggestion effect that can perform a transition suggestion effect (for example, a ceiling reach notification effect) that is performed before the transition from the first game state to the second game state can be made,
The gaming machine D0 is characterized by having a means for continuing the transition suggestion performance even after the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state by the game state transition means during the execution of the transition suggestion performance (for example, if the ceiling is reached during the execution of the ceiling reach notification performance, the ceiling reach notification performance that is currently being executed will be continued).

According to the gaming machine D0, the gaming machine includes an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance on a display means. The gaming machine further includes a game state transition means that, when a first event is executed a first number of times in a first game state, allows the player to transition to a second game state different from the first game state, a suggestion performance execution means that can execute a transition suggestion performance that is performed before the player can transition from the first game state to the second game state, and a performance continuation means that allows the transition suggestion performance to continue even after the game state transition means has transitioned from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggestion performance. As a result, the transition suggestion performance can be continued even after the game state transition means has transitioned from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggestion performance. Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the performance without losing attention to the transition suggestion performance that is being executed, making it easier to accurately recognize the state of the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine D0,
The system includes a post-transition performance execution means capable of executing a post-transition performance (for example, a right-click instruction 81d (text message 81f) for performance) that is performed after the execution of the aforementioned transition suggestion performance,
The aforementioned post-transition sequence is:
The game state transition means is configured to indicate to the player that the game state has transitioned to the second game state.
The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the post-transition performance execution means is configured to execute the post-transition performance on the condition that the transition suggestion performance has finished.

According to gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a post-transition effect execution means capable of executing a post-transition effect performed after the execution of the transition indication effect. The post-transition effect is configured to indicate to the player that the game state has transitioned to the second game state by the game state transition means, and the post-transition effect execution means is configured to execute the post-transition effect only after the transition indication effect has finished. This allows the transition indication effect to continue even after the game state transitions from the first to the second game state by the game state transition means during the execution of the transition indication effect. After the execution of the transition indication effect, the post-transition effect allows the player to recognize that the game state has transitioned to the second game state. Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the effect without losing attention to the transition indication effect in progress, and can recognize that the game state has transitioned to the second game state through the post-transition effect, thereby making it easier to accurately recognize the game situation and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine D0 or D1,
The aforementioned transition suggestion effect is
Game machine D2 is characterized by a presentation that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of gaming machines D0 or D1, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, the transition indication effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state may change. This allows the transition indication effect to continue even after the game state has changed from the first game state to the second game state by the game state transition means, while the transition indication effect is being executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game state may change without losing attention to the ongoing transition indication effect, making it easier to accurately recognize the game situation and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D2,
The aforementioned transition suggestion effect is
Game machine D3 is characterized by a situational presentation that can suggest the game situation in the first game state to the player.

According to gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, the transition indication effect is a situational effect that can suggest the game situation in the first game state to the player. This allows the transition indication effect, which is a situational effect that can suggest the game situation in the first game state to the player, to continue even after the game state transition means has moved the game from the first game state to the second game state. Therefore, the player can recognize the game situation in the first game state without losing focus on the ongoing transition indication effect, making it easier to accurately recognize the game situation and thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3,
The system includes an advantageous state means that, when a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) appears in the predetermined performance, can generate an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) that can grant the player a predetermined game value,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a non-derivation transition means that allows transitioning game states without deriving the aforementioned specific result (for example, transitioning to a "normal low probability time reduction state" upon reaching the ceiling).

According to gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines D0 to D3, it provides the following effects. Specifically, it includes an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state that grants a predetermined game value to the player when a specific result is achieved in the predetermined performance. The game state transition means includes a non-derivation transition means that allows transitions to the game state without deriving the specific result. This makes it possible to transition game states without going through an advantageous state, enriching the game's variations and improving its appeal. Furthermore, it has the effect of accurately suggesting to the player the content of any changes to the game state that may occur without a specific result being derived.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D4,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) that enables the execution of the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is met,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) that enables the execution of a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) when a second condition different from the first condition is met,
The system includes a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of Figure 1 and Figure 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time,
The aforementioned suggestive presentation execution means is
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the transition suggestion performance.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is met, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is met, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestion performance execution means is configured to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the transition suggestion performance. This allows the start of the post-transition sequence to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating the post-transition sequence are met during the transition suggestion sequence, which is being executed based on the success of the first or second lottery. This allows players to fully enjoy the ongoing transition suggestion sequence without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the transition suggestion sequence. Furthermore, since the post-transition sequence can be executed only after the transition suggestion sequence has finished, players can recognize the content of the post-transition sequence without any sense of incongruity.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5,
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed game) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed game),
The aforementioned post-transition performance execution means is:
The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, as a post-transition effect, it performs an effect that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it is equipped with a launching means capable of launching the game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The post-transition performance execution means executes a performance as the post-transition performance that suggests to the player that they should switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. This allows the start of the post-transition performance to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating a post-transition performance that suggests to the player that they should switch the launching mode by the launching means are met during the execution of the transition suggestion performance. Furthermore, by suggesting a switch in the launching mode to the player when the execution of the transition suggestion performance ends, the player can switch the launching mode without any sense of unease.

In the gaming machine D6,
The gaming machine D7 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D7,
The system includes a counting means (for example, a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine D8 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D5 to D7, the following effects are achieved: namely, it is equipped with a counting means capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed, and the game state transition means is equipped with a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times has been counted by the counting means in the first game state. This allows the start of a post-transition sequence, which could suggest to the player that the game state will transition to the second game state, to be withheld even if, for example, the counting result of the other (second or first) lottery reaches a predetermined number of times during a transition suggestion sequence performed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state. This allows the player to fully enjoy the transition suggestion sequence without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the transition suggestion sequence. Furthermore, since the post-transition sequence can be executed after the transition suggestion sequence has finished, the player can recognize the transition to the second game state without any sense of incongruity.

<Group E: Even if the conditions for transitioning to a new game state are met during the execution of the first performance, the first performance will not be terminated midway.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of playing them, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group E were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine comprising a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
In the first game state, if a first event that can occur in the first game state occurs, a game state transition means (for example, a time-saving low probability flag 203n) that can transition to a second game state in which a situation can be created in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player is provided,
A first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance (for example, a ceiling reach notification performance) which can be initiated on the condition that the first game state is in place,
The gaming machine E0 is characterized by comprising a performance continuation means that allows the first performance to be continued if the game transitions to the second game state by the game state transition means while the first performance is being performed (for example, if the ceiling is reached while the ceiling is being performed, the ceiling reach notification performance that is currently being performed will be continued).

According to the gaming machine E0, the gaming machine comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing predetermined performances on a display means. The gaming machine further comprises: a game state transition means capable of transitioning to a second game state in which a situation can be created in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player when a first event that can occur in the first game state occurs in the first game state; a first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance that can be started on the condition that the first game state is in place; and a performance continuation means capable of continuing the first performance when the game state transition means transitions to the second game state during the execution of the first performance. As a result, the first performance can be continued even after the game state transition means transitions from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the first performance that can be started on the condition that the first game state is in place. Therefore, players can recognize the content of the first animation without losing focus on it, making it easier to accurately perceive the game's status and thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine E0,
The system includes a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89) which is different from the first effect and can suggest to the player that the game state has changed by the game state transition means,
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine E1 is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second performance while the first performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E0, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect that is different from the first effect and can suggest to the player that the game state has changed by the game state transition means. The second effect execution means is configured to execute the second effect while the first effect is being executed. This allows the first effect to continue even after the game state transitions from the first to the second game state by the game state transition means, while the first effect, which can be started on the condition that the game state is in the first game state, is being executed. Furthermore, the second effect can be executed while the first effect is being executed. Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the effect without losing focus on the first effect being executed. Additionally, by configuring the second effect to be executable while the first effect is being executed and providing suggestion through the second effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to accurately recognize the game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine E0 or E1,
The first production was,
The gaming machine E2 is characterized by being configured to execute transition suggestion effects that can suggest to the player that a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is possible (for example, an effect that suggests a transition from the "normal gaming state" to the "normal low probability time reduction state" in a ceiling reach notification effect).

According to gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the first performance is configured to execute a transition suggestion performance that can indicate to the player that a transition from the first game state to the second game state is possible. This allows the first performance, which is a transition suggestion performance that can indicate to the player that a transition from the first game state to the second game state is possible, to continue even after the game state transition means has transitioned from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the first performance, which can be initiated on the condition that the first game state is in progress. Furthermore, the second performance can be executed while the first performance is being executed. Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the performance without losing focus on the first performance being executed. Additionally, by configuring the second performance to be executable while the first performance is being executed and providing suggestions through the second performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to accurately recognize the game situation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E2,
The system includes an advantageous state means that, when a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) appears in the predetermined performance, can generate an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) that can grant the player a predetermined game value,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine E3 is characterized by having a non-derivation transition means that allows transitions to game states without deriving the aforementioned specific result (for example, transitioning to a "normal low probability time reduction state" upon reaching the ceiling).

According to gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state that grants a predetermined game value to the player when a specific result is achieved in the predetermined performance. The game state transition means includes a non-derivation transition means that allows transitions to game states without deriving the specific result. This makes it possible to transition game states without going through an advantageous state, enriching the game variations and improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, it has the effect of accurately suggesting to the player the content of changes that may occur when the game state may change without a specific result being derived.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E3,
The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having related performance execution means that, while the first performance is being continued by the performance continuation means, executes related performances (for example, a right-hand shooting notification lamp 37c or a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89) that can suggest to the player a game situation related to the second performance.

According to gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, while the first performance is being continued by the performance continuation means, it is equipped with a related performance execution means that executes a related performance that can suggest to the player a game situation related to the second performance. This allows the related performance to suggest to the player a game situation related to the second performance, even if the conditions for the second performance to occur are met and the second performance has not yet started during the execution of the first performance. Therefore, even if the conditions for starting the second performance are met during the execution of the first performance, the second performance can be prevented from starting, allowing the player to enjoy the first performance without losing focus. Furthermore, the related performance makes the player aware that the start of the second performance is pending. Since the second performance can be executed when the execution of the first performance ends, while the player is aware that the second performance is pending, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity.

In the gaming machine E4,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
Game machine E5 characterized in that it performs the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the second performance in the display means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means executes the related performance in a display area smaller than the display area of the second performance on the display means. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the game situation related to the second performance through the related performance, even when the conditions for the second performance are met and the second performance is waiting to begin while the first performance is being executed. Therefore, even if the conditions for starting the second performance are met while the first performance is being executed, the second performance is not immediately performed. Instead, the related performance is executed less conspicuously than the second performance, allowing the player to enjoy the first performance without losing focus. Furthermore, by executing the related performance in a less conspicuous display area smaller than the display area of the second performance, it is possible to make the player aware that the start of the second performance is waiting, thus allowing the player to accurately understand the content of the game.

In gaming machine E4 or E5,
The aforementioned related performance execution means is
The gaming machine E6 is characterized by having a related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue to be performed even while the second performance is being performed (for example, simultaneously displaying a performance right-hand shooting instruction 81d (text message 81f) and a main display right-hand shooting instruction 89 on the third symbol display device 81).

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E4 or E5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the related performance execution means includes a related continuation means that allows the related performance to continue execution even while the second performance is being executed. This allows the player to accurately perceive the content of the game through the second performance and the related performance. Furthermore, by continuously displaying the related performance regardless of whether the second performance is being executed, the need to control whether or not to execute the related performance based on the execution status of the second performance is eliminated, thereby reducing the control burden.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E6,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) that enables the execution of the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is met,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) that enables the execution of a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) when a second condition different from the first condition is met,
The system includes a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of Figure 1 and Figure 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time,
The aforementioned suggestive presentation execution means is
The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the result of the first lottery or the second lottery in the first performance.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E0 to E6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is met, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is met, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestion performance execution means is configured to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the first performance. This allows the start of the second performance to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating the second performance are met during the first performance, which is being executed based on the success of the first or second lottery. This allows players to fully enjoy the first performance without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the first performance. Furthermore, since the second performance can be executed only after the first performance has finished, players can recognize the content of the second performance without any sense of incongruity.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7,
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed game) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed game),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that, as the second performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a launching means capable of launching the game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The second performance execution means executes a performance as the second performance that suggests to the player that they can switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. This allows the start of the second performance to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating the second performance, which suggests to the player that they can switch the launching mode using the launching means, are met during the execution of the first performance. Furthermore, by suggesting a switch in the launching mode to the player when the execution of the first performance ends, the player can switch the launching mode without any sense of unease.

In the gaming machine E8,
The gaming machine E9 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E8, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine E8 or E9,
The system includes a counting means (for example, a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine E10 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of gaming machines E8 or E9, the following effects are achieved: namely, it is equipped with a counting means capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed, and the gaming state transition means is equipped with a second gaming state transition means that, in the first gaming state, can transition to the second gaming state when a predetermined number of times has been counted by the counting means. This allows the system to pause (suspend) the start of a second performance that suggests to the player that the game state will transition to the second game state, even if, for example, the counting result of the other second or first lottery reaches a predetermined number of times during the first performance, which is executed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state. This allows the player to fully enjoy the first performance without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the first performance. Furthermore, since the second performance can be executed after the first performance has finished, the player can recognize the transition to the second game state without any sense of unease.

<Group F: The ceiling reach animation for one special symbol is extended until the other special symbol variation ends.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group F were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine comprising a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
A means for acquiring the first condition (for example, a first start port 64) capable of acquiring the first condition,
A second condition acquisition means (for example, an upper second start port 71 or a lower second start port 71a) capable of acquiring a second condition different from the first condition,
When the first condition is met, a first performance execution means (for example, a special figure 1 variation start flag 223a) is available that can execute a first performance (for example, a ceiling reach notification performance),
The gaming machine F0 is characterized by comprising an execution period extension means that can extend the execution time of the first performance based on whether the second condition is met (for example, extending the execution period of the ceiling arrival notification performance by the amount of the dynamic display of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine F0, the gaming machine comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing predetermined performances on a display means. The gaming machine further comprises: first condition acquisition means capable of acquiring a first condition; second condition acquisition means capable of acquiring a second condition different from the first condition; first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance when the first condition is met; and execution period extension means capable of extending the execution time of the first performance based on the fulfillment of the second condition. This allows the execution period of the first performance to be extended when the second condition is met. For example, the first performance will not be interrupted or its content will not be hindered when the second condition is met, allowing the player to clearly understand the content of the first performance. Therefore, it has the effect of providing easy-to-understand performances and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine F0,
The first production was,
Gaming machine F1 is characterized by a presentation that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F0, the following effects are also achieved. Specifically, the first effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state may change. This makes it possible to extend the execution period of the first effect, which suggests to the player that the game state may change, when the second condition is met. For example, the first effect, which suggests to the player whether the game state will change or not, will not end prematurely based on the fulfillment of the second condition, nor will the content of the first effect be interrupted based on the fulfillment of the second condition, allowing the player to clearly understand whether the game state will change or not. Therefore, it has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand effect and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine F0 or F1,
The system includes a means for counting the number of times the second condition is met (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 203e),
The aforementioned execution period extension means is
The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that it is configured to extend the execution period of the first performance according to the number of times the second condition is met, which is counted by the number of times the condition is met.

According to gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F0 or F1, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it is equipped with a means for counting the number of times the second condition is met, and the execution period extension means is configured to extend the execution period of the first performance according to the number of times the second condition is met counted by the means. This makes it possible to extend the execution period of the first performance according to the number of times the second condition is met. For example, the first performance will not end prematurely due to the number of times the second condition is met, nor will the content of the first performance be interrupted based on the fulfillment of the second condition, allowing the player to clearly understand the content of the first performance. Therefore, it has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand performance and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F2,
The system includes a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a right-hand hitting instruction 81d for performance) when the second condition is met,
The second production mentioned above is,
Gaming machine F3 is characterized by a presentation that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect when the second condition is met, and the second effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state may change. This makes it possible to extend the execution period of the first effect when the second effect, which can be executed when the second condition is met and can suggest to the player that the game state may change, is executed. For example, this prevents the second effect from suggesting that the game state will change before the first effect that was executed earlier, and allows the player to clearly understand the content of the first effect without it being hindered by the second effect. Therefore, it has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand effect and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F3,
The system includes a third performance execution means capable of executing a third performance (for example, a jackpot variation) that is different from the first or second performance, if the game state can be changed due to the fulfillment of the second condition while the first performance is being executed (for example, winning a jackpot with the second special symbol),
The third production mentioned above is,
Gaming machine F4 is characterized by a presentation that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F0 to F3, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a third effect execution means capable of executing a third effect different from the first or second effect when the second condition is met and the game state can transition while the first effect is being executed. The third effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state can transition. Therefore, when the second condition is met and the game state can transition while the first effect is being executed, the third effect can be executed to suggest to the player that the game state can transition, thus suggesting to the player that the game state can transition even while the first effect is being executed. Thus, it has the effect of quickly suggesting to the player that the game state can transition, providing an easy-to-understand effect, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) that can execute a first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is met,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) that enables the execution of a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) when the second condition is met,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized by comprising a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of special figures 1 and 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time.

According to gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when the first condition is met, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when the second condition is met, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first and second lotteries simultaneously. This configuration, which allows for the simultaneous execution of the first and second lotteries, has the effect of enriching the variety of games and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5,
At a minimum, the game state is changeable between a first game state (for example, a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), and a game state transition means (for example, a time reduction low probability flag 203n),
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed play) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed play),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, as the second performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F3 to F5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises at least a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a launching means capable of launching a game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The second performance execution means executes a performance as the second performance that suggests to the player that they switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. This allows the start of the second performance to be postponed even if the conditions for initiating the second performance, which suggests to the player that they switch the launching mode using the launching means, are met during the execution of the first performance. Furthermore, by suggesting a switch in the launching mode to the player when the execution of the first performance ends, the player can switch the launching mode without any discomfort.

In the gaming machine F6,
The gaming machine F7 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine F6 or F7,
The system includes a counting means (for example, a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine F8 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of gaming machines F6 or F7, the following effects are achieved: namely, it is equipped with a counting means capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed, and the gaming state transition means is equipped with a second gaming state transition means that, in the first gaming state, can transition to the second gaming state when a predetermined number of times has been counted by the counting means. This allows the start of the second performance, which suggests to the player that the game state will transition to the second state, to be withheld even if, for example, the counting result of the other (second or first) lottery reaches a predetermined number of times during the first performance, which is executed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state. This allows the player to fully enjoy the first performance without losing focus on the outcome of the first or second lottery, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the first performance. Furthermore, since the second performance can be executed after the first performance has finished, the player can recognize the transition to the second game state without any sense of incongruity.

<Group G: The special feature 1 variation animation on the LCD screen will end when the special feature 2 variation reaches the ceiling.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group G were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a special symbol variation performance) capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a special symbol variation performance),
A counting means (e.g., a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first event (e.g., the dynamic display of the first special symbol) occurs,
When a second event occurs, a first performance execution means is provided that can execute a first performance (for example, a ceiling arrival notification performance that is performed just before reaching the ceiling) that can suggest the game situation to the player,
The gaming machine G0 is characterized by comprising: an effect termination means for terminating the first effect when a third event (for example, reaching the ceiling based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol) occurs during the execution of the first effect based on the counting result of the counting means (for example, terminating the ceiling reach notification effect at the timing when the dynamic display of the second special symbol ends during the ceiling reach notification effect).

According to gaming machine D0, the gaming machine comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing predetermined performances on a display device. The gaming machine further comprises: counting means capable of counting the number of times a first event occurs; first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance that can suggest the game situation to the player when a second event occurs; and performance termination means for terminating the first performance when a third event occurs based on the counting result of the counting means during the execution of the first performance. This allows the execution of the first performance to be terminated when a third event occurs based on the counting result of the counting means during the execution of the first performance. For example, if a third event occurs and a change in the performance content or game situation may occur, the first performance can be immediately terminated and the game can transition to the game based on the third event. Therefore, this provides a gameplay experience that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the G0 gaming machine,
The system includes a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance (for example, various performances in the "low probability time reduction state"),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine G1 is configured to be able to execute the second performance when the first performance is terminated by the performance termination means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine G0, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance, and the second performance execution means is configured to execute the second performance when the first performance is terminated by the performance termination means. This allows the first performance to be terminated when a third event occurs during the execution of the first performance, and the second performance to be executed upon the termination of the first performance. Therefore, for example, if a change in performance content or a change in the game situation occurs, the first performance can be immediately terminated and the second performance executed. Thus, it provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation through the second performance to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the G1 gaming machine,
The second production mentioned above is,
A gaming machine G2 is characterized by being configured in a way that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the second performance is configured to suggest to the player that the game state may change. This allows for the termination of the first performance when a third event occurs during the execution of the first performance, and the execution of the second performance, which suggests to the player that the game state may change upon termination of the first performance. Therefore, when a game state change is possible, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the execution of the second performance, which suggests to the player that the game state may change, can be performed. Thus, this provides a gameplay experience that accurately suggests to the player that the game state may change immediately through the second performance, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine G3 is characterized by being configured to be able to perform the second performance based on the fulfillment of the second condition.

According to gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 or G2, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the second performance execution means is configured to execute the second performance based on the fulfillment of the second condition. This allows the first performance to be terminated if a third event occurs during the execution of the first performance. For example, if a third event occurs and may cause a change in the performance content or the game situation, the first performance can be immediately terminated and the second performance based on the third event can be executed. Therefore, when a third event occurs, the second performance can be executed immediately, providing gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3,
The system includes a period setting means for setting the execution period of the first performance (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification performance),
The aforementioned means for ending the performance is,
The gaming machine G4 is configured such that the first performance can be terminated if the third event occurs before the execution period of the first performance set by the period setting means has elapsed.

According to gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a period setting means that can set the execution period of the first performance, and the performance termination means is configured to terminate the first performance when the third event occurs before the execution period of the first performance set by the period setting means has elapsed. This allows the first performance to be terminated when the third event occurs before the execution period of the first performance has elapsed. For example, if the third event occurs and changes in the performance content or game situation may occur, the first performance, which could have continued, can be terminated, and the game can transition to a game based on the occurrence of the third event that occurred before the execution period had elapsed. Therefore, it has the effect of providing gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 through G4,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) capable of performing a first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) based on the first event,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) capable of executing a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) based on the third event,
The gaming machine G5 is characterized by comprising a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of special figures 1 and 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first event, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery based on the third event, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first and second lotteries simultaneously. This configuration, which allows for the simultaneous execution of the first and second lotteries, has the effect of enriching the variations in gameplay and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 through G5,
At a minimum, the game state is changeable between a first game state (for example, a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), and a game state transition means (for example, a time reduction low probability flag 203n),
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed play) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed play),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, as the second performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G0 to G5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises at least a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a launching means capable of launching the game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The second performance execution means executes a performance as the second performance that can suggest to the player that they switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. Therefore, even if the conditions for initiating a second performance that can suggest to the player that they switch the launching mode by the launching means are met during the execution of the first performance, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the second performance that can suggest to the player that they change the launching mode can be executed. Thus, it has the effect of providing gameplay that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the G6 gaming machine,
The gaming machine G7 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to the G7 gaming machine, in addition to the effects of the G6 gaming machine, it provides the following effects. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine G6 or G7,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine G8 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G6 or G7, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the game state transition means includes a second game state transition means that, in the first game state, can transition to the second game state when a predetermined number of counts are reached by the counting means. This allows, for example, during the first performance executed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state, even if the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number due to the other second or first lottery, a second performance that suggests to the player that the game state will transition to the second game state can be initiated, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and a second performance that suggests to the player a change in firing pattern can be executed. Therefore, this provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Group H: If a jackpot is hit on the other special symbol while the ceiling reach animation of one special symbol is in progress, the ceiling reach animation will be terminated midway.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group H were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
At a minimum, a calculation means (for example, a ceiling reach counter 203p) capable of determining whether the first condition (for example, a special symbol variation effect) has been met,
When the first condition is met, a first performance execution means is provided that can execute a first performance (for example, a performance that notifies the player that the game has reached the ceiling) that can suggest the game status to the player,
The gaming machine H0 is characterized by comprising: an effect termination means for terminating the first effect when a second condition is met during the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculation means (for example, terminating the ceiling reach notification effect when the dynamic display of the second special symbol ends during the ceiling reach notification effect).

According to gaming machine H0, the gaming machine comprises an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance on a display device. The gaming machine further includes, at a minimum, a calculation means capable of determining whether a first condition has been met, a first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance that can suggest the game situation to the player upon the fulfillment of the first condition, and a performance termination means that terminates the first performance when a second condition is met during the execution of the first performance based on the calculation result of the calculation means. This allows the execution of the first performance to be terminated when the second condition is met during the execution of the first performance based on the calculation result of the calculation means. For example, if the second condition is met and a change in performance content or game situation may occur, the first performance can be immediately terminated and the game situation can be transitioned to one based on the second condition. Therefore, this provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine H0,
The second condition is,
A gaming machine H1 characterized by being configured in such a way that it is difficult to satisfy the first condition described above.

According to gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine H0, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, the second condition is configured to be less likely to be met than the first condition. Therefore, during the execution of the first performance based on the calculation result of the calculation means, if the second condition, which is less likely to be met than the first condition, is met, the first performance can be terminated. For example, if the second condition, which is less likely to occur than the first condition, is met, potentially causing a change in the performance content or the game situation, the first performance can be immediately terminated according to this rare case, and the game situation can be transitioned to one based on the second condition. Thus, this provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine H0 or H1,
At a minimum, the system includes a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying identification information using the display means upon fulfillment of the first condition,
The first performance execution means is,
The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first performance can be executed across a plurality of the dynamic displays.

According to gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H0 or H1, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes at least a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means upon the fulfillment of the first condition, and the first performance execution means is configured to execute the first performance across multiple dynamic displays. This allows the first performance to be terminated when the second condition is met during the execution of the first performance across multiple dynamic displays. For example, if the second condition is met while the first performance is being executed across multiple dynamic displays, potentially causing a change in performance content or game state, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the game state can be transitioned to one based on the second condition. Therefore, it provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game state to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H2,
The system includes a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance (for example, various performances in the "low probability time reduction state"),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine H3 is configured to execute the second performance when the first performance is terminated by the performance termination means.

According to gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H0 to H2, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect, and the second effect execution means is configured to execute the second effect when the first effect is terminated by the effect termination means. This allows the first effect to be terminated if the second condition is met during the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculation means. Furthermore, if the second condition is met and a change in the effect content or game situation may occur, the first effect can be immediately terminated and the second effect based on the second condition executed. Therefore, it provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine H3,
The second production mentioned above is,
A gaming machine H4 is characterized by being configured in a way that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine H3, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the second performance is configured to suggest to the player that the game state may change. This allows the first performance to be terminated if the second condition is met during the execution of the first performance based on the calculation result of the calculation means. If the second condition is met, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the second performance, which suggests to the player that the game state may change, can be executed. Therefore, this provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine H3 or H4,
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine H5 is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second performance based on the fulfillment of the second condition.

According to gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H3 or H4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the second performance execution means is configured to execute the second performance based on the fulfillment of the second condition. This allows the first performance to be terminated when the second condition for executing the second performance is met during the execution of the first performance based on the calculation result of the calculation means. Furthermore, when the second condition is met, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and a second performance can be executed that suggests to the player that the game state may change. Therefore, this provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H5,
The system includes a period setting means for setting the execution period of the first performance (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification performance),
The aforementioned means for ending the performance is,
The gaming machine H6 is configured such that the first performance can be terminated if the second condition is met before the execution period of the first performance set by the period setting means has elapsed.

According to gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H0 to H5, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a period setting means that can set the execution period of the first performance, and the performance termination means is configured to terminate the first performance if the second condition is met before the execution period of the first performance set by the period setting means has elapsed. This allows the first performance to be terminated if the second condition is met before the execution period of the first performance has elapsed. For example, if the second condition is met and a change in the performance content or game situation may occur, the first performance, which could have continued, can be terminated, and the game can transition to a game based on the fulfillment of the second condition, which occurred before the execution period elapsed. Therefore, it has the effect of providing gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H6,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) capable of performing a first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) based on the first condition,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) capable of executing a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) based on the second condition,
The gaming machine H7 is characterized by comprising a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of special figures 1 and 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time.

According to gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H0 to H6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first condition, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery based on the second condition, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first and second lotteries simultaneously. This configuration, which allows for the simultaneous execution of the first and second lotteries, has the effect of enriching the game's variations and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7,
At a minimum, the game state is changeable between a first game state (for example, a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), and a game state transition means (for example, a time reduction low probability flag 203n),
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed play) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed play),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that, as the second performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises at least a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a launching means capable of launching the game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The second performance execution means executes a performance as the second performance that can suggest to the player that they switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. Therefore, even if the conditions for initiating a second performance that can suggest to the player that they switch the launching mode by the launching means are met during the execution of the first performance, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the second performance that can suggest to the player that they change the launching mode can be executed. Thus, it has the effect of providing gameplay that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the H8 gaming machine,
The gaming machine H9 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H8, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine H8 or H9,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine H10 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is calculated by the calculation means in the first game state.

According to gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H8 or H9, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the game state transition means includes a second game state transition means that, when a predetermined number of times is calculated by the calculation means in the first game state, allows transition to the second game state. This allows, for example, during the first performance executed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state, even if the calculation result of the calculation means reaches a predetermined number of times due to the other second or first lottery, a second performance that suggests to the player that the game state will transition to the second game state can be initiated, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and a second performance that suggests to the player a change in firing pattern can be executed. Therefore, this provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Group I: The special feature 1 variation animation on the LCD screen is terminated when the variation of special feature 2 reaches the ceiling.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group I were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
A transition condition determination means (for example, a ceiling reach count counter 203p) capable of determining whether or not the game state will change,
A first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reach notification effect) that can indicate the game status to the player when the game state changes,
An entry detection means (for example, a second start switch) capable of detecting whether or not a game medium enters a predetermined area,
The gaming machine I0 is characterized by comprising: an effect termination means for terminating the first effect during the execution of the first effect due to a ball entering the ball entry detection means (for example, terminating the ceiling arrival notification effect at the timing when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the ceiling arrival notification effect).

According to gaming machine I0, the gaming machine comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing predetermined performances on a display device. The gaming machine further includes: transition condition determination means capable of determining whether or not a game state transitions; first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance that can suggest the game state to the player when the game state transitions; ball entry detection means capable of detecting whether or not a game medium enters a predetermined area; and performance termination means that terminates the first performance during the execution of the first performance due to a ball entering the ball entry detection means. This allows the first performance to be terminated during the execution of the first performance that suggests the game state to the player due to a ball entering the ball entry detection means. For example, by having a ball enter the ball entry detection means according to the player's wishes, the first performance can be terminated at a timing desired by the player. Therefore, this has the effect of enriching the variety of games and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine I0,
The system includes a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a performance for the "low probability time reduction state"),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the second performance when the first performance is completed by the performance termination means.

In addition to the effects of the game machine I0 itself, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance, and the second performance execution means is configured to execute the second performance when the first performance is terminated by the performance termination means. This allows the first performance to be terminated due to a ball entering the ball entry detection means during the execution of the first performance, which can indicate the game situation to the player, and the second performance to be executed immediately. Therefore, for example, by causing a ball to enter the ball entry detection means according to the player's wishes, the first performance can be terminated and the second performance executed at the timing desired by the player. This provides gameplay that accurately indicates the game situation to the player and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine I1,
The second production mentioned above is,
A gaming machine I2 is characterized by being configured in a way that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the second performance is configured to suggest to the player that the game state may change. This allows the first performance, which is being performed while the first performance is being executed and which suggests the game state may change, to be terminated by a ball entering the ball entry detection means, and the second performance, which suggests to the player that the game state may change immediately, to be executed. Therefore, for example, by causing a ball to enter the ball entry detection means according to the player's wishes, the first performance can be terminated at the timing desired by the player, and the second performance, which suggests to the player that the game state may change, can be executed. This provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game state to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine I1 or I2,
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the second performance based on the detection by the ball entry detection means.

According to gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the second performance execution means is configured to execute the second performance based on the detection of the ball entry detection means. This allows the execution of a second performance that suggests to the player that the game state can be immediately transitioned based on the ball entry of the ball entry detection means, while the first performance is being executed, triggered by a ball entry into the ball entry detection means. Therefore, for example, by causing a ball to enter the ball entry detection means according to the player's wishes, the first performance can be terminated at the player's desired timing, and a second performance that suggests to the player that the game state can be transitioned can be executed. This provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game state to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I3,
The system includes a period setting means for setting the execution period of the first performance (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification performance),
The aforementioned means for ending the performance is,
The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the first performance can be terminated by having a ball enter the ball entry detection means before the execution period of the first performance set by the period setting means has elapsed.

According to gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines I0 to I3, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, it includes a period setting means that can set the execution period of the first performance, and the performance termination means is configured to terminate the first performance by having a ball enter the ball entry detection means before the execution period of the first performance set by the period setting means has elapsed. This allows the first performance to be terminated by having a ball enter the ball entry detection means before the execution period of the first performance has elapsed. For example, if a change in the game situation may occur due to a ball entering the ball entry detection means, the first performance, which could have continued, can be terminated, and the game can transition to a game based on a ball entering the ball entry detection means that occurred before the execution period had elapsed. Therefore, it has the effect of providing gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I4,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) capable of performing a first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) based on the first condition,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) capable of executing a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) based on the second condition,
The gaming machine I5 is characterized by comprising a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of special figures 1 and 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time.

According to gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines I0 to I4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first condition, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery based on the second condition, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first and second lotteries simultaneously. This configuration, which allows for the simultaneous execution of the first and second lotteries, has the effect of enriching the variations in gameplay and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5,
At a minimum, the game state is changeable between a first game state (for example, a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "normal symbol low probability time reduction state"), and a game state transition means (for example, a time reduction low probability flag 203n),
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed play) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed play),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that, as the second performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises at least a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a launching means capable of launching a game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The second performance execution means executes a performance as the second performance that can suggest to the player that they switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. Therefore, even if the conditions for initiating a second performance that can suggest to the player that they switch the launching mode by the launching means are met during the execution of the first performance, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the second performance that can suggest to the player that they change the launching mode can be executed. Thus, it has the effect of providing gameplay that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine I6,
The gaming machine I7 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to left-handed firing").

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine I6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that the launching mode should be changed to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine I6 or I7,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine I8 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is calculated by the calculation means in the first game state.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of game machines I6 or I7, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, the game state transition means includes a second game state transition means that, in the first game state, can transition to the second game state when a predetermined number of times has been calculated by the calculation means. This allows, for example, during the first performance executed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state, even if the calculation result of the calculation means reaches a predetermined number of times due to the other second or first lottery, a second performance that can suggest to the player that the game state will transition to the second game state can be initiated, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and a second performance that can suggest to the player a change in the firing pattern can be executed. Therefore, this has the effect of providing gameplay that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Group J: When a jackpot is hit on the other special symbol while the ceiling reach animation of one special symbol is in progress, the reel spin animation switches from the reel spin animation of one special symbol to the reel spin animation of the other special symbol at that moment.>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or other prizes is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and if a player wins, a predetermined gaming medium is dispensed to the player according to the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state (for example, a low-probability state for special symbols) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a high-probability state for special symbols). Some machines are configured to allow the player to win a game in the second game state, thereby continuously generating the second game state again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

Regarding the gaming machines and similar devices exemplified above, it is necessary to increase attention to the games in order to enhance the enjoyment of the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group J were made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, start-up prize processing (S208)),
A determination means (for example, MPU201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with a display device (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing predetermined performances (for example, various display images performed on the third symbol display device 81),
A first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance (e.g., a ceiling reach notification performance) that can suggest to the player a first game state (e.g., one spin before the ceiling of one special symbol is reached) based on the player's predetermined actions,
A second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance (for example, a jackpot winning variation performance) that is different from the first performance and can suggest to the player a second game situation different from the first game situation (for example, the start of a variation performance in which a jackpot game is won),
The gaming machine J0 is characterized by comprising a switching means that switches from the first performance to the second performance when the second game state is reached during the execution of the first performance (for example, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol during the ceiling reach notification performance, the machine switches to the variation performance corresponding to the jackpot).

According to the gaming machine E0, the gaming machine comprises: information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information; determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and predetermined performance execution means capable of executing predetermined performances on a display device. The gaming machine further includes: a first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance that can suggest to the player a first game situation based on the player's predetermined operations; a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance that is different from the first performance and can suggest to the player a second game situation different from the first game situation; and a switching means that switches from the first performance to the second performance when the second game situation becomes apparent during the execution of the first performance. This allows for switching from the first performance to the second performance when the second performance can be executed during the execution of the first performance. For example, if the game situation can change from the previous situation, the game can immediately switch from the first performance to the second performance, accurately suggesting the situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine J0,
The first production was,
The gaming machine J1 is characterized by being a performance that can suggest to the player the game situation before the start of the second performance.

According to gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J0, the following effects are also achieved. Specifically, the first performance is a performance that can suggest to the player the game situation before the second performance begins. Therefore, while the first performance, which can suggest to the player the game situation before the second performance begins, is being executed, the second condition is met, allowing a switch from the currently executing first performance to the second performance. For example, if the game situation may change from the previous situation, the game can immediately switch from the first performance to the second performance, accurately suggesting the change to the player, thereby providing a gameplay experience that enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine J0 or J1,
The aforementioned switching means is
The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, even while the first performance is being executed, a third performance (for example, a screen blackout performance) is performed to forcibly terminate the first performance, and the second performance is made executable after the third performance.

According to gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J0 or J1, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, the switching means is configured to perform a third performance that forcibly terminates the first performance even while it is in progress, and to enable the execution of the second performance after the third performance. This allows for a switch from the ongoing first performance to the second performance via the third performance if the game situation may change during the execution of the first performance. For example, if the game situation may change from the previous state, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the second performance can be performed via the third performance. Therefore, this provides a gameplay experience that clearly allows the player to recognize the change in performance content, accurately suggests the situation to the player, and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J2,
The second production mentioned above is,
A gaming machine J3 is characterized by being configured in a way that can suggest to the player that the game state may change.

According to gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J0 to J2, the following effect is achieved. Specifically, the second presentation is configured to suggest to the player that the game state may change. This allows the game to switch from the currently running first presentation to the second presentation, which suggests to the player that the game state may change, when the second condition is met during the execution of the first presentation. For example, if the game state may change from the previous state, the game can immediately switch from the first presentation to the second presentation, accurately suggesting the change to the player and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J3,
A game state transition means (e.g., a time-saving low probability flag 203n) that can change the game state to at least a first game state (e.g., a low probability state for special symbols) and a second game state different from the first game state (e.g., a "normal symbol low probability time-saving state"),
The system includes an advantageous state means that, when a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) appears in the predetermined performance, can generate an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) that can grant the player a predetermined game value,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine J4 is characterized by having a non-derivation transition means that allows transitions to game states without deriving the aforementioned specific result (for example, transitioning to a "normal low probability time reduction state" upon reaching the ceiling).

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a game state transition means capable of changing the game state between at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state that can grant the player a predetermined game value when a specific result is achieved in the predetermined performance. The game state transition means also includes a non-derivation transition means that allows the game state to be transitioned without deriving the specific result. This makes it possible to transition the game state without going through an advantageous state, resulting in a richer variety of gameplay and an improved level of enjoyment.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J4,
A first lottery execution means (for example, entry into the first starting gate 64) that enables the execution of the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is met,
A second lottery execution means (for example, entry into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a) that enables the execution of a second lottery (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) when a second condition different from the first condition is met,
The system includes a simultaneous execution means (for example, simultaneous variation of Figure 1 and Figure 2) that enables the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time,
The first performance means is,
The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to suggest the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the player in the first performance.

According to gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J0 to J4, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it comprises a first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is met, a second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is met, and a simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first and second lotteries simultaneously. The first performance means is configured to suggest the results of the first or second lottery to the player in the first performance. This allows the first performance to be terminated if the game situation may change during the first performance, which is being executed based on the success of the first or second lottery. For example, if a change in performance content or a change in the game situation occurs, the first performance can be immediately terminated and the game situation can be transitioned to one based on the second condition. Therefore, it provides gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J5,
The game medium is provided with a launching means (e.g., ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching in a first launching mode (e.g., left-handed game) and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode (e.g., right-handed game),
The second performance execution means is,
The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that, as the second performance, it performs a performance that can suggest to the player that it is switching from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J0 to J5, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it is equipped with a launching means capable of launching the game medium in a first launching mode and a second launching mode different from the first launching mode. The second performance execution means executes a performance as the second performance that suggests to the player that they can switch from the first or second launching mode to the second or first launching mode. Therefore, even if the conditions for initiating the second performance, which suggests to the player that they can switch the launching mode using the launching means, are met during the execution of the first performance, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and the second performance, which suggests to the player that they can change the launching mode, can be executed. Thus, it has the effect of providing gameplay that accurately suggests the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the J6 gaming machine,
The gaming machine J7 is characterized by having a means for immediately executing a corrective action that can suggest to the player to return to the first firing mode when the gaming medium is fired in the second firing mode in the first game state (for example, "Please return to firing to the left").

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J6, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, in the first game state, if the game medium is launched in the second launching mode, it is equipped with a corrective effect execution means capable of immediately executing a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode. This allows for immediate execution of a corrective effect that suggests to the player that they should switch to the first launching mode when the game medium is launched in the second launching mode in the first game state. For example, this makes it possible to immediately make the player aware that the second launching mode is not recommended in the first game state, thus making it easier for the player to play the game according to the game specifications.

In any of the gaming machines J5 to J7,
The system includes a counting means (for example, a ceiling reach counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times the first lottery and/or the second lottery is performed,
The aforementioned game state transition means is,
The gaming machine J8 is characterized by having a second game transition means (for example, turning on the time-saving low probability flag 203n) that allows transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") has been counted by the counting means in the first game state.

According to gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J5 to J7, the following effects are achieved. Specifically, it includes a counting means capable of counting the number of times the first and/or second lottery is performed, and the game state transition means includes a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined number of times has been counted by the counting means in the first game state. As a result, during the first performance executed based on the success of the first or second lottery in the first game state, even if, for example, the calculation result of the calculation means reaches a predetermined number of times due to the other second or first lottery, a second performance that can suggest to the player that the game state will transition to the second game state can be initiated, the first performance can be immediately terminated, and a second performance that can suggest to the player a change in the firing pattern can be executed. Therefore, it has the effect of providing gameplay that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, for any configuration of gaming machines A0 to A8 described above, a configuration limited to one of the above gaming machines B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the above game machine configurations B0 to B9, a configuration limited to one of the above game machines A0 to A8, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machines C0 to C10, a configuration limited to one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machines D0 to D8, a configuration limited to one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the above game machine configurations E0 to E10, a configuration limited to one of the above game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the above game machine configurations F0 to F8, a configuration limited to one of the above game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machines G0 to G8, a configuration limited to one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the above game machine configurations H0 to H10, a configuration limited to one of the above game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the above game machine configurations I0 to I8, a configuration limited to one of the above game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, or J0 to J8 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the above game machine configurations J0 to J8, a configuration limited to one of the above game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, or I0 to I8 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8, the gaming machine X1 is characterized by being a slot machine. In particular, the basic configuration of the slot machine is a "game machine equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays a sequence of identification information consisting of multiple identification pieces, and then displays the identification information in a finalized state; a special game state generation means that starts the dynamic display of identification information in response to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), stops the dynamic display of identification information in response to the operation of a stop operation means (stop button), or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification piece." In this case, typical examples of game media include coins, medals, etc.

A gaming machine X2 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. In particular, a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operating handle, which launches balls into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the handle. A necessary condition is that the balls enter (or pass through) an operating port located at a predetermined position within the game area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time. Furthermore, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize-winning device (large prize port) located at a predetermined position within the game area is opened in a predetermined manner, allowing balls to be entered, and a monetary value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is assigned according to the number of balls entered.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, or J0 to J8, the gaming machine X3 is characterized in that it is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. In particular, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "A variable display means that dynamically displays a sequence of identification information consisting of multiple identification pieces, and then displays the finalized identification information. The change in identification information begins when a starting operation means (e.g., an operation lever) is operated, and the dynamic display of the identification information stops when a stopping operation means (e.g., a stop button) is operated, or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game state generation means generates a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification piece. The machine uses balls as the game medium, requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured to dispense many balls when the special game state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
37c Right-hand hit notification lamp (part of related performance indication means)
64. First starting point (part of the first lottery execution means, part of the first condition acquisition means)
65. Variable Prize-Winning Device (Part of the Advantageous State Means)
71 Upper second starting port (part of the second lottery execution means, part of the second condition acquisition means)
71a Lower second starting port (part of the second lottery means, part of the second condition acquisition means)
81. Third graphic display device (part of the display means)
81d Right-hand play instructions for special effects (part of specific effects, part of transition effects, part of second effects, part of related effects)
81f Text message (part of specific effects, part of post-transition effects, part of second effects, part of related effects)
89. Right-handed indication for main display (part of related performance suggestion means)
112a Ball launching unit (part of the launching mechanism)
113. Audio lamp control device (part of a predetermined performance execution means)
114 Display control device (part of predetermined performance execution means)
201 MPU (part of the determination means)
202a Special Feature 2 Jackpot Random Number Table 203e Second Reserved Ball Storage Area (Part of the Established Number Counting Means)
203n Shortened time low probability flag (part of the means of transitioning to a game state)
203p Ceiling Reach Counter (Part of the counting means, part of the calculation means, part of the abnormal condition determination means)
223a Special Feature 1 Variation Start Flag (Part of the First Performance Execution Means)
S208 Start-up prize processing (part of the information acquisition method)
S1405 (Part of the method for holding off on performance)

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means capable of obtaining predetermined information,
A determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance on a display means,
The gaming machine is,
The system is configured such that a predetermined notification based on the game result can be executed by the predetermined performance execution means.
A specific notification, which has different occurrence conditions from the aforementioned predetermined notification, can be executed even when the aforementioned predetermined notification is not being executed , and can suggest a change in the player's gameplay, is configured to be executed by the aforementioned predetermined performance execution means.
The system is configured such that if a game ball enters a designated ball entry area while the predetermined notification is being executed, and the conditions for initiating the specific notification are met, the predetermined notification can be continued.
If, during the execution of the predetermined notification, a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area, thereby fulfilling the conditions for initiating the specific notification, the system is configured such that the initiation of the specific notification can be kept in standby mode at least during the execution of the predetermined notification.
The aforementioned pending specific notification is configured to be initiated when the predetermined notification is terminated.
In a predetermined situation in which a player can play the game, after the conditions for initiating the specific notification are met, the specific notification may be initiated only once, and thereafter, it is configured so that the specific notification may not be initiated again.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off and then turned back on while the aforementioned specific notification is being performed, the specific notification can be restarted.